GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 1
Page 1
(C) x
2012
1.8
(D) 1
TWO MARKS
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS
2013
1.1
ONE MARK
The maximum value of q until which the approximation sin q . q holds to within 10% error is (A) 10c (B) 18c (C) 50c (D) 90c The minimum eigen value of the following matrix is R3 5 2V S W S5 12 7W S S2 7 5W W T X (A) 0 (B) 1 (D) 3 (C) 2 A polynomial f (x) = a 4 x 4 + a 3 x3 + a2 x2 + a1 x  a 0 with all coefficients positive has (A) no real roots (B) no negative real root (C) odd number of real roots (D) at least one positive and one negative real root
2013 TWO MARKS
d 2 y (t) dy (t) Consider the differential equation +2 + y (t) = d (t) 2 dt dt dy with y (t) t = 0 = 2 and =0 dt t = 0 dy The numerical value of is dt t = 0 (A)  2 (B)  1 (C) 0 (D) 1
+
1.9
1.2
The direction of vector A is radially outward from the origin, with A = krn . where r2 = x2 + y2 + z2 and k is a constant. The value of n for which d :A = 0 is (A)  2 (B) 2 (C) 1 (D) 0 A fair coin is tossed till a head appears for the first time. The
1.10
1.3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
1.4
Let A be an m # n matrix and B an n # m matrix. It is given that determinant ^Im + AB h = determinant ^In + BAh, where Ik is the k # k identity matrix. Using the above property, the determinant of the matrix given below is V R S2 1 1 1W S1 2 1 1W S1 1 2 1W W S S1 1 1 2W X T (A) 2 (B) 5 (C) 8 (D) 16
2012 ONE MARK
The maximum value of f (x) = x3  9x2 + 24x + 5 in the interval [1, 6] is (A) 21 (B) 25 (C) 41 (D) 46
1.12
5 3 1 0 , the value of A3 is A=> and I = > H 2 0 0 1H (A) 15A + 12I (B) 19A + 30I (C) 17A + 15I (D) 17A + 21I
2011
1.13
Given that
ONE MARK
1.5
With initial condition x (1) = 0.5 , the solution of the differential equation t dx + x = t , is dt (A) x = t  1 (B) x = t 2  1 2 2 (C) x = t 2
2
v is the Consider a closed surface S surrounding volume V . If r t position vector of a point inside S , with n the unit normal on S , v$ n t dS is the value of the integral ## 5r
S
t (D) x = 2
1.6
1  2 . z+1 z+3 If C is a counter clockwise path in the z plane such that z + 1 = 1, the value of 1 f (z) dz is 2pj C (A)  2 (B)  1 (C) 1 (D) 2 Given f (z) =
1.15
1.7
#
c
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 2
2011
1.16
TWO MARKS
1.22
2010
TWO MARKS
A numerical solution of the equation f (x) + x  3 = 0 can be obtained using Newton Raphson method. If the starting value is x = 2 for the iteration, the value of x that is to be used in the next step is (A) 0.306 (B) 0.739 (C) 1.694 (D) 2.306 The system of equations x+y+z = 6 x + 4y + 6y = 20 x + 4y + l z = m has NO solution for values of l and given by (A) l = 6, m = 20 (B) l = 6, m = Y 20 (C) l = Y 6, m = 20 (D) l = Y 6, m = 20
1.23
1.17
A fair coin is tossed independently four times. The probability of the event the number of time heads shown up is more than the number of times tail shown up (A) 1/16 (B) 1/3 (C) 1/4 (D) 5/16 v = xya tx + x 2 a ty , then If A is v $ dl v over the path shown in the figure #A
C
1.24
1.18
A fair dice is tossed two times. The probability that the second toss results in a value that is higher than the first toss is (A) 2/36 (B) 2/6
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) 5/12
2010
1.19
(A) 0 (C) 1
1.25
(B) 2 3 (D) 2 3
(D) 1/2
ONE MARKS
The eigen values of a skewsymmetric matrix are (A) always zero (B) always pure imaginary (C) either zero or pure imaginary (D) always real The trigonometric Fourier series for the waveform f (t) shown below contains
1.26
1.20
The residues of a complex function 1  2z x (z) = z (z  1) (z  2) at its poles are (A) 1 ,  1 and 1 (B) 1 ,  1 and  1 2 2 2 2 (D) 1 ,  1 and 3 (C) 1 , 1 and  3 2 2 2 2 dy (x) Consider differential equation  y (x) = x , with the initial dx condition y (0) = 0 . Using Eulers first order method with a step size of 0.1, the value of y (0.3) is (A) 0.01 (B) 0.031 (C) 0.0631 (D) 0.1 3s + 1 Given f (t) = L1 ; 3 . If lim f (t) = 1, then the value t"3 s + 4s2 + (k  3) s E of k is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
1.27
cosine terms and zero values for the dc components cosine terms and a positive value for the dc components cosine terms and a negative value for the dc components sine terms and a negative value for the dc components
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2009
1.28
ONE MARK
A function n (x) satisfied the differential equation d 2 n (x) n (x)  2 =0 dx 2 L where L is a constant. The boundary conditions are : n (0) = K and n (3) = 0 . The solution to this equation is (B) n (x) = K exp ( x/ L ) (A) n (x) = K exp (x/L) 2 (D) n (x) = K exp ( x/L) (C) n (x) = K exp ( x/L)
The order of the differential equation d2y dy 3 4 t 2 + c dt m + y = e dt is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 A fair coin is tossed 10 times. What is the probability that only the first two tosses will yield heads? 2 2 (B) 10C2 b 1 l (A) c 1 m 2 2 10 10 (C) c 1 m (D) 10C 2 b 1 l 2 2
1.29
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 3
1.30
unit circle
(B) 1 (D) 0
Which of the following functions would have only odd powers of x in its Taylor series expansion about the point x = 0 ? (A) sin (x3) (B) sin (x2) (C) cos (x3) (D) cos (x2) Which of the following is a solution to the differential equation dx (t) + 3x (t) = 0 ? dt (A) x (t) = 3e  t (B) x (t) = 2e  3t
3 2 (C) x (t) = 2 t
1.31
The Taylor series expansion of sin x at x = p is given by xp 2 (x  p ) (x  p) 2 (A) 1 + (B)  1 + ... + ... 3! 3! (x  p) 2 (C) 1 + ... 3! (x  p) 2 (D)  1 + + ... 3! in Group I to its family of solution Group II 1. Circles 2. Straight lines 3. Hyperbolas
1.32
Match each differential equation curves from Group II Group I dy y A. = dx x dy y B. =dx x dy x C. = dx y dy D. = x dx y (A) A  2, B  3, C  3, D  1 (B) A  1, B  3, C  2, D  1 (C) A  2, B  1, C  3, D  3 (D) A  3, B  2, C  1, D  2
2008
1.40
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
1.33
The Eigen values of following matrix are V R S 1 3 5 W S 3  1 6 W S W S 0 0 3W X T (A) 3, 3 + 5j, 6  j (B)  6 + 5j, 3 + j, 3  j (C) 3 + j, 3  j, 5 + j (D) 3,  1 + 3j,  1  3j
2008 ONE MARKS
1.41
1 at z = 2 is (z + 2) 2 (z  2) 2
(B)  1 16 (D) 1 32
1.42
1.34
p11 p12 are nonzero, p21 p22 G and one of its eigenvalue is zero. Which of the following statements is true? (B) p11 p22  p12 p21 = 1 (A) p11 p12  p12 p21 = 1 (C) p11 p22  p12 p21 = 0 (D) p11 p22 + p12 p21 = 0
0 1 Consider the matrix P = = . The value of e p is  2  3G 2e2  3e1 e1  e2 e1 + e1 2e2  e1 (A) > 2 (B) H >2e1  4e2 3e1 + 2e2H 2e  2e1 5e2  e1 5e2  e1 3e1  e2 (C) > 2 H 2e  6e1 4e2 + 61 2e1  e2 e1  e2 (D) > H 1 2  2e + 2e  e1 + 2e2
1.43
1.35
The system of linear equations 4x + 2y = 7 2x + y = 6 has (A) a unique solution (B) no solution (C) an infinite number of solutions (D) exactly two distinct solutions
In the Taylor series expansion of exp (x) + sin (x) about the point x = p , the coefficient of (x  p) 2 is (A) exp (p) (B) 0.5 exp (p) (C) exp (p) + 1 (D) exp (p)  1 The value of the integral of the function g (x, y) = 4x3 + 10y 4 along the straight line segment from the point (0, 0) to the point (1, 2) in the x  y plane is (A) 33 (B) 35 (C) 40 (D) 56 Consider points P and Q in the x  y plane, with P = (1, 0) and Q = (0, 1). The line integral 2 (xdx + ydy) along the semicircle P with the line segment PQ as its diameter (A) is  1 (B) is 0
Q
1.44
1.36
The equation sin (z) = 10 has (A) no real or complex solution (B) exactly two distinct complex solutions (C) a unique solution (D) an infinite number of complex solutions For real values of x , the minimum value of the function
1.45
1.37
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 4
1.53
Three functions f1 (t), f2 (t) and f3 (t) which are zero outside the interval [0, T] are shown in the figure. Which of the following statements is correct?
ONE MARK
2
The following plot shows a function which varies linearly with x . The value of the integral I = ydx # 1 is
For x << 1, coth (x) can be approximated as (A) x (B) x2 (A) f1 (t) and f2 (t) are orthogonal (B) f1 (t) and f3 (t) are orthogonal (C) f2 (t) and f3 (t) are orthogonal D) f1 (t) and f2 (t) are orthonormal
1.54
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) 1 x sin b q l 2 is lim q"0 q (A) 0.5 (C) 2
1.49
If the semicircular control D of radius 2 is as shown in the figure, 1 then the value of the integral ds is 2 ( s 1 ) D
(D) 12 x
1.48
Which one of following functions is strictly bounded? (B) ex (A) 1/x2 (C) x2 (D) e  x
2
(A) jp (C)  p
(B)  jp (D) p
1.50
For the function e  x , the linear approximation around x = 2 is (A) (3  x) e  2 (B) 1  x (C) 63 + 3 2  (1 2 ) x @e  2 (D) e  2
TWO MARKS
It is given that X1, X2 ...XM at M nonzero, orthogonal vectors. The dimension of the vector space spanned by the 2M vectors X1, X2,... XM ,  X1,  X2,...  XM is (A) 2M (B) M + 1 (C) M (D) dependent on the choice of X1, X2,... XM
2007
1.51
d2 y The solution of the differential equation k2 2 = y  y2 under the dx boundary conditions (i) y = y1 at x = 0 and (ii) y = y2 at x = 3 , where k, y1 and y2 are constants, is (A) y = (y1  y2) exp a x2 k + y2 k (C) y = ^y1  y2h sinh a x k + y1 k (B) y = (y2  y1) exp a x k + y1 k (D) y = ^y1  y2h exp a x k + y2 k
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
1.56
Consider the function f (x) = x2  x  2 . The maximum value of f (x) in the closed interval [ 4, 4] is (A) 18 (B) 10 (C)  225 (D) indeterminate An examination consists of two papers, Paper 1 and Paper 2. The probability of failing in Paper 1 is 0.3 and that in Paper 2 is 0.2. Given that a student has failed in Paper 2, the probability of failing in Paper 1 is 0.6. The probability of a student failing in both the papers is (A) 0.5 (B) 0.18 (C) 0.12 (D) 0.06
1.57
1.52
The equation x3  x2 + 4x  4 = 0 is to be solved using the Newton  Raphson method. If x = 2 is taken as the initial approximation of the solution, then next approximation using this method will be (A) 2/3 (B) 4/3 (C) 1 (D) 3/2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 5
2006
ONE MARK
1.67
1.58
V R S1 1 1 W The rank of the matrix S1  1 0 W is S W S1 1 1 W X (B) 1 T (A) 0 (C) 2 (D) 3 4#4# P , where P is a vector, is equal to (A) P # 4# P  4 2 P (B) 4 2 P + 4 (4 # P) (C) 4 2 P + 4# P (D) 4 (4$ P)  4 2 P
Three companies X, Y and Z supply computers to a university. The percentage of computers supplied by them and the probability of those being defective are tabulated below Company X Y Z % of Computer Supplied 60% 30% 10% Probability of being supplied defective 0.01 0.02 0.03
1.59
1.60
## (4 # P) $ ds , where P is a vector, is equal to (A) # P $ dl (B) # 4#4# P $ dl (C) # 4# P $ dl (D) ### 4$ Pdv
A probability density function is of the form p (x) = Ke a x , x ! ( 3, 3) The value of K is (A) 0.5 (B) 1 (C) 0.5a (D) a A solution for the differential equation xo (t) + 2x (t) = d (t) with initial condition x (0) = 0 is (A) e  2t u (t) (B) e2t u (t) (C) e u (t)
2006
t
Given that a computer is defective, the probability that was supplied by Y is (A) 0.1 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.3 (D) 0.4
1.68
1.61
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4 2 For the matrix = the eigenvalue corresponding to the eigenvector 2 4G 101 =101G is
1.62
(D) e u (t)
TWO MARKS
(B) 4 (D) 8
d2 y For the differential equation 2 + k2 y = 0 the boundary conditions dx are (i) y = 0 for x = 0 and (ii) y = 0 for x = a The form of nonzero solutions of y (where m varies over all integers) are (B) y = Am cos mpx (A) y = Am sin mpx a a m m
1.63
The eigenvalue and the corresponding eigenvector of 2 # 2 matrix are given by Eigenvalue Eigenvector 1 l1 = 8 v1 = = G 1 1 l2 = 4 v2 = = G 1 The matrix is 6 2 4 6 (A) = (B) = G 2 6 6 4G 2 4 4 8 (C) = (D) = G 4 2 8 4G For the function of a complex variable W = ln Z (where, W = u + jv and Z = x + jy , the u = constant lines get mapped in Z plane as (A) set of radial straight lines (B) set of concentric circles (C) set of confocal hyperbolas (D) set of confocal ellipses The value of the constant integral jp 2 jp (C) 2 (A) 1 dz is positive sense is z2 + 4 zj = 2 (B)  p 2 (D) p 2
/ mp (C) y = / Am x a
m
/ mpx (D) y = / Am e  a
m
1.70
1.64
(A) monotonically increases (B) monotonically decreases (C) increases to a maximum value and then decreases (D) decreases to a minimum value and then increases
2005
1.71
ex 1 + ex
ONE MARK
1.65
The following differential equation has d2 y dy 3 3 c 2 m + 4 c m + y2 + 2 = x dt dt (A) degree = 2 , order = 1 (C) degree = 4 , order = 3 (B) degree = 1, order = 2 (D) degree = 2 , order = 3
1.66
# 0
1.72
A fair dice is rolled twice. The probability that an odd number will follow an even number is (A) 1/2 (B) 1/6 (C) 1/3 (D) 1/4
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
1.73
Page 6
A solution of the following differential equation is given by d2 y dy 5 + 6y = 0 2 dx dx (A) y = e2x + e3x (B) y = e2x + e3x (C) y = e2x + 33x (D) y = e2x + e3x
2005 TWO MARKS
1.78
1 2  0.1 a and A  1 = = 2 G. Then (a + b) = G 0 3 0 b (A) 7/20 (B) 3/20 (C) 19/60 (D) 11/20
Let, A = =
1.79
1 2p
# 0
1.74
In what range should Re (s) remain so that the Laplace transform of the function e(a + 2) t + 5 exits. (A) Re (s) > a + 2 (B) Re (s) > a + 7 (C) Re (s) < 2 (D) Re (s) > a + 5 The derivative of the symmetric function drawn in given figure will look like
1.80
1.75
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
R1 S2 S0 (B) S S0 S0 T R1 S4 S0 (D) S S0 S0 T
V 0 0 0W 1 W 2 0 0 W 1 0 2 0W W 0 0 1 2 XV 0 0 0W 1 W 4 0 0 W 0 1 4 0W W 0 0 1 4 X
1.76
Match the following and choose the correct combination: Group I Group 2 E. NewtonRaphson method 1. Solving nonlinear equations F. Rungekutta method 2. Solving linear simultaneous equations G. Simpsons Rule 3. Solving ordinary differential equations H. Gauss elimination 4. Numerical integration 5. Interpolation 6. Calculation of Eigenvalues (B) E  1, F  6, G  4, H  3 (A) E  6, F  1, G  5, H  3 (C) E  1, F  3, G  4, H  2 (D) E  5, F  3, G  4, H  1 4 2 Given the matrix = , the eigenvector is 4 3G 3 4 (A) = G (B) = G 2 3 2 1 (C) = G (D) = G 1 2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
1.77
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 7
SOLUTIONS
1.1
but for 10% error, we can check option (B) first, q = 18c = 18c # p = 0.314 180c sin q = sin 18c = 0.309 % error = 0.314  0.309 # 100% = 0.49% 0.309 Now, we check it for q = 50c q = 50c = 50c # p = 0.873 180c sin q = sin 50c = 0.77 % error = 0.77  0.873 = 12.25% 0.873 so, the error is more than 10% . Hence, for error less than 10%, q = 18c can have the approximation sin q . q
1.2
1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (A) is correct. For, a given matrix 6A@ the eigen value is calculated as A  lI = 0 where l gives the eigen values of matrix. Here, the minimum eigen value among the given options is l =0 We check the characteristic equation of matrix for this eigen value A  lI = A 3 5 2 = 5 12 7 2 7 5 = 3 ^60  49h  5 ^25  14h + 2 ^35  24h = 33  55 + 22 =0 Hence, it satisfied the characteristic equation and so, the minimum eigen value is l =0 (for l = 0 )
1.3
f ^x h = 0 It will have at least one pole in right hand plane as there will be least one sign change from ^a1h to ^a 0h in the Routh matrix 1 st column. Also, there will be a corresponding pole in left hand plane i.e.; at least one positive root (in R.H.P) and at least one negative root (in L.H.P) Rest of the roots will be either on imaginary axis or in L.H.P
1.4
f ^x h = a 4 x 4 + a 3 x3 + a2 x2 + a1 x  a 0 Since, all the coefficients are positive so, the roots of equation is given by
Option (D) is correct. t dx + x = t dt dx + x = 1 t dt dx + Px = Q (General form) dt Integrating factor, Solution has the form, IF = e # = e = e ln t = t
Pdt
1 # dt t
x # IF =
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 8
At t = 0+ ,
1.9
# f (z) dz
C
= sum of the residues of the poles which lie inside the given closed region.
1.10
Option (A) is correct. Divergence of A in spherical coordinates is given as d :A = 12 2 (r 2 Ar ) = 12 2 (krn + 2) r 2r r 2r = k2 (n + 2) rn + 1 r = k (n + 2) rn  1 = 0 (given) n+2 = 0 & n = 2 Option (C) is correct. Probability of appearing a head is 1/2. If the number of required tosses is odd, we have following sequence of events. Probability H, TTH, TTTTH, ........... 3 5 P = 1 + b 1 l + b 1 l + ..... 2 2 2 P = Option (B) is correct. f (x) = x3  9x2 + 24x + 5 df (x) = 3x2  18x + 24 = 0 dx df (x) = x2  6x + 8 = 0 dx 1 1 4
1 2
C & z+1 = 1 Only pole z = 1 inside the circle, so residue at z = 1 is. z + 1 f (z) = (z + 1) (z + 3) (z + 1) ( z + 1) 2 = =1 = lim 2 z "  1 (z + 1) (z + 3)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
So
1.7
=2 3
1.11
1 2 pj x=
# f (z) dz
C
=1
&
x = 4, x = 2
So,
Option (D) is correct. d 2 y (t) 2dy (t) + + y (t) = d (t) dt dt 2 By taking Laplace transform with initial conditions dy 2 ;s Y (s)  sy (0)  dt E + 2 [sy (s)  y (0)] + Y (s) = 1 t=0 &
2 6s Y (s) + 2s  0@ + 2 6sY (s) + 2@ + Y (s) = 1
max
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
l2 + 5l + 6 = 0 Since characteristic equation satisfies its own matrix, so A2 + 5A + 6 = 0 & A2 = 5A  6I Multiplying with A A3 + 5A2 + 6A = 0 A3 + 5 ( 5A  6I) + 6A = 0 A3 = 19A + 30I
1.13
5l + l2 + 6 = 0
( 2s  3) s +2 (s2 + 2s + 1)
Option (D) is correct. From Divergence theorem, we have v$n v = #A v Adv t ds ### 4$
s
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 9
Thus
Option (C) is correct. Eigen value of a Skewsymmetric matrix are either zero or pure imaginary in conjugate pairs. Option (C) is correct. For a function x (t) trigonometric fourier series is x (t) = Ao + Where,
n=1
1.20
Option (C) is correct. We have Integrating or Since y (0) = c thus So, we get, or or dy = ky dx dy = # k dx + A y
ln y = kx + A ln c = A ln y = kx + ln c ln y = ln ekx + ln c y = cekx
Bn = 2 # x (t) sin nwt dt T0 T For an even function x (t), Bn = 0 Since given function is even function so coefficient Bn = 0 , only cosine
0
1.15
Option (A) is correct. 3z + 4 dz where C is circle z = 1 C R Integrals is # 2 z 4z + 5 + C # f (z) dz = 0 if poles are outside C.
C
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
z + 4z + 5 = 0 (z + 2) 2 + 1 = 0 Thus z1, 2 = 2 ! j & z1, 2 > 1 So poles are outside the unit circle. Now
1.16
Option (C) is correct. f (x) = x + x  3 = 0 f l (x) = 1 + 1 2 x Substituting x 0 = 2 we get f l (x 0) = 1.35355 and f (x 0) = 2 + We have Newton Raphson Method x1 = x 0 f (x 0) f l (x 0)
2  3 = 0.414
Option (B) is correct. Writing A: B we have R V S1 1 1 : 6 W S1 4 6 : 20W S W S1 4 l : m W T X Apply R 3 " R 3  R2 R V 6 W S1 1 1 : S1 4 6 : 20 W S W S0 0 l  6 : m  20W T X For equation to have solution, rank of A and A: B must be same. Thus for no solution; l = 6, m ! 20 Option (C) is correct. Total outcome are 36 out of which favorable outcomes are : (1, 2), (1, 3), (1, 4), (1, 5), (1, 6), (2, 3), (2, 4), (2, 5), (2, 6); (3, 4), (3, 5), (3, 6), (4, 5), (4, 6), (5, 6) which are 15.
Option (D) is correct. Given differential equation d 2 n (x) n (x)  2 =0 dx 2 L lx Let n (x) = Ae lx So, Al2 elx  Ae2 = 0 L l2  12 = 0 & l = ! 1 L L Boundary condition, n (3) = 0 so take l = 1 L n (x) = Ae L n (0) = Ae0 = K & A = K n (x) = Ke (x/L) ey = x x
1 1 x
So,
1.22
Option (A) is correct. Given that or ln ey = ln x x or y = 1 ln x x 1 dy Now = 1 1 + ln x ^ x x h = 12  ln xx dx x x2 For maxima and minima : dy = 12 (1  ln x) = 0 dx x ln x = 1 " x = e 1
2
1.18
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 10
Option (D) is correct. Given that 3s + 1 f (t) = L  1 ; 3 s + 4s 2 + (K  3) s E lim f (t) = 1 lim f (t) = lim sF (s) = 1
s"0
t"3
1.23
Option (D) is correct. According to given condition head should comes 3 times or 4 times 4 3 P (Heads comes 3 times or 4 times) = 4C 4 b 1 l + 4C 3 b 1 l b 1 l 2 2 2 = 1: 1 +4:1 :1 = 5 16 8 2 16
or or
1.24
Option (C) is correct. v = xya tx + x 2 a ty A v = dxa tx + dya ty dl v : dl v = # (xya tx + x 2 a ty) : (dxa tx + dya ty) #A
C C
1.28
or
K =4
Option (B) is correct. The highest derivative terms present in DE is of 2nd order. Option (C) is correct. Number of elements in sample space is 210 . Only one element 1 "H, H, T, T, T, T, T, T, T, T , is event. Thus probability is 10 2 Option (C) is correct. We have f (z) = c0 + c1 z  1 z (1 + c0) + c1 1 + f (z) 1 + c0 + c1 z  1 = = f1 (z) = z z z2 Since f1 (z) has double pole at z = 0 , the residue at z = 0 is z (1 + c0) + c1 Res f1 (z) z = 0 = lim z2 .f1 (z) = lim z2 . c m = c1 z"0 z"0 z2 Hence [1 + f (z)] dz = 2pj [Residue at z = 0 ] f1 (z) dz = z
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
= =
1.29
1.30
# (xydx + x 2 dy)
C
#1/
2/ 3 3
xdx +
#2/
1/ 3 3
3xdx +
#1
4 dy + 3
#3
1 dy 3
= 1 : 4  1 D + 3 :1  4 D + 4 [3  1] + 1 [1  3] 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 =1
1.25
unit circle
unit circle
Option (C) is correct. Given function 1  2z z (z  1) (z  2) Poles are located at z = 0, z = 1, and z = 2 At Z = 0 residues is R 0 = z : X (z) Z = 0 = 1  2 # 0 = 1 2 (0  1) (0  2) X (z ) = at z = 1, R1 = (Z  1) : X (Z ) Z = 1 = 12#1 = 1 1 (1  2) At z = 2 , R2 = (z  2) : X (z) z = 2 = 1  2 # 2 = 3 2 2 (2  1)
= 2pjc1
1.31
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
y2 y 4  + ... 3! 5! Substituting x  p = y we get (x  p) 2 (x  p) 4 + ... f (x) = 1 + 3! 5! or f (y + p) = 1 +
1.32
1.26
Option (B) is correct. Taking step size x 0 0.1 0.2 0.3 y 0 0 0.01 0.031
h = 0.1, y (0) = 0 yi + 1 = yi + h dy dx
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 11
Straight Line
The NewtonRaphson iterative formula is f (xn) xn + 1 = xn f'( xn) Now f (xn) = xn  e  x f'( xn) = 1 + e  x Thus
1.41
n n
or or or
1.33
xn + 1 = xn  xn  e x = 1+e
n
 xn
(1 + xn) e  x 1 + ex
n
Option (A) is correct. Res f (z) z = a = Here we have n = 2 and a = 2 Thus Res f (z) z = 2 = 1 d (z  2) 2 1 2 (2  1)! dz ; (z  2) (z + 2) 2 Ez = a 2 1 = d ; = dz (z + 2) 2 Ez = a ; (z + 2) 3 Ez = a 1 dn  1 6(z  a) n f (z)@ z=a (n  1)! dzn  1
Hyperbola
Option (D) is correct. Sum of the principal diagonal element of matrix is equal to the sum of Eigen values. Sum of the diagonal element is  1  1 + 3 = 1.In only option (D), the sum of Eigen values is 1. Option (C) is correct. The product of Eigen value is equal to the determinant of the matrix. Since one of the Eigen value is zero, the product of Eigen value is zero, thus determinant of the matrix is zero. Thus p11 p22  p12 p21 = 0
1.34
1.35
Option (B) is correct. The given system is 4 2 x 7 =2 1G=y G = = 6 G 4 2 We have A == 2 1G 4 2 and =0 A = 2 1 4 2 7 Now C == G 2 1 6 Since r (A) ! r (C) there is no solution.
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
= 2 = 1 32 64
1.36
Option (A) is correct. sin z can have value between  1 to + 1. Thus no solution. Option (A) is correct. We have f (x) = ex + ex For x > 0 , ex > 1 and 0 < ex < 1 For x < 0 , 0 < ex < 1 and ex > 1 Thus f (x) have minimum values at x = 0 and that is e0 + e0 = 2 . Option (A) is correct.
3 5 sin x = x + x + x + ... 3! 5! 2 4 cos x = 1 + x + x + ... 2! 4!
1.37
Hp
2e  1  e  2 e1  e2 == G  2e  1 + 2e  2  e  1 + 2e  2
1.43
Option (B) is correct. Taylor series is given as f (x) = f (a) + x  a f'( a) + 1! For x = p we have Thus Now (x  p) f"( x)... f (x) = f (p) + x  p f'( p) + 1! 2! f (x) f'( x) f"( x) f"( p)
2
1.38
(x  a) 2 f"( a) + ... 2!
Option (B) is correct. dx (t) We have + 3x (t) = 0 dt or Since m = 3 , solution. (D + 3) x (t) = 0 x (t) = Ce  3t Thus only (B) may be
1.44
= ex + sin x = ex + cos x = ex  sin x = e p  sin p = e p f"( p) Thus the coefficient of (x  p) 2 is 2! Option (A) is correct. The equation of straight line from (0, 0) to (1, 2) is y = 2x . Now g (x, y) = 4x3 + 10y 4 or, g (x, 2x) = 4x3 + 160x 4 Now g (x, 2x) = # (4x3 + 160x 4) dx # 0 0
1 1
1.40
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 12
= [x 4 + 32x5] 1 0 = 33
1.45
# P # 1
# P
Thus solution is
2  y2 1 c 2 m = y2 D2  12 k k
x k x k
y = C1 e  + C2 e + y2 From y (0) = y1 we get C1 + C2 = y1  y2 From y (3) = y2 we get that C1 must be zero. Thus C2 = y1  y2 y = (y1  y2) e  + y2
1.52
x k
ydy = 0 # 0
1.46
Option (B) is correct. The given plot is straight line whose equation is x +y =1 1 1 or Now y = x+1 I = ydx # 1 (x + 2
2
(x + 1) dx # 1 9 4 E =  = 2.5 2 2
Option (B) is correct. We have f (x) = x3  x2 + 4x  4 f'( x) = 3x2  2x + 4 Taking x0 = 2 in NewtonRaphosn method 23  22 + 4 (2)  4 f (x0) x1 = x0 = 2=4 f'( x0) 3 3 (2) 2  2 (2) + 4
=;
1.47
1) 2 2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Thus
1.48
Option (C) is correct. For two orthogonal signal f (x) and g (x)
# 3
1.54
+3
f (x) g (x) dx = 0
i.e. common area between f (x) and g (x) is zero. Option (A) is correct. We know that 1 ds = 2pj [sum of residues] 2 s 1 D Singular points are at s = ! 1 but only s =+ 1 lies inside the given contour, Thus Residue at s =+ 1 is lim (s  1) f (s) = lim (s  1) 2 1 = 1 s"1 s"1 s 1 2 1 ds = 2pj 1 = pj `2j 2 s 1 D
coth x . 1 x
1.49
Option (A) is correct. q sin ^ q sin ^ q 2h 2h 1 lim sin ^ 2 h = 1 = 0.5 = lim = lim q"0 q " 0 2^ q h 2 q"0 ^ q q 2 2 2h Option (D) is correct. We have, lim 12 = 3 x"0 x lim x2 = 3
x"3 x"3 x"3 x"0
1.55
lim e  x = 3
2
Option (C) is correct. For two orthogonal vectors, we require two dimensions to define them and similarly for three orthogonal vector we require three dimensions to define them. 2M vectors are basically M orthogonal vector and we require M dimensions to define them. Option (A) is correct. We have f (x) = x2  x + 2
lim e  x = 0 lim e  x = 1
2
1.56
1.50
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
f'( x) = 2x  1 = 0 " x = 1 2 f"( x) = 2 Since f"( x) = 2 > 0 , thus x = 1 is minimum point. The maximum 2 value in closed interval 6 4, 4@ will be at x = 4 or x = 4 Now maximum value = max [f ( 4), f (4)] = max (18, 10) = 18
1.57
1.51
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 13
Probability of failing in paper 1, when A student has failed in paper 2 is P^ B h = 0.6 We know that (P + B) Pb A l = B P (B) or P (A + B) = P (B) P b A l = 0.6 # 0.2 = 0.12 B
1.58
Equation of circle
#
zj = 2
1 dz (z + 2i) (z  2i)
Option (C) is correct. We have V V R R S1 1 1 W S1 1 1 W A = S1  1 0 W + S1  1 0 W S W W S S0 0 0 W S1 1 1 W X X T T Since one full row is zero, r (A) < 3 1 1 Now = 2 ! 0 , thus r (A) = 2 1 1 Option (D) is correct. The vector Triple Product is Thus A # (B # C) = B (A $ C)  C (A $ B) 4#4# P = 4 (4$ P)  P (4$4)
R3  R1
1.66
P (0, 2) lies inside the circle z  j = 2 and P (0,  2) does not lie. Thus By cauchys integral formula 2pi = p 1 = I = 2pi lim (z  2i) z " 2i 2i + 2i 2 (z + 2i)( z  2i)
# 0 # 0
sin3 qdq
1.59
= 4 (4$ P)  4 2 P
1.60
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
## (4 # F) $ ds = # A $ dl
1.61
# p (x) dx
3 3
=1
# #
0 3
3
Ke a x dx = 1
3  ax
Option (D) is correct. Let d " defective and y " supply by Y P (y + d) y pa k = d P (d) P (y + d) = 0.3 # 0.02 = 0.006 P (d) = 0.6 # 0.1 + 0.3 # 0.02 + 0.1 # 0.03 = 0.015 y P a k = 0.006 = 0.4 d 0.015
Keax dx +
# Ke
0
dx = 1
1.62
K eax 0 + k e ax 3 = 1 @0 a 6 @ 3 ( a) 6 K +K =1 or a a or K =a 2 Option (A) is correct. We have xo (t) + 2x (t) = s (t) Taking Laplace transform both sides sX (s)  x (0) + 2X (s) = 1 or sX (s) + 2X (s) = 1 X (s) = 1 s+2
 2t
1.68
6A  lI @ [X] = 0
Since x (0 ) = 0
1.69
or or
Option (A) is correct. d2 y + k2 y = 0 2 dx or D2 y + k2 y = 0 The AE is m2 + k2 = 0 The solution of AE is m = ! ik Thus y = A sin kx + B cos kx From x = 0 , y = 0 we get B = 0 and x = a, y = 0 we get A sin ka = 0 or sin ka = 0 k = mpx a Thus y = Am sin ` mpx j a m We have
Option (A) is correct. Sum of the Eigen values must be equal to the sum of element of principal diagonal of matrix. 6 2 Only matrix = satisfy this condition. 2 6G Option (B) is correct. We have or or W u + jv eu + jv eu e jv eu (cos v + j sin v) = ln z = ln (x + jy) = x + jy = x + jy = x + jy
1.64
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
1.70
Page 14
Option (A) is correct. e 1 + ex For x " 3 , the value of f (x) monotonically increases. We have f (x) =
x
1.71
Option (B) is correct. Order is the highest derivative term present in the equation and degree is the power of highest derivative term. Order = 2 , degree = 1 Option (D) is correct. Probability of coming odd number is 1 2 and the probability of 1 coming even number is 2 . Both the events are independent to each other, thus probability of coming odd number after an even number 1 1 is 1 2 # 2 = 4. Option (B) is correct. We have The A.E. is d2 y dy 5 + 6y = 0 2 dx dx m2  5m + 6 = 0 m = 3, 2
R2  4R1
1.72
X ==
2 1G
Eigen vector
1.73
Now or or or
AA  1 = I 1 0 2  0.1 1 a =0 3 G= 2 G = =0 1G 0 b 1 2a  0.1b 1 0 == G =0 3b 0 1G
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The CF is yc = C1 e3x + C2 e2x Since Q = 0 , thus y = C1 e3x + C2 e2x Thus only (B) may be correct.
1.74
3  (x  m)2 2s2
3
dx
for  3 # x # 3
Option (A) is correct. We have f (t) = e(a + 2) t + 5 = e5 .e(a + 2) t Taking Laplace transform we get 1 Thus Re (s) > (a + 2) F (s) = e5 ; s  (a + 2) E
# f (x) dx # #
0
x2 8
=1
1.75
Option (C) is correct. For x > 0 the slope of given curve is negative. Only (C) satisfy this condition. Option (C) is correct. Newton  Raphson Runge  kutta Method Simpsons Rule Gauss elimination Option (C) is correct. We have Characteristic equation is A  lI = 0 or or 4l 2 =0 4 3l ( 4  l)(3  l)  8 = 0 4 2 A == 4 3G " " " " MethodSolving nonlinear eq. Solving ordinary differential eq. Numerical Integration Solving linear simultaneous eq.
1 2 2p 2 1 2p
3  x2 8
e e
dx = 1 dx = 1
#
0
3  x2 8
1.76
1.77
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Since the inverse of I is I , thus [AAT ] 1 = I1 = I
Eigen values
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 2
NETWORKS
Page 15
ONE MARK
2.6
Consider a delta connection of resistors and its equivalent star connection as shown below. If all elements of the delta connection are scaled by a factor k , k > 0 , the elements of the corresponding star equivalent will be scaled by a factor of
Three capacitors C1 , C2 and C 3 whose values are 10 mF , 5 mF , and 2 mF respectively, have breakdown voltages of 10 V, 5 V and 2 V respectively. For the interconnection shown below, the maximum safe voltage in Volts that can be applied across the combination, and the corresponding total charge in mC stored in the effective capacitance across the terminals are respectively,
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
2.3
A source vs ^ t h = V cos 100pt has an internal impedance of ^4 + j3h W . If a purely resistive load connected to this source has to extract the maximum power out of the source, its value in W should be (A) 3 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 7
2013 TWO MARKS
2.4
In the circuit shown below, if the source voltage VS = 100+53.13c V then the Thevenins equivalent voltage in Volts as seen by the load resistance RL is
2.7
The following arrangement consists of an ideal transformer and an attenuator which attenuates by a factor of 0.8. An ac voltage VWX1 = 100 V is applied across WX to get an open circuit voltage VYZ1 across YZ. Next, an ac voltage VYZ2 = 100 V is applied across YZ to get an open circuit voltage VWX2 across WX. Then, VYZ1 /VWX1 , VWX2 /VYZ2 are respectively,
The current IS in Amps in the voltage source, and voltage VS in Volts across the current source respectively, are (B) 8,  10 (A) 13,  20 (C)  8, 20 (D)  13, 20 The current in the 1W resistor in Amps is (A) 2 (B) 3.33 (C) 10 (D) 12 Two magnetically uncoupled inductive coils have Q factors q1 and q2
2.8
2.9
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 16
at the chosen operating frequency. Their respective resistances are R1 and R2 . When connected in series, their effective Q factor at the same operating frequency is (B) ^1/q1h + ^1/q2h (A) q1 + q2 (C) ^q1 R1 + q2 R2h / ^R1 + R2h (D) ^q1 R2 + q2 R1h / ^R1 + R2h (A) 0.8 W (C) 2 W
2.14
2012
2.10
ONE MARK
In the following figure, C1 and C2 are ideal capacitors. C1 has been charged to 12 V before the ideal switch S is closed at t = 0. The current i (t) for all t is
If VA  VB = 6 V then VC  VD is
(A) zero
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) an exponentially decaying function (D) an impulse function
2.11
(A)  5 V (C) 3 V
(B) 2 V (D) 6 V
The average power delivered to an impedance (4  j3) W by a current 5 cos (100pt + 100) A is (A) 44.2 W (B) 50 W (C) 62.5 W (D) 125 W In the circuit shown below, the current through the inductor is
2.15
2.12
With 10 V dc connected at port A , the current drawn by 7 W connected at port B is (A) 3/7 A (B) 5/7 A (C) 1 A (D) 9/7 A For the same network, with 6 V dc connected at port A , 1 W connected at port B draws 7/3 A. If 8 V dc is connected to port A , the open circuit voltage at port B is (A) 6 V (B) 7 V (C) 8 V (D) 9 V
2011 ONE MARK
2.16
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2 A 1+j (C) 1 A 1+j (A)
2012
2.13
2.17
In the circuit shown below, the Norton equivalent current in amperes with respect to the terminals P and Q is
Assuming both the voltage sources are in phase, the value of R for which maximum power is transferred from circuit A to circuit B is (A) 6.4  j 4.8 (C) 10 + j 0
2.18
In the circuit shown below, the value of RL such that the power
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 17
transferred to RL is maximum is
(A) i (t) = 15 exp ( 2 # 103 t) A (B) i (t) = 5 exp ( 2 # 103 t) A (C) i (t) = 10 exp ( 2 # 103 t) A (D) i (t) = 5 exp ( 2 # 103 t) A
2010 ONE MARK
(A) 5 W (C) 15 W
2.19
(B) 10 W (D) 20 W
2.23
For the twoport network shown below, the shortcircuit admittance parameter matrix is
The circuit shown below is driven by a sinusoidal input vi = Vp cos (t/RC ). The steady state output vo is
4 (A) > 2 (A) (Vp /3) cos (t/RC ) (C) (Vp /2) cos (t/RC )
2011
2.20
2 S 4H
 0.5 S 1H
(B) (Vp /3) sin (t/RC ) (D) (Vp /2) sin (t/RC )
TWO MARKS
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
0.5 S 1H
4 (D) > 2
2 S 4H
In the circuit shown below, the network N is described by the following Y matrix: 0.1 S  0.01 S . the voltage gain V2 is Y => 0.01 S 0.1 SH V1
2.25
For parallel RLC circuit, which one of the following statements is NOT correct ? (A) The bandwidth of the circuit decreases if R is increased (B) The bandwidth of the circuit remains same if L is increased (C) At resonance, input impedance is a real quantity (D) At resonance, the magnitude of input impedance attains its minimum value.
2010 TWO MARKS
In the circuit shown, the switch S is open for a long time and is closed at t = 0 . The current i (t) for t $ 0+ is
(B) 1/90 (D) 1/11 (A) i (t) = 0.5  0.125e1000t A (C) i (t) = 0.5  0.5e1000t A
2.26
In the circuit shown below, the initial charge on the capacitor is 2.5 mC, with the voltage polarity as indicated. The switch is closed at time t = 0 . The current i (t) at a time t after the switch is closed is
(A)  j1 A
(B) j1 A
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 18
(C) 0 A
2.27
(D) 20 A
(A) 0 W (C) 10 W
GATE 2009
2.28
2.31
An AC source of RMS voltage 20 V with internal impedance Zs = (1 + 2j) W feeds a load of impedance ZL = (7 + 4j) W in the figure below. The reactive power consumed by the load is
In the interconnection of ideal sources shown in the figure, it is known that the 60 V source is absorbing power.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The switch in the circuit shown was on position a for a long time, and is move to position b at time t = 0 . The current i (t) for t > 0 is given by
Which of the following can be the value of the current source I ? (A) 10 A (B) 13 A (C) 15 A (D) 18 A
2.29
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(D) 2R
A fully charged mobile phone with a 12 V battery is good for a 10 minute talktime. Assume that, during the talktime the battery delivers a constant current of 2 A and its voltage drops linearly from 12 V to 10 V as shown in the figure. How much energy does the
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 19
(B) 8 W 3 (D) 6 W
The time domain behavior of an RL circuit is represented by L di + Ri = V0 (1 + BeRt/L sin t) u (t). dt For an initial current of i (0) = V0 , the steady state value of the R current is given by (A) i (t) " V0 (B) i (t) " 2V0 R R (C) i (t) " V0 (1 + B) (D) i (t) " 2V0 (1 + B) R R
GATE 2008 ONE MARK
The component values are (A) L = 5 H, R = 0.5 W, C = 0.1 F (B) L = 0.1 H, R = 0.5 W, C = 5 F (C) L = 5 H, R = 2 W, C = 0.1 F (D) L = 0.1 H, R = 2 W, C = 5 F
2.39
The circuit shown in the figure is used to charge the capacitor C alternately from two current sources as indicated. The switches S1 and S2 are mechanically coupled and connected as follows: For 2nT # t # (2n + 1) T , (n = 0, 1, 2,..) S1 to P1 and S2 to P2 For (2n + 1) T # t # (2n + 2) T, (n = 0, 1, 2,...) S1 to Q1 and S2 to Q2
2.35
In the following graph, the number of trees (P) and the number of cutset (Q) are
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
(A) P = 2, Q = 2 (C) P = 4, Q = 6
2.36
(B) P = 2, Q = 6 (D) P = 4, Q = 10
In the following circuit, the switch S is closed at t = 0 . The rate of change of current di (0+) is given by dt
(B) Rs Is L (D) 3
TWO MARKS
The Thevenin equivalent impedance Zth between the nodes P and Q in the following circuit is
Assume that the capacitor has zero initial charge. Given that u (t) is a unit step function , the voltage vc (t) across the capacitor is given by (A)
n=1
/ ( 1) n tu (t  nT)
3 n=1 3
2.38
2 +s+1 (C) 2 + s + 1 (D) s 2 s s + 2s + 1 The driving point impedance of the following network is given by Z (s) = 2 0.2s s + 0.1s + 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2.40
Page 20
2.41
1 (A) 2 ^e t  e t h (B) 2 te 2 t 3 3 1 1 (C) 2 e 2 t cos c 3 t m (D) 2 e 2 t sin c 3 t m 2 2 3 3 For t > 0 , the voltage across the resistor is
1 2 3 2
3t 2
e
1t 2
1 (D) 2 e 2 t cos c 3 t m 2 3
Two series resonant filters are as shown in the figure. Let the 3dB bandwidth of Filter 1 be B1 and that of Filter 2 be B2 . the value B1 is B2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
and ammeters. A1, A2 (all assumed to be ideal), as indicated
For the circuit shown in the figure, the Thevenin voltage and resistance looking into X  Y are
(A) (C) Under following conditions, the readings obtained are: (1) S1 open, S2  closed A1 = 0,V1 = 4.5 V,V2 = 1.5 V, A2 = 1 A (2) S1 open, S2  closed A1 = 4 A,V1 = 6 V,V2 = 6 V, A2 = 0
2.42 2.48
4 3 4 3
V, 2 W V, 2 3 W
(B) 4 V, 2 3 W (D) 4 V, 2 W
In the circuit shown, vC is 0 volts at t = 0 sec. For t > 0 , the capacitor current iC (t), where t is in seconds is given by
The z parameter matrix for this network is 1.5 (A) = 4.5 1.5 (C) = 1.5 1.5 1.5G 4.5 1.5 G 1.5 (B) = 1.5 4.5 (D) = 1.5 4.5 4.5G 1.5 4.5G
2.43
The h parameter matrix for this network is 3 3 (A) =  1 0.67 G 3 3 (C) = 1 0.67 G
GATE 2007
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C) 0.50 exp ( 12.5t) mA (D) 0.25 exp ( 6.25t) mA
2.44
An independent voltage source in series with an impedance Zs = Rs + jXs delivers a maximum average power to a load impedance ZL when (B) ZL = Rs (A) ZL = Rs + jXs (C) ZL = jXs (D) ZL = Rs  jXs The RC circuit shown in the figure is
In the ac network shown in the figure, the phasor voltage VAB (in Volts) is
2.45
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 21
GATE 2006
2.50
TWO MARKS
A twoport network is represented by ABCD parameters given by V1 A B V2 = I G = =C D G= I G 1 2 If port2 is terminated by RL , the input impedance seen at port1 is given by (B) ARL + C (A) A + BRL BRL + D C + DRL (C) DRL + A (D) B + ARL BRL + C D + CRL
2.51
In the two port network shown in the figure below, Z12 and Z21 and respectively
GATE 2005
2.56
ONE MARK
The condition on R, L and C such that the step response y (t) in the figure has no oscillations, is
The first and the last critical frequencies (singularities) of a driving point impedance function of a passive network having two kinds of elements, are a pole and a zero respectively. The above property will be satisfied by (A) RL network only (B) RC network only (C) LC network only (D) RC as well as RL networks A 2 mH inductor with some initial current can be represented as shown below, where s is the Laplace Transform variable. The value of initial current is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
2.53
2.57
In the figure shown below, assume that all the capacitors are initially uncharged. If vi (t) = 10u (t) Volts, vo (t) is given by
L C (C) R $ 2 (D) R = 1 LC The ABCD parameters of an ideal n: 1 transformer shown in the figure are n 0 >0 x H (A) R $ 1 2 L C L C (B) R $
t/0.004
t/0.004
) Volts
(B) 1 n (D) 12 n
A negative resistance Rneg is connected to a passive network N having driving point impedance as shown below. For Z2 (s) to be positive real,
In a series RLC circuit, R = 2 kW , L = 1 H, and C = 1 mF The 400 resonant frequency is (B) 1 # 10 4 Hz (A) 2 # 10 4 Hz p (C) 10 4 Hz (D) 2p # 10 4 Hz
2.59
The maximum power that can be transferred to the load resistor RL from the voltage source in the figure is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 22
the figure, then the reading in the ideal voltmeter connected between a and b is
The first and the last critical frequency of an RC driving point impedance function must respectively be (A) a zero and a pole (B) a zero and a zero (C) a pole and a pole (D) a pole and a zero
GATE 2005
2.61
TWO MARKS
For the circuit shown in the figure, the instantaneous current i1 (t) is
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
A square pulse of 3 volts amplitude is applied to C  R circuit shown in the figure. The capacitor is initially uncharged. The output voltage V2 at time t = 2 sec is
(A) 3 V (C) 4 V
GATE 2004
(B)  3 V (D)  4 V
ONE MARK
Consider the network graph shown in the figure. Which one of the following is NOT a tree of this graph ?
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
For the circuit shown in the figure, Thevenins voltage and Thevenins equivalent resistance at terminals a  b is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 23
(A) a (C) c
2.68
(B) b (D) d
The equivalent inductance measured between the terminals 1 and 2 for the circuit shown in the figure is
2.72
GATE 2004
TWO MARKS
For the lattice shown in the figure, Za = j2 W and Zb = 2 W . The z11 z12 values of the open circuit impedance parameters 6 z @ = = are z21 z22 G
(A) L1 + L2 + M (C) L1 + L2 + 2M
2.69
(B) L1 + L2  M (D)L1 + L2  2M
The circuit shown in the figure, with R = 1 W, L = 1 H and C = 3 F 3 4 has input voltage v (t) = sin 2t . The resulting current i (t) is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
5 sin (2t + 53.1c) 5 sin (2t  53.1c) 25 sin (2t + 53.1c) 25 sin (2t  53.1c) 1j (A) = 1+j 1+j (C) = 1j
2.73
For the circuit shown in the figure, the time constant RC = 1 ms. The input voltage is vi (t) = 2 sin 103 t . The output voltage vo (t) is equal to
1+j 1 + jG 1+j 1  jG
The circuit shown in the figure has initial current iL (0) = 1 A through the inductor and an initial voltage vC (0) = 1 V across the capacitor. For input v (t) = u (t), the Laplace transform of the current i (t) for t $ 0 is
For the R  L circuit shown in the figure, the input voltage vi (t) = u (t). The current i (t) is
2.74
s+2 s2 + s + 1 (D) 2 1 s +s+1 V (s) The transfer function H (s) = o of an RLC circuit is given by Vi (s) s s2 + s + 1 (C) 2 s  2 s +s+1 (A) (B) 106 s + 20s + 106 The Quality factor (Qfactor) of this circuit is (A) 25 (B) 50 H (s) =
2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 24
(C) 100
2.75
(D) 5000
2.80
(C) 100
(D) 200
For the circuit shown in the figure, the initial conditions are zero. Its V (s) is transfer function H (s) = c Vi (s)
The differential equation for the current i (t) in the circuit of the figure is
Consider the following statements S1 and S2 S1 : At the resonant frequency the impedance of a series RLC circuit is zero. S2 : In a parallel GLC circuit, increasing the conductance G results in increase in its Q factor.
GATE 2003
2.81
TWO MARKS
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Which one of the following is correct? (A) S1 is FALSE and S2 is TRUE (B) Both S1 and S2 are TRUE (C) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE (D) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE
GATE 2003
2.77
Twelve 1 W resistance are used as edges to form a cube. The resistance between two diagonally opposite corners of the cube is (A) 5 W (B) 1 W 6 (D) 3 W (C) 6 W 2 5 The current flowing through the resistance R in the circuit in the figure has the form P cos 4t where P is
2.82
Assume that the switch S is in position 1 for a long time and thrown to position 2 at t = 0 .
The minimum number of equations required to analyze the circuit shown in the figure is
(A) 3 (C) 6
2.78
(B) 4 (D) 7
2.83
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
At t = 0+ , the current i1 is (B)  V (A)  V R 2R (C)  V (D) zero 4R I1 (s) and I2 (s) are the Laplace transforms of i1 (t) and i2 (t) respectively. The equations for the loop currents I1 (s) and I2 (s) for the circuit shown in the figure, after the switch is brought from position 1 to position 2 at t = 0 , are 1 V R + Ls + Cs  Ls I1 (s) s (A) > == G G 1 H=  Ls R + Cs I2 (s) 0
1 R + Ls + Cs  Ls I1 (s) V s (B) > = 1 H=  Ls R + Cs I2 (s)G = 0 G
A source of angular frequency 1 rad/sec has a source impedance consisting of 1 W resistance in series with 1 H inductance. The load that will obtain the maximum power transfer is (A) 1 W resistance (B) 1 W resistance in parallel with 1 H inductance (C) 1 W resistance in series with 1 F capacitor (D) 1 W resistance in parallel with 1 F capacitor A series RLC circuit has a resonance frequency of 1 kHz and a quality factor Q = 100 . If each of R, L and C is doubled from its original value, the new Q of the circuit is (A) 25 (B) 50
2.84
2.79
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 25
(A) 25 V (C)  50 V
GATE 2002
2.90
(B) 50 V (D) 0 V
TWO MARKS
2.85
The driving point impedance Z (s) of a network has the polezero locations as shown in the figure. If Z (0) = 3 , then Z (s) is
In the network of the fig, the maximum power is delivered to RL if its value is
2.86
3 (s + 3) 2 (s + 3) (B) 2 s + 2s + 3 s + 2s + 2 3 (s + 3) 2 (s  3) (C) 2 (D) 2 s + 2s + 2 s  2s  3 An input voltage v (t) = 10 2 cos (t + 10c) + 10 5 cos (2t + 10c) V is applied to a series combination of resistance R = 1 W and an inductance L = 1 H. The resulting steadystate current i (t) in ampere is (A) 10 cos (t + 55c) + 10 cos (2t + 10c + tan1 2) (A)
2 3 (B) 10 cos (t + 55c) + 10 2 cos (2t + 55c) (C) 10 cos (t  35c) + 10 cos (2t + 10c  tan1 2)
(A) 16 W (C) 60 W
2.91
(B) 40 W 3 (D) 20 W
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3 2
The impedance parameters z11 and z12 of the twoport network in the figure are
z11 = 2.75 W and z12 = 0.25 W z11 = 3 W and z12 = 0.5 W z11 = 3 W and z12 = 0.25 W z11 = 2.25 W and z12 = 0.5 W
ONE MARK
GATE 2002
2.88
2.92
(A) 2 V (C) 4 V
In the figure, the switch was closed for a long time before opening at t = 0 . The voltage vx at t = 0+ is
2.94
If each branch of Delta circuit has impedance 3 Z , then each branch of the equivalent Wye circuit has impedance (B) 3Z (A) Z 3 (D) Z (C) 3 3 Z 3 The admittance parameter Y12 in the 2port network in Figure is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2.98
Page 26
The z parameters z11 and z21 for the 2port network in the figure are
(A) 48 V (C) 36 V
(B) 24 V (D) 28 V (A) Low pass filter (C) band pass filter
2.100
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2.96
When the angular frequency w in the figure is varied 0 to 3 , the locus of the current phasor I2 is given by (A) eat  ebt (C) aeat  bebt
2.101
(A)  16 V
(B) 4 V
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C)  6 V In the figure, the value of the load resistor RL which maximizes the power delivered to it is
GATE 2000
2.102
(D) 16 V
TWO MARKS
2.97
Use the data of the figure (a). The current i in the circuit of the figure (b)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2.107
Page 27
A Deltaconnected network with its Wyeequivalent is shown in the given figure. The resistance R1, R2 and R3 (in ohms) are respectively
(A)  2 A (C)  4 A
GATE 1999
2.103
(B) 2 A (D) 4 A
ONE MARK
Identify which of the following is NOT a tree of the graph shown in the given figure is
A network has 7 nodes and 5 independent loops. The number of branches in the network is (A) 13 (B) 12 (C) 11 (D) 10 The nodal method of circuit analysis is based on
2.109
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
A 2port network is shown in the given figure. The parameter h21 for this network can be given by
(B) KCL and Ohms law (D) KCL, KVL and Ohms law
Superposition theorem is NOT applicable to networks containing (A) nonlinear elements (B) dependent voltage sources (C) dependent current sources (D) transformers The parallel RLC circuit shown in the figure is in resonance. In this circuit
2.111
The Thevenin equivalent voltage VTH appearing between the terminals A and B of the network shown in the given figure is given by
0  1/2 The shortcircuit admittance matrix a twoport network is > 1/2 0 H The twoport network is (A) nonreciprocal and passive (B) nonreciprocal and active (C) reciprocal and passive (D) reciprocal and active The voltage across the terminals a and b in the figure is
2.113
The value of R (in ohms) required for maximum power transfer in the network shown in the given figure is
(A) 2 (C) 8
(B) 4 (D) 16
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 28
ws and parallel resonance at the frequency wp . Then (A) ws is very close to, but less than wp (B) ws << wp (C) ws is very close to, but greater than wp (D) ws >> wp
GATE 1997
2.115
(A) 10 V (C) 5 V
2.119
In the circuit of the figure is the energy absorbed by the 4 W resistor in the time interval (0, 3) is
ONE MARK
In the circuit of the figure the equivalent impedance seen across terminals a, b, is
(A) 12 A (C) 4 A
2.116
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
ONE MARK
In the given figure, A1, A2 and A3 are ideal ammeters. If A2 and A3 read 3 A and 4 A respectively, then A1 should read
(A) 3 V (C) 5 V
2.117
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C) 7 A (A) 9 V (C) 1 V
2.118
2.122
The number of independent loops for a network with n nodes and b branches is (A) n  1 (B) b  n (C) b  n + 1 (D) independent of the number of nodes
GATE 1996 TWO MARKS
2.123
The voltages VC1, VC2, and VC3 across the capacitors in the circuit in
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 29
(A) 80 V, 32 V, 48 V (C) 20 V, 8 V, 12 V
(B) 80 V, 48 V, 32 V (D) 20 V, 12 V, 8 V
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 30
SOLUTIONS
2.1
As the circuit open across RL so I2 = 0 or, j40I2 = 0 i.e., the dependent source in loop 1 is short circuited. Therefore, ^ j4h Vs VL1 = j4 + 3 VTh = 10 VL1 = j40 100 53.13c j4 + 3 40 90c 100 53.13c = 5 53.13c = 800 90c
Option (B) is correct. In the equivalent star connection, the resistance can be given as Rb Ra RC = Ra + Rb + Rc Ra Rc RB = Ra + Rb + Rc Rb Rc RA = Ra + Rb + Rc So, if the delta connection components Ra , Rb and Rc are scaled by a factor k then ^k Rb h^k Rc h RAl = kRa + kRb + kRc
2 Rb Rc =k k Ra + Rb + Rc
2.5
Option (C) is correct. For the given transformer, we have V = 1.25 1 VWX
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
= k RA hence, it is also scaled by a factor k
2.2
VYZ = 0.8 (attenuation factor) V VYZ = 0.8 1.25 = 1 ^ h^ h VWX VYZ = VWX V VWX = 100 V ; YZ = 100 100 VWX
1 1 1
VWZ = 100 V ;
2
Option (D) is correct. For the given capacitance, C = 100mF in the circuit, we have the reactance. 1 10 4 = XC = 1 = sc s s # 100 # 106 So, 10 4 + 10 4 V2 ^s h = 4 s V1 ^s h 10 + 10 4 + 10 4 s s = s+1 s+2 Option (C) is correct. For the purely resistive load, maximum average power is transferred when 2 2 + XTh RL = RTh where RTh + jXTh is the equivalent thevinin (input) impedance of the circuit. Hence, we obtain RL = 42 + 32 5W Option (C) is correct. For evaluating the equivalent thevenin voltage seen by the load RL , we open the circuit across it (also if it consist dependent source). The equivalent circuit is shown below
Option (C) is correct. The quality factor of the inductances are given by q1 = wL1 R1 and q2 = wL2 R2 So, in series circuit, the effective quality factor is given by XLeq = wL 1 + wL 2 Q = Req R1 + R 2 q1 q wL 1 + wL 2 + 2 q R + q2 R2 R R R R R R 1 2 2 = 1 2 = 1 1 = 2 1 + 1 1 + 1 R1 + R 2 R 2 R1 R 2 R1
2.3
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2.7
2.4
Consider that the voltage across the three capacitors C1 , C2 and C 3 are V1 , V2 and V3 respectively. So, we can write V2 = C 3 V3 C 2 ....(1)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 31
2.8
Since, Voltage is inversely proportional to capacitance Now, given that C1 = 10 mF ; ^V1hmax = 10V C2 = 5 mF ; ^V2hmax = 5 V C 3 = 2 mF ; ^V3hmax = 2V So, from Eq (1) we have V2 = 2 5 V3 for ^V3hmax = 2 We obtain, V2 = 2 # 2 = 0.8 volt < 5 5 i.e., V2 < ^V2hmax Hence, this is the voltage at C2 . Therefore, V3 = 2 volt V2 = 0.8 volt and V1 = V2 + V3 = 2.8 volt Now, equivalent capacitance across the terminal is Ceq = C 2 C 3 + C1 = 5 # 2 + 10 = 80 mF 5+2 7 C2 + C3 Equivalent voltage is (max. value) Vmax = V1 = 2.8 So, charge stored in the effective capacitance is Q = Ceq Vmax = b 80 l # ^2.8h = 32 mC 7 Option (D) is correct.
I (s) =
vc (0) /s v (0) = c 1 + 1 1 + 1 C1 C 2 C1 s C 2 s
vC (0) = 12 V I (s) = b C1 C2 l (12 V) = 12Ceq C1 + C 2 Taking inverse Laplace transform for the current in time domain, i (t) = 12Ceq d (t)
2.11
(Impulse)
Z = 4  j 3 = 5  36.86c W I = 5 100c A
Alternate method:
Z = (4  j3) W , I = 5 cos (100pt + 100) A
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
At the node 1, voltage is given as V1 = 10 volt Applying KCL at node 1 IS + V1 + V1  2 = 0 2 1 10 10 IS + +  2 = 0 2 1 IS = 13 A Also, from the circuit, VS  5 # 2 = V1 VS = 10 + V1 = 20 volt
2.9
2.10
Option (C) is correct. Again from the shown circuit, the current in 1 W resistor is I = V1 = 10 = 10 A 1 1 Option (D) is correct. The s domain equivalent circuit is shown as below.
Applying nodal analysis at top node. V1 + 1 0c V1 + 1 0c + = 1 0c 1 j1 V1 (j 1 + 1) + j 1 + 1 0c = j 1 V1 =  1 1 + j1 1 V1 + 1 0c  1 + j + 1 Current = I1 = j1 j1 j = = 1 A (1 + j) j 1 + j Option (A) is correct. We obtain Thevenin equivalent of circuit B .
2.13
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 32
So current in the branch will be IAB = 6 = 3 A 2 We can see, that the circuit is a one port circuit looking from terminal BD as shown below Thevenin Impedance :
ZTh = R Thevenin Voltage : VTh = 3 0c V Now, circuit becomes as For a one port network current entering one terminal, equals the current leaving the second terminal. Thus the outgoing current from A to B will be equal to the incoming current from D to C as shown i.e. IDC = IAB = 3 A
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The total current in the resistor 1 W will be (By writing KCL at node D ) I1 = 2 + IDC = 2+3 = 5A So, VCD = 1 # ( I1) = 5 V
2.15
I1 = 10  3 2+R Power transfer from circuit A to B 2 2 P = (I 1 ) R + 3I1 2 P = :10  3D R + 3 :10  3D 2+R 2+R P = 49R 2 + 21 (2 + R) (2 + R) 49R + 21 (2 + R) P = (2 + R) 2 P = 42 + 70R (2 + R) 2 2 dP = (2 + R) 70  (42 + 70R) 2 (2 + R) = 0 dR (2 + R) 4 (2 + R) [(2 + R) 70  (42 + 70R) 2] = 0 140 + 70R  84  140R = 0 56 = 70R R = 0.8 W Current in the circuit,
2.14
Now, we obtain Thevenin equivalent for the circuit seen at load terminal, let Thevenin voltage is VTh, 10 V with 10 V applied at port A and Thevenin resistance is RTh .
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
IL = For RL = 1 W , IL = 3 A
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 33
Dividing above two 3 = RTh + 2.5 2 RTh + 1 3RTh + 3 = 2RTh + 5 RTh = 2 W Substituting RTh into equation (i) VTh,10 V = 3 (2 + 1) = 9 V Note that it is a non reciprocal two port network. Thevenin voltage seen at port B depends on the voltage connected at port A . Therefore we took subscript VTh,10 V . This is Thevenin voltage only when 10 V source is connected at input port A. If the voltage connected to port A is different, then Thevenin voltage will be different. However, Thevenins resistance remains same. Now, the circuit is as shown below :
ISC =
2.18
Option (C) is correct. Power transferred to RL will be maximum when RL is equal to the Thevenin resistance. We determine Thevenin resistance by killing all source as follows :
RTH = 10 # 10 + 10 = 15 W 10 + 10
2.19
For RL = 7 W ,
2.16
IL =
VTh,10 V = 9 = 1A 2 + RL 2 + 7
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (B) is correct. Now, when 6 V connected at port A let Thevenin voltage seen at port B is VTh,6 V . Here RL = 1 W and IL = 7 A 3
VTh, 6 V = RTh # 7 + 1 # 7 = 2 # 7 + 7 = 7 V 3 3 3 3 This is a linear network, so VTh at port B can be written as VTh = V1 a + b where V1 is the input applied at port A . We have V1 = 10 V , VTh,10 V = 9 V ...(i) ` 9 = 10a + b When V1 = 6 V , VTh, 6 V = 9 V ...(ii) ` 7 = 6a + b Solving (i) and (ii) a = 0.5 , b = 4 Thus, with any voltage V1 applied at port A , Thevenin voltage or open circuit voltage at port B will be So, VTh, V = 0.5V1 + 4 For V1 = 8 V VTh,8 V = 0.5 # 8 + 4 = 8 = Voc (open circuit voltage)
1
For parallel combination of R and C equivalent impedance is R$ 1 jwC R = Zp = 1 j 1 + wRC R+ jwC Transfer function can be written as R 1 + jwRC Vout = Z p = Vin Zs + Zp R R+ 1 + jwC 1 + jwRC jwRC jwRC + (1 + jwRC) 2 j Here w = 1 = 2 RC j + (1 + j) j = =1 3 (1 + j) 2 + j V = b p l cos (t/RC) 3 =
v out
2.17
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 34
Thus
R1 =
Ra Rb 6.6 = = 2W Ra + Rb + Rc 6 + 6 + 6
Now the total impedance of circuit is (2 + j4) (2  j4) +2 = 7W Z = (2 + j4) (2  j4) Current I = 14+0c = 2+0c 7
2.21
By writing node equation at input port I1 = V1 + V1  V2 = 4V1  2V2 0.5 0.5 By writing node equation at output port I2 = V2 + V2  V1 = 2V1 + 4V2 0.5 0.5 From (1) and (2), we have admittance matrix 4 2 Y =>  2 4H
2.24
...(1)
...(2)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
From given admittance matrix we get I1 = 0.1V1  0.01V2 and I2 = 0.01V1 + 0.1V2 Now, applying KVL in outer loop; V2 = 100I2 or I2 = 0.01V2 From eq (2) and eq (3) we have  0.01V2 = 0.01V1 + 0.1V2  0.11V2 = 0.01V1 V2 =  1 11 V1
2.22
Input impedance
Z in =
1 1 + 1 + jw C R jwL
1 = wC wL Z in = 1 = R 1/R
(maximum at resonance)
...(3)
2.25
Furthermore bandwidth is wB i.e wB \ 1 and is independent of L R , Hence statements A, B, C, are true. Option (A) is correct. Let the current i (t) = A + Bet/t t " Time constant When the switch S is open for a long time before t < 0 , the circuit is
Option (A) is correct. Here we take the current flow direction as positive. At t = 0 voltage across capacitor is 3 Q VC (0) = = 2.5 # 106 = 50 V C 50 # 10 + Thus VC (0 ) = 50 V In steady state capacitor behave as open circuit thus Now, V (3) = 100 V VC (t) = VC (3) + (VC (0+)  VC (3)) et/RC = 100 + ( 50  100) e = 100  150e (2 # 10 t) ic (t) = C dV dt = 50 # 106 # 150 # 2 # 103 e2 # 10 t A = 15e2 # 10 t ic (t) = 15 exp ( 2 # 103 t) A
3 3 3
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
t 10 # 50 # 106
Now
2.23
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 35
Applying nodal analysis VA  10 + 1 + VA  0 = 0 2 2 Current, Current is resistor (AB) i (0) = 0.75 = 0.375 A 2 Similarly for steady state the circuit is as shown below
2.28
2VA  10 + 2 = 0 = V4 = 4 V I1 = 10  4 = 3 A 2
Current from voltage source is I 2 = I1  3 = 0 Since current through voltage source is zero, therefore power delivered is zero. Option (A) is correct. Circuit is as shown below
i (3) = 15 = 0.5 A 3
3 = 103 sec t = L = 15 # 10 Req 10 + (10  10)
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Where,
Z1 = jwL = j # 103 # 20 # 103 = 20j Z2 = R  XC 1 = 20j XC = 1 = jwC j # 103 # 50 # 106 1 ( 20j) Z2 = R = 1W 1  20j  20j c 1  20j m 20j c 20j  1  20j m
Voltage across Z2 VZ =
2
Since 60 V source is absorbing power. So, in 60 V source current flows from + to  ve direction So, I + I1 = 12 I = 12  I1 I is always less then 12 A So, only option (A) satisfies this conditions.
2.29
Z2 : 20 0 = Z1 + Z 2
: 20
=c
Current in resistor R is j V I = Z = = j A 1 R
2
2.27
Option (C) is correct. For given network we have (RL XC ) Vi V0 = R + (RL XC ) RL V0 (s) RL = 1 + sRL C = Vi (s) R RR R + L L sC + RL R+ 1 + sRL C = RL 1 = R + RRL sC + RL R 1+ + RsC RL
But we have been given V (s) 1 = T . F. = 0 2 + sCR Vi (s) Comparing, we get 1 + R = 2 & RL = R RL
2.30
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 36
= I # Area
Option (B) is correct. From given circuit the load current is 20+0c = = 20+0c IL = V Zs + ZL (1 + 2j) + (7 + 4j) 8 + 6j = 1 (8  6j) = 20+0c = 2+  f where f = tan  1 3 10+f 5 4 The voltage across load is VL = IL ZL The reactive power consumed by load is
* * = IL ZL # IL = ZL IL 2 Pr = VL IL 2 = (7 # 4j) 20+0c = (7 + 4j) = 28 + 16j 8 + 6j
The open circuit voltage is From fig Voc = 100 V I1 = 100 = 12.5 A 8 Vx = 4 # 12.5 = 50 V I2 = 100 + Vx = 100  50 = 12.5 A 4 4 Isc = I1 + I2 = 25 A Rth = Voc = 100 = 4 W Isc 25 Thus for maximum power transfer RL = Req = 4 W
2.34
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
At t = 0 , the circuit is as shown in fig below :

Option (A) is correct. Steady state all transient effect die out and inductor act as short circuits and forced response acts only. It doesnt depend on initial current state. From the given time domain behavior we get that circuit has only R and L in series with V0 . Thus at steady state i (t) " i (3) = V0 R Option (C) is correct. The given graph is
2.35
There can be four possible tree of this graph which are as follows: V (0) = 100 V Thus V (0+) = 100 V At t = 0+ , the circuit is as shown below There can be 6 different possible cutset.
I (0+) = 100 = 20 mA 5k At steady state i.e. at t = 3 is I (3)= 0 Now i (t) = I (0+) eCeq =
t RCeq
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2.36
u (t)
(0.5m + 0.3m) 0.2m = 0.16 m F 0.5m + 0.3m + 0.2m 1 1 = = 1250 RCeq 5 # 103 # 0.16 # 106 i (t) = 20e1250t u (t) mA
2.33
Option (B) is correct. Initially i (0) = 0 therefore due to inductor i (0+) = 0 . Thus all current Is will flow in resistor R and voltage across resistor will be Is Rs . The voltage across inductor will be equal to voltage across Rs as no current flow through R .
Option (C) is correct. For Pmax the load resistance RL must be equal to thevenin resistance Req i.e. RL = Req . The open circuit and short circuit is as shown below
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 37
Option (A) is correct. Killing all current source and voltage sources we have,
Zth = =
1 + 1) (1 + s) ( s 1 (1 + s)( s + 1) 1 + 1) (1 + s) + ( s
1 + 1 + 1 + s] [s 1 +1+1 s+ s
or Zth = 1 Alternative : Here at DC source capacitor act as open circuit and inductor act as short circuit. Thus we can directly calculate thevenin Impedance as 1 W
2.38
Option (D) is correct. Writing in transform domain we have 1 Vc (s) = 1 s = 2 1 Vs (s) ^ s + s + 1h (s + s + 1) Since Vs (t) = d (t) " Vs (s) = 1 and
Option (D) is correct. Z (s) = R 1 sL = 2 sC s + We have been given Z (s) = 2 0.2s s + 0.1s + 2 Comparing with given we get 1 = 0.2 or C = 5 F C 1 = 0.1 or R = 2 W RC 1 = 2 or L = 0.1 H LC
s C s RC
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
1 LC
Vt = 2 e sin c 3 t m 2 3
t 2
2.39
2.41
Option (B) is correct. Let voltage across resistor be vR VR (s) s = 1 1 = VS (s) ( s + s + 1) (s2 + s + 1) Since vs = d (t) " Vs (s) = 1 we get s = VR (s) = 2 s 3 1 2 (s + s + 1) (s + 2 ) + 4 = or (s + 1 2) 2 (s + 1 2) +
1 2
# 0
dt = t
3 4
(s +
1 2 3 1 2 2) + 4
1 2
At t = 3T, Vc = T Volts For 3T < t < 4T , capacitor will be discharged from T Volts Vc = T At t = 4T, Vc = 0 Volts dt = 4T  t # 3T
t
Option (C) is correct. From the problem statement we have = 6 = 1.5W z11 = v1 i1 i = 0 4 v = 4.5 = 4.5W z12 = 1 i2 i = 0 1 = 6 = 1.5W z21 = v2 i1 i = 0 4 = 1.5 = 1.5W z22 = v2 i2 i = 0 1
2 1 2 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 38
2.46
Option (D) is correct. We know that bandwidth of series RLC circuit is R . Therefore L Bandwidth of filter 1 is B1 = R L1 Bandwidth of filter 2 is B2 = R = R = 4R L2 L1 L1 /4 B 1 Dividing above equation 1 = B2 4
From z matrix, we have v1 = z11 i1 + z12 i2 v2 = z21 i1 + z22 i2 If v2 = 0 i2 =  z21 =  1.5 = 1 = h Then 21 i1 z22 1.5 or i2 = i1 Putting in equation for v1, we get v1 i1 v1 = (z11  z12) i1 = h11 = z11  z12 = 1.5  4.5 = 3
2.47
Option (D) is correct. Here Vth is voltage across node also. Applying nodal analysis we get
v2 = 0
Vth + Vth + Vth  2i = 2 2 1 1 But from circuit i = Vth = Vth 1 Therefore Vth + Vth + Vth  2Vth = 2 2 1 1 or Vth = 4 volt From the figure shown below it may be easily seen that the short circuit current at terminal XY is isc = 2 A because i = 0 due to short circuit of 1 W resistor and all current will pass through short circuit.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Hence h parameter will be h11 h12 3 3 =h h G = = 1 0.67 G 21 22
2.44
2.45
Option (C) is correct. At w " 3 , capacitor acts as short circuited and circuit acts as shown in fig below
Therefore
2.48
Option (A) is correct. The voltage across capacitor is At t = 0+ , Vc (0+) = 0 At t = 3 , VC (3) = 5 V The equivalent resistance seen by capacitor as shown in fig is Req = 20 20 = 10kW
Here we get V0 = 0 Vi At w " 0 , capacitor acts as open circuited and circuit look like as shown in fig below
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Here we get also V0 = 0 Vi So frequency response of the circuit is as shown in fig and circuit is a Band pass filter.
Time constant of the circuit is t = Req C = 10k # 4m = 0.04 s Using direct formula Vc (t) = VC (3)  [Vc (3)  Vc (0)] et/t = VC (3) (1  et/t) + VC (0) et/t = 5 (1  et/0.04) Vc (t) = 5 (1  e25t)
or
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 39
Now
IC (t) = C
dVC (t) dt
Taking Laplace transform we get V (s) = sLI (s)  Li (0+) As per given in question  Li (0+) = 1 mV Thus i (0+) = 1 mV = 0.5 A 2 mH
2.54
Option (B) is correct. At initial all voltage are zero. So output is also zero. Thus v0 (0+) = 0 At steady state capacitor act as open circuit.
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Substituting value of V2 from (3) we get Input Impedance Zin =  A # I2 RL  BI2  C # I2 RL  DI2 or Zin = ARL + B CRL + D
2.51
The equivalent resistance and capacitance can be calculate after killing all source
At input port V1 = re I1 At output port V2 = r0 (I2  bI1) = r0 bI1 + r0 I2 Comparing standard equation V1 = z11 I1 + z12 I2 V2 = z21 I1 + z22 I2 z12 = 0 and z21 = r0 b
2.52
= 1 4 = 0.8 k W = 4 1 = 5 mF = Req Ceq = 0.8kW # 5mF = 4 ms = v 0 (3)  [v 0 (3)  v 0 (0+)] et/t = 8  (8  0) et/0.004 v0 (t) = 8 (1  et/0.004) Volts
Option (B) is correct. For series RC network input impedance is Zins = 1 + R = 1 + sRC sC sC Thus pole is at origin and zero is at  1 RC For parallel RC network input impedance is 1 R sC sC = Zin = 1 +R 1 + sRC sC Thus pole is at  1 and zero is at infinity. RC
2.55
Option (A) is correct. Here Z2 (s) = Rneg + Z1 (s) or Z2 (s) = Rneg + Re Z1 (s) + j Im Z1 (s) For Z2 (s) to be positive real, Re Z2 (s) $ 0 Thus Rneg + Re Z1 (s) $ 0 or Re Z1 (s) $  Rneg But Rneg is negative quantity and  Rneg is positive quantity. Therefore or Re Z1 (s) $ Rneg Rneg # Re Z1 (jw) For all w .
2.53
2.56
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 40
1 LC = s2 + R s + 1 L LC
For RC parallel network the driving point impedance is R 1 R Cs = Zinp = 1 1 + sRC R+ Cs Here pole is s = 1/RC and zero is at 3 , therefore first critical frequency is a pole and last critical frequency is a zero.
2.61
Comparing with s + 2xwn s + = 0 we have Here 2xwn = R , L and wn = 1 LC Thus x = R LC = R C 2L 2 L For no oscillations, x $ 1 R C $1 Thus 2 L or
2.57
2 wn
Option (A) is correct. Applying KCL we get i1 (t) + 5+0c = 10+60c or or i1 (t) = 10+60c  5+0c = 5 + 5 3j  5 i1 (t) = 5 3 +90c = 10 3 +90c 2
2.62
R $2
L C
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
I2 = V1 = n V2 1 I1 or I1 = I2 and V1 = nV2 n Comparing with standard equation V1 = AV2 + BI2 I1 = CV2 + DI2 n 0 A B =C D G = = 0 1 G n x = 1 n
Option (B) is correct. If L1 = j5W and L3 = j2W the mutual induction is subtractive because current enters from dotted terminal of j2W coil and exit from dotted terminal of j5W . If L2 = j2W and L3 = j2W the mutual induction is additive because current enters from dotted terminal of both coil. Thus Z = L1  M13 + L2 + M23 + L3  M31 + M32 = j5 + j10 + j2 + j10 + j2  j10 + j10 = j9 Option (B) is correct. Open circuit at terminal ab is shown below
2.63
Applying KCL at node we get Vab + Vab  10 = 1 5 5 or Vab = 7.5 = Vth Short circuit at terminal ab is shown below
Thus
2.58
= 10 # 20 = 10 Hz p 2p
2.59
1 1 # 1 # 10  6 400
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Thus Rth = Vth = 7.5 = 2.5 W Isc 3
Option (C) is correct. Maximum power will be transferred when RL = Rs = 100W In this case voltage across RL is 5 V, therefore
2 Pmax = V = 5 # 5 = 0.25 W R 100
Here current source being in series with dependent voltage source make it ineffective.
2.64
2.60
Option (C) is correct. For stability poles and zero interlace on real axis. In RC series network the driving point impedance is Zins = R + 1 = 1 + sRC sC Cs Here pole is at origin and zero is at s = 1/RC , therefore first critical frequency is a pole and last critical frequency is a zero.
Option (C) is correct. Here Va = 5 V because R1 = R2 and total voltage drop is 10 V. Now Vb = R3 # 10 = 1.1 # 10 = 5.238 V R3 + R4 2.1 V = Va  Vb = 5  5.238 = 0.238 V Option (D) is correct. For h parameters we have to write V1 and I2 in terms of I1 and V2 .
2.65
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 41
V1 = h11 I1 + h12 V2 I2 = h21 I1 + h22 V2 Applying KVL at input port V1 = 10I1 + V2 Applying KCL at output port V2 = I + I 1 2 20 or I2 = I1 + V2 20 Thus from above equation we get h11 h12 10 1 =h h G = = 1 0.05G 12 22
2.66
Impedance
or
Option (B) is correct. RC = 0.1 # 10  6 # 103 = 10  4 sec Since time constant RC is very small, so steady state will be reached in 2 sec. At t = 2 sec the circuit is as shown in fig. Time constant
2.72
At t = 0 , i (t) = 0 At t = 1 i (t) = 0.31 2, At t = 3 , i (t) = 0.5 Graph (C) satisfies all these conditions. Option (D) is correct. We know that V1 = z11 I1 + z12 I2 V2 = z11 I1 + z22 I2 z11 = V1 I1 I = 0
2
where
Vc = 3 V V2 = Vc = 3 V
2.67
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (B) is correct. For a tree there must not be any loop. So a, c, and d dont have any loop. Only b has loop. Option (D) is correct. The sign of M is as per sign of L If current enters or exit the dotted terminals of both coil. The sign of M is opposite of L If current enters in dotted terminal of a coil and exit from the dotted terminal of other coil. Thus Leq = L1 + L2  2M Option (A) is correct. Here w = 2 and V = 1+0c Y = 1 + jwC + 1 R jwL = 3 + j2 # 3 + 1 1 = 3 + j4 j2 # 4 = 5+ tan  1 4 = 5+53.11c 3 Thus I = V * Y = (1+0c)( 5+53.1c) = 5+53.1c i (t) = 5 sin (2t + 53.1c) vi (t) =
3
2.68
Consider the given lattice network, when I2 = 0 . There is two similar path in the circuit for the current I1. So I = 1 I1 2
2.69
For z11 applying KVL at input port we get V1 = I (Za + Zb) Thus V1 = 1 I1 (Za + Zb) 2 z11 = 1 (Za + Zb) 2 For Z21 applying KVL at output port we get V2 = Za I1  Zb I1 2 2 Thus V2 = 1 I1 (Za  Zb) 2 z21 = 1 (Za  Zb) 2 For this circuit z11 = z22 and z12 = z21. Thus V R S Za + Zb Za  Zb W z11 z12 2 2 W =z z G = S + Z Z Z Zb W a b a S 21 22 S 2 2 W X T Here Za = 2j and Zb = 2W 1+j j1 z11 z12 Thus =z z G = = j  1 1 + j G 21 22
2.70
1 jwC 1 V V0 = .Vt = + wCR i 1 1 j R+ jwC 1 1 + j # 103 # 10  3 = 1  45c v0 (t) = sin (103 t  45c) = 2 + 0c
2.71
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2.73
Page 42
Option (B) is correct. Applying KVL, Ldi (t) 1 + v (t) = Ri (t) + dt C Taking L.T. on both sides, V (s) v (t) Hence 1 s 2 +1 s or I (s) I (s) vc (0+) = RI (s) + LsI (s)  Li (0 ) + + sC sC = u (t) thus V (s) = 1 s I (s) 1 = I (s) + sI (s)  1 + s s I (s) 2 = 6s + s + 1@ s = 2s+2 s +s+1
+
2.78
# 0
i (t) dt
Number of branches = b = 8 Number of nodes = n = 5 Minimum number of equation = 85+1 = 4 Option (C) is correct. For maximum power transfer Thus
2.79
* = Rs  jXs ZL = ZS ZL = 1  1j
2.74
When R, L and C are doubled, 2L = 1 Q' = 1 2R 2C 2R Thus Q' = 100 = 50 2 Option (C) is correct. Applying KVL we get,
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
wn = Thus Now
2.75
or
Differentiating with respect to t , we get 2di (t) 2d2 i (t) cos t = + i (t) + dt dt2
2.81
106 = 103
Option (A) is correct. For current i there is 3 similar path. So current will be divide in three path
so, we get
Option (D) is correct. Impedance of series RLC circuit at resonant frequency is minimum, not zero. Actually imaginary part is zero. Z = R + j ` wL  1 j wC At resonance wL  1 = 0 and Z = R that is purely resistive. wC Thus S1 is false Now quality factor Q =R C L Since G = 1 , Q = 1 C G L R If G  then Q . provided C and L are constant. Thus S2 is also false.
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Vab = R = 1 + 1 + 1 = 5 W eq 6 i 3 6 3
2.82
Vab  b i # 1l  b i # 1l  b 1 # 1l = 0 3 6 3
Option ( ) is correct. Data are missing in question as L1 &L2 are not given. Option (A) is correct. At t = 0  circuit is in steady state. So inductor act as short circuit and capacitor act as open circuit.
2.83
2.77
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 43
Now
Z1 = R + jw1 L = 1 + j1 Z2 = R + jw2 L = 1 + j2 v (t) v (t) i (t) = 1 + 2 Z1 Z2 = = = 10 2 cos (t + 10c) 10 5 cos (2t + 10c) + 1+j 1 + j2 10 2 cos (t + 10c) 10 5 cos (2t + 10c) + 12 + 22 + tan1 1 12 + 22 tan1 2
At t = 0  ,
i1 (0 ) = i2 (0 ) = 0
vc (0 ) = V At t = 0+ the circuit is as shown in fig. The voltage across capacitor and current in inductor cant be changed instantaneously. Thus
2.87
10 2 cos (t + 10c) 10 5 cos (2t + 10c) + 2 + tan1 45c 5 tan1 2 i (t) = 10 cos (t  35c) + 10 cos (2t + 10c  tan1 2) Option (A) is correct. Using 3 Y conversion
At t = 0+ ,
2.84
i1 = i2 = V 2R
Option (C) is correct. When switch is in position 2, as shown in fig in question, applying KVL in loop (1), RI1 (s) + V + 1 I1 (s) + sL [I1 (s)  I2 (s)] = 0 s sC or I1 (s) 8R + 1 + sL B  I2 (s) sL =  V s sc z11 I1 + z12 I2 = V1 Applying KVL in loop 2, sL [I2 (s)  I1 (s)] + RI2 (s) + 1 I2 (s) = 0 sC Z12 I1 + Z22 I2 = V2 or  sLI1 (s) + 8R + sL + 1 BI2 (s) = 0 sc Now comparing with Z11 Z12 I1 V1 =Z Z G=I G = =V G 21 22 2 2 we get R V  sL SR + sL + 1 W I1 (s) V sC S W sH = G = > I2 (s) S  sL R + sL + 1 W 0 S W sC T X Option (B) is correct. Zeros = 3 Pole1 = 1 + j Pole 2 = 1  j K (s + 3) Z (s) = (s + 1 + j)( s + 1  j) K (s + 3) K (s + 3) = = 2 2 (s + 1)  j (s + 1) 2 + 1 From problem statement Z (0) w = 0 = 3 Thus 3K = 3 and we get K = 2 2 2 (s + 3) Z (s) = 2 s + 2s + 2 Option (C) is correct. v (t) = 10 2 cos (t + 10c) + 10 5 cos (2t + 10c) 1 4444 2 4444 3 1 4444 4 2 4444 43
v1 v2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
2 # 1 = 2 = 0.5 2+1+1 4 R2 = 1 # 1 = 1 = 0.25 2+1+1 4 R3 = 2 # 1 = 0.5 2+1+1 R1 = Now the circuit is as shown in figure below.
2.85
Now
z11 = V1 I1
I2 = 0
z12 = R3 = 0.25
2.88
2.86
V2 + V2  V1 = V1 5 5 5
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 44
or V2 = V1 = 20 V Voltage across dependent current source is 20 thus power delivered by it is PV2 # V1 = 20 # 20 = 80 W 5 5 It deliver power because current flows from its +ive terminals.
2.89
2.91
Option (C) is correct. When switch was closed, in steady state, iL (0 ) = 2.5 A
Option (D) is correct. IP , VP " Phase current and Phase voltage IL, VL " Line current and line voltage Now VP = c VL m and IP = IL 3 So, Power = 3VP IL cos q 1500 = 3 c VL m (IL) cos q 3 also IL = c VL m 3 ZL 1500 = 3 c VL mc VL m cos q 3 3 ZL ZL = (400) 2 (.844) = 90 W 1500
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Vx = 2.5 # 20 = 50 V
2.90
At t = 0+ , iL (0+) = iL (0 ) = 2.5 A and all this current of will pass through 2 W resistor. Thus
2.92
As power factor is leading So, cos q = 0.844 " q = 32.44 As phase current leads phase voltage ZL = 90+  q = 90+  32.44c Option (C) is correct. Applying KCL, we get e0  12 + e0 + e0 = 0 4 4 2+2 or
2.93
e0 = 4 V
Option (A) is correct. For maximum power delivered, RL must be equal to Rth across same terminal.
Here Applying KCL at Node, we get 0.5I1 = Vth + I1 20 or but Thus Vth + 10I1 = 0 I1 = Vth  50 40 Vth + Vth  50 = 0 4 and
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Now ZA = ZB = ZC = 3Z 3Z = Z 3Z+ 3Z+ 3Z 3
ZAB = ZBC = ZCA = 3 Z ZAB ZCA ZA = ZAB + ZBC + ZCA ZAB ZBC ZB = ZAB + ZBC + ZCA ZBC ZCA ZC = ZAB + ZBC + ZCA
2.94
but
Isc = 0.5I1  I1 = 0.5I1 I1 = 50 = 1.25 A 40 Isc = 0.5 #  12.5 = 0.625 A Rth = Vth = 10 = 16 W Isc 0.625
2.95
Option (D) is correct. We apply source conversion the circuit as shown in fig below.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 45
Now applying nodal analysis we have e0  80 + e0 + e0  16 = 0 6 10 + 2 12 or 4e0 = 112 e0 = 112 = 28 V 4 jw C c = E +0c I2 = Em +0 m 1 1 + jwCR2 R2 + jwC +90c + tan1 wCR2 E m wC + (90c  tan1 wCR2) I2 = 2 2 2 1 + w C R2 At w = 0 I2 = 0 and at w = 3, I2 = Em R2 Only fig. given in option (A) satisfies both conditions. +I2 =
2.97
V0 = RL Vs RL + Rs At resonant frequency w = V0 = 0 .
(finite value)
2.96
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
2.98
Option (C) is correct. Applying KVL in LHS loop or Thus z11 = 6 11 Applying KVL in RHS loop E2 = 4 (I1 + I2)  10E1 = 4 (I1 + I2)  10 c 6I1 + 4I2 m 11 11 = 16I1 + 4I2 11 11 Thus z21 = 16 11 E1 = 2I1 + 4 (I1 + I2)  10E1 E1 = 6I1 + 4I2 11 11
Option (D) is correct. Applying KCL we get Now iL = eat + ebt V (t) = vL = L diL = L d [eat + ebt] = aeat + bebt dt dt
2.101
2.99
or
10 + 5 + E + 1 = 0 E = 16 V
(finite value)
Option (C) is correct. This is a reciprocal and linear network. So we can apply reciprocity theorem which states Two loops A & B of a network N and if an ideal voltage source E in loop A produces a current I in loop B , then interchanging positions an identical source in loop B produces the same current in loop A. Since network is linear, principle of homogeneity may be applied and when volt source is doubled, current also doubles. Now applying reciprocity theorem i = 2 A for 10 V V = 10 V, i = 2 A V = 20 V, i = 4 A Option (C) is correct. Tree is the set of those branch which does not make any loop and
2.103
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 46
connects all the nodes. abfg is not a tree because it contains a loop l node (4) is not connected
2.104
Option (A) is correct. For a 2port network the parameter h21 is defined as h21 = I2 I1 V = 0 (short circuit)
2
Option (D) is correct. Delta to star conversion Rab Rac = 5 # 30 = 150 = 3 W R1 = 50 Rab + Rac + Rbc 5 + 30 + 15 Rab Rbc = 5 # 15 = 1.5 W R2 = Rab + Rac + Rbc 5 + 30 + 15 Rac Rbc = 15 # 30 = 9 W R3 = Rab + Rac + Rbc 5 + 30 + 15 Option (C) is correct. No. of branches = n + l  1 = 7 + 5  1 = 11 Option (B) is correct. In nodal method we sum up all the currents coming & going at the node So it is based on KCL. Furthermore we use ohms law to determine current in individual branch. Thus it is also based on ohms law. Option (A) is correct. Superposition theorem is applicable to only linear circuits. Option (B) is correct. Option (B) is correct. 1 For reciprocal network y12 = y21 but here y12 = 1 2 ! y 21 = 2 . Thus circuit is non reciprocal. Furthermore only reciprocal circuit are passive circuit. Option (C) is correct. Taking b as reference node and applying KCL at a we get Vab  1 + Vab = 3 2 2 or or Vab  1 + Vab = 6 Vab = 6 + 1 = 3.5 V 2
2.108
2.109
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Va  V1 + Va  0 + Va  0 = 0 R R R & Va = V1 3Va = V1 3 V1  V1 V 3 = 2V1 1  Va = I1 = R R 3R 0  V1  V 0 V 3 = a 1 = I2 = R R 3R  V1 /3R  1 I2 = h21 = = 2 I1 V = 0 2V1 /3R
2
2.110
2.111 2.112
2.113
2.114 2.115
Option (A) is correct. Option (B) is correct. The given figure is shown below.
Option (A) is correct. Applying node equation at node A Vth  100 (1 + j0) Vth  0 + =0 3 4j or or By simplifying 4jVth  4j100 + 3Vth = 0 Vth (3 + 4j) = 4j100 4j100 Vth = 3 + 4j Vth = 4j100 3  4j 3 + 4j # 3  4j
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Option (C) is correct. For maximum power transfer RL should be equal to RTh at same terminal. so, equivalent Resistor of the circuit is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 47
I = i 4 i 4 = 12 amp
In the steady state condition all capacitors behaves as open circuit & Inductors behaves as short circuits as shown below :
so
2.117
V = 3  0 = 3 volt
Option (D) is correct. Can not determined V without knowing the elements in box. Option (A) is correct. The voltage V is the voltage across voltage source and that is 10 V. Option (B) is correct. Voltage across capacitor VC (t) = VC (3) + (VC (0)  VC (3)) e RC Here VC (3) = 10 V and (VC (0) = 6 V. Thus Now VC (t) = 10 + (6  10) e RC = 10  4e RC = 10  4e 8 VR (t) = 10  VC (t)
t RC t t t t
2.118
2.119
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
= 4e
t
t RC
E
2.120
3 V R (t) 3 4 = # 16e # 4 R 0 0
3 4e 4 # 0
t
= 16 J
Option (B) is correct. It is a balanced whetstone bridge R1 R 3 b R2 = R 4 l so equivalent circuit is Voltage across capacitor C2 and C 3 are VC = 80 C 3 = 80 # 3 = 48 volt 5 C2 + C3 VC = 80 C2 = 80 # 2 = 32 volt 5 C2 + C3
2 3
Option (B) is correct. Current in A2 , Inductor current can be Current in A 3 , Total current
2.122
Option (C) is correct. For a tree we have (n  1) branches. Links are the branches which from a loop, when connect two nodes of tree. so if total no. of branches = b No. of links = b  (n  1) = b  n + 1 Total no. of links in equal to total no. of independent loops. Option (B) is correct.
2.123
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 3
Page 47
3.6
In the CMOS circuit shown, electron and hole mobilities are equal, and M1 and M2 are equally sized. The device M1 is in the linear region if
ELECTRONICS DEVICES
2013
3.1
ONE MARK
In a forward biased pn junction diode, the sequence of events that best describes the mechanism of current flow is (A) injection, and subsequent diffusion and recombination of minority carriers (B) injection, and subsequent drift and generation of minority carriers (C) extraction, and subsequent diffusion and generation of minority carriers (D) extraction, and subsequent drift and recombination of minority carriers In IC technology, dry oxidation (using dry oxygen) as compared to wet oxidation (using steam or water vapor) produces (A) superior quality oxide with a higher growth rate (B) inferior quality oxide with a higher growth rate (C) inferior quality oxide with a lower growth rate (D) superior quality oxide with a lower growth rate In a MOSFET operating in the saturation region, the channel length modulation effect causes (A) an increase in the gatesource capacitance (B) a decrease in the transconductance (C) a decrease in the unitygain cutoff frequency (D) a decrease in the output resistance
2013 TWO MARKS
(B) 1.875 V < Vin < 3.125 V (D) 0 < Vin < 5 V
3.2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.3
3.4
The smallsignal resistance (i.e., dVB /dID ) in kW offered by the nchannel MOSFET M shown in the figure below, at a bias point of VB = 2 V is (device data for M: device transconductance parameter ' kN = mn C 0 W/L h = 40 mA/V2 , threshold voltage VTN = 1 V , and x^ neglect body effect and channel length modulation effects)
3.7
The gate source overlap capacitance is approximately (A) 0.7 fF (B) 0.7 pF (C) 0.35 fF (D) 0.24 pF The sourcebody junction capacitance is approximately (A) 2 fF (B) 7 fF (C) 2 pF (D) 7 pF
2011 ONE MARK
3.8
The source of a silicon (ni = 1010 per cm3) n channel MOS transistor has an area of 1 sq mm and a depth of 1 mm . If the dopant density in the source is 1019 /cm3 , the number of holes in the source region with the above volume is approximately (A) 107 (B) 100 (C) 10 (D) 0
Drift current in the semiconductors depends upon (A) only the electric field (B) only the carrier concentration gradient (C) both the electric field and the carrier concentration (D) both the electric field and the carrier concentration gradient A Zener diode, when used in voltage stabilization circuits, is biased
3.10
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 48
in (A) reverse bias region below the breakdown voltage (B) reverse breakdown region (C) forward bias region (D) forward bias constant current mode
3.11
A silicon PN junction is forward biased with a constant current at room temperature. When the temperature is increased by 10C, the forward bias voltage across the PN junction (A) increases by 60 mV (B) decreases by 60 mV (C) increases by 25 mV (D) decreases by 25 mV
2011 TWO MARKS
In a uniformly doped BJT, assume that NE , NB and NC are the emitter, base and collector doping in atoms/cm3 , respectively. If the emitter injection efficiency of the BJT is close unity, which one of the following condition is TRUE (B) NE >> NB and NB > NC (A) NE = NB = NC (C) NE = NB and NB < NC (D) NE < NB < NC Compared to a pn junction with NA = ND = 1014 /cm3 , which one of the following statements is TRUE for a pn junction with NA = ND = 1020 /cm3 ? (A) Reverse breakdown voltage is lower and depletion capacitance is lower (B) Reverse breakdown voltage is higher and depletion capacitance is lower (C) Reverse breakdown voltage is lower and depletion capacitance is higher (D) Reverse breakdown voltage is higher and depletion capacitance is higher
3.17
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
ure below is 600 W when the full channel thickness (tch ) of 10 m is available for conduction. The builtin voltage of the gate P+ N junction (Vbi ) is  1 V . When the gate to source voltage (VGS ) is 0 V, the channel is depleted by 1 m on each side due to the built in voltage and hence the thickness available for conduction is only 8 m
3.18
The magnitude of the electric field at x = 0.5 mm is (A) 1 kV/cm (B) 5 kV/cm (C) 10 kV/cm (D) 26 kV/cm The magnitude of the electron of the electron drift current density at x = 0.5 mm is (B) 1.08 # 10 4 A/m2 (A) 2.16 # 10 4 A/cm2
3.19
3.12
The channel resistance when VGS = 3 V is (A) 360 W (B) 917 W (C) 1000 W (D) 3000 W The channel resistance when VGS = 0 V is (A) 480 W (B) 600 W (C) 750 W (D) 1000 W
2010 ONE MARK
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C) 4.32 # 103 A/cm2
2009
3.20
3.13
3.14
At room temperature, a possible value for the mobility of electrons in the inversion layer of a silicon n channel MOSFET is (A) 450 cm2 / Vs (B) 1350 cm2 / Vs (C) 1800 cm2 / Vs (D) 3600 cm2 / Vs Thin gate oxide in a CMOS process in preferably grown using (A) wet oxidation (B) dry oxidation
In an ntype silicon crystal at room temperature, which of the following can have a concentration of 4 # 1019 cm  3 ? (A) Silicon atoms (B) Holes (C) Dopant atoms (D) Valence electrons The ratio of the mobility to the diffusion coefficient in a semiconductor has the units (A) V  1 (B) cm.V1
3.21
3.15
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 49
3.28
(C) V.cm  1
2009
3.22
(D) V.s
TWO MARKS
The drain current of MOSFET in saturation is given by ID = K (VGS  VT ) 2 where K is a constant. The magnitude of the transconductance gm is (A) (C) K (VGS  VT ) 2 VDS Id VGS  VDS (B) 2K (VGS  VT ) (D) K (VGS  VT ) 2 VGS
TWO MARKS
Consider the following two statements about the internal conditions in a n channel MOSFET operating in the active region. S1 : The inversion charge decreases from source to drain S2 : The channel potential increases from source to drain. Which of the following is correct? (A) Only S2 is true (B) Both S1 and S2 are false (C) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a reason for S1 (D) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a reason for S1
2008
3.29
The measured trans conductance gm of an NMOS transistor operating in the linear region is plotted against the gate voltage VG at a constant drain voltage VD . Which of the following figures represents the expected dependence of gm on VG ?
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
 14
F.cm  1
The builtin potential of the junction (A) is 0.70 V (B) is 0.76 V (C) is 0.82 V (D) Cannot be estimated from the data given The peak electric field in the device is (A) 0.15 MV . cm  1, directed from p region to n region (B) 0.15 MV . cm  1, directed from n region to p region (C) 1.80 MV . cm  1, directed from p region to n region (D) 1.80 MV . cm  1, directed from n region to p region
2008 ONE MARK
3.24
3.25
Which of the following is NOT associated with a p  n junction ? (A) Junction Capacitance (B) Charge Storage Capacitance (C) Depletion Capacitance (D) Channel Length Modulations Which of the following is true? (A) A silicon wafer heavily doped with boron is a p+ substrate (B) A silicon wafer lightly doped with boron is a p+ substrate (C) A silicon wafer heavily doped with arsenic is a p+ substrate (D) A silicon wafer lightly doped with arsenic is a p+ substrate A silicon wafer has 100 nm of oxide on it and is furnace at a temperature above 1000c C for further oxidation in dry oxygen. The oxidation rate (A) is independent of current oxide thickness and temperature (B) is independent of current oxide thickness but depends on temperature (C) slows down as the oxide grows (D) is zero as the existing oxide prevents further oxidation
3.30
3.26
Silicon is doped with boron to a concentration of 4 # 1017 atoms cm3 . Assume the intrinsic carrier concentration of silicon to be 1.5 # 1010 / cm 3 and the value of kT/q to be 25 mV at 300 K. Compared to undopped silicon, the fermi level of doped silicon (A) goes down by 0.31 eV (B) goes up by 0.13 eV (C) goes down by 0.427 eV (D) goes up by 0.427 eV The cross section of a JFET is shown in the following figure. Let Vc be  2 V and let VP be the initial pinch off voltage. If the width W is doubled (with other geometrical parameters and doping levels remaining the same), then the ratio between the mutual trans conductances of the initial and the modified JFET is
3.27
3.31
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 50
(C) P  2, Q  2, R  1, S 2 (D) P  2, Q  1, R  2, S  2
3.36
(A) 4 (C) e
3.32
1  2/Vp o 1  1/2Vp
Group I lists four different semiconductor devices. match each device in Group I with its charactecteristic property in Group II GroupI GroupII (P) BJT (1) Population iniversion (Q) MOS capacitor (2) Pinchoff voltage (R) LASER diode (3) Early effect (S) JFET (4) Flatband voltage (A) P  3, Q  1, R  4, S  2 (B) P  1, Q  4, R  3, S  2 (C) P  3, Q  4, R  1, S  2 (D) P  3, Q  2, R  1, S  4
Consider the following assertions. S1 : For Zener effect to occur, a very abrupt junction is required. S2 : For quantum tunneling to occur, a very narrow energy barrier is required. Which of the following is correct ? (A) Only S2 is true (B) S1 and S2 are both true but S2 is not a reason for S1
3.37
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) S1 and S2 and are both true but S2 is not a reason for S1 (D) Both S1 and S2 are false
2007
3.33
A p+ n junction has a builtin potential of 0.8 V. The depletion layer width a reverse bias of 1.2 V is 2 mm. For a reverse bias of 7.2 V, the depletion layer width will be (A) 4 mm (B) 4.9 mm (C) 8 mm (D) 12 mm The DC current gain (b) of a BJT is 50. Assuming that the emitter injection efficiency is 0.995, the base transport factor is (A) 0.980 (B) 0.985 (C) 0.990 (D) 0.995
3.38
ONE MARK
3.34
The electron and hole concentrations in an intrinsic semiconductor are ni per cm3 at 300 K. Now, if acceptor impurities are introduced with a concentration of NA per cm3 (where NA >> ni , the electron concentration per cm3 at 300 K will be) (A) ni (B) ni + NA 2 (D) ni (C) NA  ni NA + In a p n junction diode under reverse biased the magnitude of electric field is maximum at (A) the edge of the depletion region on the p side (B) the edge of the depletion region on the n side (C) the p+ n junction (D) the centre of the depletion region on the n side
2007 TWO MARKS
3.39
The gate oxide thickness in the MOS capacitor is (A) 50 nm (B) 143 nm (C) 350 nm (D) 1 m m
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
3.40
3.35
Group I lists four types of p  n junction diodes. Match each device in Group I with one of the option in Group II to indicate the bias condition of the device in its normal mode of operation. Group  I GroupII (P) Zener Diode (1) Forward bias (Q) Solar cell (2) Reverse bias (R) LASER diode (S) Avalanche Photodiode (A) P  1, Q  2, R  1, S  2 (B) P  2, Q  1, R  1, S  2
The maximum depletion layer width in silicon is (A) 0.143 mm (B) 0.857 mm (C) 1 mm (D) 1.143 mm Consider the following statements about the C  V characteristics plot : S1 : The MOS capacitor has as n type substrate S2 : If positive charges are introduced in the oxide, the C  V polt will shift to the left. Then which of the following is true? (A) Both S1 and S2 are true (B) S1 is true and S2 is false
3.41
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 51
The values of voltage (VD) across a tunneldiode corresponding to peak and valley currents are Vp, VD respectively. The range of tunneldiode voltage for VD which the slope of its I  VD characteristics is negative would be (A) VD < 0 (B) 0 # VD < Vp (C) Vp # VD < Vv (D) VD $ Vv The concentration of minority carriers in an extrinsic semiconductor under equilibrium is (A) Directly proportional to doping concentration (B) Inversely proportional to the doping concentration (C) Directly proportional to the intrinsic concentration (D) Inversely proportional to the intrinsic concentration Under low level injection assumption, the injected minority carrier current for an extrinsic semiconductor is essentially the (A) Diffusion current (B) Drift current (C) Recombination current (D) Induced current The phenomenon known as Early Effect in a bipolar transistor refers to a reduction of the effective basewidth caused by (A) Electron  hole recombination at the base (B) The reverse biasing of the base  collector junction (C) The forward biasing of emitterbase junction (D) The early removal of stored base charge during saturationtocut off switching
2006 TWO MARKS
3.43
A heavily doped n  type semiconductor has the following data: Holeelectron ratio : 0.4 Doping concentration : 4.2 # 108 atoms/m3 Intrinsic concentration : 1.5 # 10 4 atoms/m 3 The ratio of conductance of the n type semiconductor to that of the intrinsic semiconductor of same material and ate same temperature is given by (A) 0.00005 (B) 2000 (C) 10000 (D) 20000
2005 ONE MARK
3.50
3.44
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.45
(D) 1.4 eV
3.46
In the circuit shown below, the switch was connected to position 1 at t < 0 and at t = 0 , it is changed to position 2. Assume that the diode has zero voltage drop and a storage time ts . For 0 < t # ts, vR is given by (all in Volts)
A Silicon PN junction at a temperature of 20c C has a reverse saturation current of 10 pico  Ameres (pA). The reserve saturation current at 40cC for the same bias is approximately (A) 30 pA (B) 40 pA (C) 50 pA (D) 60 pA The primary reason for the widespread use of Silicon in semiconductor device technology is (A) abundance of Silicon on the surface of the Earth. (B) larger bandgap of Silicon in comparison to Germanium. (C) favorable properties of Silicon  dioxide (SiO2) (D) lower melting point
2005 TWO MARKS
3.52
3.53
The majority carriers in an ntype semiconductor have an average drift velocity v in a direction perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field B . The electric field E induced due to Hall effect acts in the direction (A) v # B (B) B # v (C) along v (D) opposite to v Find the correct match between Group 1 and Group 2 Group 1 Group 2 E  Varactor diode 1. Voltage reference F  PIN diode 2. High frequency switch G  Zener diode 3. Tuned circuits H  Schottky diode 4. Current controlled attenuator (A) E  4, F  2, G  1, H  3
3.54
3.48
A Silicon sample A is doped with 1018 atoms/cm 3 of boron. Another sample B of identical dimension is doped with 1018 atoms/cm 3 phosphorus. The ratio of electron to hole mobility is 3. The ratio of conductivity of the sample A to B is (A) 3 (B) 1 3 (C) 2 (D) 3 3 2 A Silicon PN junction diode under reverse bias has depletion region of width 10 m m. The relative permittivity of Silicon, er = 11.7 and the permittivity of free space e0 = 8.85 # 10  12 F/m. The depletion capacitance of the diode per square meter is (A) 100 mF (B) 10 mF (C) 1 mF (D) 20 mF A MOS capacitor made using p type substrate is in the accumulation mode. The dominant charge in the channel is due to the presence of
3.55
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 52
(C) a CMOS inverter (D) a BJT inverter Assuming VCEsat = 0.2 V and b = 50 , the minimum base current (IB) required to drive the transistor in the figure to saturation is
For an n channel MOSFET and its transfer curve shown in the figure, the threshold voltage is
(A) 1 V and the device is in active region (B)  1 V and the device is in saturation region (C) 1 V and the device is in saturation region (D)  1 V and the device is an active region
2004 ONE MARK
3.62
(A) 56 m A (C) 60 mA
2004
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
3.57
In an abrupt p  n junction, the doping concentrations on the p side and n side are NA = 9 # 1016 /cm 3 respectively. The p  n junction is reverse biased and the total depletion width is 3 m m. The depletion width on the p side is (A) 2.7 m m (B) 0.3 m m (C) 2.25 m m (D) 0.75 m m The resistivity of a uniformly doped n type silicon sample is 0.5W mc. If the electron mobility (mn) is 1250 cm 2 /Vsec and the charge of an electron is 1.6 # 10  19 Coulomb, the donor impurity concentration (ND) in the sample is (A) 2 # 1016 /cm 3 (B) 1 # 1016 /cm 3 (C) 2.5 # 1015 /cm 3 (D) 5 # 1015 /cm 3 Consider an abrupt p  n junction. Let Vbi be the builtin potential of this junction and VR be the applied reverse bias. If the junction capacitance (Cj ) is 1 pF for Vbi + VR = 1 V, then for Vbi + VR = 4 V, Cj will be (A) 4 pF (B) 2 pF (C) 0.25 pF (D) 0.5 pF Consider the following statements Sq and S2. S1 : The threshold voltage (VT ) of MOS capacitor decreases with increase in gate oxide thickness. S2 : The threshold voltage (VT ) of a MOS capacitor decreases with increase in substrate doping concentration. Which Marks of the following is correct ?
3.63
The impurity commonly used for realizing the base region of a silicon n  p  n transistor is (A) Gallium (B) Indium (C) Boron (D) Phosphorus If for a silicon npn transistor, the basetoemitter voltage (VBE ) is 0.7 V and the collectortobase voltage (VCB) is 0.2 V, then the transistor is operating in the (A) normal active mode (B) saturation mode (C) inverse active mode (D) cutoff mode
3.64
3.58
3.65 3.59
Consider the following statements S1 and S2. S1 : The b of a bipolar transistor reduces if the base width is increased. S2 : The b of a bipolar transistor increases if the dopoing concentration in the base is increased. Which remarks of the following is correct ? (A) S1 is FALSE and S2 is TRUE (B) Both S1 and S2 are TRUE (C) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE (D) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE Given figure is the voltage transfer characteristic of
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) S1 is FALSE and S2 is TRUE (B) Both S1 and S2 are TRUE (C) Both S1 and S2 are FALSE (D) S1 is TRUE and S2 is FALSE
3.66
3.60
(A) an NOMS inverter with enhancement mode transistor as load (B) an NMOS inverter with depletion mode transistor as load
The drain of an nchannel MOSFET is shorted to the gate so that VGS = VDS . The threshold voltage (VT ) of the MOSFET is 1 V. If the drain current (ID) is 1 mA for VGS = 2 V, then for VGS = 3 V, ID is (A) 2 mA (B) 3 mA (C) 9 mA (D) 4 mA The longest wavelength that can be absorbed by silicon, which has
3.67
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 53
the bandgap of 1.12 eV, is 1.1 m m. If the longest wavelength that can be absorbed by another material is 0.87 m m, then bandgap of this material is (A) 1.416 A/cm 2 (B) 0.886 eV (C) 0.854 eV
3.68
(D) 0.706 eV
Group 1 P. LED Q. Avalanche photo diode R. Tunnel diode S. LASER (A) P  1, Q  2, R  4, S  3 (B) P  2, Q  3, R  1, S  4 (C) P  3 Q  4, R  1, S  2 (D) P  2, Q  1, R  4, S  3
3.77
The neutral base width of a bipolar transistor, biased in the active region, is 0.5 m m. The maximum electron concentration and the diffusion constant in the base are 1014 / cm 3 and Dn = 25 cm 2 / sec respectively. Assuming negligible recombination in the base, the collector current density is (the electron charge is 1.6 # 10  19 Coulomb) (A) 800 A/cm 2 (B) 8 A/cm 2 (C) 200 A/cm 2 (D) 2 A/cm 2
2003 ONE MARK
At 300 K, for a diode current of 1 mA, a certain germanium diode requires a forward bias of 0.1435 V, whereas a certain silicon diode requires a forward bias of 0.718 V. Under the conditions state above, the closest approximation of the ratio of reverse saturation current in germanium diode to that in silicon diode is (A) 1 (B) 5 (D) 8 # 103 (C) 4 # 103 A particular green LED emits light of wavelength 5490 Ac. The
3.69
n type silicon is obtained by doping silicon with (A) Germanium (B) Aluminium (C) Boron (D) Phosphorus The Bandgap of silicon at 300 K is (A) 1.36 eV (B) 1.10 eV (C) 0.80 eV (D) 0.67 eV The intrinsic carrier concentration of silicon sample at 300 K is 1.5 # 1016 /m 3 . If after doping, the number of majority carriers is 5 # 1020 /m 3 , the minority carrier density is (A) 4.50 # 1011/m 3 (B) 3.333 # 10 4 /m 3 (C) 5.00 # 10 /m 3
20
3.78
3.70
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.71
(D) 3.00 # 10 /m 3
5
3.72
Choose proper substitutes for X and Y to make the following statement correct Tunnel diode and Avalanche photo diode are operated in X bias ad Y bias respectively (A) X: reverse, Y: reverse (B) X: reverse, Y: forward (C) X: forward, Y: reverse (D) X: forward, Y: forward For an n  channel enhancement type MOSFET, if the source is connected at a higher potential than that of the bulk (i.e. VSB > 0 ), the threshold voltage VT of the MOSFET will (A) remain unchanged (B) decrease (C) change polarity (D) increase
2003 TWO MARKS
3.73
When the gatetosource voltage (VGs) of a MOSFET with threshold voltage of 400 mV, working in saturation is 900 mV, the drain current is observed to be 1 mA. Neglecting the channel width modulation effect and assuming that the MOSFET is operating at saturation, the drain current for an applied VGS of 1400 mV is (A) 0.5 mA (B) 2.0 mA (C) 3.5 mA (D) 4.0 mA If P is Passivation, Q is n well implant, R is metallization and S is source/drain diffusion, then the order in which they are carried out in a standard n well CMOS fabrication process, is (B) Q  S  R  P (A) P  Q  R  S (C) R  P  S  Q (D) S  R  Q  P The action of JFET in its equivalent circuit can best be represented as a (A) Current controlled current source (B) Current controlled voltage source (C) Voltage controlled voltage source (D) Voltage controlled current source
2002 ONE MARK
3.80
3.74
An n type silicon bar 0.1 cm long and 100 mm2 i crosssectional area has a majority carrier concentration of 5 # 1020 /m 2 and the carrier mobility is 0.13 m2 /Vs at 300 K. If the charge of an electron is 1.5 # 10  19 coulomb, then the resistance of the bar is (A) 106 Ohm (B) 10 4 Ohm (C) 10  1 Ohm (D) 10  4 Ohm
3.81
3.75
The electron concentration in a sample of uniformly doped n type silicon at 300 K varies linearly from 1017 /cm 3 at x = 0 to 6 # 1016 / cm 3 at x = 2mm . Assume a situation that electrons are supplied to keep this concentration gradient constant with time. If electronic charge is 1.6 # 10  19 coulomb and the diffusion constant Dn = 35 cm 2 /s, the current density in the silicon, if no electric field is present, is (A) zero (B) 112 A/cm 2 (C) +1120 A/cm 2 (D) 1120 A/cm 2 Match items in Group 1 with items in Group 2, most suitably.
3.82
In the figure, silicon diode is carrying a constant current of 1 mA. When the temperature of the diode is 20cC, VD is found to be 700 mV. If the temperature rises to 40cC, VD becomes approximately equal to
3.76
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 54
1998
3.89
ONE MARK
The electron and hole concentrations in a intrinsic semiconductor are ni and pi respectively. When doped with a p type material, these change to n and p , respectively, Then (B) n + ni = p + pi (A) n + p = ni + pi (C) npi = ni p (D) np = ni pi The fT of a BJT is related to its gm, C p and C m as follows (A) fT = Cp + Cm gm gm (C) fT = Cp + Cm 2p (C p + C m) gm gm (D) fT = 2p (C p + C m) (B) fT =
3.91
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2001
3.84
IC IC IC IC
is always equal to bdc IB is always equal to  bde IB is greater than or equal to bdc IB is less than or equal to bdc IB
The static characteristic of an adequately forward biased p n junction is a straight line, if the plot is of (A) log I vs log V (B) log I vs V (C) I vs log V (D) I vs V A long specimen of p type semiconductor material (A) is positively charged (B) is electrically neutral (C) has an electric field directed along its length (D) acts as a dipole Two identical FETs, each characterized by the parameters gm and rd are connected in parallel. The composite FET is then characterized by the parameters g g (A) m and 2rd (B) m and rd 2 2 2 (C) 2gm and rd (D) 2gm and 2rd 2 q The units of are kT (A) V (B) V1 (C) J (D) J/K
1997 ONE MARK
3.92
3.93
ONE MARK
MOSFET can be used as a (A) current controlled capacitor (C) current controlled inductor
3.94
3.85
The effective channel length of MOSFET in saturation decreases with increase in (A) gate voltage (B) drain voltage (C) source voltage (D) body voltage
3.95
1999
3.86
ONE MARK
The early effect in a bipolar junction transistor is caused by (A) fast turnon (B) fast turnoff (C) large collectorbase reverse bias (D) large emitterbase forward bias
1999 TWO MARKS
For a MOS capacitor fabricated on a p type semiconductor, strong inversion occurs when (A) surface potential is equal to Fermi potential (B) surface potential is zero (C) surface potential is negative and equal to Fermi potential in magnitude (D) surface potential is positive and equal to twice the Fermi po
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
tential
3.96
3.87
An n channel JEFT has IDSS = 2 mA and Vp = 4 V . Its transconductance gm (in milliohm) for an applied gatetosource voltage VGS of  2 V is (A) 0.25 (B) 0.5 (C) 0.75 (D) 1.0 An npn transistor (with C = 0.3 pF ) has a unitygain cutoff frequency fT of 400 MHz at a dc bias current Ic = 1 mA . The value of its Cm (in pF) is approximately (VT = 26 mV) (A) 15 (B) 30 (C) 50 (D) 96
3.88
The intrinsic carrier density at 300 K is 1.5 # 1010 /cm3 , in silicon. For n type silicon doped to 2.25 # 1015 atoms/cm3 , the equilibrium electron and hole densities are (A) n = 1.5 # 1015 /cm3, p = 1.5 # 1010 /cm3 (B) n = 1.5 # 1010 /cm3, p = 2.25 # 1015 /cm3 (C) n = 2.25 # 1015 /cm3, p = 1.0 # 1015 /cm3 (D) n = 1.5 # 1010 /cm3, p = 1.5 # 1010 /cm3
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 55
1996
3.97
ONE MARK
The p type substrate in a conventional pn junction isolated integrated circuit should be connected to (A) nowhere, i.e. left floating (B) a DC ground potential (C) the most positive potential available in the circuit (D) the most negative potential available in the circuit If a transistor is operating with both of its junctions forward biased, but with the collector base forward bias greater than the emitter base forward bias, then it is operating in the (A) forward active mode (B) reverse saturation mode (C) reverse active mode (D) forward saturation mode The commonemitter shortcircuit current gain b of a transistor (A) is a monotonically increasing function of the collector current IC (B) is a monotonically decreasing function of IC (C) increase with IC , for low IC , reaches a maximum and then decreases with further increase in IC (D) is not a function of IC A n channel silicon (Eg = 1.1 eV) MOSFET was fabricated using n + polysilicon gate and the threshold voltage was found to be 1 V. Now, if the gate is changed to p+ polysilicon, other things remaining the same, the new threshold voltage should be (A)  0.1 V (B) 0 V (C) 1.0 V (D) 2.1 V
1996 TWO MARKS
3.98
3.99
3.100
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.101
In a bipolar transistor at room temperature, if the emitter current is doubled the voltage across its baseemitter junction (A) doubles (B) halves (C) increases by about 20 mV (D) decreases by about 20 mV An npn transistor has a beta cutoff frequency fb of 1 MHz and common emitter short circuit lowfrequency current gain bo of 200 it unity gain frequency fT and the alpha cutoff frequency fa respectively are (B) 200 MHz, 199 MHz (A) 200 MHz, 201 MHz (C) 199 MHz, 200 MHz (D) 201 MHz, 200 MHz A silicon n MOSFET has a threshold voltage of 1 V and oxide thickness of Ao . [er (SiO 2) = 3.9, e0 = 8.854 # 1014 F/cm, q = 1.6 # 1019 C] The region under the gate is ion implanted for threshold voltage tailoring. The dose and type of the implant (assumed to be a sheet charge at the interface) required to shift the threshold voltage to  1 V are (B) 1.08 # 1012 /cm2 , ntype (A) 1.08 # 1012 /cm2 , ptype (C) 5.4 # 1011 /cm2 , ptype (D) 5.4 # 1011 /cm2 , ntype
3.102
3.103
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 56
SOLUTIONS
3.1
= 108 cm2 # 104 cm = 1012 cm3 So total no. of holes is, p = p 0 # V = 10 # 1012 = 1011 Which is approximately equal to zero.
Option (A) is correct. The potential barrier of the pn junction is lowered when a forward bias voltage is applied, allowing electrons and holes to flow across the space charge region (Injection) when holes flow from the p region across the space charge region into the n region, they become excess minority carrier holes and are subject to diffuse, drift and recombination processes. Option (D) is correct. In IC technology, dry oxidation as compared to wet oxidation produces superior quality oxide with a lower growth rate Option (D) is correct. In a MOSFET operating in the saturation region, the channel length modulation effect causes a decrease in output resistance.
3.6
3.2
3.3
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
3.4
Option (A) is correct. Given, VB = 2V VTN = 1V VD = 2 volt VG = 2 volt VS = 0 (Ground) Therefore, VGS = 2 > VTN and VDS = 2 > VGS  VTN So, the MOSFET is in the saturation region. Therefore, drain current is ID = kN ^VGS  VTN h2
2 or, ID = kN ^VB  1h Differentiating both side with respect to ID 1 = kN 2 ^VB  1hdVB dID
Since all the parameters of PMOS and NMOS are equal. So, mn = mp COX bW l = COX bW l = COX bW l L M2 L L M1 Given that M1 is in linear region. So, we assume that M2 is either in cutoff or saturation. Case 1 : M2 is in cut off So, I 2 = I1 = 0 Where I1 is drain current in M1 and I2 is drain current in M2 . m C 2 Since, I1 = p OX bW l82VSD ^VSG  VTp h  V SD B 2 L m C 2 0 = p OX bW l [2VSD ^VSG  VTp h  V SD & ] 2 L Solving it we get, & & For So, So for the NMOS 2 ^VSG  VTp h = VSD 2 ^5  Vin  1h = 5  VD Vin = VD + 3 2 I1 = 0 , VD = 5 V Vin = 5 + 3 = 4 V 2
VGS = Vin  0 = 4  0 = 4 V and VGS > VTn So it cant be in cutoff region. Case 2 : M2 must be in saturation region. So, I1 = I 2
VBQ = 2 volt (at D.C. Voltage) dVB = 1 dID 2kN ^VB  1h 1 = 2 # 40 # 106 # ^2  1h = 12.5 # 103 W = 12.5 kW n 0 p 0 = n i2 2 20 p 0 = n i = 1019 = 10 per cm3 n 0 10 V = Area # depth
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
mp COX W mn COX W 2 2 2 (VSG  VTp) VSD  V SD @ = 2 L (VGS  VTn) 2 L6
2 2 (VSG  VTp) VSD  V SD = (VGS  VTn) 2 & 2 (5  Vin  1) (5  VD)  (5  VD) 2 = (Vin  0  1) 2 & 2 (4  Vin) (5  VD)  (5  VD) 2 = (Vin  1) 2 Substituting VD = VDS = VGS  VTn and for N MOS & VD = Vin  1 & 2 (4  Vin) (6  Vin)  (6  Vin) 2 = (Vin  1) 2 & 48  36  8Vin = 2Vin + 1 & 6Vin = 11 & Vin = 11 = 1.833 V 6
&
3.5
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 57
Option (B) is correct. Gate source overlap capacitance. Co = dWeox e0 (medium Sio 2 ) tox = 0.69 # 1015 F
9 6 3.9 # 8.9 # 1012 = 20 # 10 # 1 # 10 # 9 1 # 10
rl =
3.13
3.14
3.8
Option (B) is correct. Source body junction capacitance. Cs = Aer e0 d A = (0.2 mm + 0.2 mm + 0.2 mm) # 1 mm + 2 (0.2 mm # 0.2 mm) = 0.68 mm2 d = 10 nm (depletion width of all junction) 12 12 # 8.9 # 10 Cs = 0.68 # 10 # 11.7 9 10 # 10 = 7 # 1015 F
3.15
Option (A) is correct. At room temperature mobility of electrons for Si sample is given mn = 1350 cm2 /Vs . For an n channel MOSFET to create an inversion layer of electrons, a large positive gate voltage is to be applied. Therefore, induced electric field increases and mobility decreases. So, Mobility mn < 1350 cm2 /Vs for n channel MOSFET Option (B) is correct. Dry oxidation is used to achieve high quality oxide growth. Option (B) is correct. Emitter injection efficiency is given as 1 g = 1 + NB NE SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM )
3.16
3.9
Option (C) is correct. Drift current Id = qnmn E It depends upon Electric field E and carrier concentration n Option (B) is correct. Zener diode operates in reverse breakdown region.
At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.10
g = 1, NE >> NB
3.11
Option (D) is correct. For every 1c C increase in temperature, forward bias voltage across diode decreases by 2.5 mV. Thus for 10c C increase, there us 25 mV decreases. Option (B) is correct. Full channel resistance is r L r # = 600 W W#a If VGS is applied, Channel resistance is r L where b = a c1 rl = # W#b Pinch off voltage, qN Vp = D a2 2e If depletion on each side is d = 1 m at VGS = 0 . qN Vj = D d2 2e qND qN or 1 = D (1 # 106) 2 & = 1012 2e 2e Now from equation (2), we have Vp = 10 # (5 # 10 )
12 6 2
3.12
Option (C) is correct. Reverse bias breakdown or Zener effect occurs in highly doped PN junction through tunneling mechanism. In a highly doped PN junction, the conduction and valence bands on opposite sides of the junction are sufficiently close during reverse bias that electron may tunnel directly from the valence band on the p side into the conduction band on n side. Breakdown voltage VB \ 1 NA ND So, breakdown voltage decreases as concentration increases Depletion capacitance 1/2 ees NA ND C =' 1 2 (Vbi + VR) (NA + ND) Thus C \ NA ND Depletion capacitance increases as concentration increases
3.18
Option (C) is correct. Sample is in thermal equilibrium so, electric field 1 = 10 kV/cm 1 mm Option (A) is correct. Electron drift current density E = Jd = ND mn eE = 1016 # 1350 # 1.6 # 1019 # 10 # 1013 = 2.16 # 10 4 A/cm2
3.20
or Vp = 25 V At VGS = 3 V ;  3 mm = 3.26 mm b = 5 b1  25 l
Option (C) is correct. Only dopant atoms can have concentration of 4 # 1019 cm  3 in n type silicon at room temperature. Option (A) is correct.
2 Unit of mobility mn is = cm V. sec
3.21
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2 Unit of diffusion current Dn is = cm sec 2 2 m Thus unit of n is = cm / cm = 1 = V1 V $ sec sec V Dn
3.22
Page 58
17 E2  E1 = 25 # 103 e ln 4 # 10 10 = 0.427 eV 1.5 # 10 Hence fermi level goes down by 0.427 eV as silicon is doped with boron.
3.31
Option (D) is correct. Both S1 and S2 are true and S2 is a reason for S1. Option (B) is correct. We know that or NA WP = ND WN 17 6 # 10 = 1 # 1016 NA = ND WN = 1 # 10 # 0.1 6 WP 1 # 10
D Vbi = VT 1n c NA N n i2 m 17 16 # 10 = 0.760 = 26 # 103 ln e 1 # 10 # 1 10 o (1.4 # 10 ) 2
3.23
VP = VP1 VP1 = W12 = W2 Now 2 VP2 W2 (2W) 2 or 4VP1 = VP2 Initial transconductance gm = Kn ;1  Vbi  VGS E Vp For first condition gm1 0  ( 2) = Kn =1 = Kn ;1 VP1 G For second condition gm2 = Kn =1 Dividing Hence
3.32 3.33
3.24
Option (B) is correct. The peak electric field in device is directed from p to n and is
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
from p to n E = eND xn es from n to p = eND xn es 19 17 5 # 1 # 10 = 0.15 = 1.6 # 10 # 1 #10 14 8.85 # 10 # 12
Option (A) is correct. Option (D) is correct. As per mass action law np = ni2 If acceptor impurities are introduces Thus or p = NA nNA = ni2 2 n = ni NA
MV/cm
3.25
Option (D) is correct. Channel length modulation is not associated with a p  n junction. It is being associated with MOSFET in which effective channel length decreases, producing the phenomenon called channel length modulation. Option (A) is correct. Trivalent impurities are used for making p  type semiconductors. So, Silicon wafer heavily doped with boron is a p+ substrate. Option (D) is correct. Oxidation rate is zero because the existing oxide prevent the further oxidation. Option (B) is correct. gm = 2ID = 2 K (VGS  VT ) 2 = 2K (VGS  VT ) 2VGS 2VGS Option (C) is correct. As VD = constant Thus gm \ (VGS  VT ) Option (C) is correct. E2  E1 = kT ln NA ni NA = 4 # 1017 ni = 1.5 # 1010
3.34
Option (C) is correct. The electric field has the maximum value at the junction of p+ n . Option (B) is correct. Zener diode and Avalanche diode works in the reverse bias and laser diode works in forward bias. In solar cell diode works in forward bias but photo current is in reverse direction. Thus Zener diode : Reverse Bias
3.35
3.26
3.27
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Solar Cell : Forward Bias Laser Diode : Forward Bias Avalanche Photo diode : Reverse Bias
3.36
3.28
3.29
3.30
Option (C) is correct. In BJT as the BC reverse bias voltage increases, the BC space charge region width increases which xB (i.e. neutral base width) > A change in neutral base width will change the collector current. A reduction in base width will causes the gradient in minority carrier concentration to increase, which in turn causes an increased in the diffusion current. This effect si known as base modulation as early effect.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 59
In JFET the gate to source voltage that must be applied to achieve pinch off voltage is described as pinch off voltage and is also called as turn voltage or threshold voltage. In LASER population inversion occurs on the condition when concentration of electrons in one energy state is greater than that in lower energy state, i.e. a non equilibrium condition. In MOS capacitor, flat band voltage is the gate voltage that must be applied to create flat ban condition in which there is no space charge region in semiconductor under oxide. Therefore BJT : Early effect MOS capacitor : Flatband voltage LASER diode : Population inversion JFET : Pinchoff voltage
3.37
Now = 0.857 m m
3.41
C2 = 7 pF 6 10  12 # 10  4 = 6 # 10  4 cm D2 = e0 er2 A = 1 # 7  12 C2 7 6 # 10
Option (C) is correct. Depletion region will not be formed if the MOS capacitor has n type substrate but from CV characteristics, C reduces if V is increased. Thus depletion region must be formed. Hence S1 is false If positive charges is introduced in the oxide layer, then to equalize the effect the applied voltage V must be reduced. Thus the C  V plot moves to the left. Hence S2 is true. Option (C) is correct. For the case of negative slope it is the negative resistance region
3.42
Option (A) is correct. W = K V + VR Now 2m = K 0.8 + 1.2 From above two equation we get W = 2m or 0.8 + 7.2 = 0.8 + 1.2 W2 = 4 m m a= 8 =2 2
3.38
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
a = b1 # b2 50 b1 = a = = 0.985 51 # 0.995 b2
Option (A) is correct. At low voltage when there is no depletion region and capacitance is decide by SiO2 thickness only, C = e0 er1 A D 13 4 # 10 = 50 nm or D = e0 er1 A = 3.5 # 10 12 C 7 # 10 Option (B) is correct. The construction of given capacitor is shown in fig below
3.43
3.40
Option (A) is correct. For n type p is minority carrier concentration np = ni2 np = Constant p \ 1 n Thus p is inversely proportional to n . Since ni is constant
3.44
Option (A) is correct. Diffusion current, since the drift current is negligible for minority carrier. Option (B) is correct. In BJT as the BC reverse bias voltage increases, the BC space charge region width increases which xB (i.e. neutral base width) > A change in neutral base width will change the collector current. A reduction in base width will causes the gradient in minority carrier concentration to increases, which in turn causes an increases in the diffusion current. This effect si known as base modulation as early effect. Option (A) is correct. For t < 0 diode forward biased and VR = 5 . At t = 0 diode abruptly changes to reverse biased and current across resistor must be 0. But in storage time 0 < t < ts diode retain its resistance of forward
3.45
When applied voltage is 0 volts, there will be no depletion region and we get C1 = 7 pF When applied voltage is V , a depletion region will be formed as shown in fig an total capacitance is 1 pF. Thus CT = 1 pF or CT = C1 C2 = 1 pF C1 + C2 1 = 1 + 1 or C1 C2 CT Substituting values of CT and C1 we get
3.46
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 60
Option (B) is correct. According to Hall effect the direction of electric field is same as that of direction of force exerted. or E = v # B E = B#v
sp = pqmp sp m = p =1 3 sn mn
3.54
(n = p)
or
3.55
3.48
Option (B) is correct. The varacter diode is used in tuned circuit as it can provide frequently stability. PIN diode is used as a current controlled attenuator. Zener diode is used in regulated voltage supply or fixed voltage reference. Schottkey diode has metalsemiconductor function so it has fast switching action so it is used as high frequency switch Varactor diode : Tuned circuits PIN Diode : Current controlled attenuator Zener diode : Voltage reference
Option (B) is correct. In accumulation mode for NMOS having p substrate, when positive voltage is applied at the gate, this will induce negative charge near p  type surface beneath the gate. When VGS is made sufficiently large, an inversion of electrons is formed and this in effect forms and n  channel. Option (C) is correct. From the graph it can be easily seen that Vth = 1 V Now VGS = 3  1 = 2 V and VDS = 5  1 = 4 V Since VDS > VGS $ VDS > VGS  Vth Thus MOSFET is in saturation region.
3.56
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Schottky diode : High frequency switch
3.49
3.57
Option (C) is correct. Trivalent impurities are used for making p type semiconductor. Boron is trivalent. Option (A) is correct. Here emitter base junction is forward biased and base collector junction is reversed biased. Thus transistor is operating in normal active region. Option (D) is correct. We have Thus b = a 1a
3.58
Option (D) is correct. mP We have = 0.4 mn Conductance of n type semiconductor sn = nqmn Conductance of intrinsic semiconductor si = ni q (mn + mp) nmn sn = n Ratio is = n ( ) n 1 s m + m i i n p i^ + 8 4 . 4 2 10 # = = 2 # 10 1.5 # 10 4 (1 + 0.4)
mp mn h
3.59
a " b a ." b . If the base width increases, recombination of carrier in base region increases and a decreases & hence b decreases. If doping in base region increases, recombination of carrier in base increases and a decreases thereby decreasing b . Thus S1 is true and S2 is false.
3.60 3.61
3.50
Option (C) is correct. For silicon at 0 K, Eg0 = 1.21 eV At any temperature EgT = Eg0  3.6 # 10 T At T = 300 K, Eg300 = 1.21  3.6 # 10  4 # 300 = 1.1 eV This is standard value, that must be remembered.
4
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
or Now
3.62
VCC  IC RC  VCE = 0
3.51
Option (B) is correct. The reverse saturation current doubles for every 10cC rise in temperature as follows : I0 (T) = I 01 # 2 Thus at 40c C, I0 = 40 pA
(T  T1)/10
Option (B) is correct. We know that Wp NA = Wn ND or 3 m # 1016 = 0.3 m m Wp = Wn # ND = NA 9 # 1016 Option (B) is correct. Conductivity s = nqun
3.52
Option (A) is correct. Silicon is abundant on the surface of earth in the from of SiO2 . Option (B) is correct. sn = nqmn
3.63
3.53
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 61
or resistivity Thus =
 19
At T = 300 K, Eg300 = 1.21  3.6 # 10  4 # 300 = 1.1 eV This is standard value, that must be remembered.
3.71
Option (A) is correct. By Mass action law np = ni2 2 16 .5 # 1016 = 4.5 # 1011 p = ni = 1.5 # 10 # 120 n 5 # 10
Option (D) is correct. We know that eeS NA ND Cj = ; 2 (Vbi + VR)( NA + ND) E 1 Cj \ (Vbi + VR) C j2 (Vbi + VR) 1 1 =1 = = C j1 (Vbi + VR) 2 4 2 C Cj2 = j1 = 1 = 0.5 pF 2 2
1 2
3.72
Thus Now or
3.65
Option (C) is correct. Tunnel diode shows the negative characteristics in forward bias. It is used in forward bias. Avalanche photo diode is used in reverse bias. Option (D) is correct. Option (A) is correct. We that R = rl , r = 1 and a = nqun A s
3.73 3.74
Option (C) is correct. Increase in gate oxide thickness makes difficult to induce charges in channel. Thus VT increases if we increases gate oxide thickness. Hence S1 is false. Increase in substrate doping concentration require more gate voltage because initially induce charges will get combine in substrate. Thus VT increases if we increase substrate doping concentration. Hence S2 is false. Option (D) is correct. We know that ID = K (VGS  VT ) 2 (VGS2  VT ) 2 I DS Thus = IDI (VGS1  VT ) 2 Substituting the values we have
2 ID2 = (3  1) = 4 ID1 (2  1) 2 ID2 = 4IDI = 4 mA
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.66
or
3.67
Option (A) is correct. Eg \ 1 l Eg2 = l1 = 1.1 Eg1 0.87 l2 Eg2 = 1.1 # 1.12 = 1.416 eV 0.87
Now
Thus or
3.68
Since no electric field is present, E = 0 and we get So, Jn = qDn dn dx = 1.6 # 10  19 # 35 # ( 2 # 1020) = 1120 A/cm 2
3.76
Option (B) is correct. Concentration gradient dn = 1014 = 2 # 1018 4 dx 0.5 # 10 q = 1.6 # 10  19 C Dn = 25 1014 dn = dx 0.5 # 10  4 JC = qDn dn = 1.6 # 10  19 # 25 # 2 # 1018 = 8 A/cm 2 dx
Option (C) is correct. LED works on the principal of spontaneous emission. In the avalanche photo diode due to the avalanche effect there is large current gain. Tunnel diode has very large doping. LASER diode are used for coherent radiation. Option (C) is correct. We know that I = Io `e h V  1j where h = 1 for germanium and h = 2 silicon. As per question
VD1
T si
3.77
3.69
Option (D) is correct. Pentavalent make n type semiconductor and phosphorous is pentavalent. Option (C) is correct. For silicon at 0 K Eg0 = 1.21 eV At any temperature EgT = Eg0  3.6 # 10  4 T
3.78
Io `e e  1j = Io `e hV  1j
VDsi
hVT
VDGe
T
Ge
or
VDsi
0.718
3.70
In eV
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 62
Option (D) is correct. We know that ID = K (VGS  VT ) 2 2 ID2 = (VGS2  VT ) Thus ID1 (VGS1  VT ) 2 Substituting the values we have
2 ID2 = (1.4  0.4) = 4 ID1 (0.9  0.4) 2 ID2 = 4IDI = 4 mA
3.87
At a given value of vBE , increasing the reversebias voltage on the collectorbase junction and thus increases the width of the depletion region of this junction. This in turn results in a decrease in the effective base width W . Since IS is inversely proportional to W , IS increases and that iC increases proportionally. This is early effect. Option (B) is correct. For an n channel JEFT transconductance is 3 ( 2) gm =  2IDSS b1  VGS l =  2 # 2 # 10 =1 4 VP VP ( 4)G = 103 # 1 = 0.5 mho 2 Option (A) is correct. We have Now or or or
3.89
or
3.80
3.88
Option (B) is correct. In n well CMOS fabrication following are the steps : (A) n  well implant (B) Source drain diffusion (C) Metalization (D) Passivation
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
3.81
gm = IC = 1 26 VT gm fT = 2p (C p + C m) 1/26 400 = 2p (0.3 # 1012 + C m) 1 = 15.3 # 1012 (0.3 # 1012 + C m) = 2p # 26 # 400 C m 15.3 # 1012  0.3 # 1012 = 15 # 1012 15 pF
Option (D) is correct. For any semiconductor (Intrinsic or extrinsic) the product n p remains constant at a given temperature so here np = ni pi Option (D) is correct. fT = gm 2p (C p + C m)
3.90
Option (D) is correct. For a JFET in active region we have 2 IDS = IDSS c1  VGS m VP
3.91
Option (B) is correct. For a Forward Bias p n junction, current equation I = I 0 (eV/kT  1) or or I + 1 = eV/kT I0 kT log b I + 1l = V I0
From above equation it is clear that the action of a JFET is voltage controlled current source.
3.82
Option (B) is correct. At constant current the rate of change of voltage with respect to temperature is dV = 2.5 mV per degree centigrade dT Here Thus Therefore, 3 T = T2  T1 = 40  20 = 20cC 3 VD = 2.5 # 20 = 50 mV VD = 700  50 = 650 mV
Option (B) is correct. A specimen of p  type or n  type is always electrical neutral. Option (C) is correct. Option (B) is correct. The unit of q is e and unit of kT is eV. Thus unit of e/kT is
3.93 3.94
3.83
Option (D) is correct. Condition for saturation is IC < bIB Option (B) is correct. The metal area of the gate in conjunction with the insulating dielectric oxide layer and semiconductor channel, form a parallel plate capacitor. It is voltage controlled capacitor because in active region the current voltage relationship is given by IDS = K (VGS  VT ) 2
3.95 3.96
3.84
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
e/eV = V1 . Option (D) is correct. Option (C) is correct. We have ni = 1.5 # 1010 /cm3 Nd = 2.25 # 1015 atoms/cm3 For n type doping we have electron concentration n  Nd = 2.25 # 1015 atom/cm3 For a given temperature np = n i2 Hole concentration
2 (1.5 # 1010) 2 p = ni = = 1.0 # 105 /cm3 n 2.25 # 1015
3.85
Option (D) is correct. In MOSFET the body (substrate) is connected to power supply in such a way to maintain the body (substrate) to channel junction in cutoff condition. The resulting reverse bias voltage between source and body will have an effect on device function. The reverse bias will widen the depletion region resulting the reduction in channel length. Option (C) is correct.
3.86
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 63
3.97
Option (D) is correct. In p n junction isolated circuit we should have high impedance, so that p n junction should be kept in reverse bias. (So connect p to negative potential in the circuit) Option (B) is correct.
3.98
If both junction are forward biased and collector base junction is more forward biased then IC will be flowing out wards (opposite direction to normal mode) the collector and it will be in reverse saturation mode.
3.99
Option (C) is correct. For normal active mode we have b = IC IB For small values of IC , if we increases IC , b also increases until we reach (IC ) saturation. Further increases in IC (since transistor is in saturation mode know) will increases IB and b decreases.
3.100
Option (C) is correct. For a n channel mosfet thresholds voltage is given by VTN = VGS  VDS (sat) for p channel [ p+ polysilicon used in gate] VTP = VSD (sat)  VGS so VTP = VDS (sat) + VGS so threshold voltage will be same.
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
3.101
Option (C) is correct. Emitter current is given by or or Now IE = I 0 (eV /kT  1) IE = I 0 eV /kT eV VBE = kT ln b IE l I0 (VBE ) 1 = kT ln b IE 1 l I0 (VBE ) 2 = kT ln b IE 2 l I0 (VBE ) 2  (VBE ) 1 = kT ;ln b IE 2 lE = kT ln b 2IE 1 l IE 1 IE 1
BE BE BE
/kT
>> 1
or
Now if emitter current is double i.e. IE 2 = 2IE 1 (VBE ) 2 = (VBE ) 1 + (25 # 0.60) m volt = (VBE ) 1 + 15 m volt Thus if emitter current is doubled the base emitter junction voltage is increased by 15 mV.
3.102
Option (A) is correct. Unity gain frequency is given by fT = fB # b = 106 # 200 = 200 MHz a cutoff frequency is given by f fb fa = b = = fb (b + 1) 1a b 1b+1 = 106 # (200 + 1) = 201 MHz Option (A) is correct.
3.103
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 4
ANALOG CIRCUITS
Page 64
2013
4.1
ONE MARK
In the circuit shown below what is the output voltage ^Vouth if a silicon transistor Q and an ideal opamp are used?
4.4
The ac schematic of an NMOS commonsource state is shown in the figure below, where part of the biasing circuits has been omitted for simplicity. For the n channel MOSFET M, the transconductance gm = 1 mA/V , and body effect and channel length modulation effect are to be neglected. The lower cutoff frequency in HZ of the circuit is approximately at
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A)  15 V (C) + 0.7 V
4.2
(A) 8 (C) 50
4.5
In a voltagevoltage feedback as shown below, which one of the following statements is TRUE if the gain k is increased?
In the circuit shown below the opamps are ideal. Then, Vout in Volts is
(A) The input es (B) The input increases (C) The input decreases (D) The input es
2013
4.3
impedance increases and output impedance decreasimpedance increases and output impedance also impedance decreases and output impedance also impedance decreases and output impedance increas4.6
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) 4 (C) 8 (B) 6 (D) 10
TWO MARKS
In the circuit shown below, the knee current of the ideal Zener dioide is 10 mA. To maintain 5 V across RL , the minimum value of RL in W and the minimum power rating of the Zener diode in mW , respectively, are
In the circuit shown below, Q1 has negligible collectortoemitter saturation voltage and the diode drops negligible voltage across it under forward bias. If Vcc is + 5 V , X and Y are digital signals with 0 V as logic 0 and Vcc as logic 1, then the Boolean expression for Z is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 65
(B) XY (D) XY
4.11
The diodes and capacitors in the circuit shown are ideal. The voltage v (t) across the diode D1 is
A voltage 1000 sin wt Volts is applied across YZ . Assuming ideal diodes, the voltage measured across WX in Volts, is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
In the circuit shown below, the silicon npn transistor Q has a very high value of b . The required value of R2 in kW to produce IC = 1 mA is
4.12
(A) 20 (C) 40
2012
4.9
(B) 30 (D) 50
ONE MARK
4.13
(A) 50 W (C) 5 kW
2012
The current ib through the base of a silicon npn transistor is 1 + 0.1 cos (10000pt) mA At 300 K, the rp in the small signal model of the transistor is
The i v characteristics of the diode in the circuit given below are v  0.7 A, v $ 0.7 V i = * 500 0A v < 0. 7 V
1 rad/s (R1 + R2) C (B) high pass filter with f3dB = 1 rad/s R1 C (C) low pass filter with f3dB = 1 rad/s R1 C 1 (D) high pass filter with f3dB = rad/s (R1 + R2) C (A) low pass filter with f3dB =
4.14
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 66
and the threshold voltage VT = 1 V . The voltage Vx at the source of the upper transistor is
(A) 1 V (C) 3 V
In the circuit shown below, capacitors C1 and C2 are very large and are shorts at the input frequency. vi is a small signal input. The gain magnitude vo at 10 M rad/s is vi
For the BJT, in the circuit shown below, Q1 b = 3, VBEon = 0.7 V, VCEsat = 0.7 V . The switch is initially closed. At time t = 0 , the switch is opened. The time t at which Q1 leaves the active region is
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) 10 ms (C) 50 ms
4.19
For a BJT, the common base current gain a = 0.98 and the collector base junction reverse bias saturation current ICO = 0.6 mA . This BJT is connected in the common emitter mode and operated in the active region with a base drive current IB = 20 mA . The collector current IC for this mode of operation is (A) 0.98 mA (B) 0.99 mA (C) 1.0 mA (D) 1.01 mA
The circuit below implements a filter between the input current ii and the output voltage vo . Assume that the opamp is ideal. The filter implemented is a
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
In the circuit shown below, assume that the voltage drop across a forward biased diode is 0.7 V. The thermal voltage Vt = kT/q = 25 mV . The small signal input vi = Vp cos ^wt h where Vp = 100 mV.
In the circuit shown below, for the MOS transistors, mn Cox = 100 mA/V 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
4.20
Page 67
The bias current IDC through the diodes is (A) 1 mA (B) 1.28 mA (C) 1.5 mA (D) 2 mA The ac output voltage vac is (A) 0.25 cos ^wt h mV (C) 2 cos (wt) mV
2010
2010
TWO MARKS
4.21
4.22
The amplifier circuit shown below uses a silicon transistor. The capacitors CC and CE can be assumed to be short at signal frequency and effect of output resistance r0 can be ignored. If CE is disconnected from the circuit, which one of the following statements is true
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(A) The input resistance Ri increases and magnitude of voltage gain AV decreases (B) The input resistance Ri decreases and magnitude of voltage gain AV increases (C) Both input resistance Ri and magnitude of voltage gain AV decreases (D) Both input resistance Ri and the magnitude of voltage gain AV increases
4.23
The resistance seen by the source vS is (A) 258 W (B) 1258 W (C) 93 k W (D) 3 The lower cutoff frequency due to C2 is (A) 33.9 Hz (B) 27.1 Hz (C) 13.6 Hz (D) 16.9 Hz The transfer characteristic for the precision rectifier circuit shown below is (assume ideal OPAMP and practical diodes)
4.26
In the silicon BJT circuit shown below, assume that the emitter area of transistor Q1 is half that of transistor Q2
4.27
The value of current Io is approximately (A) 0.5 mA (B) 2 mA (C) 9.3 mA (D) 15 mA
4.24
Assuming the OPAMP to be ideal, the voltage gain of the amplifier shown below is
(A)  R2 R1 R  R 3 (C)  2 R1
(B)  R 3 R1 (D) b R2 + R 3 l R1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 68
4.30
2009
4.28
TWO MARKS
For small increase in VG beyond 1V, which of the following gives the correct description of the region of operation of each MOSFET (A) Both the MOSFETs are in saturation region (B) Both the MOSFETs are in triode region (C) nMOSFETs is in triode and p MOSFET is in saturation region (D) n MOSFET is in saturation and p MOSFET is in triode region Estimate the output voltage V0 for VG = 1.5 V. [Hints : Use the appropriate currentvoltage equation for each MOSFET, based on the answer to Q.4.16] (B) 4 + 1 (A) 4  1 2 2 (C) 4  3 (D) 4 + 3 2 2 In the circuit shown below, the opamp is ideal, the transistor has VBE = 0.6 V and b = 150 . Decide whether the feedback in the circuit is positive or negative and determine the voltage V at the output of the opamp.
4.31
4.32
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) Positive feedback, V = 10 V (B) Positive feedback, V = 0 V (C) Negative feedback, V = 5 V (D) Negative feedback, V = 2 V
4.33
A small signal source Vi (t) = A cos 20t + B sin 106 t is applied to a transistor amplifier as shown below. The transistor has b = 150 and hie = 3W . Which expression best approximate V0 (t)
(A) Only the frequency (B) Only the amplitude (C) Both the amplitude and the frequency (D) Neither the amplitude nor the frequency
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 69
(A) V0 (t) = 1500 (A cos 20t + B sin 106 t) (B) V0 (t) =  1500( A cos 20t + B sin 106 t) (C) V0 (t) = 1500B sin 106 t (D) V0 (t) = 150B sin 106 t
2008
4.34
ONE MARK
In the following limiter circuit, an input voltage Vi = 10 sin 100pt is applied. Assume that the diode drop is 0.7 V when it is forward biased. When it is forward biased. The zener breakdown voltage is 6.8 V The maximum and minimum values of the output voltage respectively are
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.38
Two identical NMOS transistors M1 and M2 are connected as shown below. Vbias is chosen so that both transistors are in saturation. The equivalent gm of the pair is defied to be 2Iout at constant Vout 2Vi The equivalent gm of the pair is
For the circuit shown in the following figure, transistor M1 and M2 are identical NMOS transistors. Assume the M2 is in saturation and the output is unloaded.
4.39
4.36
The current Ix is related to Ibias as (B) Ix = Ibias (A) Ix = Ibias + Is (D) Ix = Ibias  Is (C) Ix = Ibias  cVDD  Vout m RE Consider the following circuit using an ideal OPAMP. The IV V characteristic of the diode is described by the relation I = I 0 _eV  1i where VT = 25 mV, I0 = 1m A and V is the voltage across the diode (taken as positive for forward bias). For an input voltage Vi = 1 V , the output voltage V0 is
t
(A) the sum of individual gm ' s of the transistors (B) the product of individual gm s of the transistors (C) nearly equal to the gm of M1 g (D) nearly equal to m of M2 g0 Consider the Schmidt trigger circuit shown below A triangular wave which goes from 12 to 12 V is applied to the inverting input of OPMAP. Assume that the output of the OPAMP swings from +15 V to 15 V. The voltage at the noninverting input switches between
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 70
For the BJT circuit shown, assume that the b of the transistor is very large and VBE = 0.7 V. The mode of operation of the BJT is
4.40
(B) 2 mA (D) 10 mA
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.41
In the OpAmp circuit shown, assume that the diode current follows the equation I = Is exp (V/VT ). For Vi = 2V, V0 = V01, and for Vi = 4V, V0 = V02 . The relationship between V01 and V02 is
The midband voltage gain of the amplifier is approximately (A) 180 (B) 120 (C) 90 (D) 60
2007 ONE MARK
4.47
4.42
In the CMOS inverter circuit shown, if the trans conductance parameters of the NMOS and PMOS transistors are W kn = kp = mn Cox Wn = mCox p = 40mA/V2 Ln Lp and their threshold voltages ae VTHn = VTHp = 1 V the current I is
4.43
In a transconductance amplifier, it is desirable to have (A) a large input resistance and a large output resistance (B) a large input resistance and a small output resistance (C) a small input resistance and a large output resistance (D) a small input resistance and a small output resistance
2007 TWO MARKS
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
4.44
(A) 0 A (C) 45 m A
4.48
(B) 25 m A (D) 90 m A
For the Zener diode shown in the figure, the Zener voltage at knee is 7 V, the knee current is negligible and the Zener dynamic resistance
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 71
is 10 W . If the input voltage (Vi) range is from 10 to 16 V, the output voltage (V0) ranges from
4.54
For the circuit shown below, assume that the zener diode is ideal with a breakdown voltage of 6 volts. The waveform observed across R is
4.49
The transfer function V0 (s)/ Vi (s) is (A) 1  sRC (B) 1 + sRC 1 + sRC 1  sRC 1 1 (C) (D) 1  sRC 1 + sRC If Vi = V1 sin (wt) and V0 = V2 sin (wt + f), then the minimum and maximum values of f (in radians) are respectively (B) 0 and p (A)  p and p 2 2 2 (C)  p and 0 (D)  p and 0 2
2006 ONE MARK
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.50
4.51
The input impedance (Zi) and the output impedance (Z0) of an ideal transconductance (voltage controlled current source) amplifier are (B) Zi = 0, Z0 = 3 (A) Zi = 0, Z0 = 0 (C) Zi = 3, Z0 = 0 (D) Zi = 3, Z0 = 3 An nchannel depletion MOSFET has following two points on its ID  VGs curve: (i) VGS = 0 at ID = 12 mA and (ii) VGS = 6 Volts at ID = 0 mA Which of the following Q point will given the highest trans conductance gain for small signals? (B) VGS = 3 Volts (A) VGS = 6 Volts (C) VGS = 0 Volts (D) VGS = 3 Volts
2006 TWO MARKS
4.52
4.53
For the circuit shown in the following figure, the capacitor C is initially uncharged. At t = 0 the switch S is closed. The Vc across the capacitor at t = 1 millisecond is In the figure shown above, the OPAMP is supplied with ! 15V .
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 72
4.55
Under the DC conditions, the collectororemitter voltage drop is (A) 4.8 Volts (B) 5.3 Volts (C) 6.0 Volts (D) 6.6 Volts If bDC is increased by 10%, the collectortoemitter voltage drop (A) increases by less than or equal to 10% (B) decreases by less than or equal to 10% (C) increase by more than 10% (D) decreases by more than 10% The smallsignal gain of the amplifier vc is vs
(A) 30 kW 4 (C) 40 kW
4.61
4.56
The effect of current shunt feedback in an amplifier is to (A) increase the input resistance and decrease the output resistance (B) increases both input and output resistance (C) decrease both input and output resistance (D) decrease the input resistance and increase the output resistance The cascade amplifier is a multistage configuration of (A) CC  CB (B) CE  CB (C) CB  CC (D) CE  CC
2005 TWO MARKS
4.57
4.62
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) 10 (C) 5.3 (B) 5.3 (D) 10
4.63
In an ideal differential amplifier shown in the figure, a large value of (RE ). (A) increase both the differential and common  mode gains. (B) increases the common mode gain only. (C) decreases the differential mode gain only. (D) decreases the common mode gain only. For an npn transistor connected as shown in figure VBE = 0.7 volts. Given that reverse saturation current of the junction at room temperature 300 K is 10  13 A, the emitter current is
4.64
(A) 30 mA (C) 49 mA
4.65
(B) 39 mA (D) 20 mA
4.58
The power dissipation across the transistor Q1 shown in the figure is (A) 4.8 Watts (B) 5.0 Watts (C) 5.4 Watts (D) 6.0 Watts If the unregulated voltage increases by 20%, the power dissipation across the transistor Q1 (A) increases by 20% (B) increases by 50% (C) remains unchanged (D) decreases by 20%
2005 ONE MARK
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
ideal voltmeter. Which of the following can be calculated ?
4.59
4.60
The input resistance Ri of the amplifier shown in the figure is (A) Bias current of the inverting input only (B) Bias current of the inverting and noninverting inputs only
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 73
(C) Input offset current only (D) Both the bias currents and the input offset current
4.66
The Opamp circuit shown in the figure is filter. The type of filter and its cut. Off frequency are respectively
4.70
(A) high pass, 1000 rad/sec. (C) high pass, 1000 rad/sec
4.67
(B) Low pass, 1000 rad/sec (D) low pass, 10000 rad/sec
4.71
The circuit using a BJT with b = 50 and VBE = 0.7V is shown in the figure. The base current IB and collector voltage by VC and respectively
Zi and Z0 of the circuit are respectively (B) 2 M W and 20 k W (A) 2 M W and 2 k W 11 (C) infinity and 2 M W (D) infinity and 20 k W 11 ID and VDS under DC conditions are respectively (A) 5.625 mA and 8.75 V (B) 1.875 mA and 5.00 V (C) 4.500 mA and 11.00 V (D) 6.250 mA and 7.50 V
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
The Zener diode in the regulator circuit shown in the figure has a Zener voltage of 5.8 volts and a zener knee current of 0.5 mA. The maximum load current drawn from this current ensuring proper functioning over the input voltage range between 20 and 30 volts, is
Transconductance in milliSiemens (mS) and voltage gain of the amplifier are respectively (A) 1.875 mS and 3.41 (B) 1.875 ms and 3.41 (C) 3.3 mS and 6 (D) 3.3 mS and 6 Given the ideal operational amplifier circuit shown in the figure indicate the correct transfer characteristics assuming ideal diodes with zero cutin voltage.
4.73
Both transistors T1 and T2 show in the figure, have a b = 100 , threshold voltage of 1 Volts. The device parameters K1 and K2 of T1 and T2 are, respectively, 36 mA/V2 and 9 m A/V 2 . The output voltage Vo i s
(A) 1 V (C) 3 V
(B) 2 V (D) 4 V
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 74
2004
4.74
ONE MARK
An ideal opamp is an ideal (A) voltage controlled current source (B) voltage controlled voltage source (C) current controlled current source (D) current controlled voltage source Voltage series feedback (also called seriesshunt feedback) results in (A) increase in both input and output impedances (B) decrease in both input and output impedances (C) increase in input impedance and decrease in output impedance (D) decrease in input impedance and increase in output impedance The circuit in the figure is a
4.79
4.75
(A) 1 mF 2p 1 mF (C) 2p 6
(B) 2p mF (D) 2p 6 mF
4.76
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.80
(A)  Vs R2 (C)  Vs RL
(B) Vs R2 (D) Vs R1
In the voltage regulator shown in the figure, the load current can vary from 100 mA to 500 mA. Assuming that the Zener diode is ideal (i.e., the Zener knee current is negligibly small and Zener resistance is zero in the breakdown region), the value of R is
4.81
(A) 7 W (B) 70 W (D) 14 W (C) 70 W 3 In a fullwave rectifier using two ideal diodes, Vdc and Vm are the dc and peak values of the voltage respectively across a resistive load. If PIV is the peak inverse voltage of the diode, then the appropriate
A bipolar transistor is operating in the active region with a collector current of 1 mA. Assuming that the b of the transistor is 100 and the thermal voltage (VT ) is 25 mV, the transconductance (gm) and the input resistance (rp) of the transistor in the common emitter configuration, are (A) gm = 25 mA/V and rp = 15.625 kW (B) gm = 40 mA/V and rp = 4.0 k W (C) gm = 25 mA/V and rp = 2.5 k W (D) gm = 40 mA/V and rp = 2.5 k W The value of C required for sinusoidal oscillations of frequency 1 kHz in the circuit of the figure is
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
relationships for this rectifier are (A) Vdc = Vm , PIV = 2Vm (B) Idc = 2 Vm , PIV = 2Vm p p (C) Vdc = 2 Vm , PIV = Vm (D) Vdc Vm , PIV = Vm p p Assume that the b of transistor is extremely large and VBE = 0.7V, IC and VCE in the circuit shown in the figure
4.82
4.78
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 75
resistance of the currentshunt negative feedback amplifier using the above amplifier with a feedback factor of 0.2, is (B) 1 kW (A) 1 kW 5 11 (C) 5 kW
4.89
(D) 11 kW
(B) IC = 0.5 mA, VCE = 3.75 V (D) IC = 0.5 mA, VCE = 3.9 V
ONE MARK
In the amplifier circuit shown in the figure, the values of R1 and R2 are such that the transistor is operating at VCE = 3 V and IC = 1.5 mA when its b is 150. For a transistor with b of 200, the operating point (VCE , IC ) is
Choose the correct match for input resistance of various amplifier configurations shown below : Configuration Input resistance CB : Common Base LO : Low CC : Common Collector MO : Moderate CE : Common Emitter HI : High (A) CB  LO, CC  MO, CE  HI (B) CB  LO, CC  HI, CE  MO (C) CB  MO, CC  HI, CE  LO (D) CB  HI, CC  LO, CE  MO The circuit shown in the figure is best described as a
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.84
The oscillator circuit shown in the figure has an ideal inverting amplifier. Its frequency of oscillation (in Hz) is
If the input to the ideal comparators shown in the figure is a sinusoidal signal of 8 V (peak to peak) without any DC component, then the output of the comparators has a duty cycle of 1 (2p 6 RC) 1 (C) ( 6 RC) (A) (A) 1/2 (C) 1/6 (B) 1/3 (D) 1/2
4.91
(B) (D)
1 (2pRC) 6 (2pRC)
4.86
If the differential voltage gain and the common mode voltage gain of a differential amplifier are 48 dB and 2 dB respectively, then common mode rejection ratio is (A) 23 dB (B) 25 dB (C) 46 dB (D) 50 dB Generally, the gain of a transistor amplifier falls at high frequencies due to the (A) internal capacitances of the device (B) coupling capacitor at the input (C) skin effect (D) coupling capacitor at the output
4.92
The output voltage of the regulated power supply shown in the figure is
4.87
(A) 3 V (C) 9 V
(B) 6 V (D) 12 V
2003
4.88
TWO MARKS
If the opamp in the figure is ideal, the output voltage Vout will be equal to
An amplifier without feedback has a voltage gain of 50, input resistance of 1 k W and output resistance of 2.5 k W . The input
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 76
(A) 1 V (C) 14 V
4.93
(B) 6 V (D) 17 V
Three identical amplifiers with each one having a voltage gain of 50, input resistance of 1 k W and output resistance of 250 W are cascaded. The opened circuit voltages gain of the combined amplifier is (A) 49 dB (B) 51 dB (C) 98 dB (D) 102 dB An ideal sawtooth voltages waveform of frequency of 500 Hz and amplitude 3 V is generated by charging a capacitor of 2 m F in every cycle. The charging requires (A) Constant voltage source of 3 V for 1 ms
4.94
2002
4.98
TWO MARKS
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(B) Constant voltage source of 3 V for 2 ms (C) Constant voltage source of 1 mA for 1 ms (D) Constant voltage source of 3 mA for 2 ms
2002
4.95
The circuit in the figure employs positive feedback and is intended to generate sinusoidal oscillation. If at a frequency V (f) 1 = +0c, then to sustain oscillation at this frequency f0, B (f) = 3 f V0 (f) 6
ONE MARK
4.99
In a negative feedback amplifier using voltageseries (i.e. voltagesampling, series mixing) feedback. (A) Ri decreases and R0 decreases (B) Ri decreases and R0 increases (C) Ri increases and R0 decreases (D) Ri increases and R0 increases (Ri and R0 denote the input and output resistance respectively) A 741type opamp has a gainbandwidth product of 1 MHz. A noninverting amplifier suing this opamp and having a voltage gain of 20 dB will exhibit a 3 dB bandwidth of (A) 50 kHz (B) 100 kHz (D) 1000 kHz (C) 1000 kHz 7.07 17 Three identical RCcoupled transistor amplifiers are cascaded. If each of the amplifiers has a frequency response as shown in the figure, the overall frequency response is as given in
An amplifier using an opamp with a slewrate SR = 1 V/m sec has a gain of 40 dB. If this amplifier has to faithfully amplify sinusoidal signals from dc to 20 kHz without introducing any slewrate induced distortion, then the input signal level must not exceed. (A) 795 mV (B) 395 mV (C) 79.5 mV (D) 39.5 mV A zener diode regulator in the figure is to be designed to meet the specifications: IL = 10 mA V0 = 10 V and Vin varies from 30 V to 50 V. The zener diode has Vz = 10 V and Izk (knee current) =1 mA. For
4.100
4.96
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
satisfactory operation
4.97
The voltage gain Av = v0 of the JFET amplifier shown in the figure vt is IDSS = 10 mA Vp = 5 V(Assume C1, C2 and Cs to be very large
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 77
4 (A) Hartely oscillator with foscillation = 79.6 MHz (B) Colpitts oscillator with foscillation = 50.3 MHz (C) Hartley oscillator with foscillation = 159.2 MHz (D) Colpitts oscillator with foscillation = 159.3 MHz
4.108
(B)
gm r g (D) m rp
4.103
Thee ideal OPAMP has the following characteristics. (B) Ri = 0, A = 3, R0 = 0 (A) Ri = 3, A = 3, R0 = 0 (C) Ri = 3, A = 3, R0 = 3 (D) Ri = 0, A = 3, R0 = 3 Consider the following two statements : Statement 1 : A stable multi vibrator can be used for generating square wave. Statement 2: Bistable multi vibrator can be used for storing binary information. (A) Only statement 1 is correct (B) Only statement 2 is correct (C) Both the statements 1 and 2 are correct (D) Both the statements 1 and 2 are incorrect
2001 TWO MARKS
14 13
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.104
4.105
An npn BJT has gm = 38 mA/V, C m = 10 F, C p = 4 # 10 and DC current gain b0 = 90 . For this transistor fT and fb are (A) fT = 1.64 # 108 Hz and fb = 1.47 # 1010 Hz (B) fT = 1.47 # 1010 Hz and fb = 1.64 # 108 Hz (C) fT = 1.33 # 1012 Hz and fb = 1.47 # 1010 Hz (D) fT = 1.47 # 1010 Hz and fb = 1.33 # 1012 Hz
F,
(B)  9 (D)  11
In the figure assume the OPAMPs to be ideal. The output v0 of the circuit is
4.106
The transistor shunt regulator shown in the figure has a regulated output voltage of 10 V, when the input varies from 20 V to 30 V. The relevant parameters for the zener diode and the transistor are : Vz = 9.5 , VBE = 0.3 V, b = 99 , Neglect the current through RB . Then the maximum power dissipated in the zener diode (Pz ) and the transistor (PT ) are
(B) 10
cos (100t) dt # 0
cos (100t) dt # 0
In the differential amplifier of the figure, if the source resistance of the current source IEE is infinite, then the commonmode gain is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 78
(A) precision integrator (B) Hartely oscillator (C) Butterworth high pass filter (D) Wienbridge oscillator Assume that the opamp of the figure is ideal. If vi is a triangular wave, then v0 will be
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) 1 V (C) +1 V
4.112
The most commonly used amplifier is sample and hold circuits is (A) a unity gain inverting amplifier (B) a unity gain noninverting amplifier (C) an inverting amplifier with a gain of 10 (D) an inverting amplifier with a gain of 100
2000 TWO MARKS
Introducing a resistor in the emitter of a common amplifier stabilizes the dc operating point against variations in (A) only the temperature (B) only the b of the transistor (C) both temperature and b (D) none of the above The current gain of a bipolar transistor drops at high frequencies because of (A) transistor capacitances (B) high current effects in the base (C) parasitic inductive elements (D) the Early effect If the opamp in the figure, is ideal, then v0 is
4.118
In the circuit of figure, assume that the transistor is in the active region. It has a large b and its baseemitter voltage is 0.7 V. The value of Ic is
4.113
4.114
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) zero (C)  (V1 + V2) sin wt
4.115
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
4.125
Page 79
A dc power supply has a noload voltage of 30 V, and a fullload voltage of 25 V at a fullload current of 1 A. Its output resistance and load regulation, respectively, are (A) 5 W and 20% (B) 25 W and 20% (C) 5 W and 16.7% (D) 25 W and 16.7%
1998 ONE MARK
4.126
If the opamp in the figure has an input offset voltage of 5 mV and an openloop voltage gain of 10000, then v0 will be (A) current series (C) voltage series (A) 0 V (C) + 15 V or 15 V
1999
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.120
The first dominant pole encountered in the frequency response of a compensated opamp is approximately at (A) 5 Hz (B) 10 kHz (C) 1 MHz (D) 100 MHz Negative feedback in an amplifier (A) reduces gain (B) increases frequency and phase distortions (C) reduces bandwidth (D) increases noise In the cascade amplifier shown in the given figure, if the commonemitter stage (Q1) has a transconductance gm1 , and the common base stage (Q2) has a transconductance gm2 , then the overall transconductance g (= i 0 /vi) of the cascade amplifier is
4.121
In a differential amplifier, CMRR can be improved by using an increased (A) emitter resistance (B) collector resistance (C) power supply voltages (D) source resistance From a measurement of the rise time of the output pulse of an amplifier whose is a small amplitude square wave, one can estimate the following parameter of the amplifier (A) gainbandwidth product (B) slow rate (C) upper 3dB frequency (D) lower 3dB frequency The emitter coupled pair of BJTs given a linear transfer relation between the differential output voltage and the differential output voltage and the differential input voltage Vid is less a times the thermal voltage, where a is (A) 4 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 1 In a shuntshunt negative feedback amplifier, as compared to the basic amplifier (A) both, input and output impedances,decrease (B) input impedance decreases but output impedance increases (C) input impedance increase but output (D) both input and output impedances increases.
1998 TWO MARKS
4.128
4.122
4.129
4.130
Crossover distortion behavior is characteristic of (A) Class A output stage (B) Class B output stage (C) Class AB output stage (D) Commonbase output stage
1999 TWO MARK
4.131
4.124
An amplifier has an openloop gain of 100, an input impedance of 1 kW ,and an output impedance of 100 W . A feedback network with a feedback factor of 0.99 is connected to the amplifier in a voltage series feedback mode. The new input and output impedances, respectively, are (A) 10 W and 1W (B) 10 W and 10 kW (C) 100 kW and 1 W (D) 100 kW and 1 kW
A multistage amplifier has a lowpass response with three real poles at s = w1  w2 and w3 . The approximate overall bandwidth B of the amplifier will be given by (B) 1 = 1 + 1 + 1 (A) B = w1 + w2 + w3 w1 w2 w3 B (C) B = (w1 + w2 + w3) 1/3 (D) B =
2 2 w1 + w2 2 + w3
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
4.132
Page 80
One input terminal of high gain ground and a sinusoidal voltage output of comparator will be (A) a sinusoid (C) a half rectified sinusoid
comparator circuit is connected to is applied to the other input. The (B) a full rectified sinusoid (D) a square wave
4.133
In a series regulated power supply circuit, the voltage gain Av of the pass transistor satisfies the condition (B) 1 << Av < 3 (A) Av " 3 (C) Av . 1 (D) Av << 1 For full wave rectification, a four diode bridge rectifier is claimed to have the following advantages over a two diode circuit : (A) less expensive transformer, (B) smaller size transformer, and (C) suitability for higher voltage application. Of these, (A) only (1) and (2) are true (B) only (1) and (3) are true (A) decrease the voltage gain and decrease the input impedance (B) increase the voltage gain and decrease the input impedance (C) decrease the voltage gain and increase the input impedance (D) increase the voltage gain and increase the input impedance
4.138
4.134
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) only (2) and (3) are true (D) (1), (2) as well as (3) are true
4.135
A cascade amplifier stags is equivalent to (A) a common emitter stage followed by a common base stage (B) a common base stage followed by an emitter follower (C) an emitter follower stage followed by a common base stage (D) a common base stage followed by a common emitter stage In a common emitter BJT amplifier, the maximum usable supply voltage is limited by (A) Avalanche breakdown of BaseEmitter junction (B) CollectorBase breakdown voltage with emitter open (BVCBO) (C) CollectorEmitter breakdown voltage with base open (BVCBO) (D) Zener breakdown voltage of the EmitterBase junction
1997 TWO MARKS
4.139
In the MOSFET amplifier of the figure is the signal output V1 and V2 obey the relationship
4.140
In the circuit of in the figure is the current iD through the ideal diode (zero cut in voltage and forward resistance) equals
(A) 0 A (C) 1 A
4.141
For small signal ac operation, a practical forward biased diode can be modelled as (A) a resistance and a capacitance in series (B) an ideal diode and resistance in parallel (C) a resistance and an ideal diode in series (D) a resistance
1997 ONE MARK
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
4.137
In the BJT amplifier shown in the figure is the transistor is based in the forward active region. Putting a capacitor across RE will
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 81
(A)  4 V (C) 5 V
4.142
(B) 6 V (D)  5.5 V with a forward resistance Rf . The resistance is RL . The DC current Vm p (R f + RL) (D) Vm RL (B)
ONE MARK
4.147
A half wave rectifier uses a diode voltage is Vm sin wt and the load is given by (A) Vm 2 RL 2 V m (C) p
1996
4.143
In the circuit of the given figure, assume that the diodes are ideal and the meter is an average indicating ammeter. The ammeter will read
Value of R in the oscillator circuit shown in the given figure, so chosen that it just oscillates at an angular frequency of w . The value of w and the required value of R will respectively be
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
In the circuit shown in the given figure N is a finite gain amplifier with a gain of k , a very large input impedance, and a very low output impedance. The input impedance of the feedback amplifier with the feedback impedance Z connected as shown will be (A) 105 rad/ sec, 2 # 10 4 W (C) 2 # 10 4 rad/ sec, 105 W
4.148
(A) Z b1  1 l k Z (C) (k  1)
4.146
(B) Z (1  k) (D) Z (1  k)
A zener diode in the circuit shown in the figure is has a knee current of 5 mA, and a maximum allowed power dissipation of 300 mW . What are the minimum and maximum load currents that can be drawn safely from the circuit, keeping the output voltage V0 constant at 6 V?
A Darlington stage is shown in the figure. If the transconductance of c Q1 is gm1 and Q2 is gm2 , then the overall transconductance gmc ; T ic c E vbe is given by
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 82
***********
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 83
SOLUTIONS
4.1
Option (B) is correct. For the given ideal opamp, negative terminal will be also ground (at zero voltage) and so, the collector terminal of the BJT will be at zero voltage. i.e., VC = 0 volt The current in 1 kW resistor is given by I = 5  0 = 5 mA 1 kW This current will flow completely through the BJT since, no current will flow into the ideal opamp ( I/P resistance of ideal opamp is infinity). So, for BJT we have VC = 0 VB = 0 IC = 5 mA i.e.,the base collector junction is reverse biased (zero voltage) therefore, the collector current ( IC ) can have a value only if baseemitter is forward biased. Hence, VBE = 0.7 volts & VB  VE = 0.7 & 0  Vout = 0.7 or, Vout = 0.7 volt
(1) Since, voltage across zener diode is 5 V so, current through 100 W resistor is obtained as Is = 10  5 = 0.05 A 100 Therefore, the load current is given by IL = 5 RL Since, for proper operation, we must have IZ $ Iknes So, from Eq. (1), we write 0.05 A  5 $ 10 mA RL 50 mA  5 $ 10 mA RL 40 mA $ 5 RL 3 40 # 10 $ 5 RL
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.2
Option (A) is correct. The i/p voltage of the system is given as Vin = V1 + Vf = V1 + k Vout = V1 + k A 0 V1 ^Vout = A 0 V1h = V1 ^1 + k A 0h Therefore, if k is increased then input voltage is also increased so, the input impedance increases. Now, we have Vout = A 0 V1 Vin = A0 ^1 + k A 0h A 0 Vin = ^1 + k A 0h Since, Vin is independent of k when seen from output mode, the output voltage decreases with increase in k that leads to the decrease of output impedance. Thus, input impedance increases and output impedance decreases. Option (B) is correct.
Option (A) is correct. For the given circuit, we obtain the small signal model as shown in figure below :
4.3
We obtain the node voltage at V1 as V1 + V1 + gm Vi = 0 RD R + 1 L sC & From the circuit, we have or, Is = IZ + I L IZ = Is  I L V1 =  gm Vi 1 + 1 RD R + 1 L sC
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 84
4.6
V0 = V1 RL RL + 1 sC = RL RL + 1 sC  gm Vi J K 1 1 K RD + K RL + 1 sC L N O O O P
so, the transfer function is V0 =  RD RL sCgm Vi 1 + sC ^RD + RL h 1 Then, we have the pole at w = C ^RD + RL h It gives the lower cutoff frequency of transfer function. 1 i.e., w0 = C ^RD + RL h 1 or, f0 = 2pC ^RD + RL h 1 = 2p # 106 # 20 # 103 = 7.97 . 8 Hz
4.5
Option (B) is correct. For the given circuit, we can make the truth table as below X Y Z 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 Logic 0 means voltage is v = 0 volt and logic 1 means voltage is 5 volt For x = 0 , y = 0 , Transistor is at cut off mode and diode is forward biased. Since, there is no drop across forward biased diode. So, Z =Y=0 For x = 0 , y = 1, Again Transistor is in cutoff mode, and diode is forward biased. with no current flowing through resistor. So, Z =Y=1 For x = 1, y = 0 , Transistor is in saturation mode and so, z directly connected to ground irrespective of any value of Y . i.e., Z = 0 (ground) Similarly for X = Y = 1 Z = 0 (ground) Hence, from the obtained truth table, we get Z =XY
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.7
Option (D) is correct. Given, the input voltage VYZ = 100 sin wt
For + ve half cycle VYZ > 0 i.e., VY is a higher voltage than VZ So, the diode will be in cutoff region. Therefore, there will no voltage difference between X and W node. i.e., VWX = 0 Now, for  ve half cycle all the four diodes will active and so, X and W terminal is short circuited For the given ideal opAmps we can assume V 2 = V 2+ = V2 (ideal) V 1+ = V 1 = V1 (ideal) So, by voltage division V1 = Vout # 1 2 Vout = 2V1 and, as the I/P current in Opamp is always zero therefore, there will be no voltage drop across 1 KW in II opamp i.e., V2 = 1 V Therefore, V1  V2 = V2  ^ 2h 1 1 & V1  1 = 1 + 2 or, V1 = 4 Hence, Vout = 2V1 = 8 volt
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
i.e., Hence,
4.8
VTh = VCC
R2 R1 + R 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 85
3R2 R1 + R 2 and RTh = R2 R1 R 2 + R1 Since, IC = bIB has b . 3 (very high) so, IB is negative in comparison to IC . Therefore, we can write the base voltage VB = VTh So, VTh  0.7  IC RE = 0 = or, or, or, or, Hence,
4.9
The peak rectifier adds + 1 V to peak voltage, so overall peak voltage lowers down by  1 volt. So, vo = cos wt  1
4.12
Option (A) is correct. We put a test source between terminal 1, 2 to obtain equivalent impedance
4.10
Option (C) is correct. Given ib = 1 + 0.1 cos (1000pt) mA So, IB = DC component of ib = 1 mA In small signal model of the transistor bVT VT " Thermal voltage rp = IC IC = I = VT = VT B I b IC /b B = VT IB So, rp = 25 mV = 25 W VT = 25 mV, IB = 1 mA 1 mA Option (D) is correct. Let v > 0.7 V and diode is forward biased. By applying Kirchoffs voltage law 10  i # 1k  v = 0 10  :v  0.7 D (1000)  v = 0 500 10  (v  0.7) # 2  v = 0 10  3v + 1.4 = 0 v = 11.4 = 3.8 V > 0.7 3 i = v  0.7 = 3.8  0.7 = 6.2 mA 500 500
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
ZTh = Vtest Itest (Assumption is true) Applying KCL at top right node Vtest + Vtest  99I = I test b 9 k + 1k 100 Vtest + Vtest  99I = I test b 10 k 100 ...(i) But Ib = Vtest =Vtest 9k + 1k 10k
So,
4.11
Option (A) is correct. The circuit composed of a clamper and a peak rectifier as shown.
Substituting Ib into equation (i), we have Vtest + Vtest + 99Vtest = I test 10 k 100 10 k 100Vtest + Vtest = I test 10 # 103 100 2Vtest = I test 100 ZTh = Vtest = 50 W Itest Option (B) is correct. First we obtain the transfer function.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 86
IC  IE = 13.7  VC = (b + 1) IB 12k 13.7  VC = 100I ...(ii) B 12 # 103 Solving equation (i) and (ii), IB = 0.01 mA 0  Vi (jw) 0  Vo (jw) + =0 1 +R R2 1 jwC Vo (jw)  Vi (jw) = 1 +R R2 1 j wC Vo (jw) =At w " 0 (Low frequencies), At w " 3 (higher frequencies) Vi (jw) R2 R1  j 1 wC 1 " 3, so V = 0 o wC Small Signal Analysis : Transforming given input voltage source into equivalent current source.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The filter passes high frequencies so it is a high pass filter. H (jw) = Vo =  R2 Vi R1  j 1 wC R R 2 2 = H (3) = R1 R1 At 3 dB frequency, gain will be
6H (3)@
So,
H ^ jw0h = 1 H (3) 2 R2 R2 1 = b l 2 2 R1 R1 + 21 2 w0 C
2 2 2R 1 = R1 +
This is a shuntshunt feedback amplifier. Given parameters, rp = VT = 25 mV = 2.5 kW IB 0.01 mA b 100 = 0.04 s gm = = rp 2.5 # 1000 Writing KCL at output node v0 + g v + v0  vp = 0 m p RC RF v 0 : 1 + 1 D + v p :gm  1 D = 0 RC RF RF Substituting RC = 12 kW, RF = 100 kW, gm = 0.04 s v 0 (9.33 # 105) + v p (0.04) = 0 v 0 = 428.72Vp ...(i) Writing KCL at input node vi = v p + v p + v p  vo Rs Rs rp RF vi = v 1 + 1 + 1  v 0 p: Rs Rs rp RF D RF vi = v (5.1 104)  v 0 # p Rs RF Substituting Vp from equation (i) vi =  5.1 # 104 v  v 0 0 428.72 Rs RF vi = 1.16 # 106 v 0  1 # 105 v 0 10 # 103 Rs = 10 kW
1 w C2
2 0
4.14
R = 21 2 w C w0 = 1 R1 C
2 1
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(source resistance) vi = 1.116 # 105 10 # 103 1  8.96 Av = v 0 = 3 vi 10 # 10 # 1.116 # 105
4.15
Option (A) is correct. For the parallel RLC circuit resonance frequency is, 1 wr = 1 = = 10 M rad/s 6 LC 10 # 10 # 1 # 109 Thus given frequency is resonance frequency and parallel RLC circuit has maximum impedance at resonance frequency
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 87
Gain of the amplifier is gm # (ZC RL) where ZC is impedance of parallel RLC circuit. At w = wr , ZC = R = 2 kW = ZC max . Hence at this frequency (wr ), gain is Gain w = w = gm (ZC RL) = gm (2k 2k) = gm # 103 which is maximum. Therefore gain is maximum at wr = 10 M rad/ sec .
r
4.16
Option (C) is correct. In active region VBEon = 0.7 V Emitter voltage VE = VB  VBEon = 5.7 V V  ( 10)  5.7  ( 10) Emitter Current = = 1 mA IE = E 4.3k 4.3k Now IC . IE = 1 mA Applying KCL at collector Since or i1 = 0.5 mA i1 = C dVC dt VC = 1 # i1 dt = i1 t C C
...(1)
From diagram we can write Ii = Vo + Vo R1 sL1 Transfer function H (s) = Vo = sR1 L1 I1 R1 + sL1 jwR1 L1 H (jw) = R 1 + j wL 1 H (jw) = 0 H (jw) = R1 = constant . Hence HPF.
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
or At w = 0 At w = 3
4.17
For transistor M2 , VGS = VG  VS = Vx  0 = Vx VDS = VD  VS = Vx  0 = Vx Since VGS  VT = Vx  1 < VDS , thus M2 is in saturation. By assuming M1 to be in saturation we have IDS (M ) = IDS (M ) mn C 0x m C (4) (5  Vx  1) 2 = n 0x 1 (Vx  1) 2 2 2
1 2
with time, the capacitor charges and voltage across collector changes from 0 towards negative. When saturation starts, VCE = 0.7 & VC =+ 5 V (across capacitor) Thus from (1) we get, + 5 = 0.5 mA T 5 mA or
4.20
4 (4  Vx ) 2 = (Vx  1) 2 2 (4  Vx ) = ! (Vx  1)
4.21
Option (A) is correct. The current flows in the circuit if all the diodes are forward biased. In forward biased there will be 0.7 V drop across each diode. 12.7  4 (0.7) Thus = 1 mA IDC = 9900 Option (B) is correct. The forward resistance of each diode is r = VT = 25 mV = 25 W IC 1 mA 4 (r) Thus Vac = Vi # e 4 (r) + 9900 o = 100 mV cos (wt) 0.01 = 1 cos (wt) mV
6 T = 5 # 5 # 10 = 50 m sec 3 0.5 # 10
4.22
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 88
4.24
Input impedance Ri = RB  r p Voltage gain AV = gm RC Now, if CE is disconnected, resistance RE appears in the circuit So, or
4.25
0  Vi + 0  Vo = 0 R1 R2 Vo = R2 R1 Vi
Input impedance
R in = RB  [rp + (b + 1)] RE
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.26
Input resistance seen by source vs R in = vs = Rs + Rs  rs is = (1000 W) + (93 kW  259 W) = 1258 W Option (B) is correct. Cutoff frequency due to C2 fo = fo 1 = 271 Hz 2 # 3.14 # 1250 # 4.7 # 106 Lower cutoff frequency f fL . o = 271 = 27.1 Hz 10 10 =
4.27
AV =
gm RC 1 + gm R E
1 2p (RC + RL) C2
Option (B) is correct. Since, emitter area of transistor Q1 is half of transistor Q2 , so current IE = 1 IE and IB = 1 IB 2 2
1 2 1 2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
1 = (700 + 1 + 1) IB . 2 702
2
IB + IB 2
2
I 0 = IC = b 2 : IB = 715 # 2 . 2 mA 702
2 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 89
I = 20  0 + Vi  0 = 5 + Vi 4R R R If I > 0, diode D2 conducts So, for 5 + VI > 0 & VI >  5, D2 conducts 2 Equivalent circuit is shown below Current
4.33
Thus
IC = 10  5 = 1 mA 5k
IE = IC VE = IE RE = 1m # 1.4k = 1.4V = 0.6 + 1.4 = 2V Thus the feedback is negative and output voltage is V = 2V . Option (D) is correct. The output voltage is V0 = Ar Vi . Here RC = 3 W and hie = 3 kW Thus hfe RC Vi hie
Output is Vo = 0 . If I < 0 , diode D2 will be off 5 + VI < 0 & V <  5, D is off I 2 R The circuit is shown below
4.34
V0 .  150 # 3k Vi 3k
.  150 (A cos 20t + B sin 106 t) Since coupling capacitor is large so low frequency signal will be filtered out, and best approximation is V0 .  150B sin 106 t Option (C) is correct.
0  Vi + 0  20 + 0  Vo = 0 R 4R R or At Vi = 5 V, At Vi = 10 V,
4.28
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Vo = Vi  5 Vo = 0 Vo = 5 V
Option (A) is correct. Let diode be OFF. In this case 1 A current will flow in resistor and voltage across resistor will be V = 1.V Diode is off, it must be in reverse biased, therefore Vi  1 > 0 " Vi > 1 Thus for Vi > 1 diode is off and V = 1V Option (B) and (C) doesnt satisfy this condition. Let Vi < 1. In this case diode will be on and voltage across diode will be zero and V = Vi Thus V = min (Vi, 1) Option (A) is correct. The R2 decide only the frequency. Option (D) is correct. For small increase in VG beyond 1 V the n  channel MOSFET goes into saturation as VGS " + ive and p  MOSFET is always in active region or triode region. Option (C) is correct. Option (D) is correct. The circuit is shown in fig below
4.29
4.30
Hence
4.36
Ix = Ibias
4.31 4.32
Option (B) is correct. The circuit is using ideal OPAMP. The non inverting terminal of OPAMP is at ground, thus inverting terminal is also at virtual ground.
Thus current will flow from ive terminal (0 Volt) to 1 Volt source. Thus the current I is 0  ( 1) I = = 1 100k 100k The voltage at non inverting terminal is 5 V because OP AMP is ideal and inverting terminal is at 5 V. The current through diode is I = I 0 _eV  1i
V
t
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 90
Option (B) is correct. The circuit is using ideal OPAMP. The non inverting terminal of OPAMP is at ground, thus inverting terminal is also at virtual ground.
The Thevenin resistance and voltage are VTH = 10 # 9 = 3 V 10 + 20 and total RTH = 10k # 20k = 6.67 k W 10k + 20k Since b is very large, therefore IB is small and can be ignored Thus IE = VTH  VBE = 3  0.7 = 1 mA RE 2.3k
4.41
Option (D) is correct. The small signal model is shown in fig below
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Thus we can write vi = R1 + sL or
R2 sR2 C2 + 1
gm =
IC = 1m = 1 A/V VT 25m 25
IC . IE
Vp = Vin
v
= 60Vin Am = Vo = 60 Vin
and from this equation it may be easily seen that this is the standard form of T.F. of low pass filter K H (s) = (R1 + sL)( sR2 C2 + 1) and form this equation it may be easily seen that this is the standard form of T.F. of low pass filter H (s) = 2 K as + bs + b
4.38
Option (C) is correct. The circuit shown in (C) is correct full wave rectifier circuit.
4.43
Option ( ) is correct. The current in both transistor are equal. Thus gm is decide by M1. Hence (C) is correct option. Option (C) is correct. Let the voltage at non inverting terminal be V1, then after applying KCL at non inverting terminal side we have 15  V1 + V0  V1 = V1  ( 15) 10 10 10 or V1 = V0 3 If V0 swings from 15 to +15 V then V1 swings between 5 V to +5 V.
Option (A) is correct. In the transconductance amplifier it is desirable to have large input resistance and large output resistance.
4.39
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
4.44
4.40
Option (A) is correct. For the given DC values the Thevenin equivalent circuit is as follows Applying voltage division rule v+ = 0.5 V
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 91
The range of current through 200 k W is 3 = 15 mA to 9 = 45 mA 200k 200k The range of variation in output voltage 15m # RZ = 0.15 V to 45m # RZ = 0.45 Thus the range of output voltage is 7.15 Volt to 7.45 Volt Option (A) is correct. The voltage at noninverting terminal is V+ = Now
1 R + sC 1 sC
Option (B) is correct. If we assume b very large, then IB = 0 and IE = IC ; VBE = 0.7 V. We assume that BJT is in active, so applying KVL in Baseemitter loop IE = 2  VBE = 2  0.7 = 1.3 mA RE 1k Since b is very large, we have IE = IC , thus IC = 1.3 mA Now applying KVL in collectoremitter loop 10  10IC  VCE  IC = 0 or VCE = 4.3 V Now VBC = VBE  VCE = 0.7  ( 4.3) = 5 V Since VBC > 0.7 V, thus transistor in saturation.
Vi =
1 V 1 + sCR i
V = V+ =
1 V 1 + sCR i
4.46
Option (D) is correct. Here the inverting terminal is at virtual ground and the current in resistor and diode current is equal i.e. IR = ID or or Vi = I eV /V s R VD = VT 1n Vi Is R
D T
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Applying voltage division rule (V + Vi) V+ = R1 (V0 + Vi) = o R1 + R1 2 (Vo + Vi) 1 or V = 1 + sCR i 2 Vo = 1 + 2 or Vi 1 + sRC
For the first condition VD = 0  Vo1 = VT 1n 2 Is R For the first condition VD = 0  Vo1 = VT 1n 4 Is R Subtracting above equation Vo1  Vo2 = VT 1n 4  VT 1n 2 Is R Is R Vo1  Vo2 = VT 1n 4 = VT 1n2 2
Option (C) is correct. V0 = H (s) = 1  sRC Vi 1 + sRC 1  jwRC H (jw) = 1 + jwRC +H (jw) = f = tan  1 wRC  tan  1 wRC Minimum value, Maximum value, fmin fmax = 2 tan  2 wRC =  p (at w " 3) = 0( at w = 0)
or
4.47
4.51
Option (D) is correct. We have Vthp = Vthp = 1 V WP W and = N = 40mA/V2 LP LN From figure it may be easily seen that Vas for each NMOS and PMOS is 2.5 V mA Thus ID = K (Vas  VT ) 2 = 40 2 (2.5  1) 2 = 90 m A V
Option (D) is correct. In the transconductance amplifier it is desirable to have large input impedance and large output impedance. Option (C) is correct. Option (D) is correct. The voltage at inverting terminal is V = V+ = 10 V Here note that current through the capacitor is constant and that is I = V = 10 = 10 mA 1k 1k Thus the voltage across capacitor at t = 1 msec is 1m 1m VC = 1 Idt = 1 10mdt C 0 1m 0 Im 4 = 10 dt = 10 V
4.52 4.53
4.48
Option (C) is correct. We have VZ = 7 volt, VK = 0, RZ = 10W Circuit can be modeled as shown in fig below
# 0
4.54
Since Vi is lies between 10 to 16 V, the range of voltage across 200 kW V200 = Vi  VZ = 3 to 9 volt
Option (A) is correct. In forward bias Zener diode works as normal diode. Thus for negative cycle of input Zener diode is forward biased and it conducts giving VR = Vin .
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 92
For positive cycle of input Zener diode is reversed biased when 0 < Vin < 6 , Diode is OFF and VR = 0 when Vin > 6 Diode conducts and voltage across diode is 6 V. Thus voltage across is resistor is VR = Vin  6 Only option (B) satisfy this condition.
4.55
Option (C) is correct. The circuit under DC condition is shown in fig below
Option (B) is correct. If the unregulated voltage increase by 20%, them the unregulated voltage is 18 V, but the VZ = Vin = 6 remain same and hence Vout and IC remain same. There will be change in VCE Thus, VCE  18  9 = 9 V IC = 0.9 A Power dissipation P = VCE IC = 9 # 0.9 = 8.1 W Thus % increase in power is 8.1  5.4 # 100 = 50% 5.4
4.60
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
and VCC  RB IB  VBE = 0 Substituting IC = bIB in (1) we have VCC  RC (bIB + IB)  VCE = 0 Solving (2) and (3) we get VCE = VCC  VCC  VBE RB 1+ RC (1 + b) Now substituting values we get 12  0.7 = 5.95 V VCE = 12 53 1+ 1 + (1 + 60)
4.56
Option (B) is correct. Since the inverting terminal is at virtual ground, the current flowing through the voltage source is Is = Vs 10k Vs = 10 kW = R or in Is Option (D) is correct. The effect of current shunt feedback in an amplifier is to decrease the input resistance and increase the output resistance as : Rif = Ri 1 + Ab where Rof = R0 (1 + Ab) Ri " Input resistance without feedback Rif " Input resistance with feedback.
4.61
Option (B) is correct. The CE configuration has high voltage gain as well as high current gain. It performs basic function of amplifications. The CB configuration has lowest Ri and highest Ro . It is used as last step to match a very low impedance source and to drain a high impedance load Thus cascade amplifier is a multistage configuration of CECB Option (D) is correct. Common mode gain ACM = RC 2RE And differential mode gain ADM = gm RC
4.63
Substituting b' = 66 with other values in (iv) in previous solutions 12  0.7 = 5.29 V VCE = 12 53 1+ 1 + (1 + 66) Thus change is
4.57 4.58
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Thus only common mode gain depends on RE and for large value of RE it decreases.
4.64
Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. The Zener diode is in breakdown region, thus V+ = VZ = 6 V = Vin R We know that Vo = Vin c1 + f m R1 or Vout = Vo = 6`1 + 12k j = 9 V 24k
c e1 # 26 # 10  1m = 49 mA
3
0.7
IE = Is `e nV  1j
VBE
T
4.65
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 93
or
4.69 4.70
Option (D) is correct. Option (B) is correct. The small signal model is as shown below
Writing equation for I have e 0  V = I 1M or e0 = I (1M) + VWriting equation for I+ we have 0  V+ = I+ 1M or V+ =  I+ (1M) Since for ideal OPAMP V+ = V , from (1) and (2) we have ...(1) From the figure we have Zin = 2 MW ...(2)
4.71
and
Z0 = rd RD = 20k 2k = 20 kW 11
e0 = I (1M)  I + (1M) = (I  I+) (1M) = IOS (1M) Thus if e0 has been measured, we can calculate input offset current IOS only.
4.66
Option (C) is correct. At low frequency capacitor is open circuit and voltage acr s noninverting terminal is zero. At high frequency capacitor act as short circuit and all input voltage appear at noninverting terminal. Thus, this is high pass circuit. The frequency is given by 1 = 1000 w = 1 = 3 RC 1 # 10 # 1 # 10  6 rad/sec Option (B) is correct. The circuit under DC condition is shown in fig below
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.67
Since the FET has high input resistance, gate current can be neglect and we get VGS = 2 V Since VP < VGS < 0 , FET is operating in active region 2 ( 2) 2 Now ID = IDSS c1  VGS m = 10 c1 ( 8) m VP = 5.625 mA Applying KVL we have VCC  RB IB  VBE  RE IE = 0 or VCC  RB IB  VBE  RE (b + 1) IB = 0 Since IE = IB + bIB or IB = VCC  VBE RB + (b + 1) RE 20  0.7 = = 40m A 430k + (50 + 1)1 k Now
4.68 4.72
Now = 8.75 V
Option (B) is correct. The transconductance is gm = or, The gain is So, VP 2 ID IDSS
Option (A) is correct. The maximum load current will be at maximum input voltage i.e. Vmax = 30 V i.e. Vmax  VZ = I + I L Z 1k 30  5.8 = I = 0.5 m or L 1k
Option (B) is correct. Only one diode will be in ON conditions When lower diode is in ON condition, then Vu = 2k Vsat = 2 10 = 8 V 2.5k 2.5 when upper diode is in ON condition
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 94
Option (B) is correct. An ideal OPAMP is an ideal voltage controlled voltage source. Option (C) is correct. In voltage series feed back amplifier, input impedance increases by factor (1 + Ab) and output impedance decreases by the factor (1 + Ab). Rif = Ri (1 + Ab) Ro Rof = (1 + Ab)
4.80
...(2)
4.75
Option (D) is correct. If IZ is negligible the load current is 12  Vz = I L R as per given condition 100 mA # 12  VZ # 500 mA R At IL = 100 mA 12  5 = 100 mA R or R = 70W VZ = 5 V At IL = 500 mA 12  5 = 500 mA R or R = 14 W Thus taking minimum we get R = 14 W
4.76
Option (A) is correct. This is a Low pass filter, because V0 = 0 At w = 3 Vin V0 = 1 and at w = 0 Vin Option (D) is correct. When IC >> ICO
VZ = 5 V
4.77
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
gm = IC = 1mA = 0.04 = 40 mA/V VT 25mV b rp = = 100  3 = 2.5 k W gm 40 # 10
4.81 4.82
Option (B) is correct. Option (C) is correct. The Thevenin equivalent is shown below
4.78
Option (A) is correct. The given circuit is wein bridge oscillator. The frequency of oscillation is 2pf = 1 RC 1 or = 1 m C = 1 = 3 3 2pRf 2p 2p # 10 # 10 Option (A) is correct. The circuit is as shown below
4.83
VT =
R1 V = 1 #5 = 1 V R1 + R2 C 4+1
Since b is large is large, IC . IE , IB . 0 and IE = VT  VBE = 1  0.7 = 3 mA RE 300 Now VCE = 5  2.2kIC  300IE = 5  2.2k # 1m  300 # 1m = 2.5 V
4.79
Option (B) is correct. For the different combinations the table is as follows
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
CE We know that for ideal OPAMP V = V+ Applying KCL at inverting terminal V  Vs + V  V0 = 0 R1 R1 or 2V  Vo = Vs Applying KCL at noninverting terminal V+ V  Vo + IL + + =0 R2 R2 ...(1)
4.84
Ai Av Ri Ro
Option (D) is correct. This circuit having two diode and capacitor pair in parallel, works as voltage doubler. Option (B) is correct.
4.85
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 95
If the input is sinusoidal signal of 8 V (peak to peak) then Vi = 4 sin wt The output of comparator will be high when input is higher than Vref = 2 V and will be low when input is lower than Vref = 2 V. Thus the waveform for input is shown below
4.90
or
R2 = 2kW IB1 = IC1 = 1.5m = 0.01 mA 150 b1 will we equal to IB1 as there is no in R1. IC2 = b2 IB2 = 200 # 0.01 = 2 mA VCE2 = VCC  IC2 R2 = 6  2m # 2 kW = 2 V
Option (A) is correct. The given circuit is a R  C phase shift oscillator and frequency of its oscillation is 1 f = 2p 6 RC Option (C) is correct. If we see th figure we find that the voltage at noninverting terminal is 3 V by the zener diode and voltage at inverting terminal will be 3 V. Thus Vo can be get by applying voltage division rule, i.e. 20 V = 3 20 + 40 o or V0 = 9 V
4.91
From fig, first crossover is at wt1 and second crossover is at wt2 where 4 sin wt1 = 2V Thus wt1 = sin  1 1 = p 2 6 wt2 = p  p = 5p 6 6 5p p 6 Duty Cycle = 6 =1 2p 3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.86
Thus the output of comparators has a duty cycle of 1 . 3 Option (C) is correct. CMMR = Ad Ac or 20 log CMMR = 20 log Ad  20 log Ac = 48  2 = 46 dB Where Ad " Differential Voltage Gain and AC " Common Mode Voltage Gain
4.87
Thus the gain of a transistor amplifier falls at high frequencies due to the internal capacitance that are diffusion capacitance and transition capacitance.
4.88
Option (A) is correct. We have Ri = 1kW, b = 0.2, A = 50 Ri Thus, Rif = = 1 kW (1 + Ab) 11 Option (A) is correct. The DC equivalent circuit is shown as below. This is fixed bias circuit operating in active region.
4.93
4.89
Option (C) is correct. The equivalent circuit of 3 cascade stage is as shown in fig.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 96
or or or
4.94
Option (D) is correct. If a constant current is made to flow in a capacitor, the output voltage is integration of input current and that is sawtooth waveform as below : t VC = 1 idt C 0 The time period of wave form is T = 1 = 1 = 2 m sec f 500
R2 = 5R1
Option (C) is correct. Let the gain of OPAMP be AV then we have 20 log AV = 40 dB or AV = 100 Let input be Vi = Vm sin wt then we have Now Slew Rate or =
6
Thus
3=
3
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.95
Option (C) is correct. In voltageamplifier or voltageseries amplifier, the Ri increase and Ro decrease because Rif = Ri (1 + Ab) Ro Rof = (1 + Ab) I For satisfactory operations Vin  V0 R When Vin = 30 V, 30  10 R 20 or R or when Vin = 50 V = IZ + IL > IZ + IL $ (10 + 1) mA $ 11 mA [IZ + IL = I]
4.96
Option (B) is correct. Let x be the gain and it is 20 db, therefore 20 log x = 20 or x = 10 Since Gain band width product is 106 Hz, thus So, bandwidth is Option (A) is correct. In multistage amplifier bandwidth decrease and overall gain increase. From bandwidth point of view only options (A) may be correct because lower cutoff frequency must be increases and higher must be decreases. From following calculation we have We have fL = 20 Hz and fH = 1 kHz For n stage amplifier the lower cutoff frequency is fL 20 f = = = 39.2 . 40
Ln
R # 1818 W 50  10 $ (10 + 1) mA R
4.97
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
40 $ 11 # 10  3 R or Thus R # 1818W
4.101
1 2n
1
1 23
1
R # 3636W
Option (D) is correct. We have Now and Thus IDSS VG VS VGS = 10 mA and VP = 5 V =0 = ID RS = 1 # 2.5W = 2.5 V = VG  VS = 0  2.5 = 2.5 V
2 2  1 = 0.5 kHz
Option (A) is correct. As per Barkhousen criterion for sustained oscillations Ab $ 1 and phase shift must be or 2pn .
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 97
Now
So,
4.102
1 2p LCeq Ceq = C1 C2 = 2 # 2 = 1 pF C1 + C2 4 1 f = 2p 10 # 10  6 # 10  12 f =
Option (C) is correct. The current gain of a BJT is hfe = gm rp Option (A) is correct. The ideal opamp has following characteristic : Ri " 3 R0 " 0 A"3
4.103
and
4.104
Option (C) is correct. Both statements are correct because (1) A stable multivibrator can be used for generating square wave, because of its characteristic (2) Bistable multivibrator can store binary information, and this multivibrator also give help in all digital kind of storing. Option (B) is correct. If fT is the frequency at which the short circuit common emitter gain attains unity magnitude then gm 38 # 10  3 = fT = 2p (Cm + Cp) 2p # (10  14 + 4 # 10  13) or = 1.47 # 1010 Hz If fB is bandwidth then we have 10 f fB = T = 1.47 # 10 = 1.64 # 108 Hz 90 b Option (C) is correct. If we neglect current through RB then it can be open circuit as shown in fig.
Let V be the voltage of inverting terminal, since non inverting terminal a at ground, the output voltage is
4.105
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.106
4.109
Maximum power will dissipate in Zener diode when current through it is maximum and it will occur at Vin = 30 V I = Vin  Vo = 30  10 = 1 A 20 20 I IC + IZ = bIB + IZ = bIZ + IZ = (b + 1) IZ IZ = I = 1 = 0.01 A 99 + 1 b+1 Since IC = bIB since IB = IZ
From (1) and (2) we have VO = A =  R2 CL Vs R  R2 + R1 ROL Substituting the values we have  10k = 1000 .  11 ACL = 10 89 k 1 k + 1k 100k Option (A) is correct. The first OPAMP stage is the differentiator and second OPAMP stage is integrator. Thus if input is cosine term, output will be also cosine term. Only option (A) is cosine term. Other are sine term. However we can calculate as follows. The circuit is shown in fig
or
Power dissipated in zener diode is PZ = VZ IZ = 9.5 # 0.01 = 95 mW IC = bIZ = 99 # 0.1 = 0.99 A VCE = Vo = 10 V Power dissipated in transistor is PT = VC IC = 10 # 0.99 = 9.9 W
4.107
Option (B) is correct. From the it may be easily seen that the tank circuit is having 2capacitors and oneinductor, so it is colpits oscillator and frequency is
Applying KCL at inverting terminal of first OP AMP we have V1 =  wjL =  100 # 10 # 10  3 =  1 R 10 10 VS  jVS or V1 = = j cos 100t 10 Applying KCL at inverting terminal of second OP AMP we have VO =  1/jwC 100 V1 1 == j10 j100 # 10 # 10  6 # 100
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 98
or
4.110
Option (A) is correct. Common mode gain is AC = aRC REE Since source resistance of the current source is infinite REE = 3 , common mode gain AC = 0 R1 V = 5 # 15 = 5 V R1 + R2 C 10 + 5 Since b is large is large, IC . IE , IB . 0 and IE = VT  VBE RE 4.3 = 5  0.7 = = 10 mA 0.430KW 0.430kW VT =
4.119
4.111
Option (D) is correct. In positive feed back it is working as OPAMP in saturation region, and the input applied voltage is +ve. So, V0 =+ Vsat = 15 V Option (C) is correct. With the addition of RE the DC abis currents and voltages remain closer to the point where they were set by the circuit when the outside condition such as temperature and transistor parameter b change.
4.112
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4.113
Option (C) is correct. The output voltage will be input offset voltage multiplied by open by open loop gain. Thus So V0 = 5mV # 10, 000 = 50 V But V0 = ! 15 V in saturation condition So, it can never be exceeds ! 15 V So, V0 = ! Vset = ! 15V Option (A) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Negative feedback in amplifier reduces the gain of the system. Option (A) is correct. By drawing small signal equivalent circuit
4.120 4.121
4.122
Option (A) is correct. At high frequency gm + jw (C) 1 Ai \ Capacitance 1 Ai a frequency Ai =or, and
' gbc
Thus due to the transistor capacitance current gain of a bipolar transistor drops.
4.114
Option (C) is correct. As OPAMP is ideal, the inverting terminal at virtual ground due to ground at noninverting terminal. Applying KCL at inverting terminal sC (v1 sin wt  0) + sC (V2 sin wt  0) + sC (Vo  0) = 0 or Vo = (V1 + V2) sin wt Option (D) is correct. There is R  C , series connection in parallel with parallel R  C combination. So, it is a wein bridge oscillator because two resistors R1 and R2 is also in parallel with them. Option (A) is correct. The given circuit is a differentiator, so the output of triangular wave will be square wave. Option (B) is correct. In sampling and hold circuit the unity gain noninverting amplifier is used. Option (D) is correct. The Thevenin equivalent is shown below
4.123
Vp = gm2 Vp rp
2 2
i 0 = gm2 Vp
4.115
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
gm1 Vp +
1
4.116
i 0 = i 0 gm2 rp
2
gm1 Vp = i 0 :1 + 1 D gm2 rp
1 2
4.117
4.118
gm2 rp = b >> 1 so gm1 Vp = i 0 i 0 = g m1 Vp i0 = g a Vp = Vi m1 Vi Option (B) is correct. Crossover behavior is characteristic of calss B output stage. Here 2
2 1 1 1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 99
4.133
transistor are operated one for amplifying +ve going portion and other for ve going portion.
4.124
Option (C) is correct. In Voltage series feedback mode input impedance is given by R in = Ri (1 + bv Av) where bv = feedback factor , Av = openloop gain and Ri = Input impedance So, R in = 1 # 103 (1 + 0.99 # 100) = 100 kW Similarly output impedance is given by R0 ROUT = R 0 = output impedance (1 + bv Av) 100 Thus = 1W ROUT = (1 + 0.99 # 100)
Option (C) is correct. In series voltage regulator the pass transistor is in common collector configuration having voltage gain close to unity. Option (D) is correct. In bridge rectifier we do not need central tap transformer, so its less expensive and smaller in size and its PIV (Peak inverse voltage) is also greater than the two diode circuit, so it is also suitable for higher voltage application. Option (C) is correct. In the circuit we have V2 = IS # RD 2 and V1 = IS # RD V2 = 1 2 V1 V1 = 2V2
4.134
4.135
4.125
Option (B) is correct. Regulation = Vno  load  Vfuel  load Vfull  load = 30  25 # 100 = 20% 25 Output resistance = 25 = 25 W 1
4.136
4.126
Option (D) is correct. This is a voltage shunt feedback as the feedback samples a portion of output voltage and convert it to current (shunt). Option (A) is correct. In a differential amplifier CMRR is given by (1 + b) IQ R 0 CMRR = 1 ;1 + E 2 VT b So where R 0 is the emitter resistance. So CMRR can be improved by increasing emitter resistance. Option (C) is correct. We know that rise time (tr ) is tr = 0.35 fH where fH is upper 3 dB frequency. Thus we can obtain upper 3 dB frequency it rise time is known.
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
4.127
Option (C) is correct. The equivalent circuit of given amplifier circuit (when CE is connected, RE is shortcircuited)
4.128
4.129
Option (D) is correct. In a BJT differential amplifier for a linear response Vid < VT . Option (D) is correct. In a shunt negative feedback amplifier. Input impedance Ri R in = (1 + bA) where Ri = input impedance of basic amplifier b = feedback factor A = open loop gain
Input impedance Ri = RB  r p Voltage gain AV = gm RC Now, if CE is disconnected, resistance RE appears in the circuit
4.130
Input impedance R in = RB  [rp + (b + 1)] RE Input impedance increases gm RC Voltage gain Voltage gain decreases. AV = 1 + gm R E Option (A) is correct. In common emitter stage input impedance is high, so in cascaded amplifier common emitter stage is followed by common base stage. Option (C) is correct. We know that collectemitter break down voltage is less than compare to collector base breakdown voltage. BVCEO < BVCBO both avalanche and zener break down. Voltage are higher than
Option (A) is correct. Option (D) is correct. Comparator will give an output either equal to + Vsupply or  Vsupply . So output is a square wave.
4.139
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 100
If we assume consider the diode in reverse bias then Vn should be greater than VP . VP < Vn by calculating VP = 10 # 4 = 5 Volt 4+4 Vn = 2 # 1 = 2 Volt here VP > Vn (so diode cannot be in reverse bias mode).
So
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Vm p (R f + RL)
Option (D) is correct. For the positive half cycle of input diode D1 will conduct & D2 will be off. In negative half cycle of input D1 will be off & D2 conduct so output voltage wave from across resistor (10 kW) is
Ammeter will read rms value of current so I rms = Vm (half wave rectifier) pR 4 = = 0.4 mA p (10 kW) p
4.144
Option (D) is correct. In given circuit positive feedback is applied in the opamp., so it works as a Schmitt trigger.
4.145
so current
4.141
Option (D) is correct. By applying node equation at terminal (2) and (3) of OP amp
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Gain with out feedback factor is given by V0 = kVi after connecting feedback impedance Z
Va  Q Va  V0 =0 + 5 10
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 101
input impedance
4.146 4.147
Ii = Vi  kVi Z Zin = Vi = Z Ii (1  k)
Option (A) is correct. Option (A) is correct. For the circuit, In balanced condition It will oscillated at a frequency w 1 = 1 = 105 rad/ sec 3 6 LC 10 # 10 # .01 # 10 In this condition R1 = R 3 R2 R4 5 =R 100 1 = R = 20 kW = 2 # 10 4 W
4.148
V0 = 6 volt I = 96 50 W
I = 60 m amp Maximum allowed power dissipation in zener PZ = 300 mW Maximum current allowed in zener PZ = VZ (IZ ) max = 300 # 103 & = 6 (IZ ) max = 300 # 103 & = (IZ ) max = 50 m amp Given knee current or minimum current in zener In given circuit (IZ ) min = 5 m amp I = IZ + I L I L = I  IZ (IL) min = I  (IZ ) max = (60  50) m amp = 10 m amp (IL) max = I  (IZ ) min = (60  5) = 55 m amp
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 5
DIGITAL CIRCUITS
Page 101
2012
5.4
ONE MARK
2013
5.1
ONE MARK
A bulb in a staircase has two switches, one switch being at the ground floor and the other one at the first floor. The bulb can be turned ON and also can be turned OFF by any one of the switches irrespective of the state of the other switch. The logic of switching of the bulb resembles (A) and AND gate (B) an OR gate (C) an XOR gate (D) a NAND gate For 8085 microprocessor, the following program is executed. MVI A, 05H; MVI B, 05H; PTR: ADD B; DCR B; JNZ PTR; ADI 03H; HLT; At the end of program, accumulator contains (A) 17H (B) 20H (C) 23H (D) 05H
2013 TWO MARKS
In this circuit, the race around (A) does not occur (B) occur when CLK = 0 (C) occur when CLK = 1 and A = B = 1 (D) occur when CLK = 1 and A = B = 0
5.5
5.2
The output Y of a 2bit comparator is logic 1 whenever the 2bit input A is greater than the 2bit input B . The number of combinations for which the output is logic 1, is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(B) 6 (D) 10
5.3
There are four chips each of 1024 bytes connected to a 16 bit address bus as shown in the figure below, RAMs 1, 2, 3 and 4 respectively are mappped to addresses
(A) Y = A B + C (C) Y = (A + B ) C
5.7
(B) Y = (A + B) C (D) Y = AB + C
In the sum of products function f (X, Y, Z) = (2, 3, 4, 5), the prime implicants are (A) XY, XY (B) XY, X Y Z , XY Z (C) XY Z , XYZ, XY (D) XY Z , XYZ, XY Z , XY Z
2012 TWO MARKS
(A) 0C00H0FFFH, 1C00H1FFFH, 2C00H2FFFH, 3C00H3FFFH (B) 1800H1FFFH, 2800H2FFFH, 3800H3FFFH, 4800H4FFFH (C) 0500H08FFH, 1500H18FFH, 3500H38FFH, 5500H58FFH (D) 0800H0BFFH, 1800H1BFFH, 2800H2BFFH, 3800H3BFFH
5.8
In the CMOS circuit shown, electron and hole mobilities are equal, and M1 and M2 are equally sized. The device M1 is in the linear region if
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 102
(B) 1.875 V < Vin < 3.125 V (D) 0 < Vin < 5 V
5.12
The logic function implemented by the circuit below is (ground implies a logic 0)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The output of a 3stage Johnson (twisted ring) counter is fed to a digitalto analog (D/A) converter as shown in the figure below. Assume all states of the counter to be unset initially. The waveform which represents the D/A converter output Vo is
2011
5.10
ONE MARK
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are 0 (B) two or more of the inputs P, Q, R are 1 (C) any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R is 0 (D) any odd number of the inputs P, Q, R is 1
5.11
When the output Y in the circuit below is 1, it implies that data has
5.14
Two D flipflops are connected as a synchronous counter that goes through the following QB QA sequence 00 " 11 " 01 " 10 " 00 " .... The connections to the inputs DA and DB are (A) DA = QB, DB = QA
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 103
(A) A = 1, B = 1, C = 0 (C) A = 0, B = 1, C = 0
2010
5.19
(B) A = 1, B = 0, C = 0 (D) A = 0, B = 0, C = 1
TWO MARKS
An 8085 assembly language program is given below. Assume that the carry flag is initially unset. The content of the accumulator after the execution of the program is
Assuming that the flipflop are in reset condition initially, the count sequence observed at QA , in the circuit shown is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(A) P2, Q4, R1, S3 (C) P2, Q4, R3, S1
5.17
(B) P4, Q2, R1, S3 (D) P4, Q2, R3, S1 (A) F = Sm (0, 1, 3, 5, 9, 10, 14) (C) F = Sm (1, 2, 4, 5, 11, 14, 15)
5.21
In the circuit shown, the device connected Y5 can have address in the range
For the 8085 assembly language program given below, the content of the accumulator after the execution of the program is
(A) 00H (C) 67H (A) 2000  20FF (C) 2E00  2EFF
5.18
2009
For the output F to be 1 in the logic circuit shown, the input combination should be
The full form of the abbreviations TTL and CMOS in reference to logic families are (A) Triple Transistor Logic and Chip Metal Oxide Semiconductor (B) Tristate Transistor Logic and Chip Metal Oxide Semiconductor (C) Transistor Transistor Logic and Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor (D) Tristate Transistor Logic and Complementary Metal Oxide
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 104
Silicon
5.23
In a microprocessor, the service routine for a certain interrupt starts from a fixed location of memory which cannot be externally set, but the interrupt can be delayed or rejected Such an interrupt is (A) nonmaskable and nonvectored (B) maskable and nonvectored (C) nonmaskable and vectored (D) maskable and vectored
2009 TWO MARKS
(1) push buttons pressed/not pressed in equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively. (2) a segment glowing/not glowing in the display is equivalent to logic 1/0 respectively.
5.27
If segments a to g are considered as functions of P1 and P2 , then which of the following is correct (A) g = P 1 + P2, d = c + e (B) g = P1 + P2, d = c + e (C) g = P1 + P2, e = b + c (D) g = P1 + P2, e = b + c What are the minimum numbers of NOT gates and 2  input OR gates required to design the logic of the driver for this 7  Segment display (A) 3 NOT and 4 OR (B) 2 NOT and 4 OR (C) 1 NOT and 3 OR (D) 2 NOT and 3 OR Refer to the NAND and NOR latches shown in the figure. The inputs (P1, P2) for both latches are first made (0, 1) and then, after a few seconds, made (1, 1). The corresponding stable outputs (Q1, Q2) are
5.28
5.24
If X = 1 in logic equation 6X + Z {Y + (Z + XY )}@ {X + X (X + Y)} = 1 , then (A) Y = Z (B) Y = Z (C) Z = 1 (D) Z = 0 What are the minimum number of 2 to 1 multiplexers required to generate a 2 input AND gate and a 2 input ExOR gate (A) 1 and 2 (B) 1 and 3
5.29
5.25
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) 1 and 1
5.26
(D) 2 and 2
What are the counting states (Q1, Q2) for the counter shown in the figure below
(A) NAND: first (0, 1) then (0, 1) NOR: first (1, 0) then (0, 0) (B) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0) NOR : first (1, 0) then (1, 0) (C) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 0) NOR : first (1, 0) then (0, 0) (D) NAND : first (1, 0) then (1, 1) NOR : first (0, 1) then (0, 1)
2008
5.30
TWO MARKS
The logic function implemented by the following circuit at the terminal OUT is
(A) 11, 10, 00, 11, 10,... (C) 00, 11, 01, 10, 00...
(B) 01, 10, 11, 00, 01... (D) 01, 10, 00, 01, 10...
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) P NOR Q (C) P OR Q
5.31
The two numbers represented in signed 2s complement form are P + 11101101 and Q = 11100110 . If Q is subtracted from P , the value obtained in signed 2s complement is (A) 1000001111 (B) 00000111 (C) 11111001 (D) 111111001 Which of the following Boolean Expressions correctly represents the
Consider
5.32
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 105
3
per the relation VDAC = 2n  1 bn Volts, where b3 (MSB), b1, b2 and n= 0 outputs. The counter starts from the b0 (LSB) are the counter clear state.
For the circuit shown in the figure, D has a transition from 0 to 1 after CLK changes from 1 to 0. Assume gate delays to be negligible Which of the following statements is true
5.35
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
(A) Q goes to 1 at the CLK transition and stays at 1 (B) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and stays 0 (C) Q goes to 1 at the CLK tradition and goes to 0 when D goes to 1 (D) Q goes to 0 at the CLK transition and goes to 1 when D goes to 1
5.34
(B) 07 (D) 13
For each of the positive edgetriggered J  K flip flop used in the following figure, the propagation delay is 3 t .
The magnitude of the error between VDAC and Vin at steady state in volts is (A) 0.2 (B) 0.3 (C) 0.5 (D) 1.0 For the circuit shown in the following, I0  I3 are inputs to the 4:1 multiplexers, R (MSB) and S are control bits. The output Z can be represented by
5.37
(A) PQ + PQS + QRS (B) PQ + PQR + PQS (C) PQR + PQR + PARS + QRS (D) PQR + PQRS + PQRS + QRS
5.38
An 8085 executes the following instructions 2710 LXI H, 30A0 H 2713 DAD H 2414 PCHL All address and constants are in Hex. Let PC be the contents of the program counter and HL be the contents of the HL register pair just after executing PCHL. Which of the following statements is correct ? PC = 30A0H PC = 2715H (B) (A) HL = 2715H HL = 30A0H
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 106
(C) Q1: normal active; Q2: cutoff; Q3: cutoff; Q4: saturation (D) Q1: saturation; Q2: saturation; Q3: saturation; Q4: normal active
ONE MARK
X = 01110 and Y = 11001 are two 5bit binary numbers represented in twos complement format. The sum of X and Y represented in twos complement format using 6 bits is (A) 100111 (B) 0010000 (C) 000111 (D) 101001 The Boolean function Y = AB + CD is to be realized using only 2 input NAND gates. The minimum number of gates required is (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
2007 TWO MARKS
5.45
The following binary values were applied to the X and Y inputs of NAND latch shown in the figure in the sequence indicated below : X = 0,Y = 1; X = 0, Y = 0; X = 1; Y = 1 The corresponding stable P, Q output will be.
5.40
P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0;
P = 1, Q = 0; P = 1, Q = 0 or P = 0, Q = 1 P = 0, Q = 1; or P = 0, Q = 1; P = 0, Q = 1 P = 1, Q = 1; P = 1, Q = 0 or P = 0, Q = 1 P = 1, Q = 1; P = 1, Q = 1
5.41
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) Y = ABC D + ABC + AC D (B) Y = ABC D + BCD + ABC D (C) Y = ABCD + BC D + ABC D (D) Y = ABCD + BC D + ABC D
5.42
An 8255 chip is interfaced to an 8085 microprocessor system as an I/O mapped I/O as show in the figure. The address lines A0 and A1 of the 8085 are used by the 8255 chip to decode internally its thee ports and the Control register. The address lines A3 to A7 as well as the IO/M signal are used for address decoding. The range of addresses for which the 8255 chip would get selected is
The circuit diagram of a standard TTL NOT gate is shown in the figure. Vi = 25 V, the modes of operation of the transistors will be
5.46
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
The current is (A) 31.25m A (C) 125m A The voltage V0 is (A)  0.781 V (C)  3.125 V (B) 62.5m A (D) 250m A (B)  1.562 V (D)  6.250 V
5.47
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 107
2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8:
5.48
MVI B, OEH XRI 69H ADD B ANI 9BH CPI 9FH STA 3010H HLT
 out shift registers loaded with the data shown are used to feed the data to a full adder. Initially, all the flip  flops are in clear state. After applying two clock pulse, the output of the fulladder should be
The contents of the accumulator just execution of the ADD instruction in line 4 will be (A) C3H (B) EAH (C) DCH (D) 69H After execution of line 7 of the program, the status of the CY and Z flags will be (B) CY = 0, Z = 1 (A) CY = 0, Z = 0 (C) CY = 1, Z = 0 (D) CY = 1, Z = 1 For the circuit shown, the counter state (Q1 Q0) follows the sequence (A) S = 0, C0 = 0 (C) S = 1, C0 = 0
5.54
5.49
(B) S = 0, C0 = 1 (D) S = 1, C0 = 1
5.50
A new Binary Coded Pentary (BCP) number system is proposed in which every digit of a base5 number is represented by its corresponding 3bit binary code. For example, the base5 number
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(A) 00, 01, 10, 11, 00 (C) 00, 01, 11, 00, 01
2006
5.51
(B) 00, 01, 10, 00, 01 (D) 00, 10, 11, 00, 10
ONE MARK
The number of product terms in the minimized sumofproduct expression obtained through the following K  map is (where, "d" denotes dont care states)
A 4  bit D/A converter is connected to a free  running 3  big UP counter, as shown in the following figure. Which of the following waveforms will be observed at V0 ?
(A) 2 (C) 4
2006
5.52
(B) 3 (D) 5
TWO MARKS
An I/O peripheral device shown in Fig. (b) below is to be interfaced to an 8085 microprocessor. To select the I/O device in the I/O address range D4 H  D7 H, its chipselect (CS ) should be connected to the output of the decoder shown in as below :
In the figure shown above, the ground has been shown by the symbol 4
5.56
Following is the segment of a 8085 assembly language program LXI SP, EFFF H CALL 3000 H : : : 3000 H LXI H, 3CF4
For the circuit shown in figures below, two 4  bit parallel  in serial
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 108
PUSH PSW SPHL POP PSW RET On completion of RET execution, the contents of SP is (A) 3CF0 H (B) 3CF8 H (C) EFFD H (D) EFFF H
5.57
2005
5.61
TWO MARKS
The transistors used in a portion of the TTL gate show in the figure have b = 100 . The base emitter voltage of is 0.7 V for a transistor in active region and 0.75 V for a transistor in saturation. If the sink current I = 1 A and the output is at logic 0, then the current IR will be equal to
Two D  flip  flops, as shown below, are to be connected as a synchronous counter that goes through the following sequence 00 " 01 " 11 " 10 " 00 " ... The inputs D0 and D1 respectively should be connected as,
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
5.58
The present output Qn of an edge triggered JK flipflop is logic 0. If J = 1, then Qn + 1 (A) Cannot be determined (B) Will be logic 0 (C) will be logic 1 (D) will rave around The given figure shows a ripple counter using positive edge triggered flipflops. If the present state of the counter is Q2 Q1 Q0 = 001 then is next state Q2 Q1 Q will be
(B) A (D) A
ONE MARK
5.64
Decimal 43 in Hexadecimal and BCD number system is respectively (A) B2, 0100 011 (B) 2B, 0100 0011 (C) 2B, 0011 0100 (D) B2, 0100 0100 The Boolean function f implemented in the figure using two input multiplexes is
5.60
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
What memory address range is NOT represents by chip # 1 and chip # 2 in the figure A0 to A15 in this figure are the address lines and CS means chip select.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 109
(C) 5
5.71
(D) 7
Choose the correct one from among the alternatives A, B, C, D after matching an item from Group 1 most appropriate item in Group 2. Group 1 Group 2 P. Shift register 1. Frequency division Q. Counter 2. Addressing in memory chips R. Decoder 3. Serial to parallel data conversion (B) P  3, Q  1, R  2 (A) P  3, Q  2, R  1 (C) P  2, Q  1, R  3 (D) P  1, Q  2, R  2 The figure the internal schematic of a TTL ANDORORInvert (AOI) gate. For the inputs shown in the figure, the output Y is
5.72
(A) 0 (C) AB
(B) 1 (D) AB
The following program starts at location 0100H. LXI SP, OOFF LXI H, 0701 MVI A, 20H SUB M The content of accumulator when the program counter reaches 0109 H is (A) 20 H (B) 02 H (C) 00 H (D) FF H If in addition following code exists from 019H onwards, ORI 40 H ADD M What will be the result in the accumulator after the last instruction is executed ? (A) 40 H (B) 20 H (C) 60 H (D) 42 H
2004 ONE MARK
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
TWO MARKS
5.67
11001, 1001, 111001 correspond to the 2s complement representation of which one of the following sets of number (A) 25,9, and 57 respectively (B) 6, 6, and 6 respectively (C) 7, 7 and 7 respectively (D) 25, 9 and 57 respectively In the modulo6 ripple counter shown in figure, the output of the 2 input gate is used to clear the JK flipflop The 2input gate is
5.74
5.68
A master  slave flip flop has the characteristic that (A) change in the output immediately reflected in the output (B) change in the output occurs when the state of the master is affected (C) change in the output occurs when the state of the slave is affected (D) both the master and the slave states are affected at the same time The range of signed decimal numbers that can be represented by 6bits 1s complement number is (A) 31 to +31 (B) 63 to +63 (C) 64 to +63 (D) 32 to +31 A digital system is required to amplify a binaryencoded audio signal. The user should be able to control the gain of the amplifier from minimum to a maximum in 100 increments. The minimum number of bits required to encode, in straight binary, is (A) 8 (B) 6
The minimum number of 2 to 1 multiplexers required to realize a 4 to 1 multiplexers is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 The Boolean expression AC + BC is equivalent to (A) AC + BC + AC (B) BC + AC + BC + ACB (C) AC + BC + BC + ABC (D) ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC A Boolean function f of two variables x and y is defined as follows : f (0, 0) = f (0, 1) = f (1, 1) = 1; f (1, 0) = 0 Assuming complements of x and y are not available, a minimum cost solution for realizing f using only 2input NOR gates and 2
5.69
5.76
5.70
5.77
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 110
input OR gates (each having unit cost) would have a total cost of (A) 1 unit (B) 4 unit (C) 3 unit (D) 2 unit
5.78
The 8255 Programmable Peripheral Interface is used as described below. (i) An A/D converter is interface to a microprocessor through an 8255. The conversion is initiated by a signal from the 8255 on Port C. A signal on Port C causes data to be stobed into Port A. (ii) Two computers exchange data using a pair of 8255s. Port A works as a bidirectional data port supported by appropriate handshaking signals. The appropriate modes of operation of the 8255 for (i) and (ii) would be (A) Mode 0 for (i) and Mode 1 for (ii) (B) Mode 1 for (i) and Mode 2 for (ii) (C) Mode for (i) and Mode 0 for (ii) (D) Mode 2 for (i) and Mode 1 for (ii)
(A) JNX LOOP, ADD B, DCR C (B) ADD B, JNZ LOOP, DCR C (C) DCR C, JNZ LOOP, ADD B (D) ADD B, DCR C, JNZ LOOP
2003
5.82
ONE MARK
The number of distinct Boolean expressions of 4 variables is (A) 16 (B) 256 (C) 1023 (D) 65536 The minimum number of comparators required to build an 8bits flash ADC is (A) 8 (B) 63 (C) 255 (D) 256 The output of the 74 series of GATE of TTL gates is taken from a BJT in (A) totem pole and common collector configuration (B) either totem pole or open collector configuration (C) common base configuration (D) common collector configuration Without any additional circuitry, an 8:1 MUX can be used to obtain (A) some but not all Boolean functions of 3 variables (B) all functions of 3 variables but non of 4 variables (C) all functions of 3 variables and some but not all of 4 variables (D) all functions of 4 variables A 0 to 6 counter consists of 3 flip flops and a combination circuit of 2 input gate (s). The common circuit consists of (A) one AND gate (B) one OR gate (C) one AND gate and one OR gate (D) two AND gates
2003 TWO MARKS
5.83
5.84
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
5.79
5.85
The number of memory cycles required to execute the following 8085 instructions (i) LDA 3000 H (ii) LXI D, FOF1H would be (A) 2 for (i) and 2 for (ii) (B) 4 for (i) and 3 for (ii) (C) 3 for (i) and 3 for (ii) (D) 3 for (i) and 4 for (ii) Consider the sequence of 8085 instructions given below LXI H, 9258 MOV A, M CMA MOV M, A Which one of the following is performed by this sequence ? (A) Contents of location 9258 are moved to the accumulator (B) Contents of location 9258 are compared with the contents of the accumulator (C) Contents of location 8529 are complemented and stored in location 8529 (D) Contents of location 5892 are complemented and stored in location 5892 It is desired to multiply the numbers 0AH by 0BH and store the result in the accumulator. The numbers are available in registers B and C respectively. A part of the 8085 program for this purpose is given below : MVI A, 00H LOOP HLT END The sequence of instructions to complete the program would be
5.86
5.80
5.87
The circuit in the figure has 4 boxes each described by inputs P, Q, R and outputs Y, Z with Y = P 5 Q 5 R and Z = RQ + PR + QP The circuit acts as a
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
5.81
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 111
CMOS
ECL
TTL
TTL
If the function W, X, Y and Z are as follows W = R + PQ + RS X = PQRS + PQRS + PQRS Y = RS + PR + PQ + P .Q Z = R + S + PQ + P .Q .R + PQ .S Then, (A) W = Z, X = Z (B) W = Z, X = Y (C) W = Y (D) W = Y = Z A 4 bit ripple counter and a bit synchronous counter are made using flip flops having a propagation delay of 10 ns each. If the worst case delay in the ripple counter and the synchronous counter be R and S respectively, then (A) R = 10 ns, S = 40 ns (B) R = 40 ns, S = 10 ns (C) R = 10 ns S = 30 ns (D) R = 30 ns, S = 10 ns In the circuit shown in the figure, A is parallelin, parallelout 4 bit register, which loads at the rising edge of the clock C . The input lines are connected to a 4 bit bus, W . Its output acts at input to a 16 # 4 ROM whose output is floating when the input to a partial table of the contents of the ROM is as follows Data Address 0011 0 1111 2 0100 4 1010 6 1011 8 1000 10 0010 11 1000 14
(B) Q (D) S
5.89
5.90
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
The clock to the register is shown, and the data on the W bus at time t1 is 0110. The data on the bus at time t2 is
In an 8085 microprocessor, the instruction CMP B has been executed while the content of the accumulator is less than that of register B . As a result (A) Carry flag will be set but Zero flag will be reset (B) Carry flag will be rest but Zero flag will be set (C) Both Carry flag and Zero flag will be rest (D) Both Carry flag and Zero flag will be set The circuit shown in the figure is a 4 bit DAC
5.94
The input bits 0 and 1 are represented by 0 and 5 V respectively. The OP AMP is ideal, but all the resistance and the 5 v inputs have a tolerance of ! 10%. The specification (rounded to nearest multiple of 5%) for the tolerance of the DAC is (A) ! 35% (B) ! 20% (C) ! 10% (D) ! 5%
2002
5.95
The DTL, TTL, ECL and CMOS famil GATE of digital ICs are compared in the following 4 columns (P) Fanout is minimum Power consumption is minimum DTL TTL (Q) DTL CMOS (R) TTL ECL (S) CMOS DTL
ONE MARK
4  bit 2s complement representation of a decimal number is 1000. The number is (A) +8 (B) 0 (C) 7 (D) 8 If the input to the digital circuit (in the figure) consisting of a
5.96
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 112
(A) 0 (C) X
5.97
(B) 1 (D) X
The number of comparators required in a 3bit comparators type ADC (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 7 (D) 8
2002 TWO MARKS
5.98
The circuit in the figure has two CMOS NOR gates. This circuit functions as a:
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Consider the following assembly language program MVI B, 87H MOV A, B START : JMP NEXT MVI B, 00H XRA B OUT PORT1 HLT NEXT : XRA B JP START OUT PORT2 HTL The execution of above program in an 8085 microprocessor will result in (A) an output of 87H at PORT1 (B) an output of 87H at PORT2 (C) infinite looping of the program execution with accumulator data remaining at 00H (D) infinite looping of the program execution with accumulator data alternating between 00H and 87H
2001 ONE MARKS
5.102
The 2s complement representation of 17 is (A) 101110 (B) 101111 (C) 111110 (D) 110001 For the ring oscillator shown in the figure, the propagation delay of each inverter is 100 pico sec. What is the fundamental frequency of the oscillator output
The gates G1 and G2 in the figure have propagation delays of 10 ns and 20 ns respectively. If the input V1, makes an output change from logic 0 to 1 at time t = t0 , then the output waveform V0 is
5.103
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
5.100
If the input X3, X2, X1, X0 to the ROM in the figure are 8 4 2 1 BCD numbers, then the outputs Y3, Y2, Y1, Y0 are (A) 10 MHz (C) 1 GHz
5.104
Ab 8085 microprocessor based system uses a 4K # 8 bit RAM whose starting address is AA00H. The address of the last byte in this RAM is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 113
In the TTL circuit in the figure, S2 and S0 are select lines and X7 and X0 are input lines. S0 and X0 are LSBs. The output Y is
(A) 5 V; 3 V; 7 V (C) 5 V; 5 V; 5 V
2000
5.109
(B) 4 V; 3 V; 4 V (D) 4 V; 4 V; 4 V
ONE MARKS
(B) A 5 B (D) C (A 5 B ) + C (A 5 B)
An 8 bit successive approximation analog to digital communication has full scale reading of 2.55 V and its conversion time for an analog input of 1 V is 20 m s. The conversion time for a 2 V input will be (A) 10 m s (B) 20 m s (C) 40 m s (D) 50 m s The number of comparator in a 4bit flash ADC is (A) 4 (B) 5
5.110
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(C) 15
5.111
(D) 16
For the logic circuit shown in the figure, the required input condition (A, B, C) to make the output (X) = 1 is
The digital block in the figure is realized using two positive edge triggered Dflipflop. Assume that for t < t0, Q1 = Q2 = 0 . The circuit in the digital block is given by (A) 1,0,1 (C) 1,1,1
5.112
The number of hardware interrupts (which require an external signal to interrupt) present in an 8085 microprocessor are (A) 1 (B) 4 (C) 5 (D) 13 In the microprocessor, the RST6 instruction transfer the program execution to the following location : (A)30 H (B) 24 H (C) 48 H (D) 60 H
2000 TWO MARKS
5.113
5.114
The contents of register (B) and accumulator (A) of 8085 microprocessor are 49J are 3AH respectively. The contents of A and status of carry (CY) and sign (S) after execution SUB B instructions are (A) A = F1, CY = 1, S = 1 (B) A = 0F, CY = 1, S = 1 (C) A = F0, CY = 0, S = 0 (D) A = 1F, CY = 1, S = 1 For the logic circuit shown in the figure, the simplified Boolean expression for the output Y is
5.108
In the DRAM cell in the figure, the Vt of the NMOSFET is 1 V. For the following three combinations of WL and BL voltages.
5.115
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 114
(A) y = AB (C) y = A + B
5.120
(B) y = AB (D) y = A + B
(A) A + B + C (C) B
5.116
(B) A (D) C
5.121
A Darlington emitter follower circuit is sometimes used in the output stage of a TTL gate in order to (A) increase its IOL (B) reduce its IOH (C) increase its speed of operation (D) reduce power dissipation Commercially available ECL gears use two ground lines and one negative supply in order to (A) reduce power dissipation (B) increase fanout (C) reduce loading effect (D) eliminate the effect of power line glitches or the biasing circuit The resolution of a 4bit counting ADC is 0.5 volts. For an analog input of 6.6 volts, the digital output of the ADC will be (A) 1011 (B) 1101 (C) 1100 (D) 1110
1999 TWO MARKS
For the 4 bit DAC shown in the figure, the output voltage V0 is
5.122
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
5.117
(A) 10 V (C) 4 V
(B) 5 V (D) 8 V
5.123
The minimized form of the logical expression (ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC ) is (A) AC + BC + AB (B) AC + BC + AB (C) AC + BC + AB (D) AC + BC + AB For a binary halfsubtractor having two inputs A and B, the correct set of logical expressions for the outputs D (= A minus B) and X (= borrow) are (A) D = AB + AB, X = AB (B) D = AB + AB + AB , X = AB (C) D = AB + AB , X = AB (D) D = AB + AB , X = AB The ripple counter shown in the given figure is works as a
A sequential circuit using D flipflop and logic gates is shown in the figure, where X and Y are the inputs and Z is the inputs. The circuit is
5.124
5.125
FlipFlop with inputs X = R and Y = S FlipFlop with inputs X = S and Y = R FlipFlop with inputs X = J and Y = K FlipFlop with input X = K and Y = J
In the figure, the J and K inputs of all the four FlipFlips are made high. The frequency of the signal at output Y is
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) mod3 up counter (C) mod3 down counter
5.126
If CS = A15 A14 A13 is used as the chip select logic of a 4 K RAM in an 8085 system, then its memory range will be (A) 3000 H  3 FFF H (B) 7000 H  7 FFF H (C) 5000 H  5 FFF H and 6000 H  6 FFF H (D) 6000 H  6 FFF H and 7000 H  7 FFF H
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 115
5.135
1998
5.127
ONE MARK
The minimum number of 2input NAND gates required to implement of Boolean function Z = ABC , assuming that A, B and C are available, is (A) two (B) three (C) five (D) six
5.136
For the identity AB + AC + BC = AB + AC , the dual form is (A) (A + B) (A + C) (B + C) = (A + B) (A + C) (B) (A + B ) (A + C ) (B + C ) = (A + B ) (A + C ) (C) (A + B) (A + C) (B + C) = (A + B ) (A + C ) (D) AB + AC + BC = AB + AC An instruction used to set the carry Flag in a computer can be classified as (A) data transfer (B) arithmetic (C) logical (D) program control The figure is shows a modK counter, here K is equal to
5.128
The noise margin of a TTL gate is about (A) 0.2 V (B) 0.4 V (C) 0.6 V (D) 0.8 V In the figure is A = 1 and B = 1, the input B is now replaced by a sequence 101010....., the output x and y will be
5.137
5.129
fixed at 0 and 1, respectively x = 1010.....while y = 0101...... x = 1010.....and y = 1010...... fixed at 1 and 0, respectively
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
An equivalent 2s complement representation of the 2s complement number 1101 is (A) 110100 (B) 01101 (C) 110111 (D) 111101 The threshold voltage for each transistor in the figure is 2 V. For this circuit to work as an inverter, Vi must take the values
5.131
(B) 2 (D) 4
An I/O processor control the flow of information between (A) cache memory and I/O devices (B) main memory and I/O devices (C) two I/O devices (D) cache and main memories Two 2s complement number having sign bits x and y are added and the sign bit of the result is z . Then, the occurrence of overflow is indicated by the Boolean function (A) xyz (B) x y z (C) x yz + xyz (D) xy + yz + zx The advantage of using a dual slope ADC in a digital voltmeter is that (A) its conversion time is small (B) its accuracy is high (C) it gives output in BCD format (D) it does not require a
The K map for a Boolean function is shown in the figure is the number of essential prime implicates for this function is
5.133
5.134
(A) 4 (C) 6
(B) 5 (D) 8
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 116
1997
5.140
ONE MARK
5.147
(C) 30 H to 33 H
(D) 70 H to 73 H
Each cell of a static Random Access Memory contains (A) 6 MOS transistors (B) 4 MOS transistors and 2 capacitors (C) 2 MOS transistors and 4 capacitors (D) 1 MOS transistors and 1 capacitors A 2 bit binary multiplier can be implemented using (A) 2 inputs ANSs only (B) 2 input XORs and 4 input AND gates only (C) Two 2 inputs NORs and one XNO gate (D) XOR gates and shift registers In standard TTL, the totem pole stage refers to (A) the multiemitter input stage (B) the phase splitter (C) the output buffer (D) open collector output stage
The following instructions have been executed by an 8085 mP ADDRESS (HEX) 6010 6013 6015 6016 6017 6018 INSTRUCTION LXI H, 8 A 79 H MOV A, L ADDH DAA MOV H, A PCHL
5.141
5.142
From which address will the next instruction be fetched ? (A) 6019 (B) 6379 (C) 6979 (D) None of the above
5.148
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
5.143
A signed integer has been stored in a byte using the 2s complement format. We wish to store the same integer in a 16 bit word. We should (A) copy the original byte to the less significant byte of the word and fill the more significant with zeros (B) copy the original byte to the more significant byte of the word and fill the less significant byte with zeros (C) copy the original byte to the less significant byte of the word and make each fit of the more significant byte equal to the most significant bit of the original byte (D) copy the original byte to the less significant byte as well as the more significant byte of the word
1997 TWO MARKS
The inverter 74 ALSO4 has the following specifications IOH max = 0.4 A, IOL max = 8 mA, IIH max = 20 mA, IIL max = 0.1 mA The fan out based on the above will be (A) 10 (B) 20 (C) 60 (D) 100 The output of the logic gate in the figure is
5.149
For the NMOS logic gate shown in the figure is the logic function implemented is
5.144
(A) 0 (C) A
5.145
(B) 1 (D) F
In an 8085 mP system, the RST instruction will cause an interrupt (A) only if an interrupt service routine is not being executed (B) only if a bit in the interrupt mask is made 0 (C) only if interrupts have been enabled by an EI instruction (D) None of the above The decoding circuit shown in the figure is has been used to generate the active low chip select signal for a microprocessor peripheral. (The address lines are designated as AO to A7 for I/O address)
5.150
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) ABCDE (C) A : (B + C) + D : E (B) (AB + C ) : (D + E ) (D) (A + B ) : C + D : E
5.146
In a JK flipflop we have J = Q and K = 1. Assuming the flip flop was initially cleared and then clocked for 6 pulses, the sequence at the Q output will be
The peripheral will correspond to I/O address in the range (A) 60 H to 63 H (B) A4 to A 7H
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 117
(C) 8
5.160
(D) 13
The gate delay of an NMOS inverter is dominated by charge time rather than discharge time because (A) the driver transistor has larger threshold voltage than the load transistor (B) the driver transistor has larger leakage currents compared to the load transistor (C) the load transistor has a smaller W/L ratio compared to the driver transistor (D) none of the above The boolean function A + BC is a reduced form of (A) AB + BC (B) (A + B) : (A + C) (C) AB + ABC (D) (A + C) : B
1996 ONE MARK
The following sequence of instructions are executed by an 8085 microprocessor: 1000 LXI SP, 27 FF 1003 CALL 1006 1006 POP H The contents of the stack pointer (SP) and the HL, register pair on completion of execution of these instruction are (A) SP = 27 FF, HL = 1003 (B) SP = 27 FD, HL = 1003 (C) SP = 27 FF, HL = 1006 (D) SP = 27 FD, HL = 1006
5.152
5.153
Schottky clamping is resorted in TTl gates (A) to reduce propagation delay (B) to increase noise margins (C) to increase packing density (D) to increase fanout A pulse train can be delayed by a finite number of clock periods using (A) a serialin serialout shift register (B) a serialin parallelout shift register (C) a parallelin serialout shift register (D) a parallelin parallelout shift register A 12bit ADC is operating with a 1 m sec clock period and the total conversion time is seen to be 14 m sec . The ADC must be of the (A) flash type (B) counting type (C) intergrating type (D) successive approximation type The total number of memory accesses involved (inclusive of the opcode fetch) when an 8085 processor executes the instruction LDA 2003 is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
1996 TWO MARKS
5.154
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
5.155
5.156
5.157
A dynamic RAM cell which hold 5 V has to be refreshed every 20 m sec, so that the stored voltage does not fall by more than 0.5 V . If the cell has a constant discharge current of 1 pA, the storage capacitance of the cell is (A) 4 # 106 F (B) 4 # 109 F (C) 4 # 1012 F (D) 4 # 1015 F A 10bit ADC with a full scale output voltage of 10.24 V is designed to have a ! LSB/2 accuracy. If the ADC is calibrated at 25c C and the operating temperature ranges from 0c C to 25c C , then the maximum net temperature coefficient of the ADC should not exceed (A) ! 200 mV/cC (B) ! 400 mV/cC (C) ! 600 mV/cC (D) ! 800 mV/cC A memory system of size 26 K bytes is required to be designed using memory chips which have 12 address lines and 4 data lines each. The number of such chips required to design the memory system is (A) 2 (B) 4
5.158
5.159
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 118
SOLUTIONS
5.1
For S1 S 0 = 0 0 We have A13 = A12 = 0 and for I/p = 1we obtain A10 = 1 or A10 = 0 A11 = 1 A14 = 1 or A14 = 0 A15 = 1 or A15 = 0 Since, A 0  A 9 can have any value 0 or 1 Therefore, we have the address range as
A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A 9 From to 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 A8 0 1 A7 0 1 A6 0 1 A5 0 1 A4 0 1 A3 0 1 A2 0 1 A1 0 1 A0 0 1
Option (C) is correct. Let A denotes the position of switch at ground floor and B denotes the position of switch at upper floor. The switch can be either in up position or down position. Following are the truth table given for different combinations of A and B A up(1) Down(0) up(1) B up(1) Down(0) Down(0) Y(Bulb) OFF(0) OFF(0) ON(1)
Down(0) up(1) ON(1) When the switches A and B are both up or both down, output will be zero (i.e. Bulb will be OFF). Any of the switch changes its
In Hexadecimal & 0800 H to 0BFFH Similarly, for chip 2, we obtain the range as follows E = 1 for S1 S 0 = 0 1 so, A13 = 0 and A12 = 1 and also the I/P = 1 for A10 = 0 , A11 = 1, A14 = 0 , A15 = 0 so, the fixed I/ps are A15 0 A14 0 A13 0
A8 0 1 A7 0 1
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
position leads to the ON state of bulb. Hence, from the truth table, we get Y = A5B i.e., the XOR gate
5.2
A12 1
A6 0 1 A5 0 1
A11 1
A4 0 1 A3 0 1 A2 0 1
A10 0
A1 0 1 A0 0 1
In hexadecimal it is from 1800 H to 1BFFH . There is no need to obtain rest of address ranged as only (D) is matching to two results.
5.4
Option (A) is correct. The program is being executed as follows MVI A, 0.5H; A = 05H MVI B, 0.5H; B = 05H At the next instruction, a loop is being introduced in which for the instruction DCR B if the result is zero then it exits from loop so, the loop is executed five times as follows : Content in B 05 04 03 02 01 00 Output of ADD B (Stored value at A) 05 + 05 05 + 05 + 04 05 + 05 + 04 + 03 05 + 05 + 04 + 03 + 02 05 + 05 + 04 + 03 + 02 + 01 System is out of loop
Condition for the racearound It occurs when the output of the circuit (Y1, Y2) oscillates between
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
0 and 1 checking it from the options. 1. Option (A): When CLK = 0 Output of the NAND gate will be A1 = B1 = 0 = 1. Due to these input to the next NAND gate, Y2 = Y1 : 1 = Y1 and Y1 = Y2 : 1 = Y2 . If Y1 = 0 , Y2 = Y1 = 1 and it will remain the same and doesnt oscillate. If Y2 = 0 , Y1 = Y2 = 1 and it will also remain the same for the clock period. So, it wont oscillate for CLK = 0 . So, here race around doesnt occur for the condition CLK = 0 . 2. Option (C): When CLK = 1, A = B = 1 A1 = B1 = 0 and so Y1 = Y2 = 1
i.e., A = 05 + 05 + 04 + 03 + 02 + 01 = 144 At this stage, the 8085 microprocessor exits from the loop and reads the next instruction. i.e., the accumulator is being added to 03 H. Hence, we obtain A = A + 03 H = 14 + 03 = 17 H
5.3
Option (D) is correct. For chip1, we have the following conclusions: it is enable when (i) S1 S 0 = 0 0 and (ii) Input = 1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 119
And it will remain same for the clock period. So race around doesnt occur for the condition. 3. Option (D): When CLK = 1, A = B = 0 So, A1 = B1 = 1 And again as described for Option (B) race around doesnt occur for the condition.
5.5
I1 =
mp COX W 2 2V V  VTp h  V SD B 2 b L l8 SD ^ SG m C 2 0 = p OX bW l [2VSD ^VSG  VTp h  V SD ] 2 L 2 ^VSG  VTp h = VSD 2 ^5  Vin  1h = 5  VD Vin = VD + 3 2 I1 = 0 , VD = 5 V Vin = 5 + 3 = 4 V 2
Option ( ) is correct.
Y = 1, when A > B A = a1 a 0, B = b1 b 0 a1 0 1 1 1 1 1 a0 1 0 0 1 1 1 b1 0 0 0 0 0 1 b0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Y 1 1 1 1 1 1
VGS = Vin  0 = 4  0 = 4 V and VGS > VTn So it cant be in cutoff region. Case 2 : M2 must be in saturation region. So, I1 = I 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Total combination = 6
5.6
Option (A) is correct. Parallel connection of MOS & OR operation Series connection of MOS & AND operation The pullup network acts as an inverter. From pull down network we write Y = (A + B) C = (A + B) + C = A B + C Option (A) is correct. Prime implicants are the terms that we get by solving Kmap
5.7
2 (5  Vin  1) (5  VD)  (5  VD) 2 = (Vin  0  1) 2 & 2 (4  Vin) (5  VD)  (5  VD) 2 = (Vin  1) 2 Substituting VD = VDS = VGS  VTn and for N MOS & VD = Vin  1 & & & 2 (4  Vin) (6  Vin)  (6  Vin) 2 = (Vin  1) 2 48  36  8Vin = 2Vin + 1
6Vin = 11 & Vin = 11 = 1.833 V 6 So for M2 to be in saturation Vin < 1.833 V or Vin < 1.875 V Option (D) is correct. Let Qn + 1 is next state and Qn is the present state. From the given below figure. D = Y = AX 0 + AX1 Qn + 1 = D = AX 0 + AX1 Qn + 1 = A Qn + AQn X 0 = Q , X1 = Q Qn + 1 = Qn (toggle of previous state) Qn + 1 = Qn
5.9
If A = 0, If A = 1, So state diagram is Since all the parameters of PMOS and NMOS are equal. So, mn = mp COX bW l = COX bW l = COX bW l L M2 L L M1 Given that M1 is in linear region. So, we assume that M2 is either in cutoff or saturation. Case 1 : M2 is in cut off So, I 2 = I1 = 0 Where I1 is drain current in M1 and I2 is drain current in M2 .
5.10
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 120
0 1 QB ^t + 1h
1 0
1 0
0 0
(PQ QR ) PR = (PQ + QR PR ) = PQ + QR + PR = PQ + QR + PR If any two or more inputs are 1 then output y will be 1.
5.11
QB ^t + 1h = Q A
Option (A) is correct. For the output to be high, both inputs to AND gate should be high. The DFlip Flop output is the same, after a delay. Let initial input be 0; (Consider Option A) st then Q = 1 (For 1 DFlip Flop). This is given as input to 2nd FF. Let the second input be 1. Now, considering after 1 time interval; The output of 1st Flip Flop is 1 and 2nd FF is also 1. Thus Output
DA = Q A Q B + QA QB
5.15
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
= 1.
5.12
Option (C) is correct. Initially Carry Flag, C = 0 MVI A, 07 H ; A = 0000 0111 RLC ; Rotate left without carry. A = 0000 1110 MVO B, A ; B = A = 0000 1110 RLC ; A = 0001 1100 RLC ; A = 0011 1000 ADD B ; A = 0011 1000 + 0000 1110 ; 0100 0110 ; RRC Thus A = 23 H ; Rotate Right with out carry, A = 0010 0011
5.16
Option ( ) is correct.
5.13
Option (A) is correct. All the states of the counter are initially unset.
5.17
Option (B) is correct. Since G2 is active low input, output of NAND gate must be 0
Q1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
Q0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 4 6 7 3 1 0
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
G2 = A15 : A14 A13 A12 A11 = 0 So, A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 = 00101 To select Y5 Decoder input ABC = A 8 A9 A10 = 101 Address range A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A 9 A 8 ...............A 0 0011101........A 0 S S 2 D ^2D00  2DFF h
5.18
Option (D) is correct. The sequence is QB QA 00 " 11 " 01 " 10 " 00 " ... QB 0 1 QA 0 1 QB (t + 1) 1 0 QA (t + 1) 1 1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 121
For two variables A5B = A9B So, (A 5 B) 9 (A 9 B) = 0 (always) F = 09C = 0$C+1$C = C So, F = 1 when C = 1 or C = 0
5.19
Option (C) is correct. TTL " Transistor  Transistor logic CMOS " Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Option (D) is correct. Vectored interrupts : Vectored interrupts are those interrupts in which program control transferred to a fixed memory location. Maskable interrupts : Maskable interrupts are those interrupts which can be rejected or delayed by microprocessor if it is performing some critical task. Option (D) is correct. We have 6X + Z {Y + (Z + XY )}@[X + Z (X + Y)] = 1 Substituting X = 1 and X = 0 we get [1 + Z {Y + (Z + 1Y )}][ 0 + Z (1 + Y)] = 1 or [1][ Z (1)] = 1 1 + A = 1 and 0 + A = A or Z =1)Z=0 Option (A) is correct.
Option (D) is correct. Let QA (n), QB (n), QC (n) are present states and QA (n + 1), QB (n + 1), QC (n + 1) are next states of flopflops. In the circuit QA (n + 1) = QB (n) 9 QC (n) QB (n + 1) QA (n) QC (n + 1) QB (n) Initially all flipflops are reset 1st clock pulse QA = 0 9 0 = 1 QB = 0 QC = 0 2 nd clock pulse QA = 0 9 0 = 1 QB = 1 QC = 0 3 rd clock pulse QA = 1 9 0 = 0 QB = 1 QC = 1 4 th clock pulse QA = 1 9 1 = 1 QB = 0 QC = 1 So, sequence QA = 01101.......
5.23
5.24
5.25
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
5.20
Option (D) is correct. Output of the MUX can be written as F = I 0 S 0 S1 + I1 S 0 S1 + I 2 S 0 S 1 + I 3 S 0 S 1 Here, I 0 = C, I1 = D, I2 = C , I 3 = CD and S 0 = A, S1 = B So, F = C A B + D A B + C A B + C DA B Writing all SOP terms F = A B C D + A B C D + A BCD + A B C D 14 42 4 43 14 42 4 43 S 14 42 4 43 m m m m
3 2 7 5
F = / m (2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 9, 12)
5.21
+A B C D + A B C D + ABC D 14 42 4 43 14 42 4 43 S m m m
9 8 12
Y = BI0 + BI1 = AB + BA
5.26
Option (C) is correct. By executing instruction one by one MVI A, 45 H & MOV 45 H into accumulator, A = 45 H STC & Set carry, C = 1 CMC & Complement carry flag, C = 0 RAR & Rotate accumulator right through carry The truth table is as shown below. Sequence is 00, 11, 10, 00 ... CLK 1 2 A = 00100010 XRA B & XOR A and B 3 4 J1 1 1 0 1 K1 1 1 0 1 Q1 0 1 1 0 J2 1 1 0 1 K2 1 1 1 1 Q2 0 1 0 0
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
5.27
Page 122
From the figure shown below it may be easily seen upper MOSFET are shorted and connected to Vdd thus OUT is 1 only when the node S is 0,
Since the lower MOSFETs are shorted to ground, node S is 0 only when input P and Q are 1. This is the function of AND gate. Option (B) is correct. MSB of both number are 1, thus both are negative number. Now we get 11101101 = ( 19) 10 and 11100110 = ( 26) 10 P  Q = ( 19)  ( 26) = 7 Thus 7 signed twos complements form is (7) 10 = 00000111
5.32
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
c = P1 P2 + P1 P2 = P1 d = 1 = c+e and c = P1 P2 = P1 + P2 1 NOT Gate 1 OR GATE
So and
5.33
1 OR GATE f = P1 P2 = P1 + P2 1 OR GATE g = P1 P2 = P1 + P2 Thus we have g = P1 + P2 and d = 1 = c + e . It may be observed easily from figure that Led g does not glow only when both P1 and P2 are 0. Thus g = P1 + P2 LED d is 1 all condition and also it depends on d = c+e
5.28
X = PQ Y = (P + Q) Z = PQ (P + Q) = (P + Q )( P + Q) = PQ + PQ = P 5 Q M1 = Z 5 R = (P 5 Q) 5 R
Option (D) is correct. As shown in previous solution 2 NOT gates and 3OR gates are required. Option (C) is correct. For the NAND latche the stable states are as follows
5.29
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
The truth table is shown below. When CLK make transition Q goes to 1 and when D goes to 1, Q goes to 0
5.34
Option (B) is correct. Since the input to both JK flipflop is 11, the output will change every time with clock pulse. The input to clock is
5.30
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 123
Thus after execution above instruction contests of PC and HL are same and that is 6140H
5.39
The output Q1 of second FF occurs after time 3 T when it gets input (i.e. after 3 T from t1) and it is as shown below
Option (C) is correct. MSB of Y is 1, thus it is negative number and X is positive number Now we have X = 01110 = (14) 10 and Y = 11001 = ( 7) 10 X + Y = (14) + ( 7) = 7 In signed twos complements from 7 is (7) 10 = 000111 Option (B) is correct. Y = AB + CD = AB .CD This is SOP form and we require only 3 NAND gate
5.40 5.35
or VDAC = 0.5b0 + b1 + 2b2 + 4b3 The counter outputs will increase by 1 from 0000 till Vth > VDAC . The output of counter and VDAC is as shown below Clock 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 b3 b3 b2 b0 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 VDAC 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
and when VADC = 6.5 V (at 1101), the output of AND is zero and the counter stops. The stable output of LED display is 13.
5.36
Y = AB + AB and X = YC + YC = (AB + AB ) C + (AB + AB ) C = (AB + AB) C + (AB + AB ) C = ABC + ABC + ABC + ABC Y = ABCD + ABCD + ABC D + ABC D = ABCD + ABC D + ABC D + ABC D = ABCD + ABC D + BC D (A + A) = ABCD + ABC D + BC D
5.43
Option (B) is correct. The VADC  Vin at steady state is = 6.5  6.2 = 0.3V Option (A) is correct. Z = I0 RS + I1 RS + I2 RS + I3 RS = (P + Q ) RS + PRS + PQRS + PRS = PRS + QRS + PRS + PQRS + PRS The k  Map is as shown below
5.42
5.37
A+A = 1
Option (B) is correct. In given TTL NOT gate when Vi = 2.5 (HIGH), then Q1 " Reverse active Q2 " Saturation Q3 " Saturation Q4 " cut  off region Option (C) is correct. For X = 0, Y = 1 For X = 0, Y = 0 For X = 1, Y = 1 P = 1, Q = 0 P = 1, Q = 1 P = 1, Q = 0 or P = 0, Q = 1
5.44
Z = PQ + PQS + QRS
5.38
Option (C) is correct. 2710H LXI H, 30A0H 2713H DAD H 2714H PCHL
; Load 16 bit data 30A0 in HL pair ; 6140H " HL ; Copy the contents 6140H of HL in PC
5.45
Option (C) is correct. Chip 8255 will be selected if bits A3 to A7 are 1. Bit A0 to A2 can
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 124
Option (B) is correct. Since the inverting terminal is at virtual ground the resistor network can be reduced as follows
8 : HLT ; Stop Thus the contents of accumulator after execution of ADD instruction is EAH.
5.49
Option (C) is correct. The CY = 1 and Z = 0 Option (A) is correct. For this circuit the counter state (Q1, Q0) follows the sequence 00, 01, 10, 00 ... as shown below Clock 1st 2nd 3rd D1 D0 01 10 00 Q1 Q0 00 10 01 00 Q1 NOR Q0 1 0 0 0
5.50
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
I = VR = 10 = 1 mA R 10k This current will be divide as shown below
5.51
Option (A) is correct. As shown below there are 2 terms in the minimized sum of product expression. 1 0 0 1 0 d 0 0 0 0 d 0 1 0 1 1
5.52
Option (B) is correct. The output is taken from the 5th line. Option (D) is correct. After applying two clock poles, the outputs of the full adder is S = 1 , C0 = 1 A B Ci S Co 1st 1 0 0 0 1 2nd 1 1 1 1 1
5.53
Now
5.47
3 i = I = 1 # 10 = 62.5 m A 16 16
5.54
Option (C) is correct. The net current in inverting terminal of OP  amp is I = 1 + 1 = 5I 4 16 16 So that V0 = R # 5I = 3.125 16 Option (B) is correct. Line 1 : MVI A, B5H 2 : MVI B, 0EH 3 : XRI 69H 4 : ADDB 5 : ANI 9BH 6 : CPI 9FH
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
100010011001 S S S S 4 2 3 1
5.55
5.48
; Move B5H to A ; Move 0EH to B ; [A] XOR 69H and store in A ; Contents of A is CDH ; Add the contents of A to contents of B and ; store in A, contents of A is EAH ; [a] AND 9BH, and store in A, ; Contents of A is 8 AH ; Compare 9FH with the contents of A
Option (B) is correct. In this the diode D2 is connected to the ground. The following table shows the state of counter and D/A converter Q2 Q1 Q0 000 001 010 011 D3 = Q2 0 0 0 0 D2 = 0 0 0 0 0 D1 = Q1 0 0 1 1 D0 = Q0 0 1 0 1 Vo 0 1 2 3
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 125
1 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 1 0 1
8 9 10 11 0 1
Option (B) is correct. LXI, EFFF H ; Load SP with data EFFH CALL 3000 H ; Jump to location 3000 H : : : 3000H LXI H, 3CF4 ; Load HL with data 3CF4H PUSH PSW ; Store contnets of PSW to Stack POP PSW ; Restore contents of PSW from stack PRE ; stop Before instruction SPHL the contents of SP is 3CF4H. After execution of POP PSW, SP + 2 " SP After execution of RET, SP + 2 " SP Thus the contents of SP will be 3CF4H + 4 = 3CF8H Option (A) is correct. The inputs D0 and D1 respectively should be connected as Q1 and Q0 where Q0 " D1 and Q1 " D0 Option (D) is correct. If the point P is stuck at 1, then output f is equal to A
If output is at logic 0, the we have V0 = 0 which signifies BJT Q3 is in saturation and applying KVL we have or or
5.62
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
5.57
5.58
Option (C) is correct. Characteristic equation for a jk flipflop is written as Where So, Qn + 1 Qn Qn + 1 Qn + 1 Qn + 1 = JQ n + K Qn is the present output is next output = 10 + K : 0 =1 Qn = 0
5.59
5.64
Option (C) is correct. Since T2 T1 T0 is at 111, at every clock Q2 Q1 Q0 will be changes. Ir present state is 011, the next state will be 100. Option (D) is correct. Option (C) is correct. 0100H LXI SP, 00FF 0103H LXI H, 0701 0106H MVI A, 20H 0108 H SUB M ; Load SP with 00FFG ; Load HL with 0107H ; Move A with 20 H ; Subtract the contents of memory ; location whose address is stored in HL ; from the A and store in A 0109H ORI 40H ; 40H OR [A] and store in A 010BH ADD M ; Add the contents of memeory location ; whose address is stored in HL to A ; and store in A HL contains 0107H and contents of 0107H is 20H Thus after execution of SUB the data of A is 20H  20H = 00
5.65 5.66
11 11 in decimal is equivalent is B in hexamal. Thus 4310 * 2B16 Now 410 * 01002 310 * 00112 Thus 4310 * 01000011BCD
5.60
5.67
Option (C) is correct. Before ORI instruction the contents of A is 00H. On execution the ORI 40H the contents of A will be 40H 00H = 00000000 40H = 01000000 ORI 01000000
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 126
After ADD instruction the contents of memory location whose address is stored in HL will be added to and will be stored in A 40H + 20 H = 60 H
5.68
multiplexers is required.
5.76
Option (C) is correct. A master slave Dflip flop is shown in the figure.
5.77
In the circuit we can see that output of flipflop call be triggered only by transition of clock from 1 to 0 or when state of slave latch is affected.
5.69
Option (D) is correct. We have f (x, y) = xy + xy + xy = x (y + y) + xy = x + xy or f (x, y) = x + y Here compliments are not available, so to get x we use NOR gate. Thus desired circuit require 1 unit OR and 1 unit NOR gate giving total cost 2 unit. Option (D) is correct. For 8255, various modes are described as following. Mode 1 : Input or output with hand shake In this mode following actions are executed 1. Two port (A & B) function as 8  bit input output ports. 2. 3. Each port uses three lines from C as a hand shake signal Input & output data are latched.
5.78
Option (A) is correct. The range of signed decimal numbers that can be represented by n  bits 1s complement number is  (2n  1  1) to + (2n  1  1). Thus for n = 6 we have
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Range = (26  1  1) to + (26  1  1) = 31 to + 31
5.70 5.79
Form (ii) the mode is 1. Mode 2 : Bidirectional data transfer This mode is used to transfer data between two computer. In this mode port A can be configured as bidirectional port. Port A uses five signal from port C as hand shake signal. For (1), mode is 2 Option (B) is correct. LDA 16 bit & Load accumulator directly this instruction copies data byte from memory location (specified within the instruction) the accumulator. It takes 4 memory cycleas following. 1. in instruction fetch 2. in reading 16 bit address 1. in copying data from memory to accumulator LXI D, (F0F1) 4 & It copies 16 bit data into register pair D and E. It takes 3 memory cycles. Option (A) is correct. LXI H, 9258H MOV A, M CMa ; 9258H " HL ; (9258H) " A ; A"A
Option (D) is correct. The minimum number of bit require to encode 100 increment is or 2n $ 100 n $7
5.71
Option (B) is correct. Shift Register " Serial to parallel data conversion Counter " Frequency division Decoder " Addressing in memory chips. Option (A) is correct. For the TTL family if terminal is floating, then it is at logic 1. Thus Y = (AB + 1) = AB .0 = 0 Option (C) is correct. 11001 1001 111001 00110 0110 000110 +1 +1 +1 00111 0111 000111 7 7 7 Thus 2s complement of 11001, 1001 and 111001 is 7. So the number given in the question are 2s complement correspond to 7. Option (C) is correct. In the modulo  6 ripple counter at the end of sixth pulse (i.e. after 101 or at 110) all states must be cleared. Thus when CB is 11 the all states must be cleared. The input to 2input gate is C and B and the desired output should be low since the CLEAR is active low Thus when C and B are 0, 0, then output must be 0. In all other case the output must be 1. OR gate can implement this functions. Option (C) is correct. Number of MUX is 4 = 2 and 2 = 1. Thus the total number 3 2 3
5.81 5.80
5.72
5.73
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
MOV M, A ; A"M This program complement the data of memory location 9258H. Option (D) is correct. MVI A, 00H ; Clear accumulator LOOP ADD B ; Add the contents of B to A DCR C ; Decrement C JNZ LOOP ; If C is not zero jump to loop HLT END This instruction set add the contents of B to accumulator to contents of C times.
5.74
5.75
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
5.82
Page 127
Option (D) is correct. The number of distinct boolean expression of n variable is 22n . Thus 2 = 2 = 65536
24 16
5.89
= R + S + PQ + PR + PQS + QRS Thus W = Z and X = Z Option (B) is correct. Propagation delay of flip flop is tpd = 10 nsec Propagation delay of 4 bit ripple counter R = 4tpd = 40 ns and in synchronous counter all flipflop are given clock simultaneously, so S = tpd = 10 ns Option (C) is correct. After t = t1, at first rising edge of clock, the output of shift register is 0110, which in input to address line of ROM. At 0110 is applied to register. So at this time data stroed in ROM at 1010 (10), 1000 will be on bus. When W has the data 0110 and it is 6 in decimal, and its data value at that add is 1010
5.83
Option (C) is correct. In the flash analog to digital converter, the no. of comparators is equal to 2n  1, where n is no. of bit.s So, 2n  1 = 28  1 = 255 Option (B) is correct. When output of the 74 series gate of TTL gates is taken from BJT then the configuration is either totem pole or open collector configuration . Option (D) is correct. A 2n: 1 MUX can implement all logic functions of (n + 1) variable without andy additional circuitry. Here n = 3 . Thus a 8 : 1 MUX can implement all logic functions of 4 variable. Option (D) is correct. Counter must be reset when it count 111. This can be implemented by following circuitry
5.90
5.84
5.85
5.86
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
5.87
Option (B) is correct. We have Y = P5Q5R Z = RQ + PR + QP Here every block is a full subtractor giving P  Q  R where R is borrow. Thus circuit acts as a 4 bit subtractor giving P  Q .
5.88
Option (A) is correct. W = R + PQ + RS X = PQRS + PQRS + PQRS Y = RS + PR + PQ + PQ = RS + PR $ PQ $ PQ = RS + (P + R )( P + Q)( P + Q) = RS + (P + PQ + PR + QR )( P + Q) = RS + PQ + QR (P + P ) + QR = RS + PQ + QR Z = R + S + PQ + PQR + PQS = R + S + PQ $ PQR $ PQS
5.94 5.92
Option (B) is correct. The DTL has minimum fan out and CMOS has minimum power consumption. Propagation delay is minimum in ECL. Option (D) is correct. Let input be 1010; output will be 1101 Let input be 0110; output will be 0100 Thus it convert gray to Binary code. Option (A) is correct. CMP B & Compare the accumulator content with context of Register B If A < R CY is set and zero flag will be reset. Option (A) is correct. Vo = V1 :R bo + R b1 + R b2 + R b 3D 4R R 2R 4R Exact value when V1 = 5 , for maximum output VoExact = 5 :1 + 1 + 1 + 1 D = 9.375 2 4 8 Maximum Vout due to tolerance Vo max = 5.5 :110 + 110 + 110 + 110 D 90 2 # 90 4 # 90 8 # 90 Tolerance = 12.604 = 34.44% = 35%
5.93
= R + S + (P + Q )( P + Q + R)( P + Q + S) = R + S + PQ + PQ + PQS + PR + PQR + PRS + PQ + PQS + PQR + QRS = R + S + PQ + PQS + PR + PQR + PRS + PQS + PQR + QRS = R + S + PQ (1 + S) + PR (1 + P ) + PRS + PQS + PQR + QRS = R + S + PQ + PR + PRS + PQS + PQR + QRS = R + S + PQ + PR (1 + Q ) + PQS + QRS
5.95
Option (D) is correct. If the 4 bit 2s complement representation of a decimal number is 1000, then the number is 8 Option (B) is correct. Output of 1 st XOR = = X $ 1 + X $ 1 = X Output of 2 nd XOR = X X + XX = 1
5.96
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 128
Option (C) is correct. In the comparator type ADC, the no. of comparators is equal to 2n  1 , where n is no. of bit.s So, 23  1 = 7 Option (C) is correct. The circuit is as shown below
5.103
Its 1s complement is 101110 So 2s compliment is + 101110 1 101111 Option (C) is correct. The propagation delay of each inverter is tpd then The fundamental frequency of oscillator output is 1 = 1 GHz f = 1 = 2ntpd 2 # 5 # 100 # 10  12 Option (C) is correct. 4K # 8 bit means 102410 location of byte are present Now 102410 * 1000H It starting address is AA00H then address of last byte is AA00H + 1000H  0001H = B9FFH
5.105
5.98
5.104
The circuit shown is monostable multivibrator as it requires an external triggering and it has one stable and one quasistable state.
5.99
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
For abrupt change in Vi from 0 to 1 at time t = t0 we have to assume the output of NOR then we can say that option (B) is correct waveform.
Option (B) is correct. They have prorogation delay as respectively, G1 " 10 nsec G2 " 20 nsec
or
5.106
Option (D) is correct. For the LED to glow it must be forward biased. Thus output of NAND must be LOW for LED to emit light. So both input to NAND must be HIGH. If any one or both switch are closed, output of AND will be LOW. If both switch are open, output of XOR will be LOW. So there cant be both input HIGH to NAND. So LED doesnt emit light. Option (C) is correct. The output of options (C) satisfy the given conditions
5.107
5.100
Option (B) is correct. Let X3 X2 X1 X0 be 1001 then Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1111. Let X3 X2 X1 X0 be 1000 then Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1110 Let X3 X2 X1 X0 be 0110 then Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0 will be 1100 So this converts 2421 BCD numbers. Option (B) is correct. MVI B, 87H MOV A, B START : JMP NEXT XRA B JP START JMP NEXT XRA ; B = 87 ; A = B = 87 ; Jump to next ; A 5 B " A, ; A = 00, B = 87 ; Since A = 00 is positive ; so jump to START ;Jump to NEXT ; unconditionally ; B ; A 5 B " A, A = 87 , ; B = 87 H ; will not jump as D7 , of A is 1 ; A = 87 " PORT2
5.108 5.109
5.101
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Conversion time of successive approximate analog to digital converters is independent of input voltage. It depends upon the number of bits only. Thus it remains unchanged.
5.110
NEXT :
Option (C) is correct. In the flash analog to digital converter, the no. of comparators is equal to 2n  1, where n is no. of bits. So, 2 4  1 = 15 Option (D) is correct. As the output of AND is X = 1, the all input of this AND must be 1. Thus ...(1) AB + AB = 1
5.111
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 129
...(2) BC + BC = 1 ...(3) C =1 From (2) and (3), if C = 1, then B = 1 If B = 1, then from (1) A = 0 . Thus A = 0, B = 1 and C = 1
5.112
Now applying voltage divider rule V = 1k V% = 1 Vo 1k + 7k 8 From (1) and (2) we have Vo = 8 # 5 = 5V 8
5.117
...(2)
Option (C) is correct. Interrupt is a process of data transfer by which an external device can inform the processor that it is ready for communication. 8085 microprocessor have five interrupts namely TRAP, INTR, RST 7.5, RST 6.5 and RST 5.5 Option (A) is correct. For any RST instruction, location of program transfer is obtained in following way. RST x & (x ) 8) 10 " convert in hexadecimal So for RST 6 & (6 ) 8) 10 = (48) 10 = (30) H Option (A) is correct. Accumulator contains A = 49 H Register B = 3 AH SUB B = A minus B A = 49 H = 01001001 B = 3 AH = 00111010 2s complement of ( B) = 11000110 A  B = A + ( B) 010 010 01 & +1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1111 Carry so here output A Carry CY Sign flag S =1 =0F =1 =1
Option (D) is correct. The truth table is shown below Z = XQ + YQ Comparing from the truth table of J  K FF Y = J, X =K X 0 0 1 Y 0 1 0 Z Q 0 1
5.113
5.114
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Q1
Option (B) is correct. In the figure the given counter is mod10 counter, so frequency of output is 10k = 1k 10 Option (D) is correct. We have y = A + AB we know from Distributive property Thus x + yz = (x + y) (x + z) y = (A + A) (A + B) = A + B
5.115
5.119
5.120
Y = B + (B + C ) = B (B + C ) = B
5.116
Option (C) is correct. Darligton emitter follower provides a low output impedance in both logical state (1 or 0). Due to this low output impedance, any stray capacitance is rapidly charged and discharged, so the output state changes quickly. It improves speed of operation. Option (D) is correct. Option (B) is correct. For ADC we can write Analog input = (decimal eq of digital output) # resol 6.6 = (decimal eq. of digital output) # 0.5 6.6 = decimal eq of digital. output 0.5 13.2 = decimal equivalent of digital output so output of ADC is = 1101.
5.121 5.122
5.123
...(1)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 130
address range A15 A14 A13 A12 initial 1 1 1 address final 1 1 1 address so address range is (7 0
5.127
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 &7000H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 &7FFFH 0 0 H 7 F F F H)
Option (C) is correct. For a binary halfsubtractor truth table si given below.
Option (C) is correct. Given boolean function is Z = ABC Now Z = ABC = ACB = AC + B Thus Z = AC + B we have Z = X + Y (1 NOR gate) where X = AC (1 NAND gate) To implement a NOR gate we required 4 NAND gates as shown below in figure.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
5.125
Option (D) is correct. From the given figure we can write the output
Option (B) is correct. For TTL worst cases low voltages are VOL (max) = 0.4 V VIL (max) = 0.8 V Worst case high voltages are VOH (min) = 2.4 V VIH (min) = 2 V The difference between maximum input low voltage and maximum output low voltage is called noise margin. It is 0.4 V in case of TTL.
5.129
For the state 010 all preset = 1 and output QA QB QC = 111 so here total no. of states = 5 (down counter)
5.126
Option (D) is correct. From the figure we can see If A =1 then y =1 If A =1 then also y =1
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
so for sequence B = 101010....output x and y will be fixed at 0 and 1 respectively.
5.130
Option (D) is correct. Given 2s complement no. 1101; the no. is 0011 for 6 digit output we can write the no. is 000011 2s complement representation of above no. is 111101 Option (A) is correct. Option (B) is correct. An I/O Microprocessor controls data flow between main memory and the I/O device which wants to communicate. Option (D) is correct.
5.131 5.132
5.133
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
5.134
Page 131
Option (B) is correct. Dual slope ADC is more accurate. Option (A) is correct. Dual form of any identity can be find by replacing all AND function to OR and viceversa. so here dual form will be (A + B) (A + C) (B + C) = (A + B) (A + C) Option (B) is correct. Carry flag will be affected by arithmetic instructions only. Option (C) is correct. This is a synchronous counter. we can find output as QA QB 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 h So It counts only three states. It is a mod3 counter. K =3 Option (B) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Essential prime implicates for a function is no. of terms that we get by solving K map. Here we get 4 terms when solve the K map.
5.135
F = AB + AB B = 0 so, F = A1 + A0 = A
Option (C) is correct. EI = Enabled Interput flag ,RST will cause an Interrupt only it we enable EI .
5.136
5.146
5.137
Option (A) is correct. Here only for the range 60 to 63 H chipselect will be 0, so peripheral will correspond in this range only chipselect = 1 for rest of the given address ranges. Option (B) is correct. By executing instructions one by one LXI H, 8A79 H (Load HL pair by value 8A79) H = 8AH L = 79 H MOV A, L (copy contain of L to accumulator)
5.147
5.138 5.139
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
0 1111 0 0 1 DAA add 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 A = 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 = 63 H MOV H, A (copy contain of A to H) H = 63 H PCHL (Load program counter by HL pair) PC = 6379 H
5.148 5.149
Option (C) is correct. Option (C) is correct. NMOS In parallel makes OR Gate & in series makes AND so here we can have F = A (B + C) + DE we took complement because there is another NMOS given above (works as an inverter)
Option (C) is correct. In totem pole stage output resistance will be small so it acts like a output buffer. Option (B) is correct. Consider high output state fan out = IOH max = 400 mA = 20 IIH max 20 mA Consider low output state fan out = IOL max = 8 mA = 80 IIL max 0.1 mA Thus fan out is 20 Option (A) is correct.
5.150
5.143
Option (D) is correct. For a J  K flip flop we have characteristic equation as Q (t + 1) = JQ (t) + KQ (t) Q (t) & Q (t + 1) are present & next states. In given figure J = Q (t), K = 1 so Q (t + 1) = Q (t) Q (t) + 0Q (t) Q (t + 1) = Q (t)[complement of previous state] we have initial input Q (t) = 0
5.144
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 132
Option (C) is correct. Option (B) is correct. By distributive property in boolean algebra we have (A + BC) = (A + B) (A + C) (A + B) (A + C) = AA + AC + AB + BC = A (1 + C) + AB + BC = A + AB + BC = A (1 + B) + BC = A + BC
or = 200 mV/cC
5.159
Tcoff =
5.160
5.153
Option (A) is correct. The current in a p n junction diode is controlled by diffusion of majority carriers while current in schottky diode dominated by the flow of majority carrier over the potential barrier at metallurgical junction. So there is no minority carrier storage in schottky diode, so switching time from forward bias to reverse bias is very short compared to p n junction diode. Hence the propagation delay will reduces. Option (B) is correct.
Option (C) is correct. Given instruction set 1000 LXI SP 27FF 1003 CALL 1006 1006 POP H First Instruction will initialize the SP by a value 27FF SP ! 27FF CALL 1006 will Push PC and Load PC by value 1006 PUSH PC will store value of PC in stack PC = 1006
5.154
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Option (D) is correct. The total conversion time for different type of ADC are given as t is clock period For flash type & 1t Counter type & (2n  t) = 4095 m sec n = no.of bits Integrating type conver time > 4095 m sec successive approximation type nt = 12 m sec here n = 12 so nt = 12 12t = 12 so this is succ. app. type ADC.
now POP H will be executed which load HL pair by stack values HL = 1006 and SP = SPl + 2 SP = SPl + 2 = SP  2 + 2 = SP SP = 27FF
5.155
5.156
Option (D) is correct. LDA 2003 (Load accumulator by a value 2003 H) so here total no. of memory access will be 4. 1 = Fetching instruction 2 = Read the value from memory 1 = write value to accumulator Option (D) is correct. Storage capacitance 12 C = i = 1 # 10 5  0.5 dv b dt l b 20 103 l # = 1 # 10
12
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
5.157
# 20 # 10 4.5
3
= 4.4 # 1015 F
5.158
or
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 6
SIGNALS & SYSTEMS
Page 133
2013
6.8
TWO MARKS
The impulse response of a continuous time system is given by h ^ t h = d ^t  1h + d ^t  3h. The value of the step response at t = 2 is (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 A system described by the differential equation 2 dy dy + 5 + 6y ^ t h = x ^ t h. Let x ^ t h be a rectangular pulse given by dt dt2 1 0<t<2 x^t h = * 0 otherwise dy Assuming that y ^0 h = 0 and = 0 at t = 0 , the Laplace transdt form of y ^ t h is 1  e2s e2s (B) (A) s ^s + 2h^s + 3h s ^s + 2h^s + 3h 2s e 1  e2s (C) (D) ^s + 2h^s + 3h ^s + 2h^s + 3h A system described by a linear, constant coefficient, ordinary, first
6.9
2013
6.1
ONE MARK
Two systems with impulse responses h1 ^ t h and h2 ^ t h are connected in cascade. Then the overall impulse response of the cascaded system is given by (A) product of h1 ^ t h and h2 ^ t h (B) sum of h1 ^ t h and h2 ^ t h (C) convolution of h1 ^ t h and h2 ^ t h (D) subtraction of h2 ^ t h from h1 ^ t h The impulse response of a system is h ^ t h = tu ^ t h. For an input u ^t  1h, the output is 2 t ^t  1h (A) t u ^ t h (B) u ^t  1h 2 2
6.10
6.2
^t  1h2 (C) u ^t  1h 2
6.3
2 (D) t  1 u ^t  1h 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
For a periodic signal v ^ t h = 30 sin 100t + 10 cos 300t + 6 sin ^500t + p/4h, the fundamental frequency in rad/s (A) 100 (B) 300 (C) 500 (D) 1500 A bandlimited signal with a maximum frequency of 5 kHz is to be sampled. According to the sampling theorem, the sampling frequency which is not valid is (A) 5 kHz (B) 12 kHz (C) 15 kHz (D) 20 kHz Which one of the following statements is NOT TRUE for a continuous time causal and stable LTI system? (A) All the poles of the system must lie on the left side of the jw axis (B) Zeros of the system can lie anywhere in the splane (C) All the poles must lie within s = 1 (D) All the roots of the characteristic equation must be located on the left side of the jw axis. Assuming zero initial condition, the response y ^ t h of the system given below to a unit step input u ^ t h is
6.4
6.5
6.6
The DFT of a vector 8a b c dB is the vector 8a b g dB . Consider the product V R Sa b c d W Sd a b c W 8p q r sB = 8a b c dBSc d a b W W S Sb c d aW X T The DFT of the vector 8p q r sB is a scaled version of (B) 9 a b (A) 9a2 b2 g2 d2C g dC (C) 8a + b b + d d + g g + aB (D) 8a b g dB
2012 ONE MARK
(A) u ^ t h 2 (C) t u ^ t h 2
6.7
2
Let g ^ t h = e pt , and h ^ t h is a filter matched to g ^ t h. If g ^ t h is applied as input to h ^ t h, then the Fourier transform of the output is (A) e pf (B) e pf /2
2 2
(C) e p f
(D) e2pf
The unilateral Laplace transform of f (t) is 2 1 . The unilateral s +s+1 Laplace transform of tf (t) is (A)  2 s (B)  2 2s + 1 2 (s + s + 1) 2 (s + s + 1) (C) 2 s (D) 2 2s + 1 2 2 (s + s + 1) (s + s + 1)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
6.13
Page 134
6.19
If x [n] = (1/3) n  (1/2) n u [n], then the region of convergence (ROC) of its z transform in the z plane will be (A) 1 < z < 3 (B) 1 < z < 1 3 3 2 (C) 1 < z < 3 (D) 1 < z 2 3
2012 TWO MARKS
A system is defined by its impulse response h (n) = 2n u (n  2). The system is (A) stable and causal (B) causal but not stable (C) stable but not causal (D) unstable and noncausal If the unit step response of a network is (1  e at), then its unit impulse response is (A) ae at (B) a1 e at (C) (1  a1) e at (D) (1  a) e at
2011 TWO MARKS
6.20
6.14
The input x (t) and output y (t) of a system are related as y (t) =
(A) timeinvariant and stable (B) stable and not timeinvariant (C) timeinvariant and not stable (D) not timeinvariant and not stable
6.15
The Fourier transform of a signal h (t) is H (jw) = (2 cos w) (sin 2w) /w . The value of h (0) is (A) 1/4 (B) 1/2 (C) 1 (D) 2
An input x (t) = exp ( 2t) u (t) + d (t  6) is applied to an LTI system with impulse response h (t) = u (t) . The output is (A) [1  exp ( 2t)] u (t) + u (t + 6) (B) [1  exp ( 2t)] u (t) + u (t  6) (C) 0.5 [1  exp ( 2t)] u (t) + u (t + 6) (D) 0.5 [1  exp ( 2t)] u (t) + u (t  6) Two systems H1 (Z ) and H2 (Z ) are connected in cascade as shown below. The overall output y (n) is the same as the input x (n) with a one unit delay. The transfer function of the second system H2 (Z ) is
6.22
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
6.16
Let y [n] denote the convolution of h [n] and g [n], where h [n] = (1/2) n u [n] and g [n] is a causal sequence. If y [0] = 1 and y [1] = 1/2, then g [1] equals (A) 0 (B) 1/2 (C) 1
2011
2
(B) (D)
(D) 3/2
ONE MARK
2
The first six points of the 8point DFT of a real valued sequence are 5, 1  j 3, 0, 3  j 4, 0 and 3 + j 4 . The last two points of the DFT are respectively (A) 0, 1  j 3 (B) 0, 1 + j 3 (C) 1 + j3, 5 (D) 1  j 3, 5
2010 ONE MARK
6.17
y The differential equation 100 d  20 dy dt + y = x (t) describes a system dt with an input x (t) and an output y (t). The system, which is initially relaxed, is excited by a unit step input. The output y ^ t h can be represented by the waveform
6.24
The trigonometric Fourier series for the waveform f (t) shown below contains
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
6.18
The trigonometric Fourier series of an even function does not have the (A) dc term (B) cosine terms (C) sine terms (D) odd harmonic terms
(A) only cosine terms and zero values for the dc components
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 135
(B) only cosine terms and a positive value for the dc components (C) only cosine terms and a negative value for the dc components (D) only sine terms and a negative value for the dc components
6.25
Which of the above statements are correct ? (A) P and S (B) P and R (C) Q and S (D) Q and R
6.32
Consider the z transform x (z) = 5z2 + 4z1 + 3; 0 < z < 3. The inverse z  transform x [n] is (A) 5d [n + 2] + 3d [n] + 4d [n  1] (B) 5d [n  2] + 3d [n] + 4d [n + 1] (C) 5u [n + 2] + 3u [n] + 4u [n  1] (D) 5u [n  2] + 3u [n] + 4u [n + 1] Two discrete time system with impulse response h1 [n] = d [n  1] and h2 [n] = d [n  2] are connected in cascade. The overall impulse response of the cascaded system is (B) d [n  4] (A) d [n  1] + d [n  2] (C) d [n  3] (D) d [n  1] d [n  2] For a N point FET algorithm N = 2m which one of the following statements is TRUE ? (A) It is not possible to construct a signal flow graph with both input and output in normal order (B) The number of butterflies in the m th stage in N/m (C) Inplace computation requires storage of only 2N data (D) Computation of a butterfly requires only one complex multiplication.
2010 TWO MARKS
1
6.26
A function is given by f (t) = sin2 t + cos 2t . Which of the following is true ? (A) f has frequency components at 0 and 1 Hz 2p (B) f has frequency components at 0 and 1 Hz p (C) f has frequency components at 1 and 1 Hz p 2p (D) f has frequency components at 0.1 and 1 Hz p 2p The ROC of z transform of the discrete time sequence n n x (n) = b 1 l u (n)  b 1 l u ( n  1) is 3 2 (B) z > 1 (A) 1 < z < 1 2 3 2
6.33
6.27
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.28
3s + 1 Given f (t) = L ; 3 . If lim f (t) = 1, then the value t"3 s + 4s2 + (k  3) s E of k is (A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4 A continuous time LTI system is described by d 2 y (t) dy (t) dx (t) + 4x (t) +4 + 3y (t) = 2 2 dt dt dt Assuming zero initial conditions, the response y (t) of the above system for the input x (t) = e2t u (t) is given by (B) (et  e3t) u (t) (A) (et  e3t) u (t) (C) (et + e3t) u (t) (D) (et + e3t) u (t) The transfer function of a discrete time LTI system is given by 2  3 z1 4 H (z) = 3 1 1  z + 1 z2 8 4 Consider the following statements: S1: The system is stable and causal for ROC: z > 1/2 S2: The system is stable but not causal for ROC: z < 1/4 S3: The system is neither stable nor causal for ROC: 1/4 < z < 1/2 Which one of the following statements is valid ? (A) Both S1 and S2 are true (B) Both S2 and S3 are true (C) Both S1 and S3 are true (D) S1, S2 and S3 are all true
2009 ONE MARK
Given that F (s) is the oneside Laplace transform of f (t), the Laplace transform of f (t) dt is # 0 (B) 1 F (s) s (D) 1 [F (s)  f (0)] s
6.29
# 0
F (t) dt
6.30
A system with transfer function H (z) has impulse response h (.) defined as h (2) = 1, h (3) = 1 and h (k) = 0 otherwise. Consider the following statements. S1 : H (z) is a lowpass filter. S2 : H (z) is an FIR filter. Which of the following is correct? (A) Only S2 is true (B) Both S1 and S2 are false (C) Both S1 and S2 are true, and S2 is a reason for S1 (D) Both S1 and S2 are true, but S2 is not a reason for S1 Consider a system whose input x and output y are related by the equation y (t) =
6.36
6.31
The Fourier series of a real periodic function has only (P) cosine terms if it is even (Q) sine terms if it is even (R) cosine terms if it is odd (S) sine terms if it is odd
Which of the following four properties are possessed by the system ? BIBO : Bounded input gives a bounded output.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 136
Causal : The system is causal, LP : The system is low pass. LTI : The system is linear and timeinvariant. (A) Causal, LP (B) BIBO, LTI (C) BIBO, Causal, LTI (D) LP, LTI
6.37
The 4point Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) of a discrete time sequence {1,0,2,3} is (A) [0,  2 + 2j , 2,  2  2j ] (B) [2, 2 + 2j , 6, 2  2j ] (C) [6, 1  3j , 2, 1 + 3j ] (D) [6,  1 + 3j , 0,  1  3j ]
s +1 An LTI system having transfer function s + and input 2s + 1 x (t) = sin (t + 1) is in steady state. The output is sampled at a rate ws rad/s to obtain the final output {x (k)}. Which of the following is true ? (A) y (.) is zero for all sampling frequencies ws (B) y (.) is nonzero for all sampling frequencies ws (C) y (.) is nonzero for ws > 2 , but zero for ws < 2 (D) y (.) is zero for ws > 2 , but nonzero for w2 < 2
2 2
A discrete time linear shift  invariant system has an impulse response h [n] with h [0] = 1, h [1] = 1, h [2] = 2, and zero otherwise The system is given an input sequence x [n] with x [0] = x [2] = 1, and zero otherwise. The number of nonzero samples in the output sequence y [n], and the value of y [2] are respectively (A) 5, 2 (B) 6, 2 (C) 6, 1 (D) 5, 3 Let x (t) be the input and y (t) be the output of a continuous time system. Match the system properties P1, P2 and P3 with system relations R1, R2, R3, R4 Properties Relations P1 : Linear but NOT time  invariant R1 : y (t) = t2 x (t) P2 : Time  invariant but NOT linear R2 : y (t) = t x (t) P3 : Linear and time  invariant R3 : y (t) = x (t) R4 : y (t) = x (t  5) (A) (P1, R1), (P2, R3), (P3, R4) (B) (P1, R2), (P2, R3), (P3, R4) (C) (P1, R3), (P2, R1), (P3, R2) (D) (P1, R1), (P2, R2), (P3, R3) {x (n)} is a real  valued periodic sequence with a period N . x (n) and X (k) form Npoint Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) pairs. N1 The DFT Y (k) of the sequence y (n) = 1 / x (r) x (n + r) is N r=0 N1 (B) 1 / X (r) X (k + r) (A) X (k) 2 N r=0
N1 (C) 1 / X (r) X (k + r) N r=0
6.38
6.44
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2008
6.39
6.45
ONE MARK
The input and output of a continuous time system are respectively denoted by x (t) and y (t). Which of the following descriptions corresponds to a causal system ? (B) y (t) = (t  4) x (t + 1) (A) y (t) = x (t  2) + x (t + 4) (C) y (t) = (t + 4) x (t  1) (D) y (t) = (t + 5) x (t + 5) The impulse response h (t) of a linear time invariant continuous time system is described by h (t) = exp (at) u (t) + exp (bt) u ( t) where u ( t) denotes the unit step function, and a and b are real constants. This system is stable if (A) a is positive and b is positive (B) a is negative and b is negative (C) a is negative and b is negative (D) a is negative and b is positive
2008 TWO MARKS
(D) 0
6.40
6.41
A linear, time  invariant, causal continuous time system has a rational transfer function with simple poles at s = 2 and s = 4 and one simple zero at s = 1. A unit step u (t) is applied at the input of the system. At steady state, the output has constant value of 1. The impulse response of this system is (A) [exp ( 2t) + exp ( 4t)] u (t) (B) [ 4 exp ( 2t)  12 exp ( 4t)  exp ( t)] u (t) (C) [ 4 exp ( 2t) + 12 exp ( 4t)] u (t) (D) [ 0.5 exp ( 2t) + 1.5 exp ( 4t)] u (t) The signal x (t) is described by 1 for  1 # t # + 1 x (t) = ) 0 otherwise Two of the angular frequencies at which its Fourier transform be
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
6.46
The samples x (n), n = (0, 1, 2, ...) are given by (A) 5 (1  e0.05n) (B) 5e0.05n (C) 5 (1  e5n) (D) 5e5n The expression and the region of convergence of the z transform of the sampled signal are 5z , z < e0.05 (A) 5z 5 , z < e5 (B) z e0.05 ze 5z , z > e0.05 (C) (D) 5z 5 , z > e5 0.05 ze ze
6.47
6.42
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 137
time system is given by h (t) = exp ( 2t) u (t), where u (t) denotes the unit step function.
6.48
The frequency response H (w) of this system in terms of angular frequency w , is given by H (w) 1 (B) sin w (A) w 1 + j2w jw 1 (C) (D) 2 + jw 2 + jw The output of this system, to the sinusoidal input x (t) = 2 cos 2t for all time t , is (A) 0 (B) 20.25 cos (2t  0.125p) (C) 20.5 cos (2t  0.125p) (D) 20.5 cos (2t  0.25p)
6.58
6.49
3 t=0 (B) d (t) = ) 0 otherwise 3 1 t=0 (C) d (t) = ) and d (t) dt = 1 3 0 otherwise 3 3 t=0 (D) d (t) = ) and d (t) dt = 1 3 0 otherwise If the region of convergence of x1 [n] + x2 [n] is region of convergence of x1 [n]  x2 [n] includes (A) 1 < z < 3 (B) 2 < z 3 3 (C) 3 < z < 3 (D) 1 < z 2 3
6.59
2007
6.50
ONE MARK
In the system shown below, x (t) = (sin t) u (t) In steadystate, the response y (t) will be
1 If the Laplace transform of a signal Y (s) = , then its final s (s  1) value is (A)  1 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) Unbounded
2007 TWO MARKS
6.51
The 3dB bandwidth of the lowpass signal et u (t), where u (t) is the unit step function, is given by (B) 1 (A) 1 Hz 2  1 Hz 2p 2p (C) 3 (D) 1 Hz A 5point sequence x [n] is given as x [ 3] = 1, x [ 2] = 1, x [ 1] = 0, x [0] = 5 and x [1] = 1. Let X (eiw) denoted the discretetime Fourier transform of x [n]. The value of (A) 5 (C) 16p
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.52
(B)
1 sin t + p ` 4j 2
p
X (e jw) dw is
6.53
0.5 The z transform X (z) of a sequence x [n] is given by X [z] = 1 . 2z It is given that the region of convergence of X (z) includes the unit circle. The value of x [0] is (A)  0.5 (B) 0 (C) 0.25 (D) 05
Consider the function f (t) having Laplace transform F (s) = 2 w0 2 Re [s] > 0 s + w0 The final value of f (t) would be (A) 0 (B) 1 (C)  1 # f (3) # 1 (D) 3 A system with input x [n] and output y [n] is given as y [n] = (sin 5 6 pn ) x [ n ] . The system is (A) linear, stable and invertible (B) nonlinear, stable and noninvertible (C) linear, stable and noninvertible (D) linear, unstable and invertible The unit step response of a system starting from rest is given by c (t) = 1  e2t for t $ 0 . The transfer function of the system is 1 (B) 2 (A) 2+s 1 + 2s (C) 1 (D) 2s 2+s 1 + 2s The unit impulse response of a system is f (t) = et, t $ 0 . For this system the steadystate value of the output for unit step input is equal to (A)  1 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D) 3
6.54
6.61
6.55
The frequency response of a linear, timeinvariant system is given by H (f) = 1 + j5 10pf . The step response of the system is t (A) 5 (1  e5t) u (t) (B) 5 61  e 5@ u (t) t (C) 1 (1  e5t) u (t) (D) 1 ^1  e 5 h u (t) 2 5
2006 ONE MARK
6.62
6.56
Let x (t) * X (jw) be Fourier Transform pair. The Fourier Transform of the signal x (5t  3) in terms of X (jw) is given as j3w j3w jw jw (A) 1 e 5 X b l (B) 1 e 5 X b l 5 5 5 5 jw jw (C) 1 ej3w X b l (D) 1 e j3w X b l 5 5 5 5 The Dirac delta function d (t) is defined as 1 t=0 (A) d (t) = ) 0 otherwise
6.63
6.57
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 138
2005
6.64
ONE MARK
Choose the function f (t);  3 < t < 3 for which a Fourier series cannot be defined. (A) 3 sin (25t) (B) 4 cos (20t + 3) + 2 sin (710t) (C) exp ( t ) sin (25t) (D) 1 The function x (t) is shown in the figure. Even and odd parts of a unit step function u (t) are respectively,
TWO MARKS
The output y (t) of a linear time invariant system is related to its input x (t) by the following equations y (t)= 0.5x (t  td + T) + x (t  td ) + 0.5x (t  td + T) The filter transfer function H (w) of such a system is given by (A) (1 + cos wT) ejwt
d
6.65
(B) (1 + 0.5 cos wT) ejwt (C) (1  cos wT) ejwt (D) (1  0.5 cos wT) ejwt
d
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
6.71
Match the following and choose the correct combination. Group 1 E. Continuous and aperiodic signal F. Continuous and periodic signal G. Discrete and aperiodic signal H. Discrete and periodic signal Group 2 1. Fourier representation is continuous and aperiodic 2. Fourier representation is discrete and aperiodic 3. Fourier representation is continuous and periodic 4. Fourier representation is discrete and periodic (A) (B) (C) (D) E  3, E  1, E  1, E  2, F  2, F  3, F  2, F  1, G  4, G  2, G  3, G  4, H1 H4 H4 H3
6.66
The region of convergence of z  transform of the sequence 5 n 6 n b 6 l u (n)  b 5 l u ( n  1) must be (B) z > 5 (A) z < 5 6 6 (C) 5 < z < 6 (D) 6 < z < 3 6 5 5 Which of the following can be impulse response of a causal system ?
6.72
6.67
A signal x (n) = sin (w0 n + f) is the input to a linear time invariant system having a frequency response H (e jw). If the output of the system Ax (n  n0) then the most general form of +H (e jw) will be (A)  n0 w0 + b for any arbitrary real (B)  n0 w0 + 2pk for any arbitrary integer k (C) n0 w0 + 2pk for any arbitrary integer k (D)  n0 w0 f
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
n 2 jw Let x (n) = ( 1 2 ) u (n), y (n) = x (n) and Y (e ) be the Fourier transform of y (n) then Y (e j0) (A) 1 4 (B) 2
6.68
(C) 4 (D) 4 3
6.69
6.73
The power in the signal s (t) = 8 cos (20p  p 2 ) + 4 sin (15pt) is (A) 40
x(n 2  1),
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 139
The system is stable only if (A) a = 2 , b < 2 (C) a < 2 , any value of b
6.81
The impulse response h [n] of a linear time invariant system is given as h [ n] = * 4 2 n = 2,  2 0 otherwise If the input to the above system is the sequence e jpn/4 , then the output is (A) 4 2 e jpn/4 (B) 4 2 ejpn/4 (C) 4e jpn/4 (D)  4e jpn/4 2 2 n = 1,  1
6.82
Let x (t) and y (t) with Fourier transforms F (f) and Y (f) respectively be related as shown in Fig. Then Y (f) is
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.74
The Fourier transform of y (2n) will be (A) ej2w [cos 4w + 2 cos 2w + 2] (B) cos 2w + 2 cos w + 2 jw (C) e [cos 2w + 2 cos w + 2] (D) ej2w [cos 2w + 2 cos + 2] For a signal x (t) the Fourier transform is X (f). Then the inverse Fourier transform of X (3f + 2) is given by j 4p t (A) 1 x` t j e j3pt (B) 1 x` t j e  3 2 2 3 3 (C) 3x (3t) ej4pt
2004
6.75
(D) x (3t + 2)
ONE MARK
6.76
The impulse response h [n] of a linear timeinvariant system is given by h [n] = u [n + 3] + u [n  2)  2n [n  7] where u [n] is the unit step sequence. The above system is (A) stable but not causal (B) stable and causal (C) causal but unstable (D) unstable and not causal The z transform of a system is H (z) = z z0.2 . If the ROC is z < 0.2 , then the impulse response of the system is (A) (0.2) n u [n] (B) (0.2) n u [ n  1] (C)  (0.2) n u [n] (D)  (0.2) n u [ n  1] The Fourier transform of a conjugate symmetric function is always (A) imaginary (B) conjugate antisymmetric (C) real (D) conjugate symmetric
2004 TWO MARKS
6.77
The Laplace transform of i (t) is given by 2 I (s) = s (1 + s) At t " 3 , The value of i (t) tends to (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3
6.78
6.84
The Fourier series expansion of a real periodic signal with fundamental frequency f0 is given by gp (t) = cn e j2pf t . It is given n = 3 that c3 = 3 + j5 . Then c3 is (A) 5 + j3 (B)  3  j5 (C)  5 + j3 (D) 3  j5
6.79
Consider the sequence x [n] = [ 4  j51 + j25]. The conjugate antisymmetric part of the sequence is (B) [ j2.5, 1, j2.5] (A) [ 4  j2.5, j2, 4  j2.5] (C) [ j2.5, j2, 0] (D) [ 4, 1, 4] A causal LTI system is described by the difference equation 2y [n] = ay [n  2]  2x [n] + bx [n  1]
6.85
Let x (t) be the input to a linear, timeinvariant system. The required output is 4p (t  2). The transfer function of the system should be (A) 4e j4pf (B) 2ej8pf (C) 4ej4pf (D) 2e j8pf A sequence x (n) with the z transform X (z) = z 4 + z2  2z + 2  3z4 is applied as an input to a linear, timeinvariant system with the impulse response h (n) = 2d (n  3) where
6.80
6.86
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 140
TWO MARKS
Let P be linearity, Q be timeinvariance, R be causality and S be stability. A discrete time system has the inputoutput relationship, x (n) n$1 y (n) = *0, n=0 x (n + 1) n #  1 where x (n) is the input and y (n) is the output. The above system has the properties (A) P, S but not Q, R (B) P, Q, S but not R (C) P, Q, R, S
A linear phase channel with phase delay Tp and group delay Tg must have (A) Tp = Tg = constant (B) Tp \ f and Tg \ f (C) Tp = constant and Tg \ f ( f denote frequency) (D) Tp \ f and Tp = constant
2002 TWO MARKS
5s s2  s  2
6.94
The Laplace transform of continuous  time signal x (t) is X (s) = . If the Fourier transform of this signal exists, the x (t) is (A) e2t u (t)  2et u (t) (B)  e2t u ( t) + 2et u (t) (C)  e2t u ( t)  2et u (t) (D) e2t u ( t)  2et u (t) If the impulse response of discrete  time system is h [n] = 5n u [ n  1], then the system function H (z) is equal to (A)  z and the system is stable z5 (B) z and the system is stable z5 (C)  z and the system is unstable z5 (D) z and the system is unstable z5
2001
6.95
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(D) Q, R, S but not P
ONE MARK
6.96
The transfer function of a system is given by H (s) = 2 1 . The s (s  2) impulse response of the system is (B) (t * e2t) u (t) (A) (t2 * e2t) u (t) (C) (te2 t) u (t) (D) (te2t) u (t) The region of convergence of the z  transform of a unit step function is (A) z > 1 (B) z < 1 (C) (Real part of z ) > 0 (D) (Real part of z ) < 0 Let d (t) denote the delta function. The value of the integral 3 d (t) cos b 3t l dt is 2 3
Let H (f) denote the frequency response of the RCLPF. Let f1 be H (f1) the highest frequency such that 0 # f # f1 $ 0.95 . Then f1 H (0) (in Hz) is (A) 324.8 (B) 163.9 (C) 52.2 (D) 104.4 Let tg (f) be the group delay function of the given RCLPF and f2 = 100 Hz. Then tg (f2) in ms, is (A) 0.717 (B) 7.17 (C) 71.7 (D) 4.505
2002 ONE MARK
6.97
6.98 6.89
6.90
Convolution of x (t + 5) with impulse function d (t  7) is equal to (A) x (t  12) (B) x (t + 12) (C) x (t  2) (D) x (t + 2) Which of the following cannot be the Fourier series expansion of a periodic signal? (A) x (t) = 2 cos t + 3 cos 3t (B) x (t) = 2 cos pt + 7 cos t (C) x (t) = cos t + 0.5 (D) x (t) = 2 cos 1.5pt + sin 3.5pt 1 The Fourier transform F {e1 u (t)} is equal to . Therefore, 1 + j2pf 1 is F' 1 + j2pt 1
6.99
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) 1 (C) 0 (B)  1 (D) p 2
6.91
If a signal f (t) has energy E , the energy of the signal f (2t) is equal to (A) 1 (B) E/2 (C) 2E (D) 4E
2001 TWO MARKS
6.92
6.100
The impulse response functions of four linear systems S1, S2, S3, S4 are given respectively by
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 141
h1 (t) = 1, h2 (t) = u (t), u (t) and h3 (t) = t+1 h 4 (t) = e3t u (t) where u (t) is the unit step function. Which of these systems is time invariant, causal, and stable? (A) S1 (B) S2 (C) S3 (D) S4
2000
6.101
ONE MARK
Given
L [g (t)] =
s2 + 1 (s + 3) (s + 2)
and
2 (A) s + 1 s+3
(B)
1 s+3
6.107
(C)
6.102
s2 + 1 + s+2 (s + 3)( s + 2) s2 + 1
A system has a phase response given by f (w), where w is the angular frequency. The phase delay and group delay at w = w0 are respectively given by
The Fourier Transform of the signal x (t) = e3t is of the following form, where A and B are constants : (A) AeB f (B) AeBf (C) A + B f 2 (D) AeBf
2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.103
A system with an input x (t) and output y (t) is described by the relations : y (t) = tx (t). This system is (A) linear and time  invariant (B) linear and time varying (C) non  linear and time  invariant (D) non  linear and time  varying A linear time invariant system has an impulse response e2t, t > 0 . If the initial conditions are zero and the input is e3t , the output for t > 0 is (A) e3t  e2t (B) e5t (C) e3t + e2t (D) None of these
2000 TWO MARKS
d2 f (w0) dw2
w = wo
6.104
wo
3
f (l)
ONE MARK
1999
6.108
6.109
6.105
One period (0, T) each of two periodic waveforms W1 and W2 are shown in the figure. The magnitudes of the nth Fourier series coefficients of W1 and W2 , for n $ 1, n odd, are respectively proportional to
6.110
The z transform F (z) of the function f (nT) = anT is (A) z T (B) z T za z+a z z (C) (D) z  aT z + aT If [f (t)] = F (s), then [f (t  T)] is equal to (A) esT F (s) (B) esT F (s) F (s) F (s) (C) (D) sT 1e 1  esT A signal x (t) has a Fourier transform X (w). If x (t) is a real and odd function of t , then X (w) is (A) a real and even function of w (B) a imaginary and odd function of w (C) an imaginary and even function of w (D) a real and odd function of w
1999 TWO MARKS
6.111
/ d (t  nT0) is given by
3 jpnt (B) 1 / exp T0 n = 3 T0 3 j2pnt (D) 1 / exp T0 n = 3 T0
Let u (t) be the step function. Which of the waveforms in the figure corresponds to the convolution of u (t)  u (t  1) with u (t)  u (t  2) ?
6.112
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 142
1997
6.120
ONE MARK
The function f (t) has the Fourier Transform g (w). The Fourier Transform ff (t) g (t) e = (A) 1 f (w) 2p (C) 2pf ( w)
# g (t) ejwt dt o is
3
If F (s) = 2 w 2 , then the value of Limf (t) t"3 s +w (A) cannot be determined (B) is zero (C) is unity (D) is infinite The trigonometric Fourier series of a even time function can have only (A) cosine terms (B) sine terms (C) cosine and sine terms (D) d.c and cosine terms A periodic signal x (t) of period T0 is given by
6.121
6.114
The Laplace Transform of eat cos (at) is equal to (s  a) (s + a) (A) (B) 2 2 (s  a) + a (s  a) 2 + a2 1 (C) (D) None of the above (s  a) 2
1996 ONE MARK
6.122
6.115
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
1, t < T1 x (t) = * 0, T1 < t < T0 2 The dc component of x (t) is (A) T1 T0 (C) 2T1 T0
6.116
The trigonometric Fourier series of an even function of time does not have the (A) dc term (B) cosine terms (C) sine terms (D) odd harmonic terms The Fourier transform of a real valued time signal has (A) odd symmetry (B) even symmetry (C) conjugate symmetry (D) no symmetry
6.123
The unit impulse response of a linear time invariant system is the unit step function u (t). For t > 0 , the response of the system to an excitation eat u (t), a > 0 will be (A) aeat (B) (1/a) (1  eat) (C) a (1  eat) (D) 1  eat The ztransform of the time function (A) z  1 z (C) (B)
6.117
/ d (n  k) is
k=0
z z1
6.118
z (z  1) 2 A distorted sinusoid has the amplitudes A1, A2, A 3, .... of the fundamental, second harmonic, third harmonic,..... respectively. The total harmonic distortion is 2 2 (B) A 2 + A 3 + ..... (A) A2 + A 3 + .... A1 A1
2 2 2 2 A2 + A3 + ..... A2 + A3 + ..... (D) c m 2 2 2 A1 A1 + A2 + A3 + .... The Fourier transform of a function x (t) is X (f). The Fourier dX (t) transform of will be df dX (f) (B) j2pfX (f) (A) df X (f) (D) (C) jfX (f) jf
(z  1) 2 (D) z
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C)
6.119
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 143
SOLUTIONS
6.1
Given, the maximum frequency of the bandlimited signal fm = 5 kHz According to the Nyquist sampling theorem, the sampling frequency must be greater than the Nyquist frequency which is given as fN = 2fm = 2 # 5 = 10 kHz So, the sampling frequency fs must satisfy fs $ fN fs $ 10 kHz only the option (A) doesnt satisfy the condition therefore, 5 kHz is not a valid sampling frequency.
6.5
Option (C) is correct. If the two systems with impulse response h1 ^ t h and h2 ^ t h are connected in cascaded configuration as shown in figure, then the overall response of the system is the convolution of the individual impulse responses.
6.2
x ^ t h = u ^t  1h Its Laplace transform is s X ^s h = e s The impulse response of system is given h^t h = t u^t h Its Laplace transform is H ^s h = 1 s2 Hence, the overall response at the output is Y ^s h = X ^s h H ^s h s =e3 s its inverse Laplace transform is ^t  1h2 y^t h = u ^t  1h 2
6.3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (C) is correct. For a system to be casual, the R.O.C of system transfer function H ^s h which is rational should be in the right half plane and to the right of the right most pole. For the stability of LTI system. All poles of the system should lie in the left half of S plane and no repeated pole should be on imaginary axis. Hence, options (A), (B), (D) satisfies an LTI
w1 = 100 rad/s w2 = 300 rad/s w3 = 500 rad/s Therefore, the respective time periods are T1 = 2p = 2p sec w1 100 T2 = 2p = 2p sec w2 300 T3 = 2p sec 500 So, the fundamental time period of the signal is LCM ^2p, 2p, 2ph L.C.M. ^T1, T2 T3h = HCF ^100, 300, 500h or, T0 = 2p 100 Hence, the fundamental frequency in rad/sec is w0 = 2p = 100 rad/s 10
6.4 6.7
Option (B) is correct. The Laplace transform of unit step fun n is U ^s h = 1 s So, the O/P of the system is given as Y ^s h = b 1 lb 1 l s s = 1 s2 For zero initial condition, we check dy ^ t h u^t h = dt & U ^s h = SY ^s h  y ^0 h & U ^s h = s c 1 m  y ^0 h s2 or, U ^s h = 1 s ^y ^0 h = 0h Hence, the O/P is correct which is Y ^s h = 1 s2 its inverse Laplace transform is given by y ^ t h = tu ^ t h No Option is correct. The matched filter is characterized by a frequency response that is given as H ^ f h = G * ^ f h exp ^ j2pfT h f where g^t h G^f h Now, consider a filter matched to a known signal g ^ t h. The fourier transform of the resulting matched filter output g 0 ^ t h will be G0 ^ f h = H^ f hG^ f h
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 144
T is duration of g ^ t h Assume exp ^ j2pfT h = 1 So, G0 ^ f h = G_ f i 2 Since, the given Gaussian function is g ^ t h = e pt Fourier transform of this signal will be f g ^ t h = e pt e pf = G ^ f h Therefore, output of the matched filter is 2 G 0 ^ f h = e pf
2 2 2 2
ordinary, first order differential equation with forcing function x ^ t h is y ^ t h so, we can define a function relating x ^ t h and y ^ t h as below dy P + Qy + K = x ^ t h dt where P , Q , K are constant. Taking the Laplace transform both the sides, we get ....(1) P sY ^s h  Py ^0 h + Q Y ^s h = X ^s h Now, the solutions becomes y1 ^ t h = 2y ^ t h or, Y1 ^s h = 2Y ^s h So, Eq. (1) changes to
6.8
Option (B) is correct. Given, the impulse response of continuous time system h ^ t h = d ^t  1h + d ^t  3h From the convolution property, we know x ^ t h * d ^t  t 0h = x ^t  t 0h So, for the input x ^ t h = u ^ t h (Unit step fun n ) The output of the system is obtained as
6.11
P sY1 ^s h  P y1 ^0 h + Q Y1 ^s h = X1 ^s h or, ....(2)  2PSY ^s h  P y1 ^0 h  2QY1 ^s h = X1 ^s h Comparing Eq. (1) and (2), we conclude that X1 ^s h = 2X ^s h y1 ^0 h = 2y ^0 h Which makes the two equations to be same. Hence, we require to change the initial condition to  2y ^0 h and the forcing equation to  2x ^ t h
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
y^t h = u^t h * h^t h = u ^ t h * 6d ^t  1h + d ^t  3h@ = u ^t  1h + u ^t  3h at t = 2 y ^2 h = u ^2  1h + u ^2  3h =1
6.9
Option (B) is correct. Given, the differential equation d2y dy 2 + 5 dt + 6y ^ t h = x ^ t h dt Taking its Laplace transform with zero initial conditions, we have s2 Y ^s h + 5sY ^s h + 6Y ^s h = X ^s h ....(1) Now, the input signal is
Option (A) is correct. Given, the DFT of vector 8a b c dB as D.F.T. %8a b c dB/ = 8a b g dB Also, we have V R Sa b c d W Sd a b c W ...(1) 8p q r sB = 8a b c dBSc d a b W W S Sb c d aW X T For matrix circular convolution, we know Rh h h VRx V S 0 2 1WS 0W x 6n@ * h 6n@ = Sh1 h 0 h2WSx1W S Sh2 h1 h 0W WS Sx1W W T XT X where "x 0, x1, x2, are three point signals for x 6n@ and similarly for h 6n@, h 0 , h1 and h2 are three point signals. Comparing this transformation to Eq(1), we get VT R Sa d c W Sb a d W 6p q r s@ = Sc b aW 8a b c dB W S Sd c b W X T = 6a b c d @T * 6a b c d @T
1 0<t<2 0 otherwise i.e., x ^ t h = u ^ t h  u ^t  2h Taking its Laplace transform, we obtain 2s X ^s h = 1  e s s 2s = 1e s Substituting it in equation (1), we get 2s X ^s h Y ^s h = 2 = 21  e s + 5s + 6 s ^s + 5s + 6h x^t h = * = 1  e2s s ^s + 2h^s + 3h
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
R V R V Sa W Sa W Sb W Sb W =S W * S W Sc W Sc W Sd W Sd W T X T X x1 6n@ * x2 6n@ = X1DFT 6k @ X2, DFT 6k @ R V Sa W Sb W Sc W S W Sd W T X R V R V Sa W SaW Sb W SbW Sc W = Sg W S W S W Sd W Sd W T X T X R V SaW SbW Sg W S W Sd W T X
6.10
Option (D) is correct. The solution of a system described by a linear, constant coefficient,
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 145
= 9a2 b 2 g2 d 2C
6.12
Option (D) is correct. Using s domain differentiation property of Laplace transform. If F (s) dF (s) L tf (t) ds 2s + 1 = L [tf (t)] =  d ; 2 1 ds s + s + 1E (s2 + s + 1) 2 f (t)
L
So,
6.13
So, inverse Fourier transform of H (jw) h (t) = h1 (t) + h2 (t) h (0) = h1 (0) + h2 (0) = 1 + 1 = 1 2 2
6.16
Option (A) is correct. Convolution sum is defined as y [n] = h [n] * g [n] = For causal sequence, y [n] =
3
/ h [n] g [n  k]
k = 3
/ h [n] g [n  k]
k=0
/
3
1
n=0
14 42 4 43 I
z / b 31z l + / b 1 3 l
n m=1
14 42 4 43 II
n=0
14 42 4 43 III
/ b 21z l
Taking m = n
Series I converges if
6.14
1 < 1 or z > 1 3 3z Series II converges if 1 z < 1 or z < 3 3 Series III converges if 1 < 1 or z > 1 2z 2 Region of convergence of X (z) will be intersection of above three So, ROC : 1 < z < 3 2 Option (D) is correct. y (t) =
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
For n = 1,
y [1] y [1] 1 2
= u (t) cos (0) = u (t) From equation (i), = u (t) cos (3t 0)
6.17
# d (t  t ) cos (3t) dt
So,
y (t  t 0) = u (t  t 0) y (t, t 0) ! y (t  t 0)
Option (A) is correct. d2 y dy We have 100 2  20 + y = x (t) dt dt Applying Laplace transform we get 100s2 Y (s)  20sY (s) + Y (s) = X (s) Y (s) 1 or = H (s) = X (s) 100s2  20s + 1 1/100 A = 2 = s  (1/5) s + 1/100 s2 + 2xwn s + w2 Here wn = 1/10 and 2xwn = 1/5 giving x = 1 Roots are s = 1/10, 1/10 which lie on Right side of s plane thus unstable.
cos 6t dt # 1dt  1 2#
t t 3 3
Option (C) is correct. (2 cos w) (sin 2w) H (jw) = = sin 3w + sin w w w w We know that inverse Fourier transform of sin c function is a rectangular function.
6.18
Option (C) is correct. For an even function Fourier series contains dc term and cosine term (even and odd harmonics). Option (B) is correct. Function h (n) = an u (n) stable if a < 1 and Unstable if a H 1 We We have h (n) = 2n u (n  2);
6.19
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 146
Here a = 2 therefore h (n) is unstable and since h (n) = 0 for n < 0 Therefore h (n) will be causal. So h (n) is causal and not stable.
6.20
Option (A) is correct. Impulse response = d (step response) dt = d (1  e at) dt = 0 + ae at = ae at
ad [n ! a]
6.26
6.21
Option (D) is correct. We have x (t) = exp ( 2t) m (t) + s (t  6) and h (t) = u (t) Taking Laplace Transform we get X (s) = b 1 + e6s l and H (s) = 1 s+2 s Now Y (s) = H (s) X (s) 6s 1 = 1 : 1 + e6sD = +e s s+2 s s (s + 2)
6s 1 +e Y (s) = 1 2s 2 (s + 2) s
6.27
Option (C) is correct. We have h1 [n] = d [n  1] or H1 [Z ] = Z  1 and h 2 [n] = d [n  2] or H2 (Z ) = Z  2 Response of cascaded system H (z ) = H1 (z ) : H2 (z ) = z :z or,
1 2
=z
3
h [n] = d [n  3]
or Thus
Option (D) is correct. For an Npoint FET algorithm butterfly operates on one pair of samples and involves two complex addition and one complex multiplication. Option (D) is correct. We have and 3s + 1 f (t) = L  1 ; 3 s + 4s 2 + (k  3) s E lim f (t) = 1 lim f (t) = lim sF (s) = 1
s"0
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
6.22
6.28
t"3
or Option (B) is correct. or or Now y (n) = x (n  1) Y (z) = z1 X (z) Y (z) = H (z) = z1 X (z) H1 (z) H2 (z) = z 1  0.4z1 1 c 1  0.6z1 m H2 (z) = z z1 (1  0.6z1) H2 (z) = (1  0.4z1)
1
6.29
or
or
k =4
Option (B) is correct. System is described as d 2 y (t) dt (t) dx (t) + 4x (t) +4 + 3y (t) = 2 2 dt dt dt Taking Laplace transform on both side of given equation s 2 Y (s) + 4sY (s) + 3Y (s) = 2sX (s) + 4X (s) (s 2 + 4s + 3) Y (s) = 2 (s + 2) X (s) s Transfer function of the system
6.23
Option (B) is correct. For 8 point DFT, x* [1] = x [7]; x* [2] = x [6]; x* [3] = x [5] and it is conjugate symmetric about x [4], x [6] = 0 ; x [7] = 1 + j3 Option (C) is correct. For a function x (t) trigonometric fourier series is x (t) = Ao + Where, and
n=1
6.24
Ao 1 # x (t) dt T0 T
0
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
H (s) = Input or, Output 2 (s + 2) Y (s) 2 (s + 2) = = (s + 3) (s + 1) X (s) s 2 + 4s + 3
An = 2 # x (t) cos nwt dt T0 T Bn = 2 # x (t) sin nwt dt T0 T For an even function x (t), Bn = 0 Since given function is even function so coefficient Bn = 0 , only cosine and constant terms are present in its fourier series representation 3T/4 Constant term A0 = 1 # x (t) dt T T/4 T/4 3T/4 = 1 : # Adt + #  2AdtD T T/4 T/4 = 1 :TA  2AT D = A 2 2 T 2
0 0
Y (s) = H (s) : X (s) 2 (s + 2) Y (s) = : 1 (s + 3) (s + 1) (s + 2) By Partial fraction Y (s) = 1  1 s+1 s+3 Taking inverse Laplace transform
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 147
H (z) =
It has the finite magnitude values. So it is a finite impulse response filter. Thus S2 is true but it is not a low pass filter. So S1 is false.
6.36
1 = an u [n], z > a 1  z 1 Thus system is causal. Since ROC of H (z ) includes unit circle, so it is stable also. Hence S1 is True For ROC : z < 1 4 n n h [n] =b 1 l u [ n  1] + b 1 l u (n), z > 1 , z < 1 2 2 4 4 System is not causal. ROC of H (z ) does not include unity circle, so it is not stable and S 3 is True
6.31
Option (B) is correct. Here h (t) ! 0 for t < 0 . Thus system is non causal. Again any bounded input x (t) gives bounded output y (t). Thus it is BIBO stable. Here we can conclude that option (B) is correct. Option (D) is correct. We have x [n] = {1, 0, 2, 3) and N = 4 X [k ] =
N1 n=0
6.37
/ x [n] e
j2pnk/N
k = 0, 1...N  1
Option (A) is correct. The Fourier series of a real periodic function has only cosine terms if it is even and sine terms if it is odd. Option (B) is correct. Given function is f (t) = sin2 t + cos 2t = 1  cos 2t + cos 2t = 1 + 1 cos 2t 2 2 2 The function has a DC term and a cosine function. The frequency of cosine terms is w = 2 = 2pf " f = 1 Hz p The given function has frequency component at 0 and 1 Hz. p Option (A) is correct. n n x [n] = b 1 l u (n)  b 1 l u ( n  1) 3 2 Taking z transform we have X (z) =
n=3 n=0 n=3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.32
/ x [n] e
n=0
j2pnk/4
k = 0, 1,... 3
n=0
/ x [ n] / x [n] e
3
6.33
n=0
zn  / / b1 3l
n
n = 1
= / b 1 z1 l  / b 1 z1 l 3 2 n=0 n = 3 First term gives Second term gives 1 z1 < 1 " 3 1 z1 > 1 " 2 1< z 3 1> z 2
n = 3 n = 1
1 n n b2l z
n
/ x [n] e
n=0 3
jpn
/ x [n] e
n=0
j3pn/2
Thus its ROC is the common ROC of both terms. that is 1< z <1 3 2
6.34
Option (B) is correct. By property of unilateral Laplace transform t F (s) 1 0 L f (t) dt f (t) dt + s s 3 3
= x [0] + x [1] ej3p/2 + x [2] ej3p + x [3] ej9p/2 = 1 + 0  2  j3 = 1  j3 Thus [6,  1 + j3, 0,  1  j3]
6.38 6.39
Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. The output of causal system depends only on present and past states only. In option (A) y (0) depends on x ( 2) and x (4). In option (B) y (0) depends on x (1). In option (C) y (0) depends on x ( 1). In option (D) y (0) depends on x (5). Thus only in option (C) the value of y (t) at t = 0 depends on x ( 1) past value. In all other option present value depends on future value.
6.35
Option (A) is correct. We have h (2) = 1, h (3) = 1 otherwise h (k) = 0 . The diagram of response is as follows :
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
6.40
Page 148
Option (D) is correct. We have h (t) = eat u (t) + e bt u ( t) This system is stable only when bounded input has bounded output For stability at < 0 for t > 0 that implies a < 0 and bt > 0 for t > 0 that implies b > 0 . Thus, a is negative and b is positive. Option (C) is correct. K (s + 1) , and R (s) = 1 G (s) = (s + 2)( s + 4) s K (s + 1) C (s) = G (s) R (s) = s (s + 2)( s + 4) K = K +  3K 8s 4 (s + 2) 8 (s + 4) c (t) = K :1 + 1 e2t  3 e4tD u (t) 8 4 8
6.45
The y (t) = t x (t) is not linear, thus option (B) is wrong and (a) is correct. We can see that R1: y (t) = t2 x (t) Linear and time variant. R2: y (t) = t x (t) Non linear and time variant. R3: y (t) = x (t) Non linear and time invariant R4: y (t) = x (t  5) Linear and time invariant Option (A) is correct. Given : y (n) = 1 N
r=0
6.41
/x (r) x (n + r)
DFT
N1
X (k) 2
Thus
Option (B) is correct. Current through resistor (i.e. capacitor) is Here, I = I (0+) et/RC I (0+) = V = 5 = 25m A R 200k RC = 200k # 10m = 2 sec I = 25e m A
t 2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
h (t) = L1 G (s) = ( 4e2t + 12e4t) u (t)
6.42
= VR # R = 5e V Here the voltages across the resistor is input to sampler at frequency of 10 Hz. Thus
t 2
x (n) = 5e
6.47
n 2 # 10
for  1 # t # + 1 otherwise
Option (C) is correct. Since x (n) = 5e0.05n u (n) is a causal signal Its z transform is 1 5z = X (z) = 5 : 1  e0.05 z1 D z  e0.05 Its ROC is e0.05 z1 > 1 " z > e0.05 Option (C) is correct. h (t) = e2t u (t) H (jw) = =
3 h (t) ejwt dt # 3 3 2t jwt 3 e e dt = # e (2 + jw) t dt # 0 0
6.48
ejwt 1dt # 1
1 (2 + jw)
6.49
Option (D) is correct. Given h (n) = [1,  1, 2] x (n) = [1, 0, 1] y (n) = x (n)* h (n) The length of y [n] is = L1 + L2  1 = 3 + 3  1 = 5 y (n) = x (n) * h (n) = y (2) =
3
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Magnitude response at w = 2 rad/sec is 1 = 1 H (jw) = 22 + w2 2 2 Input is x (t) = 2 cos (2t) Output is = 1 # 2 cos (2t  0.25p) 2 2 = 1 cos [2t  0.25p] 2
6.50
/ x (k) h (n  k)
k = 3
/ x (k) h (2  k)
k = 3
= x (0) h (2  0) + x (1) h (2  1) + x (2) h (2  2) = h (2) + 0 + h (0) = 1 + 2 = 3 There are 5 non zero sample in output sequence and the value of y [2] is 3.
6.44
Option (B) is correct. Mode function are not linear. Thus y (t) = x (t) is not linear but this functions is time invariant. Option (A) and (B) may be correct.
1 s (s  1) Final value theorem is applicable only when all poles of system lies in left half of S plane. Here s = 1 is right s plane pole. Thus it is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 149
unbounded.
6.51
Option (A) is correct. x (t) = e u (t) Taking Fourier transform X (jw) = 1 1 + jw X (jw) = 1 2 1+w Magnitude at 3dB frequency is Thus or or 1 = 1 2 1 + w2 w = 1 rad f = 1 Hz 2p 1 2
t
Option (D) is correct. The ROC of addition or subtraction of two functions x1 (n) and x2 (n) is R1 + R2 . We have been given ROC of addition of two function and has been asked ROC of subtraction of two function. It will be same. Option (A) is correct. As we have x (t) = sin t , Now H (s) = 1 s+1 or H (jw) = 1 = 1 jw + 1 j+1 or H (jw) = 1 +  45c 2 Thus y (t) = 1 sin (t  p 4) 2 Option (C) is correct. F (s) = w0 s + w2
2
6.59
thus w = 1
6.52
Option (B) is correct. For discrete time Fourier transform (DTFT) when N " 3 p x [ n] = 1 X (e jw) e jwn dw 2p  p
6.60
# #
Putting n = 0 we get = 1 2p or
6.53
x [0] = 1 2p X (e jw) dw
p
X (e jw) e jw0 dw
p
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
p
jw
Option (B) is correct. 0.5 1  2z1 Since ROC includes unit circle, it is left handed system X (z) = x (n) = (0.5) (2) n u ( n  1) x (0) = 0 If we apply initial value theorem x (0) = lim X (z) = lim 0.5 1 = 0.5 z"3 z " 31  2z That is wrong because here initial value theorem is not applicable because signal x (n) is defined for n < 0 .
6.61
BIBO stable
Option (B) is correct. c (t) = 1  e2t Taking Laplace transform C (s) 2 = C (s) = #s = 2 s (s + 2) s+2 U (s)
6.54
Option (A) is correct. A Hilbert transformer is a nonlinear system. Option (B) is correct. H (f) = H (s) Step response or or Y (s) Y (s) y (t) 5 1 + j10pf 5 = 5 = = 1 1 + 5s 5^s + 1 s+ 5h =1 a 1 s ^s + 5 h =1 11 =5 51 s ^s + 5 h s s+ 5 t/5 = 5 (1  e ) u (t)
6.63
6.55
Option (C) is correct. 1 s+1 L x (t) = u (t) X (s) = 1 s Y (s) = H (s) X (s) = 1 # 1 = 1  1 s+1 s s s+1 h (t) = et
L
1 5
H (s) =
6.56
Option (A) is correct. F x (t) X (jw) Using scaling we have F 1 X jw x (5t) 5 c 5 m Using shifting property we get w F 1 X jw e j3 5 x ;5 bt  3 lE b l 5 5 5 Option (D) is correct. Dirac delta function d (t) is defined at t = 0 and it has infinite value
6.57
Option (C) is correct. Fourier series is defined for periodic function and constant. 3 sin (25t) is a periodic function. 4 cos (20t + 3) + 2 sin (710t) is sum of two periodic function and also a periodic function. e t sin (25t) is not a periodic function, so FS cant be defined for it. 1 is constant Option (A) is correct.
6.65
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 150
6.70
g (t) + g ( t) 2 g (t)  g ( t) odd{g (t)} = 2 Ev{g (t)} = Here Thus g (t) = u (t) u (t) + u ( t) = ue (t) = 2 u (t)  u ( t) = uo (t) = 2 1 2 x (t) 2
Option (A) is correct. y (t) = 0.5x (t  td + T) + x (t  td ) + 0.5x (t  td  T) Taking Fourier transform we have Y (w) = 0.5e or
jw ( td + T)
X (w) + ejwt X (w) + 0.5ejw ( t  T) X (w) Y (w) = ejwt [0.5e jwT + 1 + 0.5ejwT ] X (w)
d d d
6.66
Option (C) is correct. Here x1 (n) = ` 5 jn u (n) 6 1 X1 (z) = 5 1 1  ^6 z h x2 (n) =` 6 jn u ( n  1) 5 1 X1 (z) = 1 1 1  ^6 5z h
= ejwt [cos wT + 1]
d
or
H (w) =
ROC : R2 " z < 6 5 Thus ROC of x1 (n) + x2 (n) is R1 + R2 which is 5 < z < 6 6 5
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
6.67
Option (C) is correct. For continuous and aperiodic signal Fourier representation is continuous and aperiodic. For continuous and periodic signal Fourier representation is discrete and aperiodic. For discrete and aperiodic signal Fourier representation is continuous and periodic. For discrete and periodic signal Fourier representation is discrete and periodic. Option (B) is correct. y (n) = Ax (n  no) Taking Fourier transform Y (e jw) = Aejw n X (e jw) Y (e jw) or = Aejw n H (e jw) = X (e jw) Thus +H (e jw) = wo no For LTI discrete time system phase and frequency of H (e jw) are periodic with period 2p . So in general form
o o o o
6.72
Option (D) is correct. For causal system h (t) = 0 for t # 0 . Only (D) satisfy this condition. Option (D) is correct.
n x (n) = b 1 l u (n) 2
6.68
q (w) = no wo + 2pk
6.73
or
...(1)
n
n=3
/ y (n) ejwn
n
n=3 n=0
n = 3
ejwn / b1 4l
n=3 n=0
/`1 4j
1 4
1 1
=4 3
Option (A) is correct. 1 From x (n) = [ 1 2 , 1, 2, 1, 1, 2 ] y (n) = x ^ n 2  1h, n even = 0 , for n odd 2 1 n = 2 , y ( 2) = x ( 2  1) = x ( 2) = 2 n = 1, y ( 1) = 0 0 n = 0, y (0) = x ( 2  1) = x ( 1) = 1 n = 1, y (1) = 0
Alternative : Taking z transform of (1) we get 1 Y (z) = 1 1 1 4z Substituting z = e jw we have 1 Y (e jw) = jw 1 1 4e Y (e j0) = 1 1 = 4 3 1 4
6.69
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
n=2 n = 3, n=4 n = 5, y (2) y (3) y (4) y (5) y (6) = x(2 2  1) = x (0) = 2 =0 4 = x(2  1) = x (1) = 1 =0 6 = x(2  1) = x (2) = 1 2
n=6 Hence y (n) = 1 d (n + 2) + d (n) + 2d (n  2) + d (n  4) + 1 d (n  6) 2 2 Option (C) is correct. Here y (n) is scaled and shifted version of x (n) and again y (2n) is scaled version of y (n) giving
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 151
z (n) = y (2n) = x (n  1) = 1 d (n + 1) + d (n) + 2d (n  1) + d (n  2) + 1 d (n  3) 2 2 Taking Fourier transform. Z (e jw) = 1 e jw + 1 + 2ejw + e2jw + 1 e3jw 2 2 = ejw b 1 e2jw + e jw + 2 + ejw + 1 e2jw l 2 2 =e or
6.75 6.80
xcas (n) =
x (n)  x* ( n) 2 2j
5 4j2 ]
5 = [ 4  j 2 ,
Option (C) is correct. We have 2y (n) = ay (n  2)  2x (n) + bx (n  1) Taking z transform we get 2Y (z) = aY (z) z2  2X (z) + bX (z) z1 Y (z) bz1  2 or ...(i) =c m X (z) 2  az2 z ( b  z) or H (z) = 22 a (z  2 ) It has poles at ! a/2 and zero at 0 and b/2 . For a stable system poles must lie inside the unit circle of z plane. Thus a <1 2 or a <2
jw
Option (B) is correct. X (f) 1 X f a ca m 3X (3f) Using scaling we have x (at) Thus xb 1 f l 3 e Thus 1e 3
j2pf0 t
ej2p 1 ejp 3
6.76
4 3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
/
n = 3
Option (D) is correct. We have and x (n) = e jpn/4 h (n) + 4 2 d (n  2) Now y (n) = x (n)* h (n) =
= 4 2 d (n + 2)  2 2 d (n + 1)  2 2 d (n  1)
Thus
/
n = 3
h (n) =
/
n = 3
x (n  k) h (k) =
/ x (n  k) h (k)
k = 2
h (n)
k = 3
or
= 1+1+1+1+2+2+2+2+2 = 15 < 3 Hence system is stable but h (n) ! 0 for n < 0 . Thus it is not causal.
6.77
= 4 2 ej
(n + 2)
 2 2 ej + ej
p 4
p 4
(n + 1)
 2 2 ej
p 4
p 4
(n  1)
+ 4 2 ej
p 4
p 4
(n  2)
Option (D) is correct. We know that z H (z) = z  0.2 1 1  az1 h [n] = (0.2) n u [ n  1] z < 0.2 z <a
6.82
= 4 2 6e j
p 4
(n + 2)
(n  2)
@  2 2 6e j
p 2
(n + 1)
+ ej
p 4
(n  1)
 an u [ n  1] * Thus
6.78
Option (C) is correct. The Fourier transform of a conjugate symmetrical function is always real. Option (A) is correct. We have x (n) = [ 4  j5, 1 + 2j,

Option (B) is correct. From given graph the relation in x (t) and y (t) is y (t) = x [2 (t + 1)] x (t) Using scaling we have x (at) Thus x (2t)
F F
6.79
X (f) 1 X f a ca m 1X f 2 c2m
4]
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 152
Thus
x [2 (t + 1)]  x [2 (t + 1)]
Now
H (0) = 1 H (f1) 1 = $ 0.95 H (0) 1 + 4p2 f12 R2 C2 1 + 4p2 f12 R2 C2 # 1.108 4p2 f12 R2 C2 # 0.108 2pf1 RC # 0.329 f1 # 0.329 2pRC f1 # 0.329 2pRC f1 # 0.329 2p1k # 1m f1 max f1 # 52.2 Hz = 52.2 Hz 1 1 + jwRC
6.83
2 = lim 2 =2 s (1 + s) s " 0 (1 + s)
or or or or or or or Thus
6.89
6.84
Option (D) is correct. Here C3 = 3 + j5 For real periodic signal Thus Ck = C3 = Ck = 3  j5
* Ck
6.85
Option (C) is correct. y (t) = 4x (t  2) Taking Fourier transform we get Y (e j2pf ) = 4ej2pf2 X (e j2pf ) Time Shifting property
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
or Thus
6.86
Option (C) is correct. If x (t)* h (t) = g (t) Then x (t  t1)* h (t  t2) = y (t  t1  t2) Thus x (t + 5)* d (t  7) = x (t + 5  7) = x (t  2) Option (B) is correct. In option (B) the given function is not periodic and does not satisfy Dirichlet condition. So it cant be expansion in Fourier series. x (t) = 2 cos pt + 7 cos t T1 = 2p = 2 w T2 = 2p = 2p 1 T1 = 1 = irrational T2 p
6.91
Option (B) is correct. We have h (n) = 3d (n  3) or Taking z transform H (z) = 2z3 4 2 4 X (z) = z + z  2z + 2  3z Now Y (z) = H (z) X (z) = 2z3 (z 4 + z2  2z + 2  3z4) = 2 (z + z1  2z2 + 2z3  3z7) Taking inverse z transform we have y (n) = 2[ d (n + 1) + d (n  1)  2d (n  2) + 2d (n  3)  3d (n  7)] At n = 4 , y (4) = 0
6.92
Option (C) is correct. From the duality property of fourier transform we have If Then x (t) X (t)
FT FT
X (f) x ( f)
6.87
Option (A) is correct. System is non causal because output depends on future value For n # 1 y ( 1) = x ( 1 + 1) = x (0) Time varying y (n  n0) = x (n  n0 + 1) Depends on Future y (n) = x (n + 1) i.e. None causal y (1) = x (2) For bounded input, system has bounded output. So it is stable. y (n) = x (n) for n $ 1 = 0 for n = 0 = x (x + 1) for n #  1 So system is linear.
6.93
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Therefore if Then et u (t) 1 1 + j2pt
FT
1 1 + j2pf e f u ( f)
FT
6.88
and Thus
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
6.94
Page 153
Option (*) is correct. 5s = 2 + 1 X (s) = 2 5  s = s+1 s2 ( s 1 )( s 2 ) + s s2 Here three ROC may be possible. Re (s) <  1 Re (s) > 2  1 < Re (s) < 2 Since its Fourier transform exits, only  1 < Re (s) < 2 include imaginary axis. so this ROC is possible. For this ROC the inverse Laplace transform is x (t) = [ 2et u (t)  2e2t u ( t)] Option (B) is correct. For left sided sequence we have  an u ( n  1) Thus or  5n u ( n  1)  5n u ( n  1)
z
and
# E1 = #
E = E1 =
3 3
3
Substituting 2t = p we get
3
[f (p)] 2
6.100
6.95
Option (B) is correct. Since h1 (t) ! 0 for t < 0 , thus h1 (t) is not causal h2 (t) = u (t) which is always time invariant, causal and stable. u (t) is time variant. h3 (t) = 1+t h 4 (t) = e3t u (t) is time variant. Option (B) is correct. h (t) = f (t)* g (t) We know that convolution in time domain is multiplication in s domain.
6.101
Since ROC is z < 5 and it include unit circle, system is stable. Alternative : h (n) = 5n u ( n  1) H (z) = Let n = m, then H (z) =3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
/ h (n) z
n = 3 1 m
n
/5 z
n = 3 3 1
1
n n
=
/ (5z
n = 3
1
1 n
/ (5z
= 1
/ (5
m=0
n = 1
Thus
Option (B) is correct. Since normalized Gaussion function have Gaussion FT p eThus eat a
2 FT p2 f2 a
6.103
X1 (s) X2 (s)
6.97
LT
x1 (t)* x2 (t)
Option (B) is correct. Let x (t) = ax1 (t) + bx2 (t) ay1 (t) = atx1 (t) by2 (t) = btx2 (t) Adding above both equation we have ay1 (t) + by2 (t) = atx1 (t) + btx2 (t) = t [ax1 (t) + bx2 (t)] = tx (t) or ay1 (t) + by2 (t) = y (t) If input is delayed then we have yd (d) = tx (t  t0) If output is delayed then we have y (t  t0) = (t  t0) x (t  t0) which is not equal. Thus system is time varying.
/ x (n) .z
n = 3
n
/ 1.z
n=0
n
/ (z
n=0
1 n
/ (z1) n < 3
and this is possible when z1 < 1. Thus ROC is z1 < 1 or z >1
6.98
Option (A) is correct. We know that d (t) x (t) = x (0) d (t) and
3 Let x (t) = cos ( 2 t), then x (0) = 1
6.104
# d (t) = 1
3 3
H (s) =
LS
Now
6.99
# d (t) dt = 1
3 3
Now output is
Option (B) is correct. Let E be the energy of f (t) and E1 be the energy of f (2t), then
Y (s) = H (s) X (s) = 1 # 1 = 1  1 s2 s3 s3 s2 y (t) = e3t  e2t
Thus
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
6.105
Page 154
Option (C) is correct. We know that for a square wave the Fourier series coefficient sin nw t Cnsq = At nw t2 T 2 1 Cnsq \ n
0 0
...(i)
Thus
z1 (1  z4) (z  1) z"1 4 (1  z1) 2 z1 z4 (z 4  1) (z  1) = lim z"1 4z2 (z  1) 2 3 (z  1) (z + 1) (z 2 + 1) (z  1) = lim z z"1 4 (z  1) 2 3 = lim z (z + 1) (z2 + 1) = 1 z"1 4 = lim
6.113
Option (A) is correct. We have w s2 + w2 lim f (t) final value theorem states that: t"3 lim f (t) = lim sF (s) F (s) =
t"3 s"0
F (s) G (s)
It must be noted that final value theorem can be applied only if poles lies in ve half of s plane. Here poles are on imaginary axis (s1, s2 = ! jw) so can not apply final value theorem. so lim f (t) cannot be determined.
t"3
6.114
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
e2s  es + e3s = 1 2 s s2 s2 s2 Taking inverse Laplace transform we have or f (t)* g (t)
L
Option (D) is correct. Trigonometric Fourier series of a function x (t) is expressed as : x (t) = A 0 +
n=1
Option (C) is correct. Given periodic signal 1, t < T1 x (t) = * 0, T1 < t < T0 2 The figure is as shown below.
Option (A) is correct. Option (A) is correct. We have f (nT) = anT Taking z transform we get F (z) = = z T za
/ anT zn
n = 3
/ (aT ) n zn
n = 3
n=0
/ ba z
3
T n
6.109
Option (B) is correct. If L [f (t)] = F (s) Applying time shifting property we can write L [f (t  T)] = esT F (s) Option (A) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. Given z transform C (z) = Applying final value theorem
n"3
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
where dc term
T /2 A 0 = 1 # x (t) dt = 1 # x (t) dt T0 T T0 T /2 T T = 1 : # x (t) dt + # x (t) dt + T0 T /2 T = 1 60 + 2T1 + 0@ T0 A 0 = 2T1 T0
0 0 0 1 1 0 1
n=1
# T
T0 /2
x (t) dtD
6.116
z (1  z ) 4 (1  z1) 2
1
4
Option (B) is correct. The unit impulse response of a LTI system is u (t) Let h (t) = u (t)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 155
6.123
Taking LT we have H (s) = 1 s If the system excited with an input x (t) = eat u (t), a > 0 , the response Y (s) = X (s) H (s) 1 (s + a) Y (s) = 1 1 = 1 :1  1 D a s s+a (s + a) s X (s) = L [x (t)] =
Option (C) is correct. The conjugation property allows us to show if x (t) is real, then X (jw) has conjugate symmetry, that is [ x (t) real] X ( jw) = X)(jw) Proof : X (jw) = replace w by  w then X ( jw) = X)(jw) = = if x (t) real x)(t) = x (t) then X)(jw) =
# x (t) ejwt dt
3 3
so
# x (t) e jwt dt
3 3 3 3
# x)(t) e jwt dt
3
/ d (n  k) / x [n] zn
=
n = 3 k = 0
k=0
/ ; / d (n  k) znE
Option (B) is correct. Option (B) is correct. x (t) X (f) by differentiation property; dx (t) F; = jwX (w) dt E dx (t) or F; = j2pfX (f) dt E
F
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
6.120
Option (C) is correct. We have f (t) g (w) by duality property of fourier transform we can write g (t) so F [g (t)] =
F 3 F
2pf ( w)
6.121
x (t) = eat cos (at) L s cos (at) s2 + a2 x (t) e x (t) eat cos (at)
L L L
6.122
Option (C) is correct. For a function x (t), trigonometric fourier series is : x (t) = A 0 + where
0
n=1
A 0 = 1 # x (t) dt T0 =Fundamental period T0 T An = 2 # x (t) cos nwtdt T0 T Bn = 2 # x (t) sin nwtdt T0 T For an even function x (t), coefficient Bn = 0 for an odd function x (t), A0 = 0
0 0
An = 0 so if x (t) is even function its fourier series will not contain sine terms.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 7
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Page 156
approximate value of Ka that will reduce the time constant of the closed loop system by one hundred times as compared to that of the openloop system is
2013
7.1
ONE MARK
(A) 1 (C) 10
7.3
The signal flow graph for a system is given below. The transfer Y ^s h function for this system is U ^s h
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
7.4
The statevariable equations of the system shown in the figure above are o = > 1 0 H X + > 1H u o = > 1 0 H X + > 1H u X X (A) (B) 1 1 1 1 1 1 y = 61  1@X + u y = 6 1  1@X + u o = > 1 0 H X + > 1H u o = > 1  1H X + > 1H u X X (C) (D) 1 1 1 0 1 1 y = 6 1  1@X  u y = 61  1@ X  u
7.5
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
above is et 0 (A) > t tH te e et 0 (C) > t tH e e
2012
The state transition matrix eAt of the system shown in the figure
The gain _20 log G ^s h i is 32 dB 10 rad/s respectively. The phase (A) 39.8 s (C) 32 s
2013
7.2
and  8 dB at 1 rad/s and is negative for all w . Then G ^s h is .8 (B) 392 s (D) 32 s2
TWO MARKS
7.6
The openloop transfer function of a dc motor is given as w ^s h = 10 . When connected in feedback as shown below, the Va ^s h 1 + 10s
(s2 + 9) (s + 2) (s + 1) (s + 3) (s + 4) is excited by sin (wt). The steadystate output of the system is zero at A system with transfer function G (s) =
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 157
2011
7.11
TWO MARKS
The block diagram of a system with one input u and two outputs y1 and y2 is given below.
The state variable description of an LTI system is given by Jx o1N J 0 a1 0NJx1N J0N K O K OK O K O o2O = K 0 0 a2OKx2O + K0O u Kx Kx o3O Ka 3 0 0OKx 3O K 1O L P L PL P L P Jx1N K O y = _1 0 0iKx2O Kx 3O L P where y is the output and u is the input. The system is controllable for (B) a1 = 0, a2 ! 0, a 3 ! 0 (A) a1 ! 0, a2 = 0, a 3 ! 0 (C) a1 = 0, a 3 ! 0, a 3 = 0 (D) a1 ! 0, a2 ! 0, a 3 = 0
2011 ONE MARK
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.9
The root locus plot for a system is given below. The open loop transfer function corresponding to this plot is given by
For the transfer function G (jw) = 5 + jw , the corresponding Nyquist plot for positive frequency has the form
A state space model of the above system in terms of the state vector x and the output vector y = [y1 y2]T is o = [2] x + [1] u ; y = [1 2] x (A) x 1 o = [ 2] x + [1] u; y = > H x (B) x 2 2 0 1 o= > (C) x x + > H u ; y = 81 2B x H 0 2 1 2 0 1 1 o = > Hx + > Hu ; y = > Hx (D) x 0 2 1 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 158
7.12
The gain margin of the system under closed loop unity negative feedback is (A) 0 dB (B) 20 dB (C) 26 dB (D) 46 dB The signal flow graph that DOES NOT model the plant transfer function H (s) is
7.17
7.13
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
A unity negative feedback closed loop system has a plant with the transfer function G (s) = 2 1 and a controller Gc (s) in the s + 2s + 2 feed forward path. For a unit set input, the transfer function of the controller that gives minimum steady state error is (A) Gc (s) = s + 1 (B) Gc (s) = s + 2 s+2 s+1 (s + 1) (s + 4) (C) Gc (s) = (D) Gc (s) = 1 + 2 + 3s s (s + 2) (s + 3)
7.18
The state variable representation of the system can be 0 1 1 1 1 0 o= > o= > x x +> Hu H x x u + H > H (A) (B) 2 1 0 1 0 2 o = 80 0.5B x o = [0 0.5] x y y 1 1 0 o= > x x +> Hu H (C) (D) 2 1 0 o = 80.5 0.5B x y The transfer function of the system is (A) s2+ 1 (B) s +1 (C) 2 s + 1 (D) s +s+1 1 o= > x 1 o = 80.5 y 1 0 x +> Hu H 0 2 0.5B x
2010
7.14
ONE MARK
7.19
7.15
1 s+1 (C) 2 (D) 2 s+1 s+3 Y (s) A system with transfer function has an output = s X (s) s + p p y (t) = cos a2t  k 3 for the input signal x (t) = p cos a2t  p k. Then, the system param2 eter p is (A) 3 (B) 2/ 3 (A) 0 (B) (C) 1 (D) 3 /2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2009
7.20
ONE MARK
The magnitude plot of a rational transfer function G (s) with real coefficients is shown below. Which of the following compensators has such a magnitude plot ?
7.16
For the asymptotic Bode magnitude plot shown below, the system transfer function can be
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 159
Consider the system dx = Ax + Bu with A = =1 0G and B = = p G 0 1 q dt where p and q are arbitrary real numbers. Which of the following statements about the controllability of the system is true ? (A) The system is completely state controllable for any nonzero values of p and q (B) Only p = 0 and q = 0 result in controllability (C) The system is uncontrollable for all values of p and q (D) We cannot conclude about controllability from the given data
2009 TWO MARKS
7.26
Step responses of a set of three secondorder underdamped systems all have the same percentage overshoot. Which of the following diagrams represents the poles of the three systems ?
7.22
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
The unit step response of an underdamped second order system has steady state value of 2. Which one of the following transfer functions has theses properties ? (B) 2  3.82 (A) 2  2.24 s + 1.91s + 1.91 s + 2.59s + 1.12  382 (C) 2  2.24 (D) 2 s  2.59s + 1.12 s  1.91s + 1.91
7.27
7.24
Which of the following statements is true ? (A) G (s) is an allpass filter (B) G (s) has a zero in the righthalf plane (C) G (s) is the impedance of a passive network (D) G (s) is marginally stable The gain and phase margins of G (s) for closed loop stability are (A) 6 dB and 180c (B) 3 dB and 180c (A) Law pass filter (C) Band filter (B) High pass filter (D) Notch filter
7.25
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 160
2008
7.28
TWO MARKS
Group I lists a set of four transfer functions. Group II gives a list of possible step response y (t). Match the step responses with the corresponding transfer functions.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) P  3, Q  1, R  4, S  2 (C) P  2, Q  1, R  4, S  2
7.29
(B) P  3, Q  2, R  4, S  1 (D) P  3, Q  4, R  1, S  2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
7.30
The set of equalities that corresponds to this signal flow graph is Jx1N R b  g 0 VJx1N R0 0 V W u1 WK O S K O S (A) d K x2O = S g a 0 WK x2O+ S0 1 We o u2 dt K O S W S1 0 W x3 WK x3O S S a b 0 W L P T X V R X VL P T Jx1N R 0 a g WJx1N S1 0 W S u1 O O K K (B) d K x2O = S0  a  g WK x2O+ S0 1 We o u2 dt K O S W S0 0 W x3 WK x3O S S0 b  b W L P T L P R X T V XJ Jx1N R a b 0 V x1N S1 0 W W S u1 K O K O (C) d K x2O = S b  g 0 WK x2O+ S0 1 We o u2 dt K O S W S0 0 W x3 WK x3O S S a g 0W L P T L P TR X V V Jx1N R a 0 b X J N WK x1O S1 0 W u1 S O K (D) d K x2O = S g 0 a WK x2O+ S0 1 We o u2 dt K O S W S0 0 W x3 WK x3O S S b 0  a W L P T X XL P T
A certain system has transfer function G (s) = 2 s + 8 s + as  4 where a is a parameter. Consider the standard negative unity feedback configuration as shown below
Which of the following statements is true? (A) The closed loop systems is never stable for any value of a (B) For some positive value of a , the closed loop system is stable,
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 161
but not for all positive values. (C) For all positive values of a , the closed loop system is stable. (D) The closed loop system stable for all values of a , both positive and negative.
7.31
The number of open right half plane of 10 is G (s) = 5 4 3 s + 2s + 3s + 6s2 + 5s + 3 (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 The magnitude of frequency responses of an underdamped second order system is 5 at 0 rad/sec and peaks to 10 at 5 2 rad/sec. 3 The transfer function of the system is 500 (B) 2 375 (A) 2 s + 5s + 75 s + 10s + 100 720 (C) 2 (D) 2 1125 s + 12s + 144 s + 25s + 225 Group I gives two possible choices for the impedance Z in the diagram. The circuit elements in Z satisfy the conditions R2 C2 > R1 C1. The transfer functions V0 represents a kind of controller. Vi
7.37
7.32
5 (s + 5)( s2 + s + 1) The secondorder approximation of T (s) using dominant pole concept is 5 1 (B) (A) (s + 5)( s + 1) (s + 5)( s + 1) (C) 2 5 (D) 2 1 s +s+1 s +s+1 The openloop transfer function of a plant is given as G (s) = s 1 . 1 If the plant is operated in a unity feedback configuration, then the lead compensator that an stabilize this control system is 10 (s + 4) 10 (s  1) (B) (A) s+2 s+2 10 (s + 2) 2 (s + 2) (C) (D) s + 10 s + 10 T (s) =
2
7.38
A unity feedback control system has an openloop transfer function K G (s) = 2 s (s + 7s + 12) The gain K for which s = 1 + j1 will lie on the root locus of this
7.33
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
The asymptotic Bode plot of a transfer function is as shown in the figure. The transfer function G (s) corresponding to this Bode plot is
(A) Q  1, R  2 (C) Q  2, R  3
2007
7.34
(B) Q  1, R  3 (D) Q  3, R  2
ONE MARK
If the closedloop transfer function of a control system is given as s5 , then It is T (s) (s + 2)( s + 3) (A) an unstable system (B) an uncontrollable system (C) a minimum phase system (D) a nonminimum phase system
2007 TWO MARKS
7.40
1 1 (B) (s + 1)( s + 20) s (s + 1)( s + 20) 100 100 (C) (D) s (s + 1)( s + 20) s (s + 1)( 1 + 0.05s) The state space representation of a separately excited DC servo motor dynamics is given as (A)
7.35
A control system with PD controller is shown in the figure. If the velocity error constant KV = 1000 and the damping ratio z = 0.5 , then the value of KP and KD are
where w is the speed of the motor, ia is the armature current and w (s) of the motor u is the armature voltage. The transfer function U (s) is 10 s2 + 11s + 11 (C) 2 10s + 10 s + 11s + 11 (A) 1 s2 + 11s + 11 (D) 2 1 s + s + 11 (B)
dw dt dio dt
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 162
7.47
Consider a linear system whose state space representation is 1 x (t) = Ax (t). If the initial state vector of the system is x (0) = = G, 2 e2x then the system response is x (t) = > H. If the itial state vector  2e2t 1 of the system changes to x (0) = = G, then the system response 2 et becomes x (t) = > tH e
7.41
The transfer function of a phase lead compensator is given by Gc (s) = 1 + 3Ts where T > 0 The maximum phase shift provide by 1 + Ts such a compensator is (B) p (A) p 3 2 (C) p (D) p 4 6 A linear system is described by the following state equation 0 1 o (t) = AX (t) + BU (t), A = = X  1 0G The state transition matrix of the system is cos t sin t  cos t sin t (A) = (B) = G  sin t cos t  sin t  cos t G  cos t  sin t cos t  sin t (C) = (D) = G  sin t cos t cos t sin t G
7.48
The eigenvalue and eigenvector pairs (li vi) for the system are 1 1 1 1 (A) e 1 = Go and e 2 = Go (B) e 1, = Go and e2, = Go 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 (C) e 1, = Go and e 2, = Go (D) e 2 = Go and e1, = Go 1 2 1 2 The system matrix A is 0 1 (A) =  1 1G 2 1 (C) =  1  1G 1 1 (B) =  1  2G 0 1 (D) =  2  3G
7.42
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2006
7.43
7.49
7.50
ONE MARK
The openloop function of a unitygain feedback control system is given by K G (s) = (s + 1)( s + 2) The gain margin of the system in dB is given by (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 20 (D) 3
2006 TWO MARKS
ONE MARK
A linear system is equivalently represented by two sets of state equations : o = CW + DU o = AX + BU and W X The eigenvalues of the representations are also computed as [l] and [m]. Which one of the following statements is true ? (A) [l] = [m] and X = W (B) [l] = [m] and X ! W (C) [l] ! [m] and X = W (D) [l] = [m] and X ! W
7.44
Consider two transfer functions G1 (s) = 2 1 and s + as + b s . G2 (s) = 2 s + as + b The 3dB bandwidths of their frequency responses are, respectively (A) a2  4b , a2 + 4b (B) a2 + 4b , a2  4b (C) a2  4b , a2  4b (D) a2 + 4b , a2 + 4b
7.52
7.45
The Nyquist plot of G (jw) H (jw)for a closed loop control system, passes through ( 1, j0) point in the GH plane. The gain margin of the system in dB is equal to (A) infinite (B) greater than zero (C) less than zero (D) zero
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
network ?
7.46
The positive values of K and a so that the system shown in the figures below oscillates at a frequency of 2 rad/sec respectively are
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
7.53
Page 163
Despite the presence of negative feedback, control systems still have problems of instability because the (A) Components used have non linearities (B) Dynamic equations of the subsystem are not known exactly. (C) Mathematical analysis involves approximations. (D) System has large negative phase angle at high frequencies.
2005 TWO MARKS
7.54
The polar diagram of a conditionally stable system for open loop gain K = 1 is shown in the figure. The open loop transfer function of the system is known to be stable. The closed loop system is stable for
7.59
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
(A) K < 5 and 1 < K < 1 (B) K < 1 and 1 < K < 5 2 8 8 2 (C) K < 1 and 5 < K (D) K > 1 and 5 > K 8 8 In the derivation of expression for peak percent overshoot  px Mp = exp e o # 100% 1  x2 Which one of the following conditions is NOT required ? (A) System is linear and time invariant (B) The system transfer function has a pair of complex conjugate poles and no zeroes. (C) There is no transportation delay in the system. (D) The system has zero initial conditions. A ramp input applied to an unity feedback system results in 5% steady state error. The type number and zero frequency gain of the system are respectively (A) 1 and 20 (B) 0 and 20 (D) 1 and 1 (C) 0 and 1 20 20 A double integrator plant G (s) = K/s2, H (s) = 1 is to be compensated to achieve the damping ratio z = 0.5 and an undamped natural frequency, wn = 5 rad/sec which one of the following compensator Ge (s) will be suitable ? (A) s + 3 (B) s + 99 s + 99 s+3 (C) s  6 (D) s  6 s + 8.33 s K (1  s) An unity feedback system is given as G (s) = . s (s + 3) Indicate the correct root locus diagram.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.55
Based on the above results, the gain and phase margins of the system will be (B) 7.09 dB and 87.5c (A) 7.09 dB and 87.5c (C) 7.09 dB and  87.5c (D)  7.09 and  87.5c
2004 ONE MARK
7.56
7.61
The gain margin for the system with openloop transfer function 2 (1 + s) , is G (s) H (s) = s2 (A) 3 (B) 0 (C) 1 (D)  3 K Given G (s) H (s) = .The point of intersection of the s (s + 1)( s + 3) asymptotes of the root loci with the real axis is (A)  4 (B) 1.33 (C)  1.33 (D) 4
2004 TWO MARKS
7.57
7.62
7.63
7.58
Consider the Bode magnitude plot shown in the fig. The transfer function H (s) is
(A)
(B)
10 (s + 1) (s + 10)( s + 100)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 164
7.64
102 (s + 1) 103 (s + 100) (C) (D) (s + 10)( s + 100) (s + 1)( s + 10) A causal system having the transfer function H (s) = 1/ (s + 2) is excited with 10u (t). The time at which the output reaches 99% of its steady state value is (A) 2.7 sec (B) 2.5 sec (C) 2.3 sec (D) 2.1 sec A system has poles at 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz and 80 Hz; zeros at 5 Hz, 100 Hz and 200 Hz. The approximate phase of the system response at 20 Hz is (A)  90c (B) 0c (C) 90c (D)  180c Consider the signal flow graph shown in Fig. The gain x5 is x1
Given A = =
7.65
Fig. shows the Nyquist plot of the openloop transfer function G (s) H (s) of a system. If G (s) H (s) has one righthand pole, the closedloop system is
7.66
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) (C)
7.67
(A) always stable (B) unstable with one closedloop right hand pole (C) unstable with two closedloop right hand poles (D) unstable with three closedloop right hand poles
7.73
A PD controller is used to compensate a system. Compared to the uncompensated system, the compensated system has (A) a higher type number (B) reduced damping (C) higher noise amplification (D) larger transient overshoot
2003 TWO MARKS
7.74
The signal flow graph of a system is shown in Fig. below. The transfer function C (s)/ R (s) of the system is
sin ( 4t) + 2 sin ( t)  2 sin ( 4t) + 2 sin ( t) (A) 1 = G 3  sin ( 4t) + sin ( t) 2 sin ( 4t) + sin ( t) sin ( 2t) sin (2t) (B) = sin (t) sin ( 3t)G sin (4t) + 2 sin (t) 2 sin ( 4t)  2 sin ( t) (C) 1 = 2 sin (4t) + sin (t) G 3 sin ( 4t) + sin (t) cos ( t) + 2 cos (t) 2 cos ( 4t) + 2 cos ( t) (D) 1 = G 3  cos ( 4t) + cos ( t)  2 cos ( 4t) + cos (t)
7.68
(A) (C)
7.75
6 s2 + 29s + 6 s (s + 2) s + 29s + 6
2
(B) (D)
6s s2 + 29s + 6
2
7.69
The openloop transfer function of a unity feedback system is K G (s) = 2 s (s + s + 2)( s + 3) The range of K for which the system is stable is (B) 13 > K > 0 (A) 21 > K > 0 4 (C) 21 < K < 3 (D)  6 < K < 3 4 For the polynomial P (s) = s2 + s 4 + 2s3 + 2s2 + 3s + 15 the number of roots which lie in the right half of the s plane is (A) 4 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 1 The state variable equations of a system are : xo1 = 3x1  x2 = u, xo2 = 2x1 and y = x1 + u . The system is (A) controllable but not observable (B) observable but not controllable (C) neither controllable nor observable
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
away point located at (A) ( 0.5, 0) (C) ( 4, 0)
7.76
s (s + 27) s + 29s + 6 K The root locus of system G (s) H (s) = has the breaks (s + 2)( s + 3)
The approximate Bode magnitude plot of a minimum phase system is shown in Fig. below. The transfer function of the system is
7.70
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
7.82
Page 165
The phase margin of a system with the open  loop transfer function (1  s) G (s) H (s) = (1 + s)( 2 + s) (A) 0c (B) 63.4c (C) 90c (D) 3 The transfer function Y (s)/ U (s) of system described by the state equation xo (t) = 2x (t) + 2u (t) and y (t) = 0.5x (t) is 1 (A) 0.5 (B) (s  2) (s  2) 1 (C) 0.5 (D) (s + 2) (s + 2)
2002 TWO MARKS
7.83
7.77
(s + 0.1) 3 (s + 0.1) 3 7 (B) 10 (s + 10)( s + 100) (s + 10) 2 (s + 100) 2 (s + 0.1) (s + 0.1) 3 (C) (D) (s + 10) 2 (s + 100) (s + 10)( s + 100) 2 A secondorder system has the transfer function C (s) = 2 4 R (s) s + 4s + 4 With r (t) as the unitstep function, the response c (t) of the system is represented by (A) 108
7.84
The system shown in the figure remains stable when (A) k <  1 (B)  1 < k < 3 (C) 1 < k < 3 (D) k > 3 The transfer function of a system is G (s) = 100 . For a (s + 1)( s + 100)
7.85
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.78
The gain margin and the phase margin of feedback system with 8 are G (s) H (s) = (s + 100) 3 (A) dB, 0c (B) 3, 3 (C) 3, 0c (D) 88.5 dB, 3 The zeroinput response of a system given by the statespace equation x1 (0) 1 1 0 x1 xo1 =xo G = =1 1G=x G and =x (0)G = = 0 G is 2 2 2 tet (A) = G t et (C) = t G te
2002
The characteristic polynomial of a system is The system is (A) stable (C) unstable
7.79
et (B) = G t t (D) = t G te
ONE MARK
7.87
The system with the open loop transfer 1 has a gain margin of G (s) H (s) = 2 s ( s ) + s + 1 (A)  6 db (B) 0 db (C) 35 db (D) 6 db
2001
ONE MARK
7.80
7.81
Consider a system with transfer function G (s) = 2s + 6 . Its ks + s + 6 damping ratio will be 0.5 when the value of k is (B) 3 (A) 2 6 (D) 6 (C) 1 6 Which of the following points is NOT on the root locus of a system k with the openloop transfer function G (s) H (s) = s (s + 1)( s + 3) (A) s = j 3 (B) s = 1.5 (C) s = 3 (D) s = 3
7.88
The Nyquist plot for the openloop transfer function G (s) of a unity negative feedback system is shown in the figure, if G (s) has no pole in the righthalf of s plane, the number of roots of the system characteristic equation in the righthalf of s plane is (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) 2 (D) 3 The equivalent of the block diagram in the figure is given is
7.89
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 166
7.90
If the characteristic equation of a closed  loop system is s2 + 2s + 2 = 0 , then the system is (A) overdamped (B) critically damped (C) underdamped (D) undamped The rootlocus diagram for a closedloop feedback system is shown in the figure. The system is overdamped.
7.91
7.93
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Z3 (s)  Z3 (s) , Z1 (s) + Z3 (s) + Z4 (s) Z1 (s) + Z3 (s)  Z3 (s)  Z3 (s) (B) , Z2 (s)  Z3 (s) + Z4 (s) Z1 (s) + Z3 (s) Z3 (s) Z3 (s) (C) , Z2 (s) + Z3 (s) + Z4 (s) Z1 (s) + Z3 (s)  Z3 (s) Z3 (s) (D) , Z2 (s)  Z3 (s) + Z4 (s) Z1 (s) + Z3 (s) The openloop DC gain of a unity negative feedback system with closedloop transfer function 2 s + 4 is s + 7s + 13 (B) 4 (A) 4 9 13 (A) (C) 4 (D) 13
7.94
An amplifier with resistive negative feedback has tow left half plane poles in its openloop transfer function. The amplifier (A) will always be unstable at high frequency (B) will be stable for all frequency (C) may be unstable, depending on the feedback factor (D) will oscillate at low frequency.
2000 TWO MARKS
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
7.96
An electrical system and its signalflow graph representations are shown the figure (A) and (B) respectively. The values of G2 and H , respectively are
1 A system described by the transfer function H (s) = 3 2 + a + ks + 3 s s is stable. The constraints on a and k are. (A) a > 0, ak < 3 (B) a > 0, ak > 3 (C) a < 0, ak > 3 (D) a > 0, ak < 3
1999 ONE MARK
7.97
For a second order system with the closedloop transfer function T (s) = 2 9 s + 4s + 9 the settling time for 2percent band, in seconds, is (A) 1.5 (B) 2.0
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 167
(C) 3.0
7.98
(D) 4.0
The gain margin (in dB) of a system a having the loop transfer function G (s) H (s) = (A) 0 (C) 6 2 is s (s + 1) (B) 3 (D) 3
7.105
the eigen values of the closedloop system will be (A) 0,  1,  2 (B) 0,  1,  3 (C)  1,  1,  2 (D) 0,  1,  1
1998 ONE MARK
7.99
The system modeled described by the state equations is 0 1 0 X => x + > Hu H 2 3 1 Y = 81 1B x (A) controllable and observable (B) controllable, but not observable (C) observable, but not controllable (D) neither controllable nor observable
The number of roots of s3 + 5s2 + 7s + 3 = 0 in the left half of the s plane is (A) zero (B) one (C) two (D) three
7.106
The transfer function of a tachometer is of the form (A) Ks (B) K s K (C) K (D) (s + 1) s (s + 1)
7.100
The phase margin (in degrees) of a system having the loop transfer function G (s) H (s) = 2 3 is s (s + 1) (A) 45c (B)  30c (C) 60c (D) 30c
1999 TWO MARKS
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.101
An amplifier is assumed to have a singlepole highfrequency transfer function. The rise time of its output response to a step function input is 35 n sec . The upper 3 dB frequency (in MHz) for the amplifier to as sinusoidal input is approximately at (A) 4.55 (B) 10 (C) 20 (D) 28.6 If the closed  loop transfer function T (s) of a unity negative feedback system is given by an  1 s + an T (s) = n n1 s + a1 s + .... + an  1 s + an then the steady state error for a unit ramp input is (A) an (B) an an  1 an  2 (C) an  2 (D) zero an  2 Consider the points s1 = 3 + j4 and s2 = 3  j2 in the splane. Then, for a system with the openloop transfer function G (s) H (s) = K 4 (s + 1) (A) s1 is on the root locus, but not s2 (B) s2 is on the root locus, but not s1 (C) both s1 and s2 are on the root locus (D) neither s1 nor s2 is on the root locus For the system described by the state equation R 0 1 0V R0V S W S W o = S 0 0 1W x + S0W u x S S S0.5 1 2W W S1W W T X T X If the control signal u is given by u = [ 0.5  3  5] x + v , then
Consider a unity feedback control system with openloop transfer K . function G (s) = s (s + 1) The steady state error of the system due to unit step input is (A) zero (B) K (C) 1/K (D) infinite The transfer function of a zeroorderhold system is (A) (1/s) (1 + esT ) (B) (1/s) (1  esT ) (C) 1  (1/s) esT (D) 1 + (1/s) esT In the Bodeplot of a unity feedback control system, the value of phase of G (jw) at the gain cross over frequency is  125c. The phase margin of the system is (A)  125c (B)  55c (C) 55c (D) 125c Consider a feedback control system with loop transfer function K (1 + 0.5s) G (s) H (s) = s (1 + s) (1 + 2s) The type of the closed loop system is (A) zero (B) one (C) two (D) three The transfer function of a phase lead controller is 1 + 3Ts . The 1 + Ts
7.108
7.102
7.109
7.103
7.110
7.104
7.111
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 168
maximum value of phase provided by this controller is (A) 90c (B) 60c (C) 45c (D) 30c
7.112
The Nyquist plot of a phase transfer function g (jw) H (jw) of a system encloses the (1, 0) point. The gain margin of the system is (A) less than zero (B) zero (C) greater than zero (D) infinity 2s2 + 6s + 5 (s + 1) 2 (s + 2) The characteristic equation of the system is (A) 2s2 + 6s + 5 = 0 (B) (s + 1) 2 (s + 2) = 0 (C) 2s2 + 6s + 5 + (s + 1) 2 (s + 2) = 0 The transfer function of a system is
7.113
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(D) 2s2 + 6s + 5  (s + 1) 2 (s + 2) = 0
7.114
In a synchro error detector, the output voltage is proportional to [w (t)] n, where w (t) is the rotor velocity and n equals (A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 1 (D) 2
1997 ONE MARK
7.115
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
A certain linear time invariant system has the state and the output equations given below o1 1  1 X1 0 X > o H = >0 1 H>X H + >1H u 2 X2 y = 81 1B: X1 D X2 If X1 (0) = 1, X2 (0) = 1, u (0) = 0, then (A) 1 (B) 1 dy dt is
t=0
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 169
SOLUTIONS
7.1
Option (B) is correct. From the given plot, we obtain the slope as 20 log G2  20 log G1 Slope = log w2  log w1 From the figure 20 log G2 20 log G1 w1 w2 = 8 dB = 32 dB = 1 rad/s = 10 rad/s
Pk 2 = ^1 h^s1h^1 h^1 h = s1 since, all the loops are touching to the paths Pk1 and Pk 2 so, D k 1 = Dk 2 = 1 Now, we have D = 1  (sum of individual loops) + (sum of product of nontouching loops) Here, the loops are L1 = ^ 4h^1 h = 4 L2 = ^ 4h^s1h = 4s1 L 3 = ^ 2h^s1h^s1h = 2s2 L 4 = ^ 2h^s1h^1 h = 2s1 As all the loop L1, L2, L 3 and L 4 are touching to each other so, D = 1  ^L1 + L2 + L 3 + L 4h = 1  ^ 4  4s1  2s2  2s1h = 5 + 6s1 + 2s2
Slope =  8  32 log 10  log 1 = 40 dB/decade Therefore, the transfer function can be given as G ^s h = k2 S at w = 1 G ^ jw h = k 2 = k w In decibel, 20 log G ^ jwh = 20 log k = 32 or, k = 10 = 39.8 Hence, the Transfer function is .8 G ^s h = k2 = 392 s s Option (C) is correct. Given, open loop transfer function G ^s h = 10Ka = Ka 1 1 + 10s s + 10 By taking inverse Laplace transform, we have g ^ t h = e t
20 1 10 32
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.2
Comparing with standard form of transfer function, Aet/t , we get the open loop time constant, tol = 10 Now, we obtain the closed loop transfer function for the given system as G ^s h 10Ka H ^s h = = 1 + G ^s h 1 + 10s + 10Ka Ka = 1 s + ^Ka + 10 h By taking inverse Laplace transform, we get h ^ t h = ka .e^k + ht So, the time constant of closed loop system is obtained as tcl = 1 1 ka + 10 or, tcl = 1 ka (approximately)
a 1 10
Option (A) is correct. For the shown state diagram we can denote the states x1 , x2 as below
So, from the state diagram, we obtain o1 = x1  u x o2 = x2 + ^1 h^ 1h^1 h^ 1h u + ^ 1h^1 h^ 1h x1 x o2 = x2 + x1 + u x y = ^ 1h^1 h x2 + ^ 1h^1 h^ 1h x1 + ^1 h^ 1h^1 h^ 1h^1 h u = x1  x 2 + u Hence, in matrix form we can write the state variable equations o1  1 0 x1 1 x > o H = > 1  1H >x H + > 1 H u x2 2 x1 and y = 81  1B > H + u x2 which can be written in more general form as o = > 1 0 H X + > 1H X 1 1 1 y = 81  1B X + u and
Now, given that ka reduces open loop time constant by a factor of 100. i.e., tcl = tol 100 1 or, = 10 100 ka Hence, ka = 10
7.3
Option (A) is correct. For the given SFG, we have two forward paths Pk1 = ^1 h^s1h^s1h^1 h = s2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
7.5
Page 170
Option (A) is correct. From the obtained statevariable equations We have 1 0 A => 1  1H So, and S+1 0 SI  A = >  1 S + 1H
Auxiliary equation
1 >S + 1 0 H ^S + 1h2 1 S + 1 R 1 V S 0 W S+1 W =S 1 1 W S S^S + 1h2 S + 1W T X Hence, the state transition matrix is obtained as eAt = L1 ^SI  Ah1 V_ ZR 1 S Wb ] 0 b ] 1 S S + 1 W` =L [ 1 W S 1 ]S^S + 1h2 S + 1Wb \T Xa
^SI  Ah1 =
and
7.8
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
e1 0 = > t tH te e
7.9
7.6
Option (D) is correct. General form of state equations are given as o = Ax + Bu x o = Cx + Du y For the given problem R 0 a 0V R0V 1 S W S W A = S 0 0 a2W, B = S0W S S Sa 3 0 0W W S1W W R V R V R V T 0 a1 0X 0 T X S WS W S 0W AB = S 0 0 a2WS0W = Sa2W S Sa 3 0 0W WS S1W W S S 0W W R V R V Ra a V T 0 X T X T 0 a1 a2WS0X S W S 1 2W 0 0WS0W = S 0W A2 B = Sa2 a 3 S S 0 a 3 a1 WS S1W W S S 0W W 0W T XT X T X For controllability it is necessary that following matrix has a tank of n = 3 . R0 0 a a V 1 2W S 0W U = 6B : AB : A2 B@ = S0 a2 S S1 0 W 0W So, a2 ! 0 T X a 3 may be zero or not. a1 a 2 ! 0 & a1 ! 0 Option (B) is correct. For given plot root locus exists from  3 to 3, So there must be odd number of poles and zeros. There is a double pole at s = 3 Now poles = 0,  2,  3,  3 zeros = 1 k (s + 1) Thus transfer function G (s) H (s) = s (s + 2) (s + 3) 2 Option (A) is correct. We have G (jw) = 5 + jw Here s = 5 . Thus G (jw) is a straight line parallel to jw axis. Option (B) is correct.
(s2 + 9) (s + 2) (s + 1) (s + 3) (s + 4) ( w2 + 9) (jw + 2) = (jw + 1) (jw + 3) (jw + 4) The steady state output will be zero if G (jw) = 0 w 2 + 9 = 0
7.7
&
w = 3 rad/s Y (s) =
7.10
Option (A) is correct. K (s + 1) [R (s)  Y (s)] s + as2 + 2s + 1 K (s + 1) K (s + 1) R (s) = 3 Y (s) ;1 + 3 E 2 2 1 s + as2 + 2s + 1 s + as + s + Y (s) [s3 + as2 + s (2 + k) + (1 + k)] = K (s + 1) R (s) Y (s) Transfer Function, H (s) = R (s) K (s + 1) = 3 s + as2 + s (2 + k) + (1 + k) Routh Table :
3
7.11
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Here o = dy1 x = y1 and x dx y1 x 1 y = > H = > H = > Hx y2 2x 2 y1 = 1 u s+2 y1 (s + 2) o1 + 2y1 y o + 2x x o x o x
Now
For oscillation,
a (2 + K)  (1 + K) =0 a a = K+1 K+2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 171
Y (s) = 1 R (s) s + 1
7.15
Option (B) is correct. Transfer function is given as Y (s) = s X (s) s + p jw H (jw) = jw + p H (s) = Amplitude Response H (jw) = Phase Response Input Output w w +p2
2
Thus
Here
7.12
x1 = x G (s) H (s) =
Option (C) is correct. 100 s (s + 10) 2 100 Now G (jw) H (jw) = jw (jw + 10) 2 If wp is phase cross over frequency +G (jw) H (jw) = 180c We have Thus or or or or Now At w = wp G (jw) H (jw) = 100 = 1 10 (100 + 100) 20  180c = 100 tan1 0  tan1 3  2 tan1 a  180c = 90  2 tan1 (0.1wp) 45c = tan1 (0.1wp) tan 45c 0.1wp = 1 wp = 10 rad/se 100 G (jw) H (jw) = w (w2 + 100) wp 10 k
qh (w) = 90c  tan1 a w k p x (t) = p cos a2t  p k 2 y (t) = H (jw) x (t  qh) = cos a2t  p k 3 w H (jw) = p = w2+ p 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (D) is correct. From option (D) TF = H (s) 100 100 = ! s (s + 10) 2 s (s2 + 100) Option (B) is correct. From the given block diagram
So,
7.14
or
7.16
1 s+1 E (s) (s + 1)
= R (s)  Y (s) + E (s) :1 1 = R (s)  Y (s) s + 1D sE (s) = R (s)  Y (s) (s + 1) E (s) Y (s) = s+1
...(1) ...(2)
7.17
Option (A) is correct. Initial slope is zero, so K = 1 At corner frequency w 1 = 0.5 rad/ sec , slope increases by + 20 dB/ decade, so there is a zero in the transfer function at w 1 At corner frequency w 2 = 10 rad/ sec , slope decreases by  20 dB/ decade and becomes zero, so there is a pole in transfer function at w2 K a1 + s k w1 Transfer function H (s) = s a1 + w 2 k 1 a1 + s k (1 + 10s) 0.1 = = s (1 + 0.1s) + 1 a 0.1 k
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 172
R (s) = 1 s 1 1 + G (s) GC (s) 1 = lim s"0 G (s) 1+ 2 C s + 2s + 2 eSS will be minimum if lim GC (s) is maximum s"0 In option (D) lim GC (s) = lim 1 + 2 + 3s = 3 s s"0 s"0 So, eSS = lim 1 = 0 (minimum) s"0 3 eSS = lim
s"0
7.18
7.20
Option (C) is correct. This compensator is roughly equivalent to combining lead and lad compensators in the same design and it is referred also as PID compensator. Option (C) is correct. Here 1 0 1 AB = = 0 A == 0 p and B = = G G 1 q 0 p p == G G G = 1 q q p q S = 8B AB B = = q pG
7.21
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Option (B) is correct. The characteristic equation is 1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 K (s2  2s + 2) or 1+ =0 s 2 + 2s + 2 or s2 + 2s + 2 + K (s2  2s + 2) = 0 2 or K = s2 + 2s + 2 s  2s + 2 For break away & break in point differentiating above w.r.t. s we have
2 2 dK = (s  2s + 2)( 2s + 2)  (s + 2s + 2)( 2s  2) = 0 ds (s2  2s + 2) 2
Thus or
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
/ PK DK
D
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 173
T (s) =
1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 1+ 2 s+8 =0 s + as  4 or s 2 + as  4 + s + 8 = 0 or s2 + (a + 1) s + 4 = 0 This will be stable if (a + 1) > 0 " a >  1. Thus system is stable for all positive value of a .
7.31
7.24
Option (B) is correct. The plot has one encirclement of origin in clockwise direction. Thus G (s) has a zero is in RHP. Option (C) is correct. The Nyzuist plot intersect the real axis ate  0.5. Thus G. M. = 20 log x = 20 log 0.5 = 6.020 dB And its phase margin is 90c. Option (C) is correct. Transfer function for the given pole zero plot is: (s + Z1)( s + Z2) (s + P1)( s + P2) From the plot Re (P1 and P2 )>(Z1 and Z2 ) So, these are two lead compensator. Hence both high pass filters and the system is high pass filter. Option (C) is correct. Percent overshoot depends only on damping ratio, x . Mp = e xp 1  x If Mp is same then x is also same and we get x = cos q Thus q = constant The option (C) only have same angle.
2
Option (C) is correct. The characteristic equation is 1 + G (s) = 0 or s5 + 2s 4 + 3s3 + 6s2 + 5s + 3 = 0 1 Substituting s = z we have 3z5 + 5z 4 + 6z3 + 3z2 + 2z + 1 = 0 The routh table is shown below. As there are tow sign change in first column, there are two RHS poles.
7.25
7.26
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.27
3 5
21 5 4 3
6 3
7 5
2 1
7.28
z1 z0
7 4 1
2xwn = 20, x > 1 " Overdamped 2xwn = 12, x = 1 " Critically 2xwn = 7, x < 1 " underdamped
Graph 1 Graph 2
Option (C) is correct. For underdamped second order system the transfer function is
2 Kwn 2 s2 + 2xwn s + wn It peaks at resonant frequency. Therefore
72 s + 7s + 72
2
T (s) =
7.29
wr = wn 1  2x2 5 2x 1  x2
7.30
From this SFG we have xo1 = gx1 + bx3 + m1 xo2 = gx1 + ax3 xo3 = bx1  ax3 + u2 R V R VR V R V Sx1 W S g 0 b WSx1 W S0 1 W u1 Sx2 W = S g 0 a WSx2 W+ S0 0 We o Thus u2 S W W S S1 0 W W S Sx3 W Sx3 W WS S b 0  a W X T X T XT X T Option (C) is correct. The characteristic equation of closed lop transfer function is
We have wr = 5 2 , and mr = 10 . Only options (A) satisfy these 3 values. wn = 10, x = 1 2 where wr = 10 1  2` 1 j = 5 2 4 and Hence satisfied mr = 1 5 1 = 10 22 1 4 3
7.33
Option (B) is correct. The given circuit is a inverting amplifier and transfer function is Vo =  Z =  Z (sC1 R1 + 1) R R1 Vi sC R + 1
1 1 1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 174
For Q ,
Z = Vo Vi
For R ,
Z Vo Vi
(sC2 R2 + 1) sC2 (sC2 R2 + 1) (sC1 R1 + 1) PID Controller =# sC2 R1 R2 = (sC2 R2 + 1) (sC1 R1 + 1) R2 =# (sC2 R2 + 1) R1
7.38
Option (D) is correct. For ufb system the characteristics equation is 1 + G (s) = 0 K or 1+ =0 2 s (s + 7s + 12) or s (s2 + 7s + 12) + K = 0 Point s = 1 + j lie on root locus if it satisfy above equation i.e ( 1 + j)[(  1 + j) 2 + 7 ( 1 + j) + 12) + K] = 0 or K =+ 10
Option (D) is correct. In a minimum phase system, all the poles as well as zeros are on the left half of the s plane. In given system as there is right half zero (s = 5), the system is a nonminimum phase system. Option (B) is correct. We have Kv = lim sG (s) H (s)
s"0
7.39
7.35
or
1000 = lim s
s"0
Option (D) is correct. At every corner frequency there is change of 20 db/decade in slope which indicate pole at every corner frequency. Thus K G (s) = s (1 + s)`1 + s j 20 Bode plot is in (1 + sT) form = 60 dB = 1000 20 log K w w = 0. 1 Thus Hence K =5 G (s) = 100 s (s + 1)( 1 + .05s) 1 1 w 0
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 (K + KD s) 100 = Kp 1000 = lims " 0 s p s (s + 100) Now characteristics equation is or 1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 (100 + KD s) 100 1+ =0 s (s + 10) Kp = 100
7.40
dw dt dia dt
Taking Laplace transform (i) we get sw (s) = w (s) = Ia (s) or (s + 1) w (s) = Ia (s) Taking Laplace transform (ii) we get or or or or
7.41
...(3)
sIa (s) = w (s)  10Ia (s) + 10U (s) w (s) = ( 10  s) Ia (s) + 10U (s) = ( 10  s)( s + 1) w (s) + 10U (s) w (s) = [s2 + 11s + 10] w (s) + 10U (s) (s2 + 11s + 11) w (s) = 10U (s) w (s) = 2 10 U (s) (s + 11s + 11)
From (3)
3 4]
. We can see easily that pole at s = 0.5 ! j 23 is dominant then pole at s = 5 . Thus we have approximated it.
7.37
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
We have Let xo (t) = Ax (t) p q A == r sG
Option (A) is correct. 1 = 1 2 ( s 1 )( s  1) + s 1 The lead compensator C (s) should first stabilize the plant i.e. 1 term. From only options (A), C (s) can remove this remove (s  1) term G (s) = Thus 10 (s  1) 1 G (s) C (s) = # (s + 1)( s  1) (s + 2) 10 Only option (A) = (s + 1)( s + 2)
1 For initial state vector x (0) = = G the system response is 2 e2t x (t) = > H  2e2t Thus e2t > d ( 2e2t)H dt
d dt
t=0
==
p q 1 r s G= 2G
satisfies.
or
 2e2 (0)
p q
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 175
2 p  2q = 4 G = = r  2s G We get p  2q = 2 and r  2s = 4 1 For initial state vector x (0) = = G the system response is 1 et x (t) = > tH e et > d ( et)H dt
d dt
Given system is 2nd order and for 2nd order system G.M. is infinite.
7.44
Option (D) is correct. Option (D) is correct. If the Nyquist polt of G (jw) H (jw) for a closed loop system pass through ( 1, j0) point, the gain margin is 1 and in dB GM = 20 log 1 = 0 dB
...(i)
7.45
Thus
t=0
==
p q 1 r s G= 1G
7.46
p q 1  e (0) > e (0) H = =r s G= 1G 1 pq = 1G = = r  s G We get p  q = 1 and r  s = 1 Solving (1) and (2) set of equations we get p q 0 1 =r s G = = 2  3G The characteristic equation lI  A = 0 l 1 =0 2 l+3 or l (l + 3) + 2 = 0 or l = 1,  2 Thus Eigen values are  1 and  2 Eigen vectors for l1 = 1 (l1 I  A) X1 = 0 or l1  1 x11 = 2 l + 3G=x G = 0 1 21  1  1 x11 = 2 2 G=x G = 0 21 ...(2)
s3 + as2 + (2 + K) s + K + 1 = 0 The Routh Table is shown below. For system to be oscillatory stable
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
or
...(1)
Then we have as2 + K + 1 = 0 At 2 rad/sec we have s = jw " s2 = w2 = 4 , Thus  4a + K + 1 = 0 Solving (i) and (ii) we get K = 2 and a = 0.75 . s3 s2 s1 s0
7.47
or  x11  x21 = 0 or x11 + x21 = 0 We have only one independent equation x11 = x21 . Let x11 = K , then x21 = K , the Eigen vector will be 1 x11 K =x G = = K G = K = 1G 21 Now Eigen vector for l2 = 2 (l2 I  A) X2 = 0 l2  1 x12 or = 2 l + 3G=x G = 0 2 22  2  1 x11 or = 2 1 G=x G = 0 21 or  x11  x21 = 0 or x11 + x21 = 0 We have only one independent equation x11 = x21 . Let x11 = K, then x21 = K , the Eigen vector will be x12 K 1 =x G = = 2K G = K = 2G 22
7.42
...(2)
1 a
(1 + K) a  (1 + K) a
2+K 1+K
1+K
Option (D) is correct. The transfer function of given compensator is Gc (s) = 1 + 3Ts 1 + Ts Comparing with Gc (s) = 1 + aTs we get a = 3 1 + Ts The maximum phase sift is fmax = tan1 a  1 2 a = tan1 3  1 = tan1 1 2 3 3 fmax = p 6
T>0
Option (D) is correct. As shown in previous solution the system matrix is 0 1 A ==  2  3G Option (D) is correct.
7.48
or
7.43
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 176
(sI  A) = = (sI  A)
1
s 0 0 1 s 1 = == G G 0 s 1 0 1 sG
2 2
T (s) = 1 + sT 1 + sbT
b > 1; T > 0
s s 1 s +1 1 = 2 G = > 1 = s +1 1 s s +1
1 s2 + 1 s s2 + 1
H
and At w = 0 , At w = 0 , At w = 3 , At w = 3 ,
7.53
T (jw) =
1 + w2 T2 1 + w2 b2 T2
Option (C) is correct. 1 G (s) = as + We have s2 +G (jw) = tan1 (wa)  p Since PM is p i.e. 45c, thus 4 p = p + +G (jw ) w " Gain cross over Frequeng g 4 cy or or p = p + tan1 (w a)  p g 4 p = tan1 (w a) g 4
+T (jw) = tan1 (wT)  tan1 (wbT) T (jw) = 1 +T (jw) = tan1 0 = 0 T (jw) = 1 b +T (jw) = 0
Option (A) is correct. Despite the presence of negative feedback, control systems still have problems of instability because components used have nonlinearity. There are always some variation as compared to ideal characteristics. Option (B) is correct. Option (C) is correct. The peak percent overshoot is determined for LTI second order closed loop system with zero initial condition. Its transfer function is
2 wn 2 s2 + 2xwn s + wn Transfer function has a pair of complex conjugate poles and zeroes.
7.54 7.55
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
or awg = 1 At gain crossover frequency G (jwg) = 1 Thus or or
7.50
T (s) =
7.56
Option (A) is correct. For ramp input we have R (s) = 1 s2 Now ess = lim sE (s)
s"0
2 1 + a2 wg =1 2 wg 2 1 + 1 = wg
R (s) 1 = lim 1 + G (s) s " 0 s + sG (s) ess = lim 1 = 5% = 1 s " 0 sG (s) 20 kv = 1 = lim sG (s) = 20 s"0 ess = lim s
s"0
Finite
wg = (2)
1 4
Option (C) is correct. For a = 0.84 we have +1 G (s) = 0.84s 2 s Due to ufb system H (s) = 1 and due to unit impulse response R (s) = 1, thus C (s) = G (s) R (s) = G (s) + 1 = 1 + 0.84 = 0.84s s s2 s2 Taking inverse Laplace transform At t = 1, c (t) = (t + 0.84) u (t) c (1 sec) = 1 + 0.84 = 1.84
Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. Any point on real axis of s  is part of root locus if number of OL poles and zeros to right of that point is even. Thus (B) and (C) are possible option. The characteristics equation is 1 + G (s) H (s) = 0
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
or or 1+ K (1  s) =0 s (s + 3)
2 K = s + 3s 1s
7.51
Option (C) is correct. o = AX + BU We have where l is set of Eigen values X o = CW + DU and where m is set of Eigen values W If a liner system is equivalently represented by two sets of state equations, then for both sets, states will be same but their sets of Eigne values will not be same i.e. X = W but l ! m Option (D) is correct. The transfer function of a lag network is
For break away & break in point dK = (1  s)( 2s + 3) + s2 + 3s = 0 ds or  s2 + 2s + 3 = 0 which gives s = 3 ,  1 Here  1 must be the break away point and 3 must be the break in point.
7.52
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
7.59
Page 177
7.62
w2 = 3 G (jw) H (jw) = 2 1 + w2 Thus gain margin is = 1 = 0 and in dB this is  3 . 3 Option (C) is correct. Centroid is the point where all asymptotes intersects. SReal of Open Loop Pole  SReal Part of Open Loop Pole s = SNo.of Open Loop Pole  SNo.of Open Loop zero =  1  3 = 1.33 3 Option (C) is correct. The given bode plot is shown below
7.63
or or or Now
4 wg +
2 4wg
Let at frequency wf we have +GH = 180c w  p = 2wf  p  tan1 f 2 2 w or 2wf + tan1 f = p 2 2 w w 3 or 2wf + c f  1 ` f j m = p 2 2 3 2 or
3 5wf wf =p 2 24 2 5wf .p 2 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
or
7.60
wf = 0.63 rad
Option (D) is correct. The gain at phase crossover frequency wf is 3 3 = G (jwg) = 2 wf (wf + 4) 0.63 (0.632 + 4) or G (jwg) = 2.27 G.M. = 20 log G (jwg)  20 log 2.26 = 7.08 dB Since G.M. is negative system is unstable. The phase at gain cross over frequency is w +G (jwg) = 2wg  p  tan1 g 2 2 = 2 # 1.26  p  tan1 1.26 2 2 or
1 2
Option (C) is correct. We have r (t) = 10u (t) or R (s) = 10 s Now H (s) = 1 s+2 C (s) = H (s) $ R (s) = or C (s) = 5  5 s s+2 1 $ 10 10 s + 2 s s (s + 2)
7.61
Option (D) is correct. The open loop transfer function is 2 (1 + s) G (s) H (s) = s2 Substituting s = jw we have 2 (1 + jw) ...(1) G (jw) H (jw) =  w2 +G (jw) H (jw) = 180c + tan1 w The frequency at which phase becomes  180c, is called phase crossover frequency. Thus  180 = 180c + tan1 wf or tan1 wf = 0 or wf = 0 The gain at wf = 0 is
c (t) = 5 [1  e2t] The steady state value of c (t) is 5. It will reach 99% of steady state value reaches at t , where or or or
7.65
Option (A) is correct. Approximate (comparable to 90c) phase shift are Due to pole at 0.01 Hz "  90c Due to pole at 80 Hz "  90c Due to pole at 80 Hz " 0 Due to zero at 5 Hz " 90c
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 178
Due to zero at 100 Hz " 0 Due to zero at 200 Hz " 0 Thus approximate total  90c phase shift is provided.
7.66
or
1  2 x12 = 1 2 G=x G = 0 22
We have only one independent equation x12 = 2x22 Let x22 = K , then x12 = 2K . Thus Eigen vector will be x12 2K 2 =x G = = K G = K = 1 G 22 Digonalizing matrix 1 2 x11 x12 = M == x21 x22 G = 1 1G 1 2 M1 = `  1 j= G 3 1 1
In given SFG there is only one forward path and 3 possible loop. p1 = abcd 31 = 1 3 = 1  (sum of indivudual loops)  (Sum of two non touching loops) = 1  (L1 + L2 + L3) + (L1 L3) Non touching loop are L1 and L3 where L1 L2 = bedg Thus C (s) p1 3 1 = 1  (be + cf + dg) + bedg R (s)
Now
Now Diagonal matrix of sin At is D where sin (l1 t) 0 sin ( 4t) 0 D == == G 0 sin (l2 t) 0 sin (l2 t)G Now matrix B = sin At = MDM1  1 2 sin ( 4t) 0 1 2 =` 1 j= G G = = 1 1 0 sin ( t)  1  1G 3  sin ( 4t)  2 sin ( t) 2 sin ( 4t)  2 sin ( t) =` 1 j= sin ( 4t) + 2 sin (t)  2 sin ( 4t)  sin ( t)G 3  sin ( 4t)  2 sin ( t) 2 sin ( 4t)  2 sin ( t) =` 1 j= sin ( 4t)  sin ( t)  2 sin ( 4t) + 2 sin ( t)G 3 sin ( 4t) + 2 sin ( t)  2 sin ( 4t) + 2 sin ( t) = ` 1 j= Gs 3  sin ( 4t + sin ( t) 2 sin ( 4t) + sin ( t)
7.68
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
=
7.67
Option (A) is correct. For ufb system the characteristic equation is 1 + G (s) = 0 K =0 s (s2 + 2s + 2)( s + 3) s 4 + 4s3 + 5s2 + 6s + K = 0 The routh table is shown below. For system to be stable, (21  4K) 0 < K and 0 < 2/7 This gives 0 < K < 21 4 1+ s4 1 5 K
1 + G (s)
Characteristic equation is
or (l + 2)( l + 3)  2 = 0 or l2 + 5l + 4 = 0 Thus l1 = 4 and l2 = 1 Eigen values are  4 and  1. Eigen vectors for l1 = 4 or (l1 I  A) X1 = 0 l1 + 2  2 x11 = 1 l + 3G=x G = 0 1 21  2  2 x11 = 1  1G=x G = 0 21
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
s3 s2 s1 s0
7.69
4
7 2
21  4K 7/2
6 K 0
or  2x11  2x21 = 0 or x11 + x21 = 0 We have only one independent equation x11 = x21 . Let x21 = K , then x11 = K , the Eigen vector will be K 1 x11 =x G = = K G = K = 1 G 21 Now Eigen vector for l2 = 1 (l2 I  A) X2 = 0 l2 + 2  2 x12 or =  1 l + 3G=x G = 0 2 22
Option (B) is correct. We have P (s) = s5 + s 4 + 2s3 + 3s + 15 The routh table is shown below. 12 24e  144 If e " 0+ then 2e + is positive and 15e2is negative. Thus e e + 12 there are two sign change in first column. Hence system has 2 root
2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 179
on RHS of plane. s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0
7.70
2
1 1 e
2e + 12 e
15e  24e  144 2e + 12
2 2  12 15
3 15 0 0
where L1 and L3 are nontouching C (s) This R (s) p1 3 1 = 1  (loop gain) + pair of non  touching loops ^ s +s27 h = 3 24 2 2 3 = 1  ^s  s  sh+ s . s s (s + 27) = 2 s + 29s + 6
7.75
^ s h 6 1 + 29 s + 2 s
s + 27
Option (D) is correct. 1  3  1 x1 x1 We have =x G = = 2 0 G=x G + = 0 Gu 2 2 1 x1 and Y = [1 0]= G + = G u 2 x2 3 1 1 Here , B = = G and C = [1 0] A == G 2 0 0 The controllability matrix is 1 3 QC = [B AB ] = = 0 2G det QC ! 0 The observability matrix is Q0 = [CT AT CT ] 1 3 == !0 0  1G det Q0 ! 0 Thus observable Thus controllable
Option (D) is correct. We have or or 1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 K =0 1+ s (s + 2)( s + 3) K = s (s2 + 5s2 + 6s) dK = (3s2 + 10s + 6) = 0 ds s =  10 ! 100  72 = 0.784,  2.548 6
which gives
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.71
0
1 s1
H
Since breakpoint must lie on root locus so s = 0.748 is possible.
7.76
Option (A) is correct. Z = PN N " Net encirclement of ( 1 + j0) by Nyquist plot, P " Number of open loop poles in right hand side of s  plane Z " Number of closed loop poles in right hand side of s  plane Here N = 1 and P = 1 Thus Z =0 Hence there are no roots on RH of s plane and system is always stable.
7.73
Option (C) is correct. PD Controller may accentuate noise at higher frequency. It does not effect the type of system and it increases the damping. It also reduce the maximum overshoot. Option (D) is correct. Mason Gain Formula T (s) = Spk 3 k 3
7.77
7.74
In given SFG there is only forward path and 3 possible loop. p1 = 1 31 = 1 + 3 + 24 = s + 27 s s s L1 =  2 , L2 =  24 and L3 =  3 s s s
At w = 0.1 change in slope is + 60 dB " 3 zeroes at w = 0.1 At w = 10 change in slope is  40 dB " 2 poles at w = 10 At w = 100 change in slope is  20 dB " 1 poles at w = 100 K ( 0s.1 + 1) 3 Thus T (s) = s s + 1) ( 10 + 1) 2 ( 100 Now 20 log10 K = 20 or K = 10 10 ( 0s.1 + 1) 3 108 (s + 0.1) 3 Thus = T (s) = s s + 1) (s + 10) 2 (s + 100) ( 10 + 1) 2 ( 100 Option (B) is correct. The characteristics equation is s2 + 4s + 4 = 0 Comparing with
2 =0 s2 + 2xwn + wn
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 180
we get Thus
Critically damped
or or
7.84
7.78 7.79
Option (B) is correct. Option (C) is correct. We have 1 xo1 =xo G = =1 2 1 A == 1 s (sI  A) = = 0
1
Option (D) is correct. From Mason gain formula we can write transfer function as K Y (s) K s = = 3 R (s) 1  ( s + sK ) s  3 (3  K) For system to be stable (3  K) < 0 i.e. K > 3 Option (B) is correct. The characteristics equation is (s + 1)( s + 100) = 0 s2 + 101s + 100 = 0 2 Comparing with s2 + 2xwn + wn = 0 we get 2 2xwn = 101 and wn = 100 Thus x = 101 20
7.85
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
7.80
1 (s  1) 0 s1 1 (sI  A) = > H = > +1 (s  1) 2 + 1 (s  1) (s  1) t e 0 L1 [(sI  A) 1] = eAt = = t t G te e et 0 1 et x (t) = eAt # [x (t0)] = = t t G= G = = t G te e 0 te
1 s1
Overdamped
For overdamped system settling time can be determined by the dominant pole of the closed loop system. In given system dominant pole consideration is at s = 1. Thus 1 =1 and Ts = 4 = 4 sec T T
7.86
Option (B) is correct. Routh table is shown below. Here all element in 3rd row are zero, so system is marginal stable. s5 s4 s3 s2 s1 s0 2 1 0 4 2 0 2 1 0
Given x = 0.5
7.87
Option (B) is correct. Any point on real axis lies on the root locus if total number of poles and zeros to the right of that point is odd. Here s = 1.5 does not lie on real axis because there are total two poles and zeros (0 and  1) to the right of s = 1.5 . Option (D) is correct. From the expression of OLTF it may be easily see that the maximum magnitude is 0.5 and does not become 1 at any frequency. Thus gain cross over frequency does not exist. When gain cross over frequency does not exist, the phase margin is infinite. Option (D) is correct. We have xo (t) = 2x (t) + 2u (t) Taking Laplace transform we get or or Now sX (s) = 2X (s) + 2U (s) (s + 2) X (s) = 2U (s) 2U (s) X (s) = (s + 2) y (t) = 0.5x (t) ...(i)
7.82
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
+G (jw) H (jw) = p  tan1 w 2 2 (1  w ) The frequency at which phase becomes  180c, is called phase crossover frequency. wf Thus  180 = 90  tan1 2 1  wf wf or  90 = tan1 2 1  wf or 1  w2 f = 0 wf = 1 rad/sec The gain margin at this frequency wf = 1 is
Option (B) is correct. The open loop transfer function is 1 G (s) H (s) = 2 s (s + s + 1) Substituting s = jw we have 1 G (jw) H (jw) = jw ( w2 + jw + 1)
7.83
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 181
Option (A) is correct. Z = PN N " Net encirclement of ( 1 + j0) by Nyquist plot, P " Number of open loop poles in right had side of s  plane Z " Number of closed loop poles in right hand side of s  plane Here N = 0 (1 encirclement in CW direction and other in CCW) and P = 0 Thus Z = 0 Hence there are no roots on RH of s  plane.
Option (B) is correct. For unity negative feedback system the closed loop transfer function is G (s) s+4 , CLTF = = G (s) " OL Gain 1 + G (s) s2 + 7s + 13 2 1 + G (s) or = s + 7s + 13 G (s) s+4 or or 1 = s2 + 7s + 13  1 = s2 + 6s + 9 G (s) s+4 s+4 G (s) = 2 s + 4 s + 6s + 9 G (0) = 4 9
7.89
Option (D) is correct. Take off point is moved after G2 as shown below
7.90
Option (C) is correct. The characteristics equation is s2 + 2s + 2 = 0 2 Comparing with s2 + 2xwn + wn = 0 we get 2 2xwn = 2 and wn =2 2 and x = 1 2 Since x < 1 thus system is under damped wn =
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (C) is correct. From the Block diagram transfer function is G (s) T (s) = 1 + G (s) H (s) K (s  2) Where G (s) = (s + 2) and H (s) = (s  2) The Characteristic equation is 1 + G (s) H (s) = 0 K (s  2) 1+ (s  2) = 0 (s + 2) 2 or (s + 2) 2 + K (s  2) 2 = 0 or (1 + K) s2 + 4 (1  K) s + 4K + 4 = 0 Routh Table is shown below. For System to be stable 1 + k > 0 , and 4 + 4k > 0 and 4  4k > 0 . This gives  1 < K < 1 As per question for 0 # K < 1 s2 s1 s0 1+k 4  4k 4 + 4k 4 + 4k 0
7.91
Option (D) is correct. If roots of characteristics equation lie on negative axis at different positions (i.e. unequal), then system response is over damped. From the root locus diagram we see that for 0 < K < 1, the roots are on imaginary axis and for 1 < K < 5 roots are on complex plain. For K > 5 roots are again on imaginary axis. Thus system is over damped for 0 # K < 1 and K > 5 . Option (C) is correct. From SFG we have I1 (s) I2 (s) V0 (s) Now applying = G1 Vi (s) + HI2 (s) = G2 I1 (s) = G3 I2 (s) KVL in given block diagram we have ...(1) ...(2) ...(3) ...(4) ...(5)
7.95
7.92
Vi (s) = I1 (s) Z1 (s) + [I1 (s)  I2 (s)] Z3 (s) 0 = [I2 (s)  I1 (s)] Z3 (s) + I2 (s) Z2 (s) + I2 (s) Z4 (s) From (4) we have or Vi (s) = I1 (s)[ Z1 (s) + Z3 (S)]  I2 (s) Z3 (S) Z3 (s) 1 or + I2 I1 (s) = Vi Z1 (s) + Z3 (s) Z1 (s) + Z3 (s) From (5) we have or I1 (s) Z3 (S) = I2 (s)[ Z2 (s) + Z3 (s) + Z4 (s)] I1 (s) Z3 (s) Is (s) = Z3 (s) + Z2 (s) + Z4 (s)
...(6)
7.96
Option (B) is correct. It is stable at all frequencies because for resistive network feedback factor is always less than unity. Hence overall gain decreases. Option (B) is correct. The characteristics equation is s2 + as2 + ks + 3 = 0 The Routh Table is shown below For system to be stable a > 0 and aK  3 > 0 a Thus a > 0 and aK > 3
...(7)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 182
s3 s2 s1 s0
1 a
aK  3 a
K 3 0
7.100
The observability matrix is 1 2 !0 Q0 = [CT AT CT ] = = 1  2G det Q0 ! 0 Option (D) is correct. we have G (s) H (s) = 2 3 s (s + 1) G (jw) H (jw) = 2 3 jw (jw + 1) Thus observable
7.97
Option (B) is correct. Closed loop transfer function is given as T (s) = 2 9 s + 4s + 9 by comparing with standard form we get natural freq.
2 wA =9 wn = 3 2xwn = 4
or
or
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
4 =4 =2 ts = 4 = xwn 3 # 2/3 2
7.98
4 = 2/3 2#3 for second order system the setting time for 2percent band is given by damping factor x =
which gives
7.101 7.102
Option (B) is correct. Option (C) is correct. Closedloop transfer function is given by an  1 s + an T (s) = n s + a1 sn  1 + ... + an  1 s + an an  1 s + an n n1 2 = s + a1 s + ...an  2 s an  1 s + an 1+ n s + a1 sn  1 + ...an  2 s2 Thus G (s) H (s) = an  1 s + an sn + a1 sn  1 + ....an  2 s2
Option (D) is correct. Given loop transfer function is G (s) H (s) = G (jw) H (jw) = 2 s (s + 1)
2 jw (jw + 1) Phase cross over frequency can be calculated as So here f (w) at w = w = 180c f (w) = 90c  tan1 (w)  90c  tan1 (wp) = 180c tan1 (wp) = 90c wp = 3
p
For unity feed back H (s) = 1 an  1 s + an sn + a1 sn  1 + ....an  2 s2 Steady state error is given by 1 E (s) = lim R (s) s"0 1 + G (s) H (s) for unity feed back H (s) = 1 Thus G (s) =
1 G (jw) H (jwp) o
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
R (s) = 1 (unit Ramp) s2 1 so E (s) = lim 1 s " 0 s 2 1 + G (s) sn + a1 sn  1 + .... + an  2 s2 = lim 1 s " 0 s2 sn + a1 sn  1 + .... + an = an  2 an Here input
7.103
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 183
Phase is f (w) = tan1 (3Tw)  tan1 (Tw) w f (w) = tan1 ; 3Tw  T 1 + 3T 2 w2 E f (w) = tan1 ; 2Tw2 2 E 1 + 3T w For maximum value of phase df (w) =0 dw 1 = 3T 2 w2 Tw = 1 3 So maximum phase is or fmax = tan1 ; 2Tw2 2 E at Tw = 1 1 + 3T w 3 R V 1 S 2 W 1 3 W = tan1 1 = 30c = tan S ; 3E 1 S S1 + 3 # 3 W W T X
7 3 =
32 5
There is no sign change in the first column. Thus there is no root lying in the lefthalf plane.
7.107
Option (A) is correct. Techometer acts like a differentiator so its transfer function is of the form ks . Option (A) is correct. Open loop transfer function is K G (s) = s (s + 1) Steady state error sR (s) E (s) = lim s " 0 1 + G (s) H (s) Where R (s) = 1 s s1 s (s + 1) s so =0 = lim 2 E (s) = lim s"0 s"0 s + s + K K 1+ s (s + 1) Option (B) is correct. Fig given below shows a unit impulse input given to a zeroorder hold circuit which holds the input signal for a duration T & therefore, the output is a unit step function till duration T . R (s) = input H (s) = 1 (unity feedback)
7.108
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
7.109
Option (A) is correct. G (jw) H (jw) enclose the ( 1, 0) point so here G (jwp) H (jwp) > 1 wp = Phase cross over frequency 1 Gain Margin = 20 log 10 G (jwp) H (jwp) so gain margin will be less than zero. Option (B) is correct. The denominator of Transfer function is called the characteristic equation of the system. so here characteristic equation is (s + 1) 2 (s + 2) = 0 Option (C) is correct. In synchro error detector, output voltage is proportional to [w (t)], where w (t) is the rotor velocity so here n = 1 Option (C) is correct. By massons gain formulae / Dk Pk y = x D Forward path gain P1 = 5 # 2 # 1 = 10 D = 1  (2 #  2) = 1 + 4 = 5 D1 = 1 y = 10 # 1 = 2 5 x
7.114
7.115
7.116
Option (C) is correct. Phase margin = 180c + qg where qg = value of phase at gain crossover frequency. Here qg = 125c so P.M = 180c  125c = 55c Option (B) is correct. Open loop transfer function is given by K (1 + 0.5s) G (s) H (s) = s (1 + s) (1 + 2s) Close looped system is of type 1. It must be noted that type of the system is defined as no. of poles lies at origin in OLTF. lying Option (D) is correct. Transfer function of the phase lead controller is 1 + (3Tw) j T.F = 1 + 3Ts = 1+s 1 + (Tw) j
7.111
so gain
7.117
7.112
Option (C) is correct. By given matrix equations we can have o1 = dx1 = x1  x2 + 0 X dt o2 = dx2 = 0 + x2 + m X dt x1 y = [1 1] > H = x1 + x2 x2 dy = dx1 + dx2 dt dt dt
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 184
dy = x1 + m dt dy dt = x1 (0) + m (0)
t=0
= 1+0 = 0
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 8
Page 184
8.6
The optimum threshold to achieve minimum bit error rate (BER) is (A) 1 (B) 4 2 5 (C) 1
2012
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
(D) 3 2
ONE MARK
2013
8.1
ONE MARK
8.7
The bit rate of a digital communication system is R kbits/s . The modulation used is 32QAM. The minimum bandwidth required for ISI free transmission is (A) R/10 Hz (B) R/10 kHz (C) R/5 Hz (D) R/5 kHz
2013 TWO MARKS
The power spectral density of a real process X (t) for positive frequencies is shown below. The values of E [X 2 (t)] and E [X (t)] , respectively, are
8.2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
P ^3V F 2U h is (A) 4/9 (C) 2/3
8.3
Let U and V be two independent zero mean Gaussain random variables of variances 1 and 1 respectively. The probability 9 4
In a baseband communications link, frequencies upto 3500 Hz are used for signaling. Using a raised cosine pulse with 75% excess bandwidth and for no intersymbol interference, the maxi mum possible signaling rate in symbols per second is (A) 1750 (B) 2625 (C) 4000 (D) 5250 A source alphabet consists of N symbols with the probability of the first two symbols being the same. A source encoder increases the probability of the first symbol by a small amount e and decreases that of the second by e . After encoding, the entropy of the source (A) increases (B) remains the same (C) increases only if N = 2 (D) decreases Two independent random variables X and Y are uniformly distributed in the interval 6 1, 1@. The probability that max 6X, Y @ is less than 1/2 is (A) 3/4 (B) 9/16 (C) 1/4 (D) 2/3
2012 TWO MARKS
8.9
Consider two identically distributed zeromean random variables U and V . Let the cumulative distribution functions of U and 2V be F ^x h and G ^x h respectively. Then, for all values of x (A) F ^x h  G ^x h # 0 (B) F ^x h  G ^x h $ 0 (C) ^F (x)  G (x)h .x # 0 (D) ^F (x)  G (x)h .x $ 0 Let U and V be two independent and identically distributed random variables such that P ^U =+ 1h = P ^U = 1h = 1 . The entropy 2 H ^U + V h in bits is (A) 3/4 (B) 1 (C) 3/2 (D) log 2 3
8.10
8.4
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
8.11
8.5
If the detection threshold is 1, the BER will be (A) 1 (B) 1 2 4 (C) 1 (D) 1 8 16
A BPSK scheme operating over an AWGN channel with noise power spectral density of N 0 /2, uses equiprobable signals s1 (t) = 2E sin (wc t) and s2 (t) = 2E sin (wc t) over the symbol T T interval (0, T). If the local oscillator in a coherent receiver is ahead in phase by 45c with respect to the received signal, the probability of error in the resulting system is (A) Q c 2E m (B) Q c E m N0 N0 E E (C) Q c (D) Q c 2N 0 m 4N 0 m A binary symmetric channel (BSC) has a transition probability of 1/8. If the binary symbol X is such that P (X = 0) = 9/10, then the
8.12
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 185
probability of error for an optimum receiver will be (B) 63/80 (A) 7/80 (C) 9/10 (D) 1/10
8.13
TWO MARKS
The signal m (t) as shown is applied to both a phase modulator (with k p as the phase constant) and a frequency modulator (with k f as the frequency constant) having the same carrier frequency.
X (t) is a stationary random process with autocorrelation function RX (t) = exp ( pt 2). This process is passed through the system shown below. The power spectral density of the output process Y (t) is
The ratio k p /k f (in rad/Hz) for the same maximum phase deviation is (A) 8p (B) 4p (C) 2p (D) p
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.14
8.15
ONE MARK
An analog signal is bandlimited to 4 kHz, sampled at the Nyquist rate and the samples are quantized into 4 levels. The quantized levels are assumed to be independent and equally probable. If we transmit two quantized samples per second, the information rate is (A) 1 bit/sec (B) 2 bits/sec (C) 3 bits/sec (D) 4 bits/sec The Column 1 lists the attributes and the Column 2 lists the modulation systems. Match the attribute to the modulation system that best meets it. Column 1 P. Q. R. S. Power efficient transmission of 1. signals Most bandwidth efficient 2. transmission of voice signals Simplest receiver structure 3. Bandwidth efficient transmission 4. of signals with significant dc component Column 2 Conventional AM FM
8.21
A fourphase and an eightphase signal constellation are shown in the figure below.
8.17
8.20
For the constraint that the minimum distance between pairs of signal points be d for both constellations, the radii r 1 , and r 2 of the circles are (B) r 1 = 0.707d, r 2 = 1.932d (A) r 1 = 0.707d, r2 = 2.782d (C) r 1 = 0.707d, r 2 = 1.545d (D) r 1 = 0.707d, r 2 = 1.307d Assuming high SNR and that all signals are equally probable, the additional average transmitted signal energy required by the 8PSK signal to achieve the same error probability as the 4PSK signal is (A) 11.90 dB (B) 8.73 dB (C) 6.79 dB (D) 5.33 dB
2010 ONE MARK
VSB SSBSC
(A) P4, Q2, R1, S3 (B) P2, Q4, R1, S3 (C) P3, Q2, R1, S4
8.22
Suppose that the modulating signal is m (t) = 2 cos (2pfm t) and the
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 186
carrier signal is xC (t) = AC cos (2pfC t), which one of the following is a conventional AM signal without overmodulation (A) x (t) = AC m (t) cos (2pfC t) (B) x (t) = AC [1 + m (t)] cos (2pfC t) (C) x (t) = AC cos (2pfC t) + AC m (t) cos (2pfC t) 4 (D) x (t) = AC cos (2pfm t) cos (2pfC t) + AC sin (2pfm t) sin (2pfC t)
8.23
gain and cutoff frequency 1 MHz. Let Yk represent the random variable y (tk ). Yk = Nk , if transmitted bit bk = 0 Yk = a + Nk if transmitted bit bk = 1 Where Nk represents the noise sample value. The noise sample has a probability density function, PNk (n) = 0.5ae a n (This has mean zero and variance 2/a 2 ). Assume transmitted bits to be equiprobable and threshold z is set to a/2 = 106 V .
Consider an angle modulated signal x (t) = 6 cos [2p # 106 t + 2 sin (800pt)] + 4 cos (800pt) The average power of x (t) is (A) 10 W (B) 18 W (C) 20 W (D) 28 W
8.24
Consider the pulse shape s (t) as shown below. The impulse response h (t) of the filter matched to this pulse is
8.25
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The value of the parameter a (in V  1 ) is (A) 1010 (B) 107 (C) 1.414 # 1010 (D) 2 # 1020 The probability of bit error is (A) 0.5 # e3.5 (C) 0.5 # e7 (B) 0.5 # e5 (D) 0.5 # e10
8.26
8.27
The Nyquist sampling rate for the signal sin (500pt) sin (700) pt is given by s (t) = # pt pt (A) 400 Hz (B) 600 Hz (C) 1200 Hz (D) 1400 Hz X (t) is a stationary process with the power spectral density Sx (f ) > 0 , for all f . The process is passed through a system shown below
8.28
Let Sy (f ) be the power spectral density of Y (t). Which one of the following statements is correct (A) Sy (f ) > 0 for all f (B) Sy (f ) = 0 for f > 1 kHz
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(C) Sy (f ) = 0 for f = nf0, f0 = 2 kHz kHz, n any integer (D) Sy (f ) = 0 for f = (2n + 1) f0 = 1 kHz , n any integer
2009 2010 TWO MARKS
8.29
ONE MARK
For a message siganl m (t) = cos (2pfm t) and carrier of frequency fc , which of the following represents a single sideband (SSB) signal ? (B) cos (2pfc t) (A) cos (2pfm t) cos (2pfc t) (C) cos [2p (fc + fm) t] (D) [1 + cos (2pfm t) cos (2pfc t)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 187
2009
8.30
TWO MARKS
8.37
2008
TWO MARKS
Consider two independent random variables X and Y with identical distributions. The variables X and Y take values 0, 1 and 2 with 1 respectively. What is the conditional 1 probabilities 1 2 , 4 and 4 probability P (X + Y = 2 X  Y = 0) ? (A) 0 (C) 1/6 (B) 1/16 (D) 1
8.31
A discrete random variable X takes values from 1 to 5 with probabilities as shown in the table. A student calculates the mean X as 3.5 and her teacher calculates the variance of X as 1.5. Which of the following statements is true ? k P (X = k) 1 0.1 2 0.2 3 0.3 4 0.4 5 0.5
(A) Both the student and the teacher are right (B) Both the student and the teacher are wrong (C) The student is wrong but the teacher is right (D) The student is right but the teacher is wrong
8.32
1 A message signal given by m (t) = ( 1 2 ) cos w1 t  ( 2 ) sin w2 t amplitude  modulated with a carrier of frequency wC to generator s (t)[ 1 + m (t)] cos wc t . What is the power efficiency achieved by this modulation scheme ? (B) 11.11% (A) 8.33% (C) 20% (D) 25%
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.33
A communication channel with AWGN operating at a signal to noise ration SNR >> 1 and bandwidth B has capacity C1. If the SNR is doubled keeping constant, the resulting capacity C2 is given by (B) C2 . C1 + B (A) C2 . 2C1 (C) C2 . C1 + 2B (D) C2 . C1 + 0.3B
If the signal to quantization noise ratio required in uniformly quantizing the signal is 43.5 dB, the step of the quantization is approximately (A) 0.033 V (B) 0.05 V (C) 0.0667 V (D) 0.10 V
8.38
8.35
If the positive values of the signal are uniformly quantized with a step size of 0.05 V, and the negative values are uniformly quantized with a step size of 0.1 V, the resulting signal to quantization noise ration is approximately (A) 46 dB (B) 43.8 dB (C) 42 dB (D) 40 dB
2008 ONE MARK
A memory less source emits n symbols each with a probability p . The entropy of the source as a function of n 1 (A) increases as log n (B) decreases as log ( n ) (C) increases as n (D) increases as n log n Noise with doublesided power spectral density on K over all frequencies is passed through a RC low pass filter with 3 dB cutoff frequency of fc . The noise power at the filter output is (A) K (B) Kfc (D) 3 (C) kpfc Consider a Binary Symmetric Channel (BSC) with probability of error being p . To transmit a bit, say 1, we transmit a sequence of three 1s. The receiver will interpret the received sequence to represent 1 if at least two bits are 1. The probability that the transmitted bit will be received in error is (B) p3 (A) p3 + 3p2 (1  p) (D) p3 + p2 (1  p) (C) (1  p3)
8.39
8.36
Consider the amplitude modulated (AM) signal Ac cos wc t + 2 cos wm t cos wc t . For demodulating the signal using envelope detector, the minimum value of Ac should be (A) 2 (B) 1 (C) 0.5 (D) 0
8.40
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
8.41
Page 188
Four messages band limited to W, W, 2W and 3W respectively are to be multiplexed using Time Division Multiplexing (TDM). The minimum bandwidth required for transmission of this TDM signal is (A) W (B) 3W (C) 6W (D) 7W Consider the frequency modulated signal 10 cos [2p # 105 t + 5 sin (2p # 1500t) + 7.5 sin (2p # 1000t)] with carrier frequency of 105 Hz. The modulation index is (A) 12.5 (B) 10 (C) 7.5 (D) 5 The signal cos wc t + 0.5 cos wm t sin wc t is (A) FM only (B) AM only (C) both AM and FM (D) neither AM nor FM
8.50
8.42
8.51
8.43
In delta modulation, the slope overload distortion can be reduced by (A) decreasing the step size (B) decreasing the granular noise (C) decreasing the sampling rate (D) increasing the step size The raised cosine pulse p (t) is used for zero ISI in digital communications. The expression for p (t) with unity rolloff factor is given by sin 4pWt p (t) = 4pWt (1  16W2 t2) The value of p (t) at t = 1 is 4W (A)  0.5 (C) 0.5
8.52
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
sample is quantized and represented by 8 bits.
8.44
(B) 0 (D) 3
8.53
In the following scheme, if the spectrum M (f) of m (t) is as shown, then the spectrum Y (f) of y (t) will be
If the bits 0 and 1 are transmitted using bipolar pulses, the minimum bandwidth required for distortion free transmission is (A) 64 kHz (B) 32 kHz (C) 8 kHz (D) 4 kHz Assuming the signal to be uniformly distributed between its peak to peak value, the signal to noise ratio at the quantizer output is (A) 16 dB (B) 32 dB (C) 48 dB (D) 4 kHz Assuming the signal to be uniformly distributed between its peak to peak value, the signal to noise ratio at the quantizer output is (A) 1024 (B) 512 (C) 256 (D) 64
2007 ONE MARK
8.45
8.46
8.54
8.47
If R (t) is the auto correlation function of a real, widesense stationary random process, then which of the following is NOT true (A) R (t) = R ( t) (B) R (t) # R (0) (C) R (t) = R ( t) (D) The mean square value of the process is R (0) If S (f) is the power spectral density of a real, widesense stationary random process, then which of the following is ALWAYS true? (B) S (f) $ 0 (A) S (0) # S (f) (C) S ( f) = S (f) (D)
8.55
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
bit errors occur independently with probability p . The probability of AT MOST one bit in error in a block of n bits is given by (A) pn (B) 1  pn (C) np (1  p) n  1 + (1 + p) n (D) 1  (1  p) n
8.48
# 3 S (f) df = 0
8.49
In a GSM system, 8 channels can coexist in 200 kHz bandwidth using TDMA. A GSM based cellular operator is allocated 5 MHz bandwidth. Assuming a frequency reuse factor of 1 , i.e. a fivecell 5 repeat pattern, the maximum number of simultaneous channels that can exist in one cell is (A) 200 (B) 40 (C) 25 (D) 5
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 189
8.56
In a Direct Sequence CDMA system the chip rate is 1.2288 # 106 chips per second. If the processing gain is desired to be AT LEAST 100, the data rate (A) must be less than or equal to 12.288 # 103 bits per sec (B) must be greater than 12.288 # 103 bits per sec (C) must be exactly equal to 12.288 # 103 bits per sec (D) can take any value less than 122.88 # 103 bits per sec
2006
8.61
ONE MARK
A lowpass filter having a frequency response H (jw) = A (w) e jf (w) does not produce any phase distortions if (B) A (w) = Cw2, f (w) = kw (A) A (w) = Cw3, f (w) = kw3 (C) A (w) = Cw, f (w) = kw2
2006
8.62
A signal with bandwidth 500 Hz is first multiplied by a signal g (t) where g (t) =
R = 3
The resulting signal is then passed through an ideal lowpass filter with bandwidth 1 kHz. The output of the lowpass filter would be (A) d (t) (B) m (t) (C) 0 (D) m (t) d (t)
8.63
8.57
The if ratio or the average energy of Constellation 1 to the average energy of Constellation 2 is (A) 4a2 (B) 4 (C) 2 (D) 8 If these constellations are used for digital communications over an AWGN channel, then which of the following statements is true ? (A) Probability of symbol error for Constellation 1 is lower (B) Probability of symbol error for Constellation 1 is higher (C) Probability of symbol error is equal for both the constellations (D) The value of N0 will determine which of the constellations has a lower probability of symbol error
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.58
The minimum stepsize required for a DeltaModulator operating at 32k samples/sec to track the signal (here u (t) is the unitstep function) x (t) = 125[ u (t)  u (t  1) + (250t)[ u (t  1)  u (t  2)] so that slopeoverload is avoided, would be (A) 2  10 (B) 2  8 (C) 2  6 (D) 2  4
8.65
A zeromean white Gaussian noise is passes through an ideal lowpass filter of bandwidth 10 kHz. The output is then uniformly sampled with sampling period ts = 0.03 msec. The samples so obtained would be (A) correlated (B) statistically independent (C) uncorrelated (D) orthogonal A source generates three symbols with probabilities 0.25, 0.25, 0.50 at a rate of 3000 symbols per second. Assuming independent generation of symbols, the most efficient source encoder would have average bit rate is (A) 6000 bits/sec (B) 4500 bits/sec (C) 3000 bits/sec (D) 1500 bits/sec The diagonal clipping in Amplitude Demodulation (using envelop detector) can be avoided it RC timeconstant of the envelope detector satisfies the following condition, (here W is message bandwidth and w is carrier frequency both in rad/sec) (B) RC > 1 (A) RC < 1 W W
8.66
8.59
8.60
The values of a and b are (B) a = 1 and b = 3 (A) a = 1 and b = 1 12 5 40 6 (C) a = 1 and b = 1 (D) a = 1 and b = 1 4 16 3 24 Assuming that the reconstruction levels of the quantizer are the midpoints of the decision boundaries, the ratio of signal power to quantization noise power is (B) 64 (A) 152 3 9 (C) 76 (D) 28 3
8.67
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 190
8.68
(C) RC < 1 (D) RC > 1 w w A uniformly distributed random variable X with probability density function fx (x) = 1 pu (x + 5)  u (x  5)] 10 where u (.) is the unit step function is passed through a transformation given in the figure below. The probability density function of the transformed random variable Y would be
signal and modulation index would be (A) t, 0.5 (B) t, 1.0 (C) t, 2.0 (D) t2, 0.5
(A) fy (y) = 1 [u (y + 2.5)  u (y  2.25)] 5 (B) fy (y) = 0.5d (y) + 0.5d (y  1) (C) fy (y) = 0.25d (y + 2.5) + 0.25d (y  2.5) + 5d (y) (D) fy (y) = 0.25d (y + 2.5) + 0.25d (y  2.5) + 1 [u (y + 2.5)  u (y  2.5)]
10
8.74
It is desired to generate a stochastic process (as voltage process) with power spectral density S (w) = 16/ (16 + w2) by driving a LinearTimeInvariant system by zero mean white noise (As voltage process) with power spectral density being constant equal to 1. The system which can perform the desired task could be (A) first order lowpass RL filter (B) first order highpass RC filter (C) tuned LC filter (D) series RLC filter The parameters of the system obtained in previous Q would be (A) first order RL lowpass filter would have R = 4W L = 1H (B) first order RC highpass filter would have R = 4W C = 0.25F (C) tuned LC filter would have L = 4H C = 4F (D) series RLC lowpass filter would have R = 1W , L = 4H , C = 4F
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
8.69
In the following figure the minimum value of the constant "C" , which is to be added to y1 (t) such that y1 (t) and y2 (t) are different , is
The average sideband power for the AM signal given above is (A) 25 (B) 12.5 (C) 6.25 (D) 3.125 The AM signal gets added to a noise with Power Spectral Density Sn (f) given in the figure below. The ratio of average sideband power to mean noise power would be :
8.76
(A) 3
(B) 3 2
8.70
2 (C) 3 (D) 3 12 L A message signal with bandwidth 10 kHz is LowerSide Band SSB modulated with carrier frequency fc1 = 106 Hz. The resulting signal is then passed through a NarrowBand Frequency Modulator with carrier frequency fc2 = 109 Hz. The bandwidth of the output would be (B) 2 # 106 Hz (A) 4 # 10 4 Hz (D) 2 # 1010 Hz (C) 2 # 109 Hz
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
The impulse response of filter matched s (t) = g (t)  d (1  2)* g (t) is given as : (A) s (1  t) (B)  s (1  t) (C)  s (t) (D) s (t) An Amplitude Modulated signal is given as
to
the
signal
8.72
xAM (t) = 100 [p (t) + 0.5g (t)] cos wc t in the interval 0 # t # 1. One set of possible values of modulating
(A)
25 8N0 B
(B)
25 4N0 B
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 191
(C)
25 2N0 B
(D) 25 N0 B
ONE MARK
the probability density function as shown in the figure. The mean square value of v is
2005
8.77
Find the correct match between group 1 and group 2. Group 1 Group 2 W. Phase modulation P. {1 + km (t) A sin (wc t)} Q. km (t) A sin (wc t) X. Frequency modulation R. A sin {wc t + km (t)} Y. Amplitude modulation t S. A sin ; wc t + k m (t) dt E Z. DSBSC modulation
# 3
(A) 4 (C) 8
8.83
(B) 6 (D) 9
P  Z, Q  Y, R  X, S  W P  W, Q  X, R  Y, S  Z P  X, Q  W, R  Z, S  Y P  Y, Q  Z, R  W, S  X
Which of the following analog minimum transmitted power and (A) VSB (C) SSB
2005
modulation scheme requires the minimum channel bandwidth ? (B) DSBSC (D) AM
TWO MARKS
A carrier is phase modulated (PM) with frequency deviation of 10 kHz by a single tone frequency of 1 kHz. If the single tone frequency is increased to 2 kHz, assuming that phase deviation remains unchanged, the bandwidth of the PM signal is (A) 21 kHz (B) 22 kHz (C) 42 kHz (D) 44 kHz
8.79
A device with input X (t) and output y (t) is characterized by: Y (t) = x2 (t). An FM signal with frequency deviation of 90 kHz and modulating signal bandwidth of 5 kHz is applied to this device. The bandwidth of the output signal is (A) 370 kHz (B) 190 kHz (C) 380 kHz (D) 95 kHz A signal as shown in the figure is applied to a matched filter. Which of the following does represent the output of this matched filter ?
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.80
8.84
8.85
If the probability density function is divide into three regions as shown in the figure, the value of a in the figure is (B) 2 (A) 1 3 3 (C) 1 (D) 1 2 4 The quantization noise power for the quantization region between  a and + a in the figure is (B) 1 (A) 4 9 81 (C) 5 (D) 2 81 81
2004 ONE MARK
8.86
8.81
Noise with uniform power spectral density of N0 W/Hz is passed though a filter H (w) = 2 exp ( jwtd ) followed by an ideal pass filter of bandwidth B Hz. The output noise power in Watts is (A) 2N0 B (B) 4N0 B (C) 8N0 B (D) 16N0 B An output of a communication channel is a random variable v with
In a PCM system, if the code word length is increased from 6 to 8 bits, the signal to quantization noise ratio improves by the factor (B) 12 (A) 8 6 (C) 16 (D) 8
8.87
8.82
An AM signal is detected using an envelop detector. The carrier frequency and modulating signal frequency are 1 MHz and 2 kHz respectively. An appropriate value for the time constant of the envelop detector is (A) 500m sec (B) 20m sec
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 192
(D) 1m sec
An AM signal and a narrowband FM signal with identical carriers, modulating signals and modulation indices of 0.1 are added together. The resultant signal can be closely approximated by (A) broadband FM (B) SSB with carrier (C) DSBSC (D) SSB without carrier In the output of a DM speech encoder, the consecutive pulses are of opposite polarity during time interval t1 # t # t2 . This indicates that during this interval (A) the input to the modulator is essentially constant (B) the modulator is going through slope overload (C) the accumulator is in saturation (D) the speech signal is being sampled at the Nyquist rate The distribution function Fx (x) of a random variable x is shown in the figure. The probability that X = 1 is
symbols are represented as shown in the figure. The source output is transmitted using two modulation schemes, namely Binary PSK (BPSK) and Quadrature PSK (QPSK). Let B1 and B2 be the bandwidth requirements of the above rectangular pulses is 10 kHz, B1 and B2 are
8.89
8.90
A 100 MHz carrier of 1 V amplitude and a 1 MHz modulating signal of 1 V amplitude are fed to a balanced modulator. The ourput of the modulator is passed through an ideal highpass filter with cutoff frequency of 100 MHz. The output of the filter is added with 100 MHz signal of 1 V amplitude and 90c phase shift as shown in the figure. The envelope of the resultant signal is
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
8.95
(B)
5  sin (2p  106 t) 5 + cos (2p # 106 t) (D) 4 4 Two sinusoidal signals of same amplitude and frequencies 10 kHz and 10.1 kHz are added together. The combined signal is given to an ideal frequency detector. The output of the detector is (A) 0.1 kHz sinusoid (B) 20.1 kHz sinusoid (C) a linear function of time (D) a constant Consider a binary digital communication system with equally likely 0s and 1s. When binary 0 is transmitted the detector input can lie between the levels  0.25 V and + 0.25 V with equl probability : when binary 1 is transmitted, the voltage at the detector can have any value between 0 and 1 V with equal probability. If the detector has a threshold of 0.2 V (i.e., if the received signal is greater than 0.2 V, the bit is taken as 1), the average bit error probability is (A) 0.15 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.05 (D) 0.5
8.96
A 1 mW video signal having a bandwidth of 100 MHz is transmitted to a receiver through cable that has 40 dB loss. If the effective oneside noise spectral density at the receiver is 10  20 Watt/Hz, then the signaltonoise ratio at the receiver is (A) 50 dB (B) 30 dB (C) 40 dB (D) 60 dB Consider the signal x (t) shown in Fig. Let h (t) denote the impulse response of the filter matched to x (t), with h (t) being nonzero only in the interval 0 to 4 sec. The slope of h (t) in the interval 3 < t < 4 sec is
8.92
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
8.97
8.93
(A) 1 sec  1 (B)  1 sec  1 2 (C)  1 sec  1 (D) 1 sec  1 2 A source produces binary data at the rate of 10 kbps. The binary
A random variable X with uniform density in the interval 0 to 1 is quantized as follows : If 0 # X # 0.3 , xq = 0 If 0.3 < X # 1, xq = 0.7 where xq is the quantized value of X. The rootmean square value of the quantization noise is (A) 0.573 (B) 0.198 (D) 0.266 (C) 2.205 Choose the current one from among the alternative A, B, C, D after matching an item from Group 1 with the most appropriate item in Group 2. Group 1 Group 2
8.98
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 193
1. 2. 3. 4.
P. Slope overload Q. m law R. Envelope detector S. Hilbert transform T. Hilbert transform U. Matched filter (A) 1  T, 2  P, 3  U, 4  S (B) 1  S, 2  U, 3  P, 4  T (C) 1  S, 2  P, 3  U, 4  Q (D) 1  U, 2  R, 3  S, 4  Q
8.99
FM DM PSK PCM
Three analog signals, having bandwidths 1200 Hz, 600 Hz and 600 Hz, are sampled at their respective Nyquist rates, encoded with 12 bit words, and time division multiplexed. The bit rate for the multiplexed. The bit rate for the multiplexed signal is (A) 115.2 kbps (B) 28.8 kbps (C) 57.6 kbps (D) 38.4 kbps Consider a system shown in the figure. Let X (f) and Y (f) and denote the Fourier transforms of x (t) and y (t) respectively. The ideal HPF has the cutoff frequency 10 kHz.
8.106
Let X be the Gaussian random variable obtained by sampling the process at t = ti and let 3 Q (a) =  1 e dy a 2p The probability that 6x # 1@ is (B) Q (0.5) (A) 1  Q (0.5) 1 (C) Q c (D) 1  Q c 1 m m 2 2 2 2 Let Y and Z be the random variable obtained by sampling X (t) at t = 2 and t = 4 respectively. Let W = Y  Z . The variance of W is (A) 13.36 (B) 9.36 (C) 2.64 (D) 8.00
x2 2
8.100
8.107
A sinusoidal signal with peaktopeak amplitude of 1.536 V is quantized into 128 levels using a midrise uniform quantizer. The
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(B) 12 # 10  6 V2
8.108
ONE MARK
Let x (t) = 2 cos (800p) + cos (1400pt). x (t) is sampled with the rectangular pulse train shown in the figure. The only spectral components (in kHz) present in the sampled signal in the frequency range 2.5 kHz to 3.5 kHz are
The input to a coherent detector is DSBSC signal plus noise. The noise at the detector output is (A) the inphase component (B) the quadrature  component (C) zero (D) the envelope The noise at the input to an ideal frequency detector is white. The detector is operating above threshold. The power spectral density of the noise at the output is (A) raised  cosine (B) flat (C) parabolic (D) Gaussian At a given probability of error, binary coherent FSK is inferior to binary coherent PSK by. (A) 6 dB (B) 3 dB (C) 2 dB (D) 0 dB
2003 TWO MARKS
8.102
8.103
A DSBSC signal is to be generated with a carrier frequency fc = 1 MHz using a nonlinear device with the inputoutput characteristic V0 = a0 vi + a1 vi3 where a0 and a1 are constants. The output of the nonlinear device can be filtered by an appropriate bandpass filter. i Let Vi = Ac cos (2pfi ct) + m (t) is the message signal. Then the value i of fc (in MHz) is (A) 1.0 (B) 0.333 (B) 0.5 (D) 3.0
8.104
Let X and Y be two statistically independent random variables uniformly distributed in the ranges ( 1, 1) and ( 2, 1) respectively. Let Z = X + Y . Then the probability that (z #  1) is (A) zero (B) 1 6 (C) 1 (D) 1 3 12
c (t) and m (t) are used to generate an AM signal. The modulation index of the generated AM signal is 0.5. Then the quantity Total sideband power is Carrier power
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 194
(A) 1 2 (C) 1 3
8.111
(B) 1 4 (D) 1 8
8.112
c (t) and m (t) are used to generated an FM signal. If the peak frequency deviation of the generated FM signal is three times the transmission bandwidth of the AM signal, then the coefficient of the term cos [2p (1008 # 103 t)] in the FM signal (in terms of the Bessel coefficients) is (B) 5 J8 (3) (A) 5J4 (3) 2 (C) 5 J8 (4) (D) 5J4 (6) 2 Choose the correct one from among the alternative A, B, C, D after matching an item in Group 1 with most appropriate item in Group 2. Group 1 Group 2 P. Ring modulator 1. Clock recovery Q. VCO 2. Demodulation of FM R. FosterSeely discriminator 3. Frequency conversion
A signal is sampled at 8 kHz and is quantized using 8  bit uniform quantizer. Assuming SNRq for a sinusoidal signal, the correct statement for PCM signal with a bit rate of R is (A) R = 32 kbps, SNRq = 25.8 dB (B) R = 64 kbps, SNRq = 49.8 dB (C) R = 64 kbps, SNRq = 55.8 dB (D) R = 32 kbps, SNRq = 49.8 dB
2002 ONE MARK
8.118
A 2 MHz sinusoidal carrier amplitude modulated by symmetrical square wave of period 100 m sec . Which of the following frequencies will NOT be present in the modulated signal ? (A) 990 kHz (B) 1010 kHz (C) 1020 kHz (D) 1030 kHz Consider a sample signal y (t) = 5 # 10  6 # (t)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
S. Mixer 4. Summing the two inputs 5. Generation of FM 6. Generation of DSBSc (B) P  6; Q = 5; R  2; S  3 (D) P  5; Q  6; R  1; S  3
8.119
where x (t) = 10 cos (8p # 103) t and Ts = 100m sec. When y (t) is passed through an ideal lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency of 5 KHz, the output of the filter is (A) 5 # 10  6 cos (8p # 103) t (b) 5 # 10  5 cos (8p # 103) t (C) 5 # 10  1 cos (8p # 103) t
8.120
n = 3
/ d (t  nTs)
+3
For a bitrate of 8 Kbps, the best possible values of the transmitted frequencies in a coherent binary FSK system are (A) 16 kHz and 20 kHz (C) 20 kHz and 32 kHz (C) 20 kHz and 40 kHz (D) 32 kHz and 40 kHz The lineofsight communication requires the transmit and receive antennas to face each other. If the transmit antenna is vertically polarized, for best reception the receiver antenna should be (A) horizontally polarized (B) vertically polarized (C) at 45c with respect to horizontal polarization (D) at 45c with respect to vertical polarization
2002 TWO MARKS
(A) P  1; Q  3; R  2; S  4 (C) P  6; Q  1; R  3; S  2
8.113
8.121
A superheterodyne receiver is to operate in the frequency range 550 kHz  1650 kHz, with the intermediate frequency of 450 kHz. Let R = Cmax /Cmin denote the required capacitance ratio of the local oscillator and I denote the image frequency (in kHz) of the incoming signal. If the receiver is tuned to 700 kHz, then (B) R = 2.10, I  1150 (A) R = 4.41, I = 1600 (C) R = 3.0, I = 600 (D) R = 9.0, I = 1150 If Eb , the energy per bit of a binary digital signal, is 10  5 wattsec and the onesided power spectral density of the white noise, N0 = 10  6 W/Hz, then the output SNR of the matched filter is (A) 26 dB (B) 10 dB (C) 20 dB (D) 13 dB The input to a linear delta modulator having a stepsize 3 = 0.628 is a sine wave with frequency fm and peak amplitude Em . If the sampling frequency fx = 40 kHz, the combination of the sinewave frequency and the peak amplitude, where slope overload will take place is Em fm (A) 0.3 V 8 kHz (B) 1.5 V 4 kHz (C) 1.5 V 2 kHz (D) 3.0 V 1 kHz If S represents the carrier synchronization at the receiver and r represents the bandwidth efficiency, then the correct statement for the coherent binary PSK is
8.122
8.114
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
The maximum frequency and phase deviations of s (t) are (A) 10.5 kHz, 140 p rad (B) 6 kHz, 80p rad (C) 10.5 kHz, 100 p rad (D) 7.5 kHz, 100 p rad
8.123
8.115
In the figure m (t) = 2 sin 2pt , s (t) = cos 200pt and n (t) = sin 199pt t t . The output y (t) will be
8.116
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 195
8.124
(A) sin 2pt (B) sin 2pt + sin pt cos 3pt t t t (C) sin 2pt + sin 0.5pt cos 1.5pt (D) sin 2pt + sin pt cos 0.75pt t t t t 3 A signal x (t) = 100 cos (24p # 10 ) t is ideally sampled with a sampling period of 50m sec ana then passed through an ideal lowpass filter with cutoff frequency of 15 kHz. Which of the following frequencies is/are present at the filter output ? (A) 12 kHz only (B) 8 kHz only (C) 12 kHz and 9 kHz (D) 12 kHz and 8 kHz
2 of d (n) = x (n)  x (n  1) is onetenth the If the variance ax 2 variance ax of stationary zeromean discretetime signal x (n), then R (k) the normalized autocorrelation function xx 2 at k = 1 is (A) 0.95 (B) 0.90 ax
of K0 m (t) is greater than 1. Which of the following could be the detector output ? 2 (A) Ac m (t) (B) Ac [1 + Ka m (t)] 2 (C) [Ac (1 + Ka m (t)] (D) Ac [1 + Ka m (t)] 2
8.133
The frequency range for satellite communication is (A) 1 KHz to 100 KHz (B) 100 KHz to 10 KHz (C) 10 MHz to 30 MHz (D) 1 GHz to 30 GHz
2000 TWO MARKS
8.125
8.134
(C) 0.10
2001
8.126
(D) 0.05
ONE MARK
In a digital communication system employing Frequency Shift Keying (FSK), the 0 and 1 bit are represented by sine waves of 10 KHz and 25 KHz respectively. These waveforms will be orthogonal for a bit interval of (A) 45m sec (B) 200m sec (C) 50m sec (D) 250m sec A message m (t) bandlimited to the frequency fm has a power of Pm
8.135
A bandlimited signal is sampled at the Nyquist rate. The signal can be recovered by passing the samples through (A) an RC filter (B) an envelope detector (C) a PLL (D) an ideal lowpass filter with the appropriate bandwidth The PDF of a Gaussian random variable X is given by (x  4) px (x) = 1 e  18 . The probability of the event {X = 4} is 3 2p 1 1 (B) (A) 2 3 2p (C) 0 (D) 1 4
2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.127
2001
8.128
TWO MARKS
(A) Pm cos q 2
(B) Pm 4
A video transmission system transmits 625 picture frames per second. Each frame consists of a 400 # 400 pixel grid with 64 intensity levels per pixel. The data rate of the system is (A) 16 Mbps (B) 100 Mbps (C) 600 Mbps (D) 6.4 Gbps The Nyquist sampling interval, for the signal sin c (700t) + sin c (500t) is (A) 1 sec (B) p sec 350 350 (C) 1 sec (D) p sec 700 175 During transmission over a communication channel, bit errors occur independently with probability p . If a block of n bits is transmitted, the probability of at most one bit error is equal to (B) p + (n  1)( 1  p) (A) 1  (1  p) n (C) np (1  p)
n1
8.136
2 2 (C) Pm sin q (D) Pm cos q 4 4 The Hilbert transform of cos w1 t + sin w2 t is (A) sin w1 t  cos w2 t (B) sin w1 t + cos w2 t (C) cos w1 t  sin w2 t (D) sin w1 t + sin w2 t
8.129
8.137
8.130
In a FM system, a carrier of 100 MHz modulated by a sinusoidal signal of 5 KHz. The bandwidth by Carsons approximation is 1 MHz. If y (t) = (modulated waveform) 3 , than by using Carsons approximation, the bandwidth of y (t) around 300 MHz and the and the spacing of spectral components are, respectively. (A) 3 MHz, 5 KHz (B) 1 MHz, 15 KHz (C) 3 MHz, 15 KHz (D) 1 MHz, 5 KHz
1999 ONE MARK
(D) (1  p) + np (1  p)
n1
8.138
8.131
The PSD and the power of a signal g (t) are, respectively, Sg (w) and Pg . The PSD and the power of the signal ag (t) are, respectively, (A) a2 Sg (w) and a2 Pg (B) a2 Sg (w) and aPg (C) aSg (w) and a2 Pg (D) aSg (w) and aPs
2000 ONE MARK
8.139
The input to a channel is a bandpass signal. It is obtained by linearly modulating a sinusoidal carrier with a singletone signal. The output of the channel due to this input is given by y (t) = (1/100) cos (100t  106) cos (106 t  1.56) The group delay (tg) and the phase delay (t p) in seconds, of the channel are (A) tg = 106, t p = 1.56 (B) tg = 1.56, t p = 106 (C) tg = 108, t p = 1.56 # 106 (D) tg = 108, t p = 1.56 A modulated signal is given by s (t) = m1 (t) cos (2pfc t) + m2 (t) sin (2pfc t)
8.132
The amplitude modulated waveform s (t) = Ac [1 + Ka m (t)] cos wc t is fed to an ideal envelope detector. The maximum magnitude
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 196
8.147
where the baseband signal m1 (t) and m2 (t) have bandwidths of 10 kHz, and 15 kHz, respectively. The bandwidth of the modulated signal, in kHz, is (A) 10 (B) 15 (C) 25 (D) 30
8.140
A modulated signal is given by s (t) = eat cos [(wc + Dw) t] u (t), where a wc and Dw are positive constants, and wc >> Dw . The complex envelope of s (t) is given by (A) exp ( at) exp [j (wc + Dw) t] u (t) (B) exp ( at) exp (jDwt) u (t) (C) exp (jDwt) u (t) (D) exp [jwc + Dw) t]
1999 TWO MARKS
The image channel selectivity of superheterodyne receiver depends upon (A) IF amplifiers only (B) RF and IF amplifiers only (C) Preselector, RF and IF amplifiers (D) Preselector, and RF amplifiers only In a PCM system with uniform quantisation, increasing the number of bits from 8 to 9 will reduce the quantisation noise power by a factor of (A) 9 (B) 8 (C) 4 (D) 2 Flat top sampling of low pass signals (A) gives rise to aperture effect (B) implies oversampling (C) leads to aliasing (D) introduces delay distortion A DSBSC signal is generated using the carrier cos (we t + q) and modulating signal x (t). The envelope of the DSBSC signal is (A) x (t) (B) x (t) (C) only positive portion of x (t) (D) x (t) cos q Quadrature multiplexing is (A) the same as FDM (B) the same as TDM (C) a combination of FDM and TDM (D) quite different from FDM and TDM The Fourier transform of a voltage signal x (t) is X (f). The unit of X (f) is (A) volt (B) voltsec (C) volt/sec (D) volt 2 Compression in PCM refers to relative compression of (A) higher signal amplitudes (B) lower signal amplitudes (C) lower signal frequencies (D) higher signal frequencies For a give data rate, the bandwidth B p of a BPSK signal and the bandwidth B 0 of the OOK signal are related as (A) B p = B 0 (B) B p = B 0 2 4 (C) B p = B 0 (D) B p = 2B 0
8.148
8.149
8.141
The Nyquist sampling frequency (in Hz) of a signal given by 6 # 10 4 sin c2 (400t) * 106 sin c3 (100t) is (A) 200 (B) 300
8.150
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) 500
8.142
8.151
(D) 1000
8.152
The peaktopeak input to an 8bit PCM coder is 2 volts. The signal powertoquantization noise power ratio (in dB) for an input of 0.5 cos (wm t) is (A) 47.8 (B) 49.8 (C) 95.6 (D) 99.6 The input to a matched filter is given by 6 4 sec "10 0 sin (2p # 10 t) 0 < 1 < 10 s (t) = otherwise The peak amplitude of the filter output is (A) 10 volts (B) 5 volts (C) 10 millivolts (D) 5 millivolts Four independent messages have bandwidths of 100 Hz, 200 Hz and 400 Hz , respectively. Each is sampled at the Nyquist rate, and the samples are time division multiplexed (TDM) and transmitted. The transmitted sample rate (in Hz) is (A) 1600 (B) 800 (C) 400 (D) 200
1998 ONE MARK
8.153
8.143
8.154
8.144
8.155
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) an even symmetry (C) a conjugate symmetry
8.156
8.145
The amplitude spectrum of a Gaussian pulse is (A) uniform (B) a sine function (C) Gaussian (D) an impulse function The ACF of a rectangular pulse of duration T is (A) a rectangular pulse of duration T (B) a rectangular pulse of duration 2T (C) a triangular pulse of duration T (D) a triangular pulse of duration 2T
The probability density function of the envelope of narrow band Gaussian noise is (A) Poisson (B) Gaussian (C) Rayleigh (D) Rician
1997 ONE MARK
8.146
8.157
The line code that has zero dc component for pulse transmission of random binary data is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 197
(A) Nonreturn to zero (NRZ) (B) Return to zero (RZ) (C) Alternate Mark Inversion (AM) (D) None of the above
8.158
from (A) IF stages only (B) RF stages only (C) detector and RF stages only (D) detector RF and IF stages
1996
8.164
A probability density function is given by p (x) = Kex /2  3 < x < 3 . The value of K should be 2 (B) (A) 1 p 2p (C) 1 (D) 1 2 p p 2 A deterministic signal has the power spectrum given in the figure is, The minimum sampling rate needed to completely represent this signal is
TWO MARKS
The number of bits in a binary PCM system is increased from n to n + 1. As a result, the signal to quantization noise ratio will improve by a factor (A) n + 1 (B) 2(n + 1)/n n (C) 22 (n + 1)/n (D) which is independent of n
8.159
8.165
The auto correlation function of an energy signal has (A) no symmetry (B) conjugate symmetry (C) odd symmetry (D) even symmetry An FM signal with a modulation index 9 is applied to a frequency tripler. The modulation index in the output signal will be
8.166
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
A communication channel has first order low pass transfer function. The channel is used to transmit pulses at a symbol rate greater than the halfpower frequency of the low pass function. Which of the network shown in the figure is can be used to equalise the received pulses?
8.161
The power spectral density of a deterministic signal is given by [sin (f) /f 2] where f is frequency. The auto correlation function of this signal in the time domain is (A) a rectangular pulse (B) a delta function (C) a sine pulse (D) a triangular pulse
1996 ONE MARK
8.162
A rectangular pulse of duration T is applied to a filter matched to this input. The out put of the filter is a (A) rectangular pulse of duration T (B) rectangular pulse of duration 2T (C) triangular pulse (D) sine function The image channel rejection in a superheterodyne receiver comes
8.163
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 198
SOLUTIONS
8.1
for which we have X = 2U = 0 Y = 2V = 0 and X2 = 4U2 = 1 also, Y2 = 9V2 = 1 Therefore, X  Y is also a normal random variable with XY = 0 Hence, P ^X  Y $ 0h = P ^X  Y # 0h = 1 2 or, we can say P ^2U  3V # 0h = 1 2 Thus, P ^3V $ 2U h = 1 2
8.3
Option (B) is correct. In ideal Nyquist Channel, bandwidth required for ISI (Inter Symbol reference) free transmission is W = Rb 2 Here, the used modulation is 32  QAM (Quantum Amplitude modulation i.e., q = 32 or 2v = 32 v = 5 bits So, the signaling rate (sampling rate) is Rb = R 5 ( R " given bit rate)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Hence, for ISI free transmission, minimum bandwidth is W = Rb = R kHz 2 10 Option (B) is correct. Given, random variables U and V with mean zero and variances 1 4 and 1 9 i.e., U =V=0 2 su =1 4 1 2 and sv = 9 so, P ^U $ 0h = 1 2 1 and P ^V $ 0h = 2 The distribution is shown in the figure below
8.4
Option (C) is correct. The mean of random variables U and V are both zero i.e., U =V=0 Also, the random variables are identical i.e., fU ^u h = fV ^v h or, FU ^u h = FV ^v h i.e., their cdf are also same. So, FU ^u h = F2V ^2v h i.e., the cdf of random variable 2V will be also same but for any instant 2V $ U Therefore, G ^x h = F ^x h but, x G ^x h $ xF ^x h or, 6F ^x h  G ^x h@x # 0 Option (C) is correct. Given, P ^U =+ 1h = P ^U = 1h = 1 2 where U is a random variable which is identical to V i.e., P ^V =+ 1h = P ^V = 1h = 1 2 So, random variable U and V can have following values U =+ 1,  1; V =+ 1,  1 Therefore the random variable U + V can have the following values, U+V  2 When U = V = 1 = *0 When U = 1,V = 1 or u = 1, v = 1 2 When U = V = 1 Hence, we obtain the probabilities for U + V as follows U+V P ^U + V h
8.2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2 0 fu ^u h = fv ^v h = 1 e u 2s 2 2p su
2 u
/ P^U + V h log
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 199
=3 2
8.5
Option (D) is correct. For the shown received signal, we conclude that if 0 is the transmitted signal then the received signal will be also zero as the threshold is 1 and the pdf of bit 0 is not crossing 1. Again, we can observe that there is an error when bit 1 is received as it crosses the threshold. The probability of error is given by the area enclosed by the 1 bit pdf (shown by shaded region)
= 1 ;2 b 1 # 1 # 103 # 6 l + 400E p 2 = 1 66000 + 400@ = 6400 p p E [X (t)] is the absolute value of mean of signal X (t) which is also equal to value of X (w) at (w = 0). From given PSD SX (w) w = 0 = 0 SX (w) = X (w) 2 = 0 X (w) 2 =0 w=0 X (w) w = 0 = 0
8.8
P (error when bit 1 received) = 1 # 1 # 0.25 = 1 8 2 or P b received 1 l = 1 8 transmitted 0 Since, the 1 and 0 transmission is equiprobable: i.e., P ^ 0 h = P ^1 h = 1 2 Hence bit error rate (BER) is BER 0 received received 1 P 1 = Pb l P 0 + P b transmitted 0l ^ h transmitted 1 ^ h = 0+1 #1 8 2 1 = 16
8.6
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (C) is correct. For raised cosine spectrum transmission bandwidth is given as a " Roll of factor BT = W (1 + a) BT = Rb (1 + a) Rb " Maximum signaling rate 2
Option (B) is correct. The optimum threshold is the threshold value for transmission as obtained at the intersection of two pdf. From the shown pdf. We obtain at the intersection (transmitted, received) = b 4 , 1 l 5 5 we can obtain the intersection by solving the two linear eqs pdf of received bit 0 x+y = 1 y = 0.5 x pdf of received bit 1 2 4 Hence for threshold = , we have 5 BER = P b received 1 l P ^0 h + P b received 0 l P ^1 h transmitted 0 transmitted 1 = b1 # 1 # 1l# 1 +b1 # 4 # 1l# 1 2 5 2 2 2 5 5 2 = 1 <(BER for threshold = 1) 20 Hence, optimum threshold is 4 5 Option (A) is correct. The mean square value of a stationary process equals the total area under the graph of power spectral density, that is E [X 2 (t)] = or, or,
Option (D) is correct. Entropy function of a discrete memory less system is given as H =
N1 k=0
1 / P log b P l
k k
where Pk is probability of symbol Sk . For first two symbols probability is same, so H = P1 log b 1 l + P2 log b 1 l + Pk log b 1 l P1 P2 Pk k=3
N1
N1 k=3
/ P log P o
k k
/ P log P o
k
(P1 = P2 = P)
N1 k=3
/ P log P G
k k
By comparing,
8.10
8.7
Option (B) is correct. Probability density function of uniformly distributed variables X and Y is shown as
#S
3 3
(f ) df
3 X
E [X 2 (t)] = 1 2p
#S
3
(w) dw
3 E [X 2 (t)] = 2 # 1 SX (w) dw (Since the PSD is even) 2p 0 = 1 [area under the triangle + integration of delta function] p
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 200
Since X and Y are independent. P &[max (x, y)] < 1 0 2 PbX < 1 l 2 Similarly for Y : P bY < 1 l 2 So P &[max (x, y)] < 1 0 2
where 0 # t # T , E is the transmitted energy per bit. General function of local oscillator 2 sin (w t), 0 # t < T f1 (t) = c T But here local oscillator is ahead with 45c. so, 2 sin (w t + 45c) f1 (t) = c T The coordinates of message points are s11 = = = = = 1 T
# s (t) f (t) dt
0 1 1
Alternate Method:
From the given data since random variables X and Y lies in the interval [ 1, 1] as from the figure X , Y lies in the region of the square ABCD .
2E sin w t c T
T 0 c
2 sin (w t + 45c) dt c T
c
2E T 2E T E
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
s21 =
E 2
Now here the two message points are s11 and s21 . The error at the receiver will be considered. When : (i) s11 is transmitted and s21 received (ii) s21 is transmitted and s11 received So, probability for the 1st case will be as : P b s21 received l = P (X < 0) (as shown in diagram) s11 transmitted = P _ E/2 + N < 0i = P _N <  E/2 i Taking the Gaussian distribution as shown below :
8.11
Probability for max 6X, Y @ < 1/2 : The points for max 6X, Y @ < 1/2 will be inside the region of square AEFG . So, P &max 6X, Y @ < 1 0 = Area of 4AEFG 2 Area of square ABCD 3 3 #2 2 = = 9 2#2 16 Option (B) is correct. In a coherent binary PSK system, the pair of signals s1 (t) and s2 (t) used to represent binary system 1 and 0 respectively. s1 (t) = 2E sin wc t T s2 (t) = 2E sin wc t T
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 201
Note: For phase lead compensator zero is nearer to the origin as compared to pole, so option (C) can not be true.
8.15
Option (A) is correct. f = tan1 a w k  tan1 a w k a b 1/a 1/b df = =0 2 2 dw 1 +awk 1 +awk a b 1 + w2 = 1 + 1 w2 a ab2 b b a2 1  1 = w2 1  1 a b ab b a b l w = ab = 1 # 2 = 2 rad/ sec
# #
3 0
3
2p N 0 2 2 1 e `x + NE/2 j dx pN 0
0
e
`x + E/2 j
2N 0 /2
dx
x + E/2 =t N 0 /2 dx = N 0 dt 2
3 E/N 0
1 e t2 dt Q c 2p
2
E N0 m
8.16
where Q is error function. Since symbols are equiprobable in the 2 nd case So, P b s11 received l = Q c E m N0 s21 transmitted So the average probability of error = 1 ;P b s21 received l + P b s11 received lE 2 s11 transmitted s21 transmitted = 1 =Q c 2
8.12 8.13
Option (D) is correct. Quantized 4 level require 2 bit representation i.e. for one sample 2 bit are required. Since 2 sample per second are transmitted we require 4 bit to be transmitted per second.
E +Q c N0 m
E =Q c N 0 mG
E N0 m
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option ( ) is correct. Option (B) is correct. General equation of FM and PM waves are given by fFM (t) = Ac cos ;wc t + 2pk f
8.17
# m (t) dtE
0
fPM (t) = Ac cos [wc t + k p m (t)] For same maximum phase deviation. k p [m (t)] max = 2pk f ; m (t) dtE
#
0
max
# m (t) dt
0
8.18
So,
8.14
Option (A) is correct. jw + a GC (s) = s + a = s+b jw + b Phase lead angle f = tan1 a w k  tan1 a w k a b Jw  wN 1 K a b O = tan1 w (b  a) f = tan c ab + w 2 m 2 K O K1 + w O ab P L For phaselead compensation f > 0 ba > 0 b >a
8.19
Option (B) is correct. Highest frequency component in m (t) is fm = 4000p/2p = 2000 Hz Carrier frequency fC = 1 MHz For Envelope detector condition 1/fC << RC << 1/fm 1 s << RC << 0.5 ms
8.20
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 202
Where m < 1, for no over modulation. In option (C) x (t) = AC :1 + 1 m (t)D cos (2pfC t) 4 Thus m = 1 < 1 and this is a conventional AMsignal without over4 modulation
8.23
Now
d = r +r d2 = 2r 12
2 1
2 1
r1 = d/ 2 = 0.707d
8.24
Option (C) is correct. Impulse response of the matched filter is given by h (t) = S (T  t)
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
q = 2p = 2p = p 8 4 M Applying Cooine law we have d2 = r 22 + r 22  2r 22 cos p 4 or
8.21
8.25
Option (B) is correct. Let response of LPF filters 1, H (f ) = * 0, Noise variance (power) is given as f < 1 MHz elsewhere
= 2r 22  2r 22 1/ 2 = (2 d r2 = = 1.3065d 2 2
2 ) r 22
P = s2 =
#0
fo
2 H (f ) No df = 22 (given) a
Option (D) is correct. Here Pe for 4 PSK and 8 PSK is same because Pe depends on d . Since Pe is same, d is same for 4 PSK and 8 PSK. or
8.26
#0
1 # 106
Additional Power SNR = (SNR) 2  (SNR) 1 = 10 log b ES2 l  10 log b ES1 l No No = 10 log b ES2 l ES1
2 = 10 log a r2 k & 20 log a r2 k = 20 log 1.3065d r1 r1 0.707d
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Pe = 1 [P (0/1) + P (1/0)] 2 P (0/1) =
# 3 0.5e a n  a dn = 0.5e10
= 0.5e10
a/2
Pe = 0.5e10
8.27
Option (C) is correct. Conventional AM signal is given by x (t) = AC [1 + mm (t)] cos (2pfC t)
Option (C) is correct. S (t) = sin c (500t) sin c (700t) S (f ) is convolution of two signals whose spectrum covers f 1 = 250 Hz
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 203
and f 2 = 350 Hz . So convolution extends f = 25 + 350 = 600 Hz Nyquist sampling rate N = 2f = 2 # 600 = 1200 Hz
8.28
X2 = Sxi2 pi (x) = 1 # 0.1 + 4 # 0.2 + 9 # 0.4 + 16 # 0.2 + 25 # 0.1 = 0.1 + 0.8 + 3.6 + 3.2 + 2.5 = 10.2 Variance
8.32
Option (D) is correct. For the given system, output is written as y (t) = d [x (t) + x (t  0.5)] dt dx (t) dx (t  0.5) + y (t) = dt dt Taking Laplace on both sides of above equation Y (s) = sX (s) + se0.5s X (s) Y (s) = s (1 + e0.5s) H (s) = X (s) H (f ) = jf (1 + e0.5 # 2pf ) = jf (1 + e pf ) Power spectral density of output SY (f ) = H (f ) 2 SX (f ) = f 2 (1 + e pf ) 2 SX (f ) For SY (f ) = 0 , 1 + e pf = 0 f = (2n + 1) f0 or f0 = 1 KHz
Option (C) is correct. m (t) = 1 cos w1 t  1 sin w2 t 2 2 Modulation index sAM (t) = [1 + m (t)] cos wc t m (t) max = Vc 2 2 m = `1j +`1j = 1 2 2 2 2 h = m # 100% m2 + 2
8.29
Option (C) is correct. cos (2pfm t) cos (2pfc t) cos (2pfc t) cos [2p (fc + fm) t] [1 + cos (2pfm t) cos (2pfc t)] $ $ $ $ DSB suppressed carrier Carrier Only USB Only USB with carrier
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
1 2 2j 1 2 + 2j
# 100% = 20%
8.30
Option (C) is correct. We have p (X = 0) = p (Y = 0) = 1 2 p (X = 1) = p (Y = 1) = 1 4 p (X = 2) = p (Y = 2) = 1 4 Let and Now X+Y = 2 $ A XY = 0 $ B P (X + Y = 2 X  Y = 0) = P (A + B) P (B)
As S >> 1 N
C2 . B log2 ` 2S j N
8.34
Event P (A + B) happen when X + Y = 2 and X  Y = 0 . It is only the case when X = 1 and Y = 1. Thus P (A + B) = 1 # 1 = 1 4 4 16 Now event P (B) happen when X  Y = 0 It occurs when X = Y , i.e. X = 0 and Y = 0 or X = 1 and Y = 1 or X = 2 and Y = 2 Thus P (B) = 1 # 1 + 1 # 1 + 1 # 1 = 6 2 2 4 4 4 4 16 1/16 P (A + B) Now = =1 6 P (B) 6/16
8.31
Option (C) is correct. We have SNR = 1.76 + 6n or 43.5 = 1.76 + 6n 6n = 43.5 + 1.76 6n = 41.74 $ n . 7 No. of quantization level is 27 = 128 Step size required is = VH  VL = 128
. B log2 2 + B log2 S . B + C1 N
5  ( 5) = 10 128 128
= .078125 . .0667
8.35
Option (B) is correct. For positive values step size s+ = 0.05 V For negative value step size s = 0.1 V No. of quantization in + ive is = 5 = 5 = 100 s+ 0.05 Thus 2n + = 100 $ n+ = 7 No. of quantization in  ve
Option (B) is correct. The mean is X = Sxi pi (x) = 1 # 0.1 + 2 # 0.2 + 3 # 0.4 + 4 # 0.2 + 5 # 0.1 = 0.1 + 0.4 + 1.2 + 0.8 + 0.5 = 3.0
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 204
Q1 = 5 = 5 = 50 s0.1 Thus 2n = 50 $ n  = 6

= 1 [2W + 2W + 4W + 6W] = 7W 2
8.42
Option (B) is correct. We have qi = 2p105 t + 5 sin (2p1500t) + 7.5 sin (2p1000t) wi = dqi = 2p105 + 10p1500 cos (2p1500t) + 15p1000 cos (2p1000t) dt Maximum frequency deviation is 3 wmax = 2p (5 # 1500 + 7.5 # 1000) 3 fmax = 15000 3f Modulation index is = max = 15000 = 10 fm 1500
Best
8.36
S ` N j0 = 43.76 dB
Option (A) is correct. We have xAM (t) = Ac cos wc + 2 cos wm t cos wc t = AC c1 + 2 cos wm t m cos wc t Ac
8.43 8.44
Option (C) is correct. Option (B) is correct. fm = 4 KHz fs = 2fm = 8 kHz Bit Rate Rb = nfs = 8 # 8 = 64 kbps The minimum transmission bandwidth is BW = Rb = 32 kHz 2
For demodulation by envelope demodulator modulation index must be less than or equal to 1. 2 #1 Thus Ac Ac $ 2 Hence minimum value of Ac = 2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
8.37
8.45
= 1.76 + 6 # 8 = 49.76 dB
We have n = 8
8.46
Option (A) is correct. CDF is the integration of PDF. Plot in option (A) is the integration of plot given in question. Option (A) is correct. The entropy is H = Since
i=1
8.38
1 / pi log2 p i
Noise \ 12 L To reduce quantization noise by factor 4, quantization level must be two times i.e. 2L . Now L = 2n = 28 = 256 Thus 2L = 512 As
8.47
bits
p1 = p2 = ... = pn = 1 n H =
i=1
Option (C) is correct. Autocorrelation is even function. Option (B) is correct. Power spectral density is non negative. Thus it is always zero or greater than zero. Option (A) is correct. The variance of a random variable x is given by E [X2]  E2 [X] Option (A) is correct.
8.48
1 log n = log n /n
8.49
8.39
Option (C) is correct. PSD of noise is N0 = K 2 fc = 1 2pRC Output noise power is = N0 = c N0 m 1 = Kpfc 4RC 2 2RC ...(1)
8.50
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
A Hilbert transformer is a nonlinear system.
8.51
8.40
Option (D) is correct. At receiving end if we get two zero or three zero then its error. Let p be the probability of 1 bit error, the probability that transmitted bit error is = Three zero + two zero and single one = 3 C3 p3 + 3C2 p2 (1  p) = p3 + p2 (1  p)
Option (D) is correct. Slope overload distortion can be reduced by increasing the step size 3 $ slope of x (t) Ts Option (C) is correct. We have p (t) = sin (4pWt) 4pWt (1  16W2 t2)
8.52
8.41
at t = 1 it is 0 form. Thus applying L' Hospital rule 0 4W 4pW cos (4pWt) p( ) = 4pW [1  48W2 t2]
1 4W
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 205
6 Rb max = RC = 1.2288 # 10 = 12.288 # 103 bps Gmin 100
8.57
=
8.53
Option (B) is correct. Energy of constellation 1 is Eg1 2 a) 2 + ( 2 a) 2 + ( 2 2 a) 2 = 2a2 + 2a2 + 2a2 + 8a2 = 16a2 Energy of constellation 2 is = (0) + (2 a) + (Eg2 = a2 + a2 + a2 + a2 = 4a2 2 E Ratio = g1 = 16a =4 Eg2 4a2
2 2
Here
8.58
Option (A) is correct. Noise Power is same for both which is N0 . 2 Thus probability of error will be lower for the constellation 1 as it has higher signal energy.
Y2 (f) = M1 (f) c e
j 2p B
+ e j 2 p B m 2
 e j2pB m 2
8.59
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Option (*) is correct. Option (B) is correct. A LPF will not produce phase distortion if phase varies linearly with frequency. i.e. f (w) \ w f (w) = kw
8.54
Option (C) is correct. By Binomial distribution the probability of error is pe = Cr p (1  p) Probability of at most one error = Probability of no error + Probability of one error = n C0 p0 (1  p) n  0 + n C1 p1 (1  p) n  1 = (1  p) n + np (1  p) n  1
n r nr
8.62
Option (B) is correct. Let m (t) is a low pass signal, whose frequency spectra is shown below
8.55
Option (B) is correct. Bandwidth allocated for 1 Channel = 5 M Hz Average bandwidth for 1 Channel 5 = 1 MHz 5 Total Number of Simultaneously Channel = 1M # 8 = 40 Channel 200k Option (A) is correct. Chip Rate RC = 1.2288 # 106 chips/sec Data Rate Rb = RC G Since the processing gain G must be at least 100, thus for Gmin we get Fourier transform of g (t) 1 d (f  20 # 103 k) 0.5 # 104 k = 3 Spectrum of G (f ) is shown below G (t) =
3
8.56
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 206
= 0.25 log2 4 + 0.25 log2 4 + 0.5 log2 2 = 0.5 + 0.5 + 1 = 3 bits/symbol 2 2 Average bit rate Rb = 3000 symbol/sec = Rb H = 3 # 3000 = 4500 bits/sec 2
Now when m (t) is sampled with above signal the spectrum of sampled signal will look like.
8.67
Option (A) is correct. The diagonal clipping in AM using envelop detector can be avoided if 1 << RC < 1 wc W 1 $ Wm sin Wt But from RC 1 + m cos Wt We can say that RC depends on W , thus RC < 1 W
When sampled signal is passed through a LP filter of BW 1 kHz, only m (t) will remain.
8.63
8.68 8.69
Option (B) is correct. Option (B) is correct. When 3 /2 is added to y (t) then signal will move to next quantization level. Otherwise if they have step size less than 3 then they will be 2 on the same quantization level. Option (C) is correct. After the SSB modulation the frequency of signal will be fc  fm i.e. 1000  10 kHz . 1000 kHz The bandwidth of FM is BW = 2 (b + 1) 3 f For NBFMb << 1, thus BWNBFM . 2 3 f = 2 (109  106) . 2 # 109
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
The highest frequency signal in x (t) is 1000 # 3 = 3 kHz if expression is expanded. Thus minimum frequency requirement is f = 2 # 3 # 103 = 6 # 103 Hz
8.64
8.70
Option (B) is correct. We have x (t) = 125t [u (t)  u (t  1)] + (250  125t) [u (t  1)  u (t  2)] The slope of expression x (t) is 125 and sampling frequency fs is 32 # 1000 samples/sec. Let 3 be the step size, then to avoid slope overload 3 $ slope x (t) Ts 3 fc $ slope x (t) 3# 32000 $ 125 3 $ 125 32000 3 = 2 8
8.71
Option (A) is correct. We have p (t) = u (t)  u (t  1) g (t) = p (t)* p (t) s (t) = g (t)  d (t  2)* g (t) = g (t)  g (t  2) All signal are shown in figure below :
8.65
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
The impulse response of matched filter is h (t) = s (T  t) = s (1  t) Here T is the time where output SNR is maximum.
8.72
1 / p1 log2 p 1
bits/symbol
= p1 log2 1 + p2 log2 1 + p3 log2 1 p1 p2 p3 = 0.25 log2 1 + 0.25 log2 1 + 0.5 log2 1 0.25 0.25 0.5
Option (A) is correct. We have xAM (t) = 10 [P (t) + 0.5g (t)] cos wc t where p (t) = u (t)  u (t  1) and g (t) = r (t)  2r (t  1) + r (t  2) For desired interval 0 # t # 1, p (t) = 1 and g (t) = t , Thus we have, xAM (t) = 100 (1  0.5t) cos wc t
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 207
The transfer function of matched filter is h (t) = x (t  t) = x (2  t) The output of matched filter is the convolution of x (t) and h (t) as shown below
Option (A) is correct. We know that SYY (w) = H (w) 2 .SXX (w) Now SYY (w) = 16 2 and SXX (w) = 1 white noise 16 + w Thus or or 16 = H (w) 2 16 + w2 4 H (w) = 16 + w2 H (s) = 4 4+s
Option (C) is correct. We have xAM (t) = 10 (1 + 0.5 sin 2pfm t) cos 2pfc t The modulation index is 0.5 Carrier power Side band power Side band power Pc = Ps = (10) 2 = 50 2 (10) 2 = 50 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
8.76
Option (B) is correct. Mean noise power = Area under the PSD curve = 4 ; 1 # B # No E = BNo 2 2
The ratio of average sideband power to mean noise power is Side Band Power = 6.25 = 25 Noise Power N0 B 4No B {1 + km (t)} A sin (wc t) dm (t) Asin (wc t) A sin {cos t + km (t)} t A sin [wc + k] t 3 m (t) dt $ Amplitude modulation $ DSBSC modulation $ Phase Modulation $ Frequency Modulation
Option (C) is correct. As the area under pdf curve must be unity 1 (4 # k) = 1 $ k = 1 2 2 Now mean square value is
2 sv =
8.77
# 3 # 0 #
4
+3
v2 p (v) dv as p (v) = 1 v 8
v2 ` v j dv 8 3 4 v = c 8 m dv = 8 0 =
8.83
8.78
Option (C) is correct. VSB $ fm + fc DSB  SC $ 2fm SSB $ fm AM $ 2fm Thus SSB has minimum bandwidth and it require minimum power.
If phase deviation remain same and modulating frequency is changed ' = 2 (10 + 1) 2 = 44 kHz BW = 2 (b + 1) fm
8.84
8.79
Option (A) is correct. Let x (t) be the input signal where x (t) = cos (cos t + b1 cos wm t) cos (2wc t + 2b1 cos wm t) y (t) = x2 (t) = 1 + 2 2 3f Here = 90 = 18 b = 2b1 and b1 = fm 5 BW = 2 (b + 1) fm = 2 (2 # 18 + 1) # 5 = 370 kHz Option (C) is correct.
Option (B) is correct. As the area under pdf curve must be unity and all three region are equivaprobable. Thus are under each region must be 1 3. 2a # 1 = 1 $ a = 2 3 3 4 Option (A) is correct. Nq =
8.85
# a
+a
x2 p (x) dx = 2
# 0
a 2
8.80
Substituting a = 2 we have 3 Nq = 4 81
3 a 3 x $ 1 dx = 1 ; x E = a 2 3 0 6 4
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
8.86
Page 208
8.90
Option (D) is correct. F (x1 # X < x2) = p (X = x2)  P (X = x1) or P (X = 1) = P (X = 1+)  P (X = 1 ) = 0.55  0.25 = 0.30
When word length is 8 2#8 16 S ` N jN = 8 = 2 = 2 S 16 ^ N hN = 8 Now = 212 = 2 4 = 16 S ^ N hN = 6 2 Thus it improves by a factor of 16.
8.87
8.91
Option (A) is correct. The SNR at transmitter is SNRtr = Ptr NB 10  3 = 109 10  20 # 100 # 106 In dB SNRtr = 10 log 109 = 90 dB Cable Loss = 40 db At receiver after cable loss we have SNRRc = 90  40 = 50 dB
Option (B) is correct. Carrier frequency Modulating frequency For an envelope detector
fc = 1 # 106 Hz fm = 2 # 103 Hz 2pfc > 1 > 2pfm Rc 1 < RC < 1 2pfc 2pfm
8.92
Option (B) is correct. The impulse response of matched filter is h (t) = x (T  t) Since here T = 4 , thus h (t) = x (4  t) The graph of h (t) is as shown below.
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
1 < RC < 1 2pfc 2pfm 1 1 < RC < 6 2p10 2 # 103 1.59 # 10  7 < RC < 7.96 # 10  5 so, 20 msec sec best lies in this interval.
8.88
From graph it may be easily seen that slope between 3 < t < 4 is  1.
8.93
Option (B) is correct. SAM (t) = Ac [1 + 0.1 cos wm t] cos wm t sNBFM (t) = Ac cos [wc t + 0.1 sin wm t] s (t) = SAM (t) + SNB fm (t) = Ac [1 + 0.1 cos wm t] cos wc t + Ac cos (wc t + 0.1 sin wm t) = Ac cos wc t + Ac 0.1 cos wm t cos wc t + Ac cos wc t cos (0.1 sin wm t)  Ac sin wc t. sin (0.1 sin wm t) As 0.1 sin wm t , + 0.1 to  0.1 so, cos (0.1 sin wm t) . 1 As when q is small cos q . 1 and sin q , q , thus sin (0.1 sin wm t) = 0.1 sincos wc t cos wm t + Ac cos wc t  Ac 0.1 sin wm t sin wc t = 2Ac cos wc t + 0.1Ac cos (wc + wm) t 1 44 2 44 3 1 4444 4 2 4444 43 cosec
USB
8.94
Option (C) is correct. The required bandwidth of M array PSK is BW = 2Rb n where 2n = M and Rb is bit rate For BPSK, M = 2 = 2n $ n = 1 Thus B1 = 2Rb = 2 # 10 = 20 kHz 1 For QPSK, Thus M = 4 = 2n $ n = 2 B2 = 2Rb = 10 kHz 2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Option (C) is correct. We have MHz fc = 100 MHz = 100 # 106 and fm = 1
= 1 # 106 The output of balanced modulator is VBM (t) = [cos wc t][ cos wc t] = 1 [cos (wc + wm) t + cos (wc  wm) t] 2 If VBM (t) is passed through HPF of cut off frequency fH = 100 # 106 , then only (wc + wm) passes and output of HPF is VHP (t) = 1 cos (wc + wm) t 2
Option (A) is correct. Consecutive pulses are of same polarity when modulator is in slope overload. Consecutive pulses are of opposite polarity when the input is constant.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 209
Now
Probability of error of 1 P (0 # X # 0.2) = 0.2 Probability of error of 0 : P (0.2 # X # 0.25) = 0.05 # 2 = 0.1 Average error = P (0 # X # 0.2) + P (0.2 # X # 0.25) 2 = 0.2 + 0.1 = 0.15 0
= 1 cos [2p100 # 106 + 2p # 1 # 106 t] + sin (2p # 100 # 106) t 2 = 1 cos [2p108 + 2p106 t] + sin (2p108) t 2 = 1 [cos (2p108 t) t cos (2p106 t)]  sin [2p108 t sin (2p106 t) + sin 2p108 t] 2
8.97
= 1 cos (2p106 t) cos 2p108 t + `1  1 sin 2p106 t j sin 2p108 t 2 2 This signal is in form = A cos 2p108 t + B sin 2p108 t Now
# 3 (x  xq) 2 f (x) dx
(x  xq) 2 f (x) dx # 0
1
GATE
# 0
(x  0) 2 f (x) dx +
Fully Revised
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Every Unit Contain All Questions of Last 15 Year Papers Purchase from Nodia Online Store at Maximum Discount with free Shipping The envelope of this signal is = = A2 + B2 or
8.98
s2 = 0.039 RMS =
s2 =
0.039 = 0.198
Option (C) is correct. FM DM PSK PCM $ Capture effect $ Slope over load $ Matched filter $ m  law
1 cos2 (2p106 t) + 1 + 1 sin2 (2p106 t)  sin (2p106 t) 4 4 1 + 1  sin (2p106 t) = 4 5  sin (2p106 t) = 4
8.99
8.95
Option (A) is correct. s (t) = A cos [2p10 # 10 t] + A cos [2p10.1 # 103 t] 1 Here T1 = = 100m sec 10 # 103 1 and = 99m sec T2 = 10.1 # 103 Period of added signal will be LCM [T1, T2] Thus T = LCM [100, 99] = 9900m sec Thus frequency f = 1 = 0.1 kHz 9900m
3
Option (C) is correct. Since fs = 2fm , the signal frequency and sampling frequency are as follows fm1 = 1200 Hz $ 2400 samples per sec fm2 = 600 Hz $ 1200 samples per sec fm3 = 600 Hz $ 1200 samples per sec Thus by time division multiplexing total 4800 samples per second will be sent. Since each sample require 12 bit, total 4800 # 12 bits per second will be sent Thus bit rate Rb = 4800 # 12 = 57.6 kbps
8.100
8.96
Option (A) is correct. The pdf of transmission of 0 and 1 will be as shown below :
Option (B) is correct. The input signal X (f) has the peak at 1 kHz and  1 kHz. After balanced modulator the output will have peak at fc ! 1 kHz i.e. : 10 ! 1 $ 11 and 9 kHz 10 ! ( 1) $ 9 and 11 kHz 9 kHz will be filtered out by HPF of 10 kHz. Thus 11 kHz will remain. After passing through 13 kHz balanced modulator signal will have 13 ! 11 kHz signal i.e. 2 and 24 kHz. Thus peak of Y (f) are at 2 kHz and 24 kHz.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
8.101
Page 210
8.106
Option (A) is correct. The input is a coherent detector is DSB  SC signal plus noise. The noise at the detector output is the inphase component as the quadrature component nq (t) of the noise n (t) is completely rejected by the detector. Option (C) is correct. The noise at the input to an ideal frequency detector is white. The PSD of noise at the output is parabolic Option (B) is correct. We have Pe = 1 erfc c 2 Ed 2h m
Option (C) is correct. W = YZ E [W2] = E [Y  Z] 2 = E [Y2] + E [Z2]  2E [YZ] 2 = sw E [X2 (t)] = Rx (10) = 4 [e  0.2 0 + 1] = 4 [1 + 1] = 8 E [Y2] = E [X2 (2)] = 8 E [Z2] = E [X2 (4)] = 8 E [YZ] = RXX (2) = 4 [e0.2 (4  2) + 1] = 6.68 2 = 8 + 8  2 # 6.68 = 2.64 E [W2] = sw
We have
8.102
8.103
8.107
Option (D) is correct. The pdf of Z will be convolution of pdf of X and pdf of Y as shown below. Now p [Z # z] = p [ Z #  2] =
= 12 # 106 V2 Option (D) is correct. The frequency of pulse train is f 1 3 = 1 k Hz 10 The Fourier Series coefficient of given pulse train is T /2 Cn = 1 Aejnw t dt To T /2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
= Area [z #  2] = 1 # 1 #1 = 1 2 6 12
# #
= 1 To =
To /6
To /6
Aejhw t dt
o o o o
T /6 A [ejw t] T /6 To ( jhwo) A = (ejw t  e jhw T /6) ( j2pn) = A (e jhp/3  ejhp/3) j2pn or Cn = A sin ` np j pn 3 From Cn it may be easily seen that 1, 2, 4, 5, 7, harmonics are present and 0, 3, 6, 9,.. are absent. Thus p (t) has 1 kHz, 2 kHz, 4 kHz, 5 kHz, 7 kHz,... frequency component and 3 kHz, 6 kHz.. are absent. The signal x (t) has the frequency components 0.4 kHz and 0.7 kHz. The sampled signal of x (t) i.e. x (t)* p (t) will have 1 ! 0.4 and 1 ! 0.7 kHz 2 ! 0.4 and 2 ! 0.7 kHz 4 ! 0.4 and 4 ! 0.7 kHz
o o o
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
8.105
Option (D) is correct. We have or mean Now RXX (t) = 4 (e  0.2 t + 1) RXX (0) = 4 (e  0.2 0 + 1) = 8 = s2 s =2 2 m =0 P (x # 1) = Fx (1) = 1  Qc Given
8.109
Thus in range of 2.5 kHz to 3.5 kHz the frequency present is 2 + 0.7 = 2.7 kHz 4  0.7 = 3.3 kHz Option (C) is correct.
1 vi = Ac cos (2pfc t) + m (t) v0 = ao vi + avi3 v0 ' ' = a0 [Ac cos (2pfc' t) + m (t)] 3 cos (2pfc' t) + m (t)] + a1 [Ac
Xm at x = 1 s m = 1  Qc 1  0 m = 1  Qc 1 m 2 2 2 2
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 211
+ m (t)]
8.117
'2 + 3a1 Ac ;
Option (B) is correct. Bit Rate = 8k # 8 = 64 kbps (SNR)q = 1.76 + 6.02n dB = 1.76 + 6.02 # 8 = 49.8 dB Option (C) is correct. The frequency of message signal is fc = 1000 kHz 1 The frequency of message signal is 1 = 10 kHz fm = 100 # 10  6 Here message signal is symmetrical square wave whose FS has only odd harmonics i.e. 10 kHz, 30 kHz 50 kHz. Modulated signal contain fc ! fm frequency component. Thus modulated signal has fc ! fm = (1000 ! 10) kH = 1010 kHz, 990 kHz fc ! 3fm = (1000 ! 10) kH = 1030 kHz, 970 kHz
' = 3a1 Ac cos (2pfc' t) m2 (t) + m3 (t) ' cos 4pf t The term 3a1 Ac ( 2 ) m (t) is a DSBSC signal having carrier frequency 1. MHz. Thus 2fc' = 1 MHz or fc' = 0.5 MHz
' c
8.118
8.110
or
8.111
Option (D) is correct. AM Band width = 2fm Peak frequency deviation = 3 (2fm) = 6fm 6f Modulation index b = m = 6 fm xFM (t) = Ac
6 3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
wc + nwm = 2p (1008 # 10 ) 2p10 + n4p # 103 = 2p (1008 # 103), n = 4 Thus coefficient = 5J4 (6)
8.112
Option (B) is correct. Ring modulation $ Generation of DSB  SC VCO $ Generation of FM Foster seely discriminator $ Demodulation of fm mixer $ frequency conversion Option (A) is correct. fmax = 1650 + 450 = 2100 kHz fmin = 550 + 450 = 1000 kHz 1 or f = 2p LC frequency is minimum, capacitance will be maximum f2 = (2.1) 2 R = Cmax = max 2 Cmin fmin R = 4.41 fi = fc + 2fIF = 700 + 2 (455) = 1600 kHz Eb = 10  6 wattsec No = 10  5 W/Hz o (SNR) matched filler = E = N
o
/ d (t  nTs)
+3
8.113
x (t) = 10 cos (8p # 103) t Ts = 100m sec The cut off fc of LPF is 5 kHz We know that for the output of filter x (t) y (t) = Ts 10 cos (8p # 103) t # 5 # 10  6 100 # 10  6 = 5 # 10  1 cos (8p # 103) t =
8.120
or
8.114
Option (C) is correct. Transmitted frequencies in coherent BFSK should be integral of bit rate 8 kHz. Option (B) is correct. For best reception, if transmitting waves are vertically polarized, then receiver should also be vertically polarized i.e. transmitter and receiver must be in same polarization. Option (D) is correct. s (t) = cos 2p (2 # 106 t + 30 sin 150t + 40 cos 150t) = cos {4p106 t + 100p sin (150t + q)} Angle modulated signal is s (t) = A cos {wc t + b sin (wm t + q)} Comparing with angle modulated signal we get Phase deviations b = 100p Frequency deviations 3 f = bfm = 100p # 150 = 7.5 kHz 2p
8.121
8.122
8.115
Option (B) is correct. 3 fs 2pfm This is satisfied with Em = 1.5 V and fm = 4 kHz For slopeoverload to take place Em $
8.116
Option (A) is correct. If s " carrier synchronization at receiver r " represents bandwidth efficiency
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
8.126 8.123
Page 212
Option (*) is correct. We have m (t) s (t) = y1 (t) 2 sin (2pt) cos (200pt) = t sin (202pt)  sin (198pt) = t y1 (t) + n (t) = y2 (t) = sin 202pt  sin 198pt + sin 199pt t t y2 (t) s (t) = u (t)
Option (A) is correct. An ideal low  pass filter with appropriate bandwidth fm is used to recover the signal which is sampled at nyquist rate 2fm . Option (A) is correct. For any PDF the probability at mean is 1 . Here given PDF is 2 Gaussian random variable and X = 4 is mean.
8.127
8.128
Option (C) is correct. We require 6 bit for 64 intensity levels because 64 = 26 Data Rate = Frames per second # pixels per frame # bits per pixel = 625 # 400 # 400 # 6 = 600 Mbps sec Option (C) is correct. We have sin c (700t) + sin c (500t) = sin (700pt) sin (500pt) + 700pt 500pt
8.129
= 1 [sin (402pt) + sin (2pt)  {sin (398pt)  sin (2pt)} 2 + sin (399pt)  sin (pt)]
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
After filtering sin (2pt) + sin (2pt)  sin (pt) y (t) = 2t sin (2pt) + 2 sin (0.5t) cos (1.5pt) = 2t sin sin . t 2 p 0 5pt cos 1.5pt = + t 2t
8.124
Here the maximum frequency component is 2pfm = 700p i.e. fm = 350 Hz Thus Nyquist rate fs = 2fm = 2 (350) = 700 Hz Thus sampling interval = 1 sec 700
8.130
Option (D) is correct. Probability of error = p Probability of no error = q = (1  p) Probability for at most one bit error = Probability of no bit error + probability of 1 bit error = (1  p) n + np (1  p) n  1
8.131
Sg (w) dw # 3 aG (w)
kHz
After sampling signal will have fs ! fm frequency component i.e. 32 and 12 kHz At filter output only 8 kHz will be present as cutoff frequency is 15 kHz.
8.125
or
Option (A) is correct. d (n) = x (n)  x (n  1) E [d (n)] 2 = E [x (n)  x (n  1)] 2 or E [d (n)] 2 = E [x (n)] 2 + E [x (n  1)] 2  2E [x (n) x (n  1)] 2 2 2 or sd = sx + sx  2Rxx (1) 2 2 As we have been given sd = sx , therefore 10
2 sx 2 2 = sx + sx  2Rxx (1) 10 2 2Rxx (1) = 19 sx 10 Rxx = 19 = 0.95 2 20 sx
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Similarly
8.132
Pag = a2 Pg
as k = 1
8.133
Option (C) is correct. The envelope of the input signal is [1 + ka m (t)] that will be output of envelope detector. Option (D) is correct. Frequency Range for satellite communication is 1 GHz to 30 GHz, Option (B) is correct. Waveform will be orthogonal when each bit contains integer number of cycles of carrier. Bit rate Rb = HCF (f1, f2) = HCF (10k, 25k)
8.134
or or
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 213
8.141
= 5 kHz Tb = 1 = 1 = 0.2 msec = 200 m sec Rb 5k Pm = m2 (t) x (t) = m (t) cos wo t cos (wo t + q) m (t) [cos (2wo t + q) + cos q] 2 m (t) cos (2wo t + q) m (t) cos q = + 2 2 =
Option (B) is correct. Given function g (t) = 6 # 10 sin c (400t) ) 10 sin c3 (100t) Let g1 (t) = 6 # 10 4 sin c2 (400t) g2 (t) = (106) sin c3 (100t) We know that g1 (t) ) g2 (t) ? G1 (w) G2 (w) occupies minimum of Bandwidth of G1 (w) or G2 (w) Band width of G1 (w) = 2 # 400 = 800 rad/ sec or = 400 Hz Band width of G2 (w) = 3 # 100 = 300 rad/ sec or 150 Hz Sampling frequency = 2 # 150 = 300 Hz
4 2 6
m (t) cos q 2
8.142
Option (B) is correct. For a sinusoidal input SNR (dB) is PCM is obtained by following formulae.
Option (A) is correct. Hilbert transformer always adds  90c to the positive frequency component and 90c to the negative frequency component. Hilbert Trans form cos wt " sin wt sin wt " cos wt cos w1 t + sin w2 t " sin w1 t  cos w2 t x (t) = Ac cos {wc t + b sin wm t} y (t) = {x (t)} 3
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Thus
8.137
2 = Ac cos (3wc t + 3b sin wm t) + 3 cos (wc t + b sin wm t) Thus the fundamental frequency doesnt change but BW is three times. BW = 2 (3 f') = 2 (3 f # 3) = 3 MHz
8.138 8.139
Option (D) is correct. We know that matched filter output is given by g 0 (t) = t = T0
# g (l) g (T  t + l) dl at
3 3 0
Option (C) is correct. Option (C) is correct. This is Quadrature modulated signal. In QAM, two signals having bandwidth. B 1 & B 2 can be transmitted simultaneous over a bandwidth of (B 1 + B 2) Hz so B.W. = (15 + 10) = 25 kHz Option (B) is correct. A modulated signal can be expressed in terms of its inphase and quadrature component as S (t) = S1 (t) cos (2pfc t)  SQ (t) sin (2pfc t) Here S (t) at at = [e cpsDwt cos wc t  e sin Dwt sin wc t] m (t) = [eat cos Dwt] cos 2pfc t  [eat sin Dwt] sin 2pfc t = S1 (t) cos 2pfc t  SQ (t) sin 2pfc t Complex envelope of s (t) is S (t) = S1 (t) + jSQ (t) = eat cos Dwt + jeat sin Dwt = eat [cos Dwt + j sin Dwt] = exp ( at) exp (jDwt) m (t)
8.146
6g 0 (t)@max =
=
# g (l) g (l) dl = #
3 3
3
g 2 (t) dt
#
0
1 # 104
8.140
Option (B) is correct. Sampling rate must be equal to twice of maximum frequency. f s = 2 # 400 = 800 Hz Option (C) is correct. The amplitude spectrum of a gaussian pulse is also gaussian as shown in the fig. y 2 fY (y) = 1 exp c 2 m 2p
8.145
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 214
2#8 (SNR) 1 = 22 # 9 = 22 = 1 4 (SNR) 2 2 so SNR will increased by a factor of 4
8.149
Option (A) is correct. In flat top sampling an amplitude distortion is produced while reconstructing original signal x (t) from sampled signal s (t). High frequency of x (t) are mostly attenuated. This effect is known as aperture effect. Option (A) is correct. Carrier C (t) = cos (we t + q) Modulating signal = x (t) DSB  SC modulated signal = x (t) c (t) = x (t) cos (we t + q) envelope = x (t) Option (D) is correct. In Quadrature multiplexing two baseband signals can transmitted or modulated using I 4 phase & Quadrature carriers and its quite different form FDM & TDM. Option (A) is correct. Fourier transform perform a conversion from time domain to frequency domain for analysis purposes. Units remain same. Option (A) is correct. In PCM, SNR is depends an step size (i.e. signal amplitude) SNR can be improved by using smaller steps for smaller amplitude. This is obtained by compressing the signal. Option (C) is correct. Band width is same for BPSK and APSK(OOK) which is equal to twice of signal Bandwidth. Option (A) is correct. The spectral density of a real value random process symmetric about vertical axis so it has an even symmetry. Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. It is one of the advantage of bipolar signalling (AMI) that its spectrum has a dc null for binary data transmission PSD of bipolar signalling is
Auto correlation function is given by T/2 Rxx (t) = 1 x (t) x (t  t) dt T T/2 When x (t) is shifted to right (t > 0), x (t  t) will be shown as dotted line.
8.150
8.151
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
8.152
8.153
8.154
8.155
8.156 8.157
Rxx (t) = 1 T
T +t 2
A2 dt
T  +t 2
2 2 = A :T + T  tD = A :T  tD 2 T 2 T 2 (t) can be negative or positive, so generalizing above equations 2 Rxx (t) = A :T  t D T 2 Rxx (t) is a regular pulse of duration T .
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
8.147
Option (B) is correct. Selectivity refers to select a desired frequency while rejecting all others. In super heterodyne receiver selective is obtained partially by RF amplifier and mainly by IF amplifier. Option (C) is correct. In PCM, SNR a 22n so if bit increased from 8 to 9
8.158
8.148
Option (A) is correct. Probability Density function (PDF) of a random variable x defined as
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 215
Px (x) = so here
8.159
K =
1 ex /2 2p 1 2p
2
factor of 22 (n + 1)/n
8.165
Option (C) is correct. Here the highest frequency component in the spectrum is 1.5 kHz [at 2 kHz is not included in the spectrum] Minimum sampling freq. = 1.5 # 2 = 3 kHz Option (B) is correct. We need a high pass filter for receiving the pulses. Option (D) is correct. Power spectral density function of a signal g (t) is fourier transform of its auto correlation function Sg (w) Rg (t) here Sg (w) = sin c2 (f) so Rg (t) is a triangular pulse. f [triang.] = sin c2 (f)
F
Option (D) is correct. The auto correlation of energy signal is an even function. auto correlation function is gives as R (t) = put Let
# x (t) x (t + t) dt
3 3
8.160
R ( t) = # x (t) x (t  t) dt 3 tt = a dt = da
8.161
R ( t) =
change variable a " t
# x (a + t) x (a) da
3
R ( t) =
# x (t) x (t + t) dt = R (t)
3
8.162
Option (C) is correct. For a signal g (t), its matched filter response given as h (t) = g (T  t) so here g (t) is a rectangular pulse of duration T .
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
if we shift g ( t) for convolution y (t) increases first linearly then decreases to zero.
8.163
Option (C) is correct. The difference between incoming signal frequency (fc) and its image frequency (fc) is 2I f (which is large enough). The RF filter may provide poor selectivity against adjacent channels separated by a small frequency differences but it can provide reasonable selectivity against a station separated by 2I f . So it provides adequate suppression of image channel. Option (C) is correct. In PCM SNR is given by SNR = 3 22n 2 if no. of bits is increased from n to (n + 1) SNR will increase by a
8.164
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 9
ELECTROMAGNETICS
Page 216
9.5
2013
9.1
ONE MARK
p # 10 z tx  a tz h ej 3 V/m (D) 60c and E 0 ^a 2 vr is The expression for E p # 10 ^x  z h tx + a tz h ej 3 2 (A) 0.23 E 0 ^a V/m 2
4 4
v ^r v : dl v vh. The closed loop line integral A Consider a vector field A can be expressed as vh : ds v over the closed surface bounded by the loop (A) ^d # A vh dv over the closed volume bounded by the loop (B) ^d : A
p # 10 z tx + a tz h e j 3 V/m (B)  E 0 ^a 2
4
(C) (D)
9.2
## ### vh dv over the open volume bounded by the loop ### ^d : A vh : ds v over the open surface bounded by the loop ## ^d # A
2012
ONE MARK
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C) 1
9.3
A plane wave propagating in air with E = (8ax + 6ay + 5az ) e j (wt + 3x  4y) V/m is incident on a perfectly conducting slab positioned at x # 0 . The E field of the reflected wave is (A) ( 8ax  6ay  5az ) e j (wt + 3x + 4y) V/m (B) ( 8ax + 6ay  5az ) e j (wt + 3x + 4y) V/m (C) ( 8ax  6ay  5az ) e j (wt  3x  4y) V/m (D) ( 8ax + 6ay  5az ) e j (wt  3x  4y) V/m

(D) 3
9.7
The return loss of a device is found to be 20 dB. The voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR) and magnitude of reflection coefficient are respectively (A) 1.22 and 0.1 (B) 0.81 and 0.1 (C) 1.22 and 0.1 (D) 2.44 and 0.2
9.8
The electric field of a uniform plane electromagnetic wave in free space, along the positive x direction is given by E = 10 (ay + jaz ) ej 25x . The frequency and polarization of the wave, respectively, are (A) 1.2 GHz and left circular (B) 4 Hz and left circular (C) 1.2 GHz and right circular (D) 4 Hz and right circular A coaxialcable with an inner diameter of 1 mm and outer diameter of 2.4 mm is filled with a dielectric of relative permittivity 10.89. 9 Given m0 = 4p # 107 H/m, e0 = 10 F/m , the characteristic 36p impedance of the cable is (A) 330 W (C) 143.3 W (B) 100 W (D) 43.4 W
2013
TWO MARKS
9.9
The radiation pattern of an antenna in spherical coordinates is given by F (q) = cos 4 q ; 0 # q # p/2 . The directivity of the antenna is
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) 10 dB (C) 11.5 dB
2012
9.10 9.4
vi are The angle of incidence qi and the expression for E p # 10 ^x + 2h tx  a tz h ej 3 2 (A) 60c and E 0 ^a V/m 2
4
A transmission line with a characteristic impedance of 100 W is used to match a 50 W section to a 200 W section. If the matching is to be done both at 429 MHz and 1 GHz, the length of the transmission line can be approximately (A) 82.5 cm (b) 1.05 m (C) 1.58 cm (D) 1.75 m
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
9.11
Page 217
The magnetic field among the propagation direction inside a rectangular waveguide with the crosssection shown in the figure is Hz = 3 cos (2.094 # 102 x) cos (2.618 # 102 y) cos (6.283 # 1010 t  bz)
9.16
The phase velocity v p of the wave inside the waveguide satisfies (A) v p > c (B) v p = c (C) 0 < v p < c (D) v p = 0
The modes in a rectangular waveguide are denoted by TE mn where TM mn m and n are the eigen numbers along the larger and smaller dimensions of the waveguide respectively. Which one of the following statements is TRUE? (A) The TM 10 mode of the waveguide does not exist (B) The TE 10 mode of the waveguide does not exist (C) The TM 10 and the TE 10 modes both exist and have the same cutoff frequencies (D) The TM 10 and the TM 01 modes both exist and have the same cutoff frequencies
2011 TWO MARKS
The magnetic field at a distance r from the center of the wire is proportional to (A) r for r < a and 1/r 2 for r > a (B) 0 for r < a and 1/r for r > a (C) r for r < a and 1/r for r > a (D) 0 for r < a and 1/r 2 for r > a A hole of radius b (b < a) is now drilled along the length of the wire at a distance d from the center of the wire as shown below.
v = 10u ty A/m lies on the dielectric interface x = 0 A current sheet J between two dielectric media with er 1 = 5, mr 1 = 1 in Region1
9.13
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
The magnetic field inside (A) uniform and depends (B) uniform and depends (C) uniform and depends (D) non uniform
2011
9.14
v2 = 1.5u tx + 30u ty  10u tz A/m (A) H v2 = 3u tx + 30u ty  10u tz A/m (B) H v2 = 1.5u tx + 40u ty A/m (C) H v2 = 3u tx + 30u ty + 10u tz A/m (D) H
ONE MARK
9.18
Consider the following statements regarding the complex Poynting v for the power radiated by a point source in an infinite vector P v ) denotes the real part of homogeneous and lossless medium. Re( P v P, S denotes a spherical surface whose centre is at the point source, t denotes the unit surface normal on S . Which of the following and n statements is TRUE? v ) remains constant at any radial distance from the source (A) Re( P v ) increases with increasing radial distance from the (B) Re( P source (C) (D) the source the source v) : n t dS Re (P ## s v) : n t dS Re (P ## s remains constant at any radial distance from decreases with increasing radial distance from
A transmission line of characteristic impedance 50 W is terminated in a load impedance ZL . The VSWR of the line is measured as 5 and the first of the voltage maxima in the line is observed at a distance of l /4 from the load. The value of ZL is (A) 10 W (B) 250 W (C) (19.23 + j 46.15) W (D) (19.23  j 46.15) W The electric and magnetic fields for a TEM wave of frequency 14 GHz in a homogeneous medium of relative permittivity er and v = E p e j (wt  280py) u tz V/m relative permeability mr = 1 are given by E j (wt  280py) v tx A/m . Assuming the speed of light in free space and H = 3e u 8 to be 3 # 10 m/s , the intrinsic impedance of free space to be 120p , the relative permittivity er of the medium and the electric field amplitude E p are (B) er = 3, E p = 360p (A) er = 3, E p = 120p (C) er = 9, E p = 360p (D) er = 9, E p = 120p
2010 ONE MARK
9.19
9.15
A transmission line of characteristic impedance 50 W is terminated by a 50 W load. When excited by a sinusoidal voltage source at 10 GHz, the phase difference between two points spaced 2 mm apart on the line is found to be p/4 radians. The phase velocity of the wave along the line is
9.20
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 218
0.2+0c 0.9+90c , then the network is [S ] = > 0.9+90c 0.1+90cH (A) lossless and reciprocal (B) lossless but not reciprocal (C) not lossless but reciprocal (D) neither lossless nor reciprocal
9.21
A transmission line has a characteristic impedance of 50 W and a resistance of 0.1 W/m . If the line is distortion less, the attenuation constant(in Np/m) is (A) 500 (B) 5 (C) 0.014 (D) 0.002 The electric field component of a time harmonic plane EM wave traveling in a nonmagnetic lossless dielectric medium has an amplitude of 1 V/m. If the relative permittivity of the medium is 4, the magnitude of the timeaverage power density vector (in W/m2 ) is (A) 1 (B) 1 30p 60p (C) 1 (D) 1 120p 240p
9.22
Two infinitely long wires carrying current are as shown in the figure below. One wire is in the y  z plane and parallel to the y  axis. The other wire is in the x  y plane and parallel to the x  axis. Which components of the resulting magnetic field are nonzero at the origin ?
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2010
9.23
TWO MARKS
o
C
v = xya tx + x 2 a ty , then If A is
Which of the following statements is true regarding the fundamental mode of the metallic waveguides shown ?
(A) 0 (C) 1
9.24
(B) 2 3 (D) 2 3
(A) Only P has no cutofffrequency (B) Only Q has no cutofffrequency (C) Only R has no cutofffrequency (D) All three have cutofffrequencies
A plane wave having the electric field components vi = 24 cos ^3 # 108  by h a tx V/m and traveling in free space is E incident normally on a lossless medium with m = m0 and e = 9e0 which occupies the region y $ 0 . The reflected magnetic field component is given by tx A/m (A) 1 cos (3 # 108 t + y) a 10p tx A/m (B) 1 cos (3 # 108 t + y) a 20p tx A/m (C)  1 cos (3 # 108 t + y) a 20p tx A/m (D)  1 cos (3 # 108 t + y) a 10p In the circuit shown, all the transmission line sections are lossless. The Voltage Standing Wave Ration(VSWR) on the 60 W line is
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2009
9.28
TWO MARKS
If a vector field V is related to another vector field A through V = 4# A , which of the following is true? (Note : C and SC refer to any closed contour and any surface whose boundary is C . ) (B) A $ dl = (A) V $ dl = V $ dS A $ dS (C)
# # # # # # C S C C S C D # V $ dl = # # D # A $ d S (D) # D # V $ dl = # #V $ d S # C S C C S C
9.25
9.29
A transmission line terminates in two branches, each of length l , 4 as shown. The branches are terminated by 50W loads. The lines are lossless and have the characteristic impedances shown. Determine the impedance Zi as seen by the source.
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 219
(C) 35 dB
2007
9.38
(D) 45 dB
ONE MARK
A plane wave of wavelength l is traveling in a direction making an angle 30c with positive x  axis and 90c with positive y  axis. The E field of the plane wave can be represented as (E0 is constant) p p 3p 3p t 0 e j c wt  l x  l z m t 0 e jc wt  l x  l z m (A) E = yE (B) E = yE t 0 e jc wt + (C) E = yE
3 p x+ p z l l m
A magnetic field in air is measured to be t 2 y 2 x tm B = B0 c 2 x 2 y x +y x +y What current distribution leads to this field ? [Hint : The algebra is trivial in cylindrical coordinates.] t t (A) J = B0 z c 2 1 2 m, r ! 0 (B) J = B0 z c 2 2 2 m, r ! 0 m0 x + y m0 x + y t (C) J = 0, r ! 0 (D) J = B0 z c 2 1 2 m, r ! 0 m0 x + y
2008 ONE MARK
t 0 e jc wt  l x + (D) E = yE
3pz l m
If C is code curve enclosing a surface S , then magnetic field intensity H , the current density j and the electric flux density D are related by 2D (A) H $ ds = c j + 2t m $ d t S c
##
##
(B) (C)
H $ d l = ## c j + 2D m $ dS # 2t S S
9.31
For a Hertz dipole antenna, the half power beam width (HPBW) in the E plane is (A) 360c (B) 180c (C) 90c (D) 45c For static electric and magnetic fields in an inhomogeneous sourcefree medium, which of the following represents the correct form of Maxwells equations ? (A) 4$ E = 0 , 4# B = 0 (B) 4$ E = 0 , 4$ B = 0 (C) 4# E = 0 , 4# B = 0 (D) 4# E = 0 , 4$ B = 0
2008 TWO MARKS
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
H $ dS = # c j + 2D m $ d t ## 2t S C
9.32
2007
9.40
TWO MARKS
9.33
A rectangular waveguide of internal dimensions (a = 4 cm and b = 3 cm) is to be operated in TE11 mode. The minimum operating frequency is (A) 6.25 GHz (B) 6.0 GHz (C) 5.0 GHz (D) 3.75 GHz One end of a lossless transmission line having the characteristic impedance of 75W and length of 1 cm is shortcircuited. At 3 GHz, the input impedance at the other end of transmission line is (A) 0 (B) Resistive (C) Capacitive (D) Inductive A uniform plane wave in the free space is normally incident on an infinitely thick dielectric slab (dielectric constant e = 9 ). The magnitude of the reflection coefficient is (A) 0 (B) 0.3 (C) 0.5 (D) 0.8 In the design of a single mode step index optical fibre close to upper cutoff, the singlemode operation is not preserved if (A) radius as well as operating wavelength are halved (B) radius as well as operating wavelength are doubled (C) radius is halved and operating wavelength is doubled (D) radius is doubled and operating wavelength is halved At 20 GHz, the gain of a parabolic dish antenna of 1 meter and 70% efficiency is (A) 15 dB (B) 25 dB
9.34
Where H0 is a constant, and a and b are the dimensions along the x  axis and the y  axis respectively. The mode of propagation in the waveguide is (A) TE20 (B) TM11 (C) TM20 (D) TE10
9.41
The E field in a rectangular waveguide of inner dimension a # b is given by 2 wm t E = 2 ` l j H0 sin ` 2px j sin (wt  bz) y a h 2
9.35
A load of 50 W is connected in shunt in a 2wire transmission line of Z0 = 50W as shown in the figure. The 2port scattering parameter matrix (smatrix) of the shunt element is
9.36
1 2
1 2 1 1 2 2
H H
1 3
2 3 1 2 3 3
9.37
The parallel branches of a 2wirw transmission line re terminated in 100 W and 200W resistors as shown in the figure. The characteristic impedance of the line is Z0 = 50W and each section has a length of l . The voltage reflection coefficient G at the input is 4
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 220
(C) 2
2006
9.47
(D) 3
ONE MARK
(A)  j 7 5 (C) j 5 7
9.43
(B)  5 7 (D) 5 7
The electric field of an electromagnetic wave propagation in the positive tx sin (wt  bz) + a ty sin (wt  bz + p/2). The direction is given by E = a wave is (A) Linearly polarized in the z direction (B) Elliptically polarized (C) Lefthand circularly polarized (D) Righthand circularly polarized A transmission line is feeding 1 watt of power to a horn antenna having a gain of 10 dB. The antenna is matched to the transmission line. The total power radiated by the horn antenna into the free space is (A) 10 Watts (B) 1 Watts (C) 0.1 Watts (D) 0.01 Watt
2006 TWO MARKS
9.48
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(C)
9.44
The H field (in A/m) of a plane wave propagating in free space is t 5 3 cos (wt  bz) + y t`wt  bz + p j . given by H = x h0 2 The time average power flow density in Watts is h (A) 0 (B) 100 100 h0
9.49
50h2 0
(D) 50 h0
9.50
An airfilled rectangular waveguide has inner dimensions of 3 cm # 2 cm. The wave impedance of the TE20 mode of propagation in the waveguide at a frequency of 30 GHz is (free space impedance h0 = 377 W ) (A) 308 W (B) 355 W (C) 400 W (D) 461 W A l dipole is kept horizontally at a height of l0 above a perfectly 2 2 conducting infinite ground plane. The radiation pattern in the lane of the dipole (E plane) looks approximately as
9.51
When a planes wave traveling in freespace is incident normally on a medium having the fraction of power transmitted into the medium is given by (B) 1 (A) 8 2 9 (C) 1 (D) 5 3 6 A medium of relative permittivity er2 = 2 forms an interface with free  space. A point source of electromagnetic energy is located in the medium at a depth of 1 meter from the interface. Due to the total internal reflection, the transmitted beam has a circular crosssection over the interface. The area of the beam crosssection at the interface is given by (A) 2p m 2 (B) p2 m 2 (C) p m 2 (D) p m 2 2 A rectangular wave guide having TE10 mode as dominant mode is having a cut off frequency 18 GHz for the mode TE30 . The inner broad  wall dimension of the rectangular wave guide is (B) 5 cm (A) 5 cm 3 (D) 10 cm (C) 5 cm 2
9.45
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
9.52
A medium is divide into regions I and II about x = 0 plane, as shown in the figure below.
9.46
A right circularly polarized (RCP) plane wave is incident at an angle 60c to the normal, on an airdielectric interface. If the reflected wave is linearly polarized, the relative dielectric constant xr2 is.
(A)
(B)
tx + 3a ty + 5a tz is An electromagnetic wave with electric field E1 = 4a incident normally on the interface from region I . The electric file E2 in region II at the interface is tx + 0.75a ty  1.25a tz (B) 4a (A) E2 = E1
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 221
tx + 3a ty + 5a tz (C) 3a
9.53
tx + 3a ty + 5a tz (D)  3a
A mast antenna consisting of a 50 meter long vertical conductor operates over a perfectly conducting ground plane. It is basefed at a frequency of 600 kHz. The radiation resistance of the antenna is Ohms is 2 2 (A) 2p (B) p 5 5
2 (C) 4p 5
(D) 20p2
ONE MARK
9.59
2005
9.54
The magnetic field intensity vector of a plane wave is given by ty H (x, y, z, t) = 10 sin (50000t + 0.004x + 30) a ty , denotes the unit vector in y direction. The wave is where a propagating with a phase velocity. (B)  3 # 108 m/s (A) 5 # 10 4 m/s (C)  1.25 # 107 m/s (D) 3 # 108 m/s
The value of the load resistance is (A) 50 W (B) 200 W (C) 12.5 W (D) 0 The reflection coefficient is given by (A)  0.6 (B)  1 (C) 0.6 (D) 0
9.60
9.55
Refractive index of glass is 1.5. Find the wavelength of a beam of light with frequency of 1014 Hz in glass. Assume velocity of light is 3 # 108 m/s in vacuum (A) 3 m m (B) 3 mm (C) 2 m m (D) 1 mm
2005 TWO MARKS
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
9.56
Which one of the following does represent the electric field lines for the mode in the crosssection of a hollow rectangular metallic waveguide ?
Many circles are drawn in a Smith Chart used for transmission line calculations. The circles shown in the figure represent
9.57
Characteristic impedance of a transmission line is 50 W . Input impedance of the opencircuited line when the transmission line a short circuited, then value of the input impedance will be. (A) 50 W (B) 100 + j150W (C) 7.69 + j11.54W (D) 7.69  j11.54W Two identical and parallel dipole antennas are kept apart by a distance of l in the H  plane. They are fed with equal currents 4 but the right most antenna has a phase shift of + 90c. The radiation pattern is given as.
(A) Unit circles (B) Constant resistance circles (C) Constant reactance circles (D) Constant reflection coefficient circles.
2004
9.62
ONE MARK
9.58
The phase velocity of an electromagnetic wave propagating in a hollow metallic rectangular waveguide in the TE10 mode is (A) equal to its group velocity (B) less than the velocity of light in free space (C) equal to the velocity of light in free space (D) greater than the velocity of light in free space Consider a lossless antenna with a directive gain of + 6 dB. If 1 mW of power is fed to it the total power radiated by the antenna will be (A) 4 mW (B) 1 mW (C) 7 mW (D) 1/4 mW
2004 TWO MARKS
9.63
9.64
A parallel plate airfilled capacitor has plate area of 10  4 m 2 and plate separation of 10  3 m. It is connect  ed to a 0.5 V, 3.6 GHz
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 222
source. The magnitude of the displacement current is ( e = F/m) (A) 10 mA (B) 100 mA (C) 10 A (D) 1.59 mA
9.65
1 36p
10  9
Consider a 300 W , quarter  wave long (at 1 GHz) transmission line as shown in Fig. It is connected to a 10 V, 50 W source at one end and is left open circuited at the other end. The magnitude of the voltage at the open circuit end of the line is
A lossless transmission line is terminated in a load which reflects a part of the incident power. The measured VSWR is 2. The percentage of the power that is reflected back is (A) 57.73 (B) 33.33 (C) 0.11 (D) 11.11
2003 ONE MARK
9.71
(A) 10 V (C) 60 V
9.66
9.72
In a microwave test bench, why is the microwave signal amplitude modulated at 1 kHz
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) To increase the sensitivity of measurement (B) To transmit the signal to a faroff place (C) To study amplitude modulations (D) Because crystal detector fails at microwave frequencies
9.67
The depth of penetration of electromagnetic wave in a medium having conductivity s at a frequency of 1 MHz is 25 cm. The depth of penetration at a frequency of 4 MHz will be (A) 6.25 dm (B) 12.50 cm (C) 50.00 cm (D) 100.00 cm
2003 TWO MARKS
9.73
Medium 1 has the electrical permittivity e1 = 1.5e0 farad/m and occupies the region to the left of x = 0 plane. Medium 2 has the electrical permittivity e2 = 2.5e0 farad/m and occupies the region to the right of x = 0 plane. If E1 in medium 1 is E1 = (2ux  3uy + 1uz ) volt/m, then E2 in medium 2 is (A) (2.0ux  7.5uy + 2.5uz ) volt/m (B) (2.0ux  2.0uy + 0.6uz ) volt/m (C) (2.0ux  3.0uy + 1.0uz ) volt/m (D) (2.0ux  2.0uy + 0.6uz ) volt/m If the electric field intensity is given by E = (xux + yuy + zuz ) volt/m, the potential difference between X (2, 0, 0) and Y (1, 2, 3) is (A) + 1 volt (B)  1 volt (C) + 5 volt (D) + 6 volt A uniform plane wave traveling in air is incident on the plane boundary between air and another dielectric medium with er = 4 . The reflection coefficient for the normal incidence, is (A) zero (B) 0.5+180c (B) 0.333+0c (D) 0.333+180c
tx + ja ty) e jkz  kwt and H = (k/wm) (a ty + ka tx ) e jkz  jwt , the timeIf E = (a averaged Poynting vector is tz (A) null vector (B) (k/wm) a tz tz (C) (2k/wm) a (D) (k/2wm) a Consider an impedance Z = R + jX marked with point P in an impedance Smith chart as shown in Fig. The movement from point P along a constant resistance circle in the clockwise direction by an angle 45c is equivalent to
9.74
9.68
9.75
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
9.76
(A) adding an inductance in series with Z (B) adding a capacitance in series with Z (C) adding an inductance in shunt across Z (D) adding a capacitance in shunt across Z
9.69
If the electric field intensity associated with a uniform plane electromagnetic wave traveling in a perfect dielectric medium is given by E (z, t) = 10 cos (2p107 t  0.1pz) V/m, then the velocity of the traveling wave is (B) 2.00 # 108 m/sec (A) 3.00 # 108 m/sec (C) 6.28 # 107 m/sec (D) 2.00 # 107 m/sec A short  circuited stub is shunt connected to a transmission line as shown in fig. If Z0 = 50 ohm, the admittance Y seen at the junction of the stub and the transmission line is
9.77
A plane electromagnetic wave propagating in free space is incident normally on a large slab of lossless, nonmagnetic, dielectric material with e > e0 . Maxima and minima are observed when the electric field is measured in front of the slab. The maximum electric field is found to be 5 times the minimum field. The intrinsic impedance of
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 223
(D) unpolarized
Distilled water at 25c C is characterized by s = 1.7 # 10  4 mho/m and e = 78eo at a frequency of 3 GHz. Its loss tangent tan d is ( e = 10 36p F/m)
9
The electric field on the surface of a perfect conductor is 2 V/m. The conductor is immersed in water with e = 80eo . The surface charge density on the conductor is ( e = 10 36p F/m) 2 (A) 0 C/m (B) 2 C/m 2
9
A rectangular metal wave guide filled with a dielectric material of relative permittivity er = 4 has the inside dimensions 3.0 cm # 1.2 cm. The cutoff frequency for the dominant mode is (A) 2.5 GHz (B) 5.0 GHz (C) 10.0 GHz (D) 12.5 GHz Two identical antennas are placed in the q = p/2 plane as shown in Fig. The elements have equal amplitude excitation with 180c polarity difference, operating at wavelength l . The correct value of the magnitude of the farzone resultant electric field strength normalized with that of a single element, both computed for f = 0 , is
A person with receiver is 5 Km away from the transmitter. What is the distance that this person must move further to detect a 3dB decrease in signal strength (A) 942 m (B) 2070 m (C) 4978 m (D) 5320 m
9.79
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
ONE MARK
9.88
The VSWR can have any value between (A) 0 and 1 (B)  1 and + 1 (C) 0 and 3 (D) 1 and 3 In in impedance Smith movement along a constant resistance circle gives rise to (A) a decrease in the value of reactance (B) an increase in the value of reactance (C) no change in the reactance value (D) no change in the impedance The phase velocity for the TE10 waveguide is (c is the velocity of (A) less than c (C) greater than c
2002
9.89
9.81
The plane velocity of wave propagating in a hollow metal waveguide is (A) grater than the velocity of light in free space (B) less than the velocity of light in free space (C) equal to the velocity of light free space (D) equal to the velocity of light in free The dominant mode in a rectangular waveguide is TE10 , because this mode has (A) the highest cutoff wavelength (B) no cutoff (C) no magnetic field component (D) no attenuation
2001 TWO MARKS
9.90
9.82
mode in an airfilled rectangular plane waves in free space) (B) equal to c (D) none of these
TWO MARKS
jp/2 jwt  jkz
9.83
t + ye t )e A plane wave is characterized by E = (0.5x wave is (A) linearly polarized (B) circularly polarized
. This
9.91
A material has conductivity of 10  2 mho/m and a relative permittivity of 4. The frequency at which the conduction current in the medium is equal to the displacement current is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 224
A uniform plane electromagnetic wave incident on a plane surface of a dielectric material is reflected with a VSWR of 3. What is the percentage of incident power that is reflected ? (A) 10% (B) 25% (C) 50% (D) 75% A medium wave radio transmitter operating at a wavelength of 492 m has a tower antenna of height 124. What is the radiation resistance of the antenna? (A) 25 W (B) 36.5 W (C) 50 W (D) 73 W In uniform linear array, four isotropic radiating elements are spaced l apart. The progressive phase shift between required for forming 4 the main beam at 60c off the end  fire is : (A)  p (B)  p 2 radians (C)  p (D)  p 8 radians 4 radians
For an 8 feet (2.4m) parabolic dish antenna operating at 4 GHz, the minimum distance required for far field measurement is closest to (A) 7.5 cm (B) 15 cm (C) 15 m (D) 150 m
1999 ONE MARK
9.93
9.102
An electric field on a place is described by its potential V = 20 (r1 + r2) where r is the distance from the source. The field is due to (A) a monopole (B) a dipole (C) both a monopole and a dipole (D) a quadruple
9.94
9.103
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
2000
9.95
Assuming perfect conductors of a transmission line, pure TEM propagation is NOT possible in (A) coaxial cable (B) airfilled cylindrical waveguide (C) parallel twinwire line in air (D) semiinfinite parallel plate wave guide Indicate which one of the following will NOT exist in a rectangular resonant cavity. (A) TE110 (B) TE 011 (C) TM110 (D) TM111 Identify which one of the following will NOT satisfy the wave equation. (A) 50e j (wt  3z) (B) sin [w (10z + 5t)] 2 (C) cos (y + 5t) (D) sin (x) cos (t)
1999 TWO MARKS
9.104
ONE MARK
9.105
The magnitudes of the opencircuit and shortcircuit input impedances of a transmission line are 100 W and 25 W respectively. The characteristic impedance of the line is, (A) 25 W (B) 50 W (C) 75 W (D) 100 W A TEM wave is incident normally upon a perfect conductor. The E and H field at the boundary will be respectively, (A) minimum and minimum (B) maximum and maximum (C) minimum and maximum (D) maximum and minimum If the diameter of a l dipole antenna is increased from l to l 2 100 50 , then its (A) bandwidth increases (C) gain increases
2000
9.96
9.106
In a twinwire transmission line in air, the adjacent voltage maxima are at 12.5 cm and 27.5 cm . The operating frequency is (A) 300 MHz (B) 1 GHz (C) 2 GHz (D) 6.28 GHz A transmitting antenna radiates 251 W isotropically. A receiving antenna, located 100 m away from the transmitting antenna, has an effective aperture of 500 cm2 . The total received by the antenna is
9.97
9.107
9.98
A uniform plane wave in air impings at 45c angle on a lossless dielectric material with dielectric constant dr . The transmitted wave propagates is a 30c direction with respect to the normal. The value of dr is (B) 1.5 (A) 1.5 (C) 2 (D) 2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
(A) 10 mW (C) 20 mW
9.108
9.99
A rectangular waveguide has dimensions 1 cm # 0.5 cm. Its cutoff frequency is (A) 5 GHz (B) 10 GHz (C) 15 GHz (D) 12 GHz Two coaxial cable 1 and 2 are filled with different dielectric constants er1 and er2 respectively. The ratio of the wavelength in the cables
In air, a lossless transmission line of length 50 cm with L = 10 mH/m , C = 40 pF/m is operated at 25 MHz . Its electrical path length is (A) 0.5 meters (B) l meters (C) p/2 radians (D) 180 deg rees A plane wave propagating through a medium [er = 8, vr = 2, and s = 0] v = 0.5Xe t  (z/3) sin (108 t  bz) V/m . The has its electric field given by E wave impedance, in ohms is (A) 377 (B) 198.5+180c (D) 133.3 (C) 182.9+14c
9.109
9.100
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 225
9.119
1998
9.110
ONE MARK
The intrinsic impedance of copper at high frequencies is (A) purely resistive (B) purely inductive (C) complex with a capacitive component (D) complex with an inductive component The Maxwell equation V # H = J + 2D is based on 2t (A) Amperes law (B) Gauss law (C) Faradays law (D) Coulombs law All transmission line sections shown in the figure is have a characteristic impedance R 0 + j 0 . The input impedance Zin equals
9.120
An antenna in free space receives 2 mW of power when the incident electric field is 20 mV/m rms. The effective aperture of the antenna is (A) 0.005 m2 (B) 0.05 m2 (C) 1.885 m2 (D) 3.77 m2 The maximum usable frequency of an ionospheric layer at 60c incidence and with 8 MHz critical frequency is (A) 16 MHz (B) 16 MHz 3 (C) 8 MHz (D) 6.93 MHz A loop is rotating about they y axis in a magnetic field v = B 0 cos (wt + f) a vx T. The voltage in the loop is B (A) zero
9.111
9.112
9.121
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
(A) 2 R 0 3 (C) 3 R 0 2
1998
9.113
(B) R 0 (D) 2R 0
TWO MARKS
The time averages Poynting vector, v = 24e j (wt + bz) a vy V/m in free space is E v (A)  2.4 a (B) p z v (C) 4.8 a (D) p z
The far field of an antenna varies with distance r as (A) 1 (B) 12 r r (C) 13 (D) 1 r r
1997 ONE MARK
9.114
The wavelength of a wave with propagation constant (0.1p + j0.2p) m1 is 2 m (A) (B) 10 m 0.05 (C) 20 m (D) 30 m The depth of penetration of wave in a lossy dielectric increases with increasing (A) conductivity (B) permeability (C) wavelength (D) permittivity The polarization of v = E 0 e j^wt + bz h a vy h is E ^ vx + a (A) linear (C) left hand circular wave with electric field vector
9.123
9.115
A transmission line of 50 W characteristic impedance is terminated with a 100 W resistance. The minimum impedance measured on the line is equal to (A) 0 W (B) 25 W (C) 50 W (D) 100 W A rectangular air filled waveguide has cross section of 4 cm #10 cm . The minimum frequency which can propagate in the waveguide is (A) 0.75 GHz (B) 2.0 GHz (C) 2.5 GHz (D) 3.0 GHz A parabolic dish antenna has a conical beam 2c wide, the directivity of the antenna is approximately (A) 20 dB (B) 30 dB (C) 40 dB (D) 50 dB
9.124
9.116
9.117
The vector H in the far field of an antenna satisfies v = 0 and d # H v=0 v ! 0 and d # H v!0 (A) d $ H (B) d $ H v = 0 and d # H v!0 v ! 0 and d # H v=0 (C) d $ H (D) d $ H The radiation resistance of a circular loop of one turn is 0.01 W . The radiation resistance of five turns of such a loop will be (B) 0.01 W (A) 0.002 W (C) 0.05 W (D) 0.25 W
9.125
9.118
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 226
1997
9.126
TWO MARKS
A very lossy, l/4 long, 50 W transmission line is open circuited at the load end. The input impedance measured at the other end of the line is approximately (A) 0 (B) 50 W (C) 3 (D) None of the above The skin depth at 10 MHz for a conductor is 1 cm. The phase velocity of an electromagnetic wave in the conductor at 1, 000 MHz is about (A) 6 # 106 m/ sec (B) 6 # 107 m/ sec (C) 3 # 108 m/ sec (D) 6 # 108 m/ sec
9.127
The critical frequency of an ionospheric layer is 10 MHz. What is the maximum launching angle from the horizon for which 20 MHz wave will be reflected by the layer ? (A) 0c (B) 30c (C) 45c (D) 90c A 1 km long microwave link uses two antennas each having 30 dB gain. If the power transmitted by one antenna is 1 W at 3 GHz, the power received by the other antenna is approximately (A) 98.6 mW (B) 76.8 mW (C) 63.4 mW (D) 55.2 mW Some unknown material has a conductivity of 106 mho/m and a permeability of 4p # 107 H/m . The skin depth for the material at 1 GHz is (A) 15.9 mm (B) 20.9 mm (C) 25.9 mm (D) 30.9 mm
9.134
1996
9.128
ONE MARK
A lossless transmission line having 50 W characteristic impedance and length l/4 is short circuited at one end and connected to an ideal voltage source of 1 V at the other end. The current drawn from
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
the voltage source is (A) 0 (C) 3
9.129
9.135
The capacitance per unit length and the characteristic impedance of a lossless transmission line are C and Z 0 respectively. The velocity of a travelling wave on the transmission line is (A) Z 0 C (B) 1 Z0 C (C) Z 0 (D) C Z0 C A transverse electromagnetic wave with circular polarization is received by a dipole antenna. Due to polarization mismatch, the power transfer efficiency from the wave to the antenna is reduced to about (A) 50% (B) 35.3% (C) 25% (D) 0% A metal sphere with 1 m radius and a surface charge density of 10 Coulombs/m2 is enclosed in a cube of 10 m side. The total outward electric displacement normal to the surface of the cube is (A) 40p Coulombs (B) 10p Coulombs (C) 5p Coulombs (D) None of these
1996 TWO MARKS
9.130
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
9.131
9.132
A uniform plane wave in air is normally incident on infinitely thick slab. If the refractive index of the glass slab is 1.5, then the percentage of incident power that is reflected from the airglass interface is
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 227
SOLUTION
9.1
Option (D) is correct. v around Stokes theorem states that the circulation a vector field A v over a closed path l is equal to the surface integral of the curl of A the open surface S bounded by l . vh : ds v : dl v= v ^d # A i.e., A
9.5
##
Here, line integral is taken across a closed path which is denoted by a small circle on the integral notation where as, the surface invh is taken over open surface bounded by the loop. tegral of ^d # A
9.2
Option (A) is correct. We obtain the reflection coefficient for parallel polarized wave (since, electric field is in the plane of wave propagation) as h cos qt  h1 cos qi Gz = 2 h2 cos qt + h1 cos qi ...(1) As we have already obtained Also, qi = 45c, qt = 19.2c m 1 = h2 = = h0 e 4.5 h0 4.5
Option (D) is correct. Given, the vector field v = xa vx + ya vy + za vz A so, Ay 2 Ax + 2 v (Divergence of A v) =2 + Az d$A 2 2 2 x y z = 1+1+1 = 3
9.3
Option (A) is correct. Given, the return loss of device as 20 dB i.e., G in dB = 20 dB (loss)
^ h
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
or,
20 log G = 20 and
& G = 101 = 0.1 Therefore, the standing wave ration is given by 1+ G VSWR = 1 G = 1 + 0.1 = 1.1 = 1.22 1  0.1 0.9
9.4
Option (C) is correct. For the given incidence of plane wave, we have the transmitting angle qt = 19.2c From Snells law, we know n1 sin qi = n 2 sin qt c m1 e1 sin qi = c m2 e2 sin qt ...(1) For the given interfaces, we have m1 = m2 = 1 e1 = 1, e2 = 4.5 So, from Eq. (1) sin qi = 4.5 sin 19.2 or, qi . 45c v Now, the component of Ei can be obtained as v E a v jbk vi = _Eox a E x oz z i e (observed from the shown figure) Since, the angle qi = 45c so, Eox = Eoz = Eo 2 E v v i ejbk o v Therefore, Ei = _ax  a z 2 ...(1) Now, the wavelength of EM wave is l = 600 mm So, b = 2p = p # 10 4 3 l
Again, we have the propagation vector of reflected wave as v a v v =a x z a k 2 or, k = xz 2 Substituting it in Eq. (2), we get 10 x  z v = 0.23 Eo _ a v a v i ej p # 3 b 2 l E r x z 2 jp 10 ^x  z h V E v = 0.23 o _a v +a v i e # 3 2 m E r x z 2
4 4
9.6
Option (C) is correct. Electric field of the propagating wave in free space is given as Ei = (8ax + 6ay + 5az ) e j (wt + 3x  4y) V/m So, it is clear that wave is propagating in the direction ( 3ax + 4ay) . Since, the wave is incident on a perfectly conducting slab at x = 0 . So, the reflection coefficient will be equal to  1. i.e. Er = ( 1) Ei = 8ax  6ay  5az Again, the reflected wave will be as shown in figure.
0 0
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 228
l = (2m + 1) l 4 3 # 108 c = = 0.174 m f1 # 4 429 # 106 # 4 8 f2 = 1 GHz , l2 = c = 3 # 10 = 0.075 m 9 f2 # 4 1 # 10 # 4 Only option (C) is odd multiple of both l1 and l2 . (2m + 1) = 1.58 = 9 l1 (2m + 1) = 1.58  21 l2 f1 = 429 MHz, l1 =
9.11
i.e. the reflected wave will be in direction 3ax + 4ay . Thus, the electric field of the reflected wave will be. Ex = ( 8ax  6ay  5az ) e j (wt  3x  4y) V/m
9.7
Option (A) is correct. The field in circular polarization is found to be Es = E 0 (ay ! jaz ) ejbx propagating in + ve x direction. where, plus sign is used for left circular polarization and minus sign for right circular polarization. So, the given problem has left circular polarization. b = 25 = w c
Option (D) is correct. Hz = 3 cos (2.094 # 102 x) cos (2.618 # 102 y) cos (6.283 # 1010 t  bz) bx = 2.094 # 102 by = 2.618 # 102 w = 6.283 # 1010 rad/s For the wave propagation, b = Substituting above values, b =  j 261 6.283 # 1010 2  (2.0942 + 2.6182) 10 4 # c 3 108 m # w 2  (b 2 + b 2) x y c2
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
25 =
9.8
2pf c
&
# H : dl
= Ienclosed
Option (B) is correct. Let b " outer diameter a " inner diameter Characteristic impedance, m0 4p # 107 # 36p ln 2.4 = 100 W Z0 = ln b b l = b 1 l e0 er a 109 # 10.89 Option (A) is correct. The directivity is defined as D = Fmax Favg Fmax = 1 Favg = 1 F (q, f) dW 4p 2p 2p = 1 ; F (q, f) sin qdq dfE 4p 0 0
H # 2pr = (pa2) J H = Io 2pr H \ 1 , for r > a r For r < a , So, Ienclosed = J (pr 2) Jr 2 = 2 a pa2
Io = (pa2) J
9.9
# H : dl
# # # #
0
2p = 1 ; 4p 0
p/2
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Option (B) is correct. Assuming the cross section of the wire on x y plane as shown in figure.
or,
9.10
Option (C) is correct. Since 100 = 50 # 200 This is quarter wave matching. The length would be odd multiple of l/4 .
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 229
tx + Au ty + Buz Further if H z = 1 .5 u Then from Boundary condition t tx + Au ty + Bu tz ) x t + 10uy tx + 30u ty) u tx = (1.5u (3u v J tz = Au tz + Bu ty + 10u ty = 30u Comparing we get A = 30 and B = 10 tx + 30u ty  10u tz A/m So H z = 1.5u
9.18
Since, the hole is drilled along the length of wire. So, it can be assumed that the drilled portion carriers current density of  J . Now, for the wire without hole, magnetic field intensity at point P will be given as Hf1 (2pR) = J (pR2) Hf1 (2pR) = JR 2 Since, point o is at origin. So, in vector form H1 = J (xax + yay) 2 Again only due to the hole magnetic field intensity will be given as. (Hf2) (2pr) = J (pr 2) Hf2 =  Jr 2 Again, if we take Ol at origin then in vector form H2 =  J (xlax + ylay) 2 where xl and yl denotes point P in the new coordinate system. Now the relation between two coordinate system will be. x = xl + d So, y = yl H2 =  J [(x  d) ax + yay] 2
Option (A) is correct. Since voltage maxima is observed at a distance of l/4 from the load and we know that the separation between one maxima and minima equals to l/4 so voltage minima will be observed at the load, Therefore load can not be complex it must be pure resistive. Now G = s1 s+1 also RL = R 0 (since voltage maxima is formed at the load) s RL = 50 = 10 W 5 Option (D) is correct.
9.19
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
So, total magnetic field intensity = H1 + H2 = J dax 2 So, magnetic field inside the hole will depend only on d .
9.14
Option (C) is correct. Power radiated from any source is constant. Option (C) is correct. We have d = 2 mm and f = 10 GHz Phase difference = 2p d = p ; 4 l or = l = 8d = 8 # 2 mm = 16 mm v = fl = 10 # 109 # 16 # 103 = 1.6 # 108 m/ sec
9.15
Option (C) is correct. For a lossless network S11 2 + S21 2 = 1 For the given scattering matrix S11 = 0.2 0c , S12 = 0.9 90c S21 = 0.9 90c , S22 = 0.1 90c Here, (0.2) 2 + (0.9) 2 ! 1 Reciprocity :
(not lossless)
9.16
Option (A) is correct. TM11 is the lowest order mode of all the TMmn modes. Option (A) is correct. From boundary condition Bn1 = Bn2 m1 Hx1 = m2 Hx2 Hx2 = Hx1 = 1.5 2 tx Hx2 = 1.5u
9.17
Option (D) is correct. For distortion less transmission line characteristics impedance Z0 = R G Attenuation constant a = So, Option (C) is correct. RG a = R = 0.1 = 0.002 50 Z0
or or
9.22
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 230
Intrinsic impedance of EM wave m m0 = = 120p = 60p h = e 2 4e0 Time average power density 2 1 = 1 Pav = 1 EH = 1 E = 2 2 h 2 # 60p 120p
9.23
Option (C) is correct. v = xya tx + x 2 a ty A v = dxa tx + dya ty dl v : dl v = # (xya tx + x 2 a ty) : (dxa tx + dya ty) #A
C
tan bl = tan b 2p : l l = 3 4 l R ZL V S tan bl + jZo W 2 W = Z 0 = 60 W Z in = Zo S S Zo + jZL W ZL S tan bl W T X For length of l/8 transmission line Z + jZo tan bl Z in = Zo ; L Zo + jZL tan bl E So, Zo = 30 W, ZL = 0 (short) tan bl = tan b 2p : l l = 1 8 l Z in = jZo tan bl = 30j Circuit is shown below.
= # (xydx + x 2 dy)
C
#1/
2/ 3 3
xdx +
#2/
1/ 3 3
3xdx +
#1
4 dy + 3
#3
1 dy 3
= 1 : 4  1 D + 3 :1  4 D + 4 [3  1] + 1 [1  3] = 1 2 3 3 2 3 3 3 3
9.24
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
In the given problem
9.26
Option (D) is correct. Due to 1 A current wire in x  y plane, magnetic field be at origin will be in x direction. Due to 1 A current wire in y  z plane, magnetic field be at origin will be in z direction. Thus x and z component is nonzero at origin. Option (A) is correct. Rectangular and cylindrical waveguide doesnt support TEM modes and have cut off frequency. Coaxial cable support TEM wave and doesnt have cut off frequency. Option (B) is correct. We have V = 4# A By Stokes theorem ...(1) ...(2)
9.27
Reflection coefficient h  h1 t = 2 = 400p  120p = 1 h2 + h 1 2 40p + 120p t is negative So magnetic field component does not change its direction Direction of incident magnetic field tE # a tH = a tK a tZ # a tH = a ty a tx ( + x direction) tH = a a So, reflection magnetic field component tx , y $ 0 Hr = t # 24 cos (3 # 108 + by) a h tx , y $ 0 = 1 # 24 cos (3 # 108 + by) a 2 # 120p
8 b = w = 3 # 108 = 1 vC 3 # 10 tx , y $ 0 Hr = 1 cos (3 # 108 + y) a 10p
9.28
# A $ dl
## (4 # A) $ ds
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
From (1) and (2) we get
# A $ dl
9.29
##V $ ds
So,
9.25
Option (B) is correct. For length of l/4 transmission line Z + jZo tan bl Z in = Zo ; L Zo + jZL tan bl E ZL = 30 W , Zo = 30 W, b = 2p , l = l 4 l
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
2 2 Zi1 = Z01 = 100 = 200W ZL1 50 2 2 Zi2 = Z02 = 100 = 200W ZL2 50
Page 231
Reflection coefficient G= h2  h1 h2 + h1
mo eo er mo eo er
ZL3
2 Z0
= 50 = 25W 100
= 11+
er = 1 er 1+
9 9
since
x a  y a y xm c 2 x + y2 x2 + y2 To convert in cylindrical substituting x = r cos f and y = r sin f ax = cos far  sin faf ay = sin far + cos faf v0 af v =B B va v B v = B = 0 f H m0 m0 v = 4# H v=0 J
= 0.5
9.36
Option (C) is correct. In single mode optical fibre, the frequency of limiting mode increases as radius decreases Hence r \ 1 f So. if radius is doubled, the frequency of propagating mode gets halved, while in option (D) it is increased by two times.
9.37
Now
9.31
Option (C) is correct. The beamwidth of Hertizian dipole is 180c and its half power beamwidth is 90c. Option (D) is correct. Maxwell equations 4 B = 0 4$ E = r/E 4# E = B t = D+J 4# H For static electric magnetic fields 4$ B = 0 4$ E = r/E 4# E = 0 S 4# H = J
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
9.32
Gain
= 44.87 dB
9.38
9.33
Option (A) is correct. Cutoff Frequency is fc = c 2 For TE11 mode, m 2 n 2 ` a j +`b j 1 2 1 2 ` 4 j + ` 3 j = 6.25 GHz
9.39
p 3 x! p y l l mE
3 # 1010 fc = 2
9.34
Option (D) is correct. Zin = Zo ZL + iZo tan (bl) Zo + iZL tan (bl)
9.40
.ds ## 4# H $ ds = ## `J + 22D t j
s
# H $ dl
.ds ## `J + 22D t j
E =
9.35
Option (C) is correct. The 2port scattering parameter matrix is S11 S12 S == S21 S22 G
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 232
(ZL Z0)  Zo (50 50)  50 = = 1 (ZL Z0) + Zo (50 50) + 50 3 2 (ZL Zo) 2 (50 50) S12 = S21 = = =2 (ZL Zo) + Zo (50 50) + 50 3 (Z Z )  Zo (50 50)  50 S22 = L o = = 1 (ZL Zo) + Zo (50 50) + 50 3 S11 =
9.42
er2 = 3
if l = l 4
9.48
Option (C) is correct. txx sin (wt  bz) + a ty sin (wt  bz + p/2) We have E =a Here Ex = Ey and fx = 0, fy = p 2 Phase difference is
p 2
Zin1
Now
Option (A) is correct. We have 10 log G = 10 dB or G = 10 Now gain G = Prad Pin or 10 = Prad 1W or Option (A) is correct. G= = 1 + er = 1  4 = 1 3 1 + er 1+ 4 The transmitted power is h2  h1 = h2 + h1
mo eo er mo eo er
Prad = 10 Watts +
mo eo mo eo
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
G = ZS  Zo = 300  50 = 5 ZS + Zo 300 + 50 7
9.43
or
9.50
or
9.44
9.45
Since the mode is TE20, m = 2 and n = 0 8 fc = c m = 3 # 10 # 2 = 10 GHz 2 2 2 # 0.03 ho 377 = h' = = 400W 10 2 fc 2 1c m 1  c 10 10 m f 3 # 10 Option (B) is correct. Using the method of images, the configuration is as shown below
9.51
AO = 1 m BO = 1 m
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Thus area Option (C) is correct. The cutoff frequency is fc = c 2 m 2 m 2 ` a j +` b j = pr2 = p # OB = p m 2
Here d = l, a = p, thus bd = 2p Array factor is bd cos y + a E 2 2p cos y + p = cos ; E = sin (p cos y) 2 = cos ;
9.46
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
9.52
Page 233
Option (C) is correct. We have E1 = 4ux + 3uy + 5uz Since for dielectric material at the boundary, tangential component of electric field are equal ty + 5a tz E21 = E1t = 3a at the boundary, normal component of displacement vector are equal i.e. Dn2 = Dn1 or e2 E2n = e1 E1n tz or 4eo E2n = 3eo 4a tx or E2n = 3a tx + 3a ty + 5a tz Thus E2 = E2t + E2a = 3a
9.61
Option (C) is correct. The given figure represent constant reactance circle. Option (D) is correct. We know that vp > c > vg . Option (A) is correct. We have GD (q, f) = 4pU (q, f) Prad
9.62
9.63
For lossless antenna Prad = Pin Here we have Prad = Pin = 1 mW and 10 log GD (q, f) = 6 dB or GD (q, f) = 3.98 Thus the total power radiated by antenna is 4pU (q, f) = Prad GD (q, f) = 1 m # 3.98 = 3.98 mW
9.64
9.53
9.54
Option (C) is correct. Phase Velocity is w = 50, 000 and b = 0.004 4 vP = w = 5 # 10  3 = 1.25 # 107 m/s b  4 # 10
9.55
Option (C) is correct. Refractive index of glass m = 1.5 Frequency f = 1014 Hz c = 3 # 108 m/sec
8 l = c = 3 # 10 = 3 # 10  6 14 f 10 wavelength in glass is 6 lg = a = 3 # 10 = 2 # 10  6 m 1.5 m
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
9.56 9.57
9.58
Option (C) is correct. VL = ZO Vin Zin or VL = ZO Vin = 10 # 300 = 60 V Zin 50 Option (D) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Ravg = 1 Re [E # H*] 2
9.66 9.67
Here b = 2p , d = l and a = 90c l 4 2p l sin q + Thus A = cos c l 4 2 The option (A) satisfy this equation.
9.59
p 2
Option (C) is correct. From the diagram, VSWR is s = Vmax = 4 = 4 Vmin 1 When minima is at load ZO = s.ZL or ZL = Zo = 50 = 12.5W s 4
Option (A) is correct. Suppose at point P impedance is Z = r + j ( 1) If we move in constant resistance circle from point P in clockwise direction by an angle 45c, the reactance magnitude increase. Let us consider a point Q at 45c from point P in clockwise direction. Its impedance is Z1 = r  0.5j
9.60
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 234
or Z1 = Z + 0.5j Thus movement on constant r  circle by an +45c in CW direction is the addition of inductance in series with Z .
9.69
or or or Thus
9.74
Option (D) is correct. We have or Thus Now or or VSWR G G G 2 3 1 G = Emax = 5 = Emin 1+ G =2 3 = 2 3 h  h1 = 2 h2 + h1 h  120p = 2 h2 + 120p
e1 E1n = e2 E2n 1.5eo 2ux = 2.5eo E2n E2n = 3 ux = 1.2ux 2.5 E2 = E2t + E2n = 3uy + uz + 1.2ux
# 1
tx + xdxu
2 2 1
tz + # zdzuz t ydyu # 2 3
0
h2 = 24p 1 G 1+ G
== x 2
2 0 y2 +z G 2 2 2 3
9.70
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
or Thus or G =1 3 Pref = G2= 1 Pinc 9 Pref = Pinc 9
9.76
m e
= 11+
er = 1 er 1+
4 4
since
=  1 = 0.333+180c 3 Option (B) is correct. We have E (z, t) = 10 cos (2p # 107 t  0.1pz) where w = 2p # 107 t b = 0.1p 7 Phase Velocity u = w = 2p # 10 = 2 # 108 m/s b 0.1p Option (A) is correct. The fig of transmission line is as shown below. [Z + jZo tan bl] We know that Zin = Zo L [Zo + jZL tan bl] For line 1, l = l and b = 2p , ZL1 = 100W l 2
Option (C) is correct. By Maxwells equations 4# H = 2D + J 2t Thus 4# H has unit of current density J that is A/m2
9.77
9.72
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
[ZL + jZo tan p] = ZL = 100W [Zo + jZL tan p] For line 2, l = l and b = 2p , ZL2 = 0 (short circuit) l 8 [0 + jZo tan p 4] Thus = jZo = j50W Zin2 = Zo [Zo + 0] Y = 1 + 1 = 1 + 1 = 0.01  j0.02 Zin1 Zin2 100 j50 Thus Zin1 = Zo
or
9.73
Option (C) is correct. We have E1 = 2ux  3uy + 1uz E1t =  3uy + uy and E1n = 2ux Since for dielectric material at the boundary, tangential component of electric field are equal (x = 0 plane) E1t = 3uy + uy = E2t E1n = 2ux At the boundary the for normal component of electric field are D1n = D2n
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
9.84
Page 235
9.85
9.86
9.78
9.79
y 2
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Now
= 2 cos 8 2p 2 s cos 45c + 180 B l. 2 2 = 2 cos 8 ps + 90cB = 2 sin ` ps j l l where G varies from 0 to 1
or Distance to move
9.87
Option (C) is correct. A transmission line is distortion less if LG = RC Option (B) is correct. d2 Ex = c2 d2 Ex dz2 dt2 This equation shows that x component of electric fields Ex is traveling in z direction because there is change in z direction. We have
9.80
9.88
Option (B) is correct. Reactance increases if we move along clockwise direction in the constant resistance circle. Option (C) is correct. Phase velocity VP = f 2 1c c m f VC
9.89
9.82
Option (A) is correct. In wave guide vp > c > vg and in vacuum vp = c = vg where vp $ Phase velocity c $ Velocity of light vg $ Group velocity
9.90
Option (C) is correct. We have t + ye t j ) e j (wt  kz) E = (0.5x Ex = 0.5e j (wt  kz) Ey = e e
jp 2 j (wt  kz)
p 2
Option (A) is correct. In a wave guide dominant gives lowest cutoff frequency and hence the highest cutoff wavelength. Option (A) is correct. or or or or Ic = Id sE = jw d E s = 2pfeo er f =
9.91
w = 2pf and e = er e0
2 9 s = 2s = 9 # 10 # 2 # 10 2p # eo er 4peo er 4
f = 45 # 106 = 45 MHz
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 236
or or Now
or
9.99
er = 2 fc = vp 2 m 2 n 2 ` a j +`b j
For rectangular waveguide dominant mode is TE01 8 v Thus fc = p = 3 # 10 2 = 15 # 109 2a 2 # 10 vp = 3 # 108 = 15 GHz
9.100
For air
l = 492 m
and height of antenna = 124 m . l 4 It is a quarter wave monopole antenna and radiation resistance is 25 W .
9.94
Option (C) is correct. The array factor is where y = bd cos q + d d =l 4 Distance between elements
9.101
we get
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
Because of end fire y =0 q = 60c 0 = 2p # l cos 60c + d = p # 1 + d 2 2 l 4 d = p 4 Zo =
9.96
2 3 ` 40 # 2 j d = (2.4)
8 l = c = 3 # 10 9 = 3 m f 40 4 # 10
or
9.102
d =
80 # (2.4) 2 . 150 m 3
Thus or
9.95
Option (C) is correct. We know that for a monopole its electric field varies inversely with r 2 while its potential varies inversely with r . Similarly for a dipole its electric field varies inversely as r 3 and potential varies inversely as r 2 . In the given expression both the terms a _ r1 + r1 i are present, so this potential is due to both monopole & dipole.
1 2
Option (C) is correct. As the impedance of perfect conductor is zero, electric field is minimum and magnetic field is maximum at the boundary. Option (B) is correct. BW \ 1 (Diameter)
9.104 9.105
Option (D) is correct. In TE mode Ez = 0 , at all points within the wave guide. It implies that electric field vector is always perpendicular to the waveguide axis. This is not possible in semiinfine parallel plate wave guide. Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct. A scalar wave equation must satisfy following relation
9.97
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
2 2 E  m 22 2 E = 0 ...(1) 2t 2 2z 2 Where m = w (Velocity) b Basically w is the multiply factor of t and b is multiply factor of z or x or y . In option (A) E = 50e j (wt  3z) m =w=w 3 b We can see that equations in option (C) does not satisfy equation (1)
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
9.106
Page 237
Option (B) is correct. We know that distance between two adjacent voltage maxima is equal to l/2 , where l is wavelength. l = 27.5  12.5 2 Frequency l = 2 # 15 = 30 cm 10 u = C = 3 # 10 = 1 GHz 30 l
l = 2 = 10 m 0.2
9.115
Option (C) is correct. The depth of penetration or skin depth is defined as 1 d= pfms d\ 1 \ l f so depth increases with increasing in wavelength.
9.107
Option (D) is correct. Power received by antenna 4 PR = PT 2 # (apeture) = 251 # 500 # 102 = 100 mW 4pr 4 # p # (100) Option (C) is correct. Electrical path length = bl Where b = 2p , l = 50 cm l We know that l =u =1# 1 au= f f LC 1 1 = 6 # 6 25 # 10 10 # 10 # 40 # 1012
7 = 5 # 10 6 = 2 m 25 # 10 Electric path length = 2p # 50 # 102 = p radian 5 2
9.116
9.108
Option (A) is correct. Given j (wt + bz) v vy a x + e0 e j (wt + bz) a E (z, t) = Eo e Generalizing
...(1)
1 LC
vx E1 (z) + a vy E2 (z) ...(2) E (z) = a Comparing (1) and (2) we can see that E1 (z) and E2 (z) are in space quadrature but in time phase, their sum E will be linearly polarized
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
9.109
Option (D) is correct. In a lossless dielectric (s = 0) median, impedance is given by mr m0 mr m = 120p # h = 0c = er e0 er e = 120p # 2 = 188.4 W 8 Option (D) is correct. Impedance is written as jwm h = s + jwe Copper is good conductor i.e. s >> we jwm wm So h = = 45c s s Impedance will be complex with an inductive component.
9.110
Option (C) is correct. v v =14 v H A m # v is auxiliary potential function. where A So 4: H = 4: (4 # A) = 0 4# H = 4# (4 # A) = Y 0 Option (D) is correct. Radiation resistance of a circular loop is given as S Rr = 8 hp3 :ND 2 D 3 l 2 Rx \ N N " no. of turns So, Rr 2 = N 2 # Rr 1 = (5) 2 # 0.01 = 0.25 W Option (C) is correct. We have Aperture Area Power Re ceived Polynting vector of incident wave A =W P =
2 P = E h0 = 120p is intrinsic impedance h0
9.118
9.111
Option (A) is correct. This equation is based on amperes law as we can see
#l H $ dl
or
= I enclosed = Jds # s =
(ampere's law)
9.119
#l H $ dl
(4 # H) $ ds # s
Jds # s of space So = 2 # 10 E2 c h0 m
6 6
Option (A) is correct. Option (B) is correct. Option (B) is correct. Propagation constant here r = a + ib = 0.1p + j0.2p b = 2p = 0.2p l
9.120
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 238
or 8 = 16 MHz 3 3 c 2 m or
f 1 = 10 MHz
Option (D) is correct. When a moving circuit is put in a time varying magnetic field educed emf have two components. One for time variation of B and other turn motion of circuit in B . Option (A) is correct. Far field \ 1 r
9.122
Put
3
9.123
Option (B) is correct. Z in min = Z 0 S where S = standing wave ratio 1 + GL S = 1  GL GL = reflection coefficient
=
9.128
Option (A) is correct. Input impedance of a lossless transmission line is given by Z + jZ 0 tan bl Zin = Z 0 ; L Z 0 + jZL tan bl E where Z 0 = Charateristic impedance of line ZL = Load impedance b = 2p l = length l bl = 2p l = p 2 l 4 ZL = 0 (Short circuited) Z 0 = 50 W 0 + j50 tan p/2 =3 Zin = 50 = 50 + j0 tan p/2G
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
GL = ZL  Z 0 = 100  50 = 50 = 1 ZL + Z 0 100 + 50 150 3 1+1 3 =2 S = 1 13 50 Z in min = = 25 W 2
9.124 9.129
so here
and so
Thus infinite impedance, and current will be zero. Option (B) is correct. For lossless transmission line, we have Velocity V =w= 1 b LC Characteristics impedance for a lossless transmission line Z0 = L C From eqn. (1) and (2) 1 = 1 V = C (Z 0 C ) Z 0 C Option (C) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Option (C) is correct.
...(1)
Option (A) is correct. The cutoff frequency is given by ml m 2+ n 2 fc = 2 a a k a2k Here a < b , so minimum cut off frequency will be for mode TE 01 m = 0, n = 1
8 fc = 3 # 10 2#2
9.130
...(2)
a ml = c 2 *
9.131 9.132
c = 3 # 108
9.125 9.126
Option (B) is correct. Option (A) is correct. For any transmission line we can write input impedance Z + jZ 0 tanh lg Zin = Z 0 ; L Z 0 + jZL tanh lg E Here given ZL = 3 (open circuited at load end) R jZ tanh lg V S1 + 0 W Z0 ZL W= so Zin = Z 0 lim S Z " 3S Z 0 j tanh lg W S ZL + j tanh lg W T X Option (A) is correct. We know that skin depth is given by 1 s = = 1 # 102 m pf1 ms
L
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
Reflected power Er = GEi G = Reflection coefficient h  h1 G = 2 = 1.5  1 = 1 h 2 + h1 1.5 + 1 5 Er = 1 # Ei 5 Er = 20% Ei Ei " Incident power
So
9.127
9.133
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 239
Option (C) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Skin depth d= 1 pfms 1 3.14 # 1 # 109 # 4p # 107 # 106
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
UNIT 10
GENERAL APTITUDE
Page 240
(C)
10.8
9 ^9n  1h +n 8
(D)
9 ^9n  1h + n2 8
YEAR 2013
10.1
ONE MARK
Choose the grammatically CORRECT sentence: (A) Two and two add four (B) Two and two become four (C) Two and two are four (D) Two and two make four Statement: You can always give me a ring whenever you need. Which one of the following is the best inference from the above statement? (A) Because I have a nice caller tune. (B) Because I have a better telephone facility (C) Because a friend in need is a friend indeed
10.9
Statement: There were different streams of freedom movements in colonial India carried out by the moderates, liberals, radicals, socialists, and so on. Which one of the following is the best inference from the above statement? (A) The emergence of nationalism in colonial India led to our Independence (B) Nationalism in India emerged in the context of colonialism (C) Nationalism in India is homogeneous (D) Nationalism in India is heterogeneous The set of values of p for which the roots of the equation 3x2 + 2x + p ^p  1h = 0 are of opposite sign is (A) ^ 3, 0h (B) ^0, 1h (C) ^1, 3h (D) ^0, 3h What is the chance that a leap year, selected at random, will contain 53 Sundays? (A) 2/7 (B) 3/7 (C) 1/7 (D) 5/7
2012 ONE MARK
10.2
10.10
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(D) Because you need not pay towards the telephone bills when you give me a ring
10.3
10.11
If (1.001) 1259 = 3.52 and (1.001) 2062 = 7.85, then (1.001) 3321 (B) 4.33 (A) 2.23 (C) 11.37 (D) 27.64 Choose the most appropriate alternate from the options given below to complete the following sentence : If the tired soldier wanted to lie down, he..................the mattress out on the balcony. (A) should take (B) shall take (C) should have taken (D) will have taken Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the following sentence : Give the seriousness of the situation that he had to face, his........ was impressive. (A) beggary (B) nomenclature (C) jealousy (D) nonchalance
In the summer of 2012, in New Delhi, the mean temperature of Monday to Wednesday was 41C and of Tuesday to Thursday was 43cC . If the temperature on Thursday was 15% higher than that of Monday, then the temperature in cC on Thursday was (A) 40 (B) 43 (C) 46 (D) 49 Complete the sentence: Dare .................. mistakes. (A) commit (B) to commit (C) committed (D) committing They were requested not to quarrel with others. Which one of the following options is the closest in meaning to the word quarrel? (A) make out (B) call out (C) dig out (D) fall out Option (D) is correct. They were requested not to quarrel with others. Quarrel has a similar meaning to fall out
YEAR 2013 TWO MARKS
10.12
10.13
10.4
10.5
10.14
10.1
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
word given below ? Latitude (A) Eligibility (C) Coercion
10.15
10.6
A car travels 8 km in the first quarter of an hour, 6 km in the second quarter and 16 km in the third quarter. The average speed of the car in km per hour over the entire journey is (A) 30 (B) 36 (C) 40 (D) 24 Find the sum to n terms of the series 10 + 84 + 734 + ... 9 ^9n  1h 9 ^9n + 1h (B) (A) +1 +1 8 10
10.7
One of the parts (A, B, C, D) in the sentence given below contains an ERROR. Which one of the following is INCORRECT ? I requested that he should be given the driving test today instead of tomorrow. (A) requested that (B) should be given (C) the driving test (D) instead of tomorrow
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 241
10.22
2012
10.16
TWO MARKS
One of the legacies of the Roman legions was discipline. In the legious, military law prevailed and discipline was brutal. Discipline on the battlefield kept units obedient, intact and fighting, even when the odds and conditions were against them. Which one of the following statements best sums up the meaning of the above passage ? (A) Through regimentation was the main reason for the efficiency of the Roman legions even in adverse circumstances. (B) The legions were treated inhumanly as if the men were animals (C) Disciplines was the armies inheritance from their seniors (D) The harsh discipline to which the legions were subjected to led to the odds and conditions being against them. Raju has 14 currency notes in his pocket consisting of only Rs. 20 notes and Rs. 10 notes. The total money values of the notes is Rs. 230. The number of Rs. 10 notes that Raju has is (A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 9 (D) 10 There are eight bags of rice looking alike, seven of which have equal weight and one is slightly heavier. The weighing balance is of unlimited capacity. Using this balance, the minimum number of weighings required to identify the heavier bag is (A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 8 The data given in the following table summarizes the monthly budget of an average household. Category Food Clothing Rent Savings Other Expenses Amount (Rs.) 4000 1200 2000 1500 1800
The question below consists of a pair of related words followed by four pairs of words. Select the pair that best expresses the relations in the original pair : Gladiator : Arena (A) dancer : stage (B) commuter : train (C) teacher : classroom (D) lawyer : courtroom Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the following sentence : Under ethical guidelines recently adopted by the Indian Medical Association, human genes are to be manipulated only to correct diseases for which...................treatments are unsatisfactory. (A) similar (B) most (C) uncommon (D) available Choose the word from the from the options given below that is most opposite in meaning to the given word : Frequency (A) periodicity (B) rarity
10.23
10.17
10.24
10.18
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
10.19
(D) persistency
Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the following sentence : It was her view that the countrys had been ............. by foreign technocrafts, so that to invite them to come back would be counterproductive. (A) identified (B) ascertained (C) exacerbated (D) analysed
2011 TWO MARKS
The approximate percentages of the monthly budget NOT spent on savings is (A) 10% (B) 14% (C) 81% (D) 86%
10.20
10.26
The fuel consumed by a motor cycle during a journey while travelling at various speed is indicated in the graph below.
A and B are friends. They decide to meet between 1 PM and 2 PM on a given day. There is a conditions that whoever arrives first will not wait for the other for more than 15 minutes. The probability that they will meet on that days is (A) 1/4 (B) 1/16 (C) 7/16 (D) 9/16
2011 ONE MARK
10.21
There are two candidates P and Q in an election. During the campaign, 40% of voter promised to vote for P , and rest for Q . However, on the day of election 15% of the voters went back on their promise to vote for P and instead voted for Q . 25% of the voter went back on their promise to vote for Q and instead voted for P . Suppose, P lost by 2 votes, then what was the total number of voters ? (A) 100 (B) 110 (C) 90 (D) 95
The distance covered during four laps of the journey are listed in the table below Lap P Q R Distance (km) 15 75 40 Average speed (km/hour) 15 45 75
S 10 10 From the given data, we can conclude that the fuel consumed per kilometre was least during the lap
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 242
10.34
(A) P (C) R
10.27
(B) Q (D) S
The horse has played a little known but very important role in the field of medicine. Horses were injected with toxins of disease until their blood build up immunities. Then a serum was made from their blood. Serums to fight with diphteria and tetanus were developed this way. It can be inferred from the passage, that horses were (A) given immunity to diseases (B) generally quite immune to diseases (C) given medicines to fight toxins (D) given diphtheria and tetanus serums The sum of n terms of the series 4 + 44 + 444 + ........ (A) (4/81) [10n + 1  9n  1] (B) (4/81) [10n  1  9n  1] (C) (4/81) [10n + 1  9n  10] (D) (4/81) [10n  9n  10] Given that f (y) = y /y, and q is any nonzero real number, the value of f (q)  f ( q) is
Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the following sentence : His rather casual remarks on politics..................his lack of seriousness about the subject. (A) masked (B) belied (C) betrayed (D) suppressed 25 persons are in a room 15 of them play hockey, 17 of them play football and 10 of them play hockey and football. Then the number of persons playing neither hockey nor football is (A) 2 (B) 17 (C) 13 (D) 3
2010 TWO MARKS
10.35
10.28
10.36
10.29
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(A) 0 (C) 1
10.30
Modern warfare has changed from large scale clashes of armies to suppression of civilian populations. Chemical agents that do their work silently appear to be suited to such warfare ; and regretfully, their exist people in military establishments who think that chemical agents are useful fools for their cause. Which of the following statements best sums up the meaning of the above passage ? (A) Modern warfare has resulted in civil strife. (B) Chemical agents are useful in modern warfare. (C) Use of chemical agents in ware fare would be undesirable. (D) People in military establishments like to use chemical agents in war. If 137 + 276 = 435 how much is 731 + 672 ? (A) 534 (B) 1403 (C) 1623 (D) 1531 5 skilled workers can build a wall in 20 days; 8 semiskilled workers can build a wall in 25 days; 10 unskilled workers can build a wall in 30 days. If a team has 2 skilled, 6 semiskilled and 5 unskilled workers, how long will it take to build the wall ? (A) 20 days (B) 18 days (C) 16 days (D) 15 days Given digits 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4 how much distinct 4 digit numbers greater than 3000 can be formed ? (A) 50 (B) 51 (C) 52 (D) 54 Hari (H), Gita (G), Irfan (I) and Saira (S) are siblings (i.e. brothers
(B)  1 (D) 2
10.37
Three friends R, S and T shared toffee from a bowl. R took 1/3 rd of the toffees, but returned four to the bowl. S took 1/4 th of what was left but returned three toffees to the bowl. T took half of the remainder but returned two back into the bowl. If the bowl had 17 toffees left, how many toffees were originally there in the bowl ? (A) 38 (B) 31 (C) 48 (D) 41
2010 ONE MARK
10.38
10.39
10.31
Which of the following options is the closest in meaning to the word below ? Circuitous (A) Cyclic (B) Indirect (C) Confusing (D) Crooked The question below consist of a pair of related words followed by four pairs of words. Select the pair that best expresses the relation in the original pair. Unemployed : Worker (A) Fallow : Land (B) Unaware : Sleeper (C) Wit : Jester (D) Renovated : House Choose the most appropriate word from the options given below to complete the following sentence : If we manage to ........ our natural resources, we would leave a better planet for our children. (A) unhold (B) restrain (C) cherish (D) conserve
10.40
10.32
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
and sisters.) All were born on 1st January. The age difference between any two successive siblings (that is born one after another) is less than 3 years. Given the following facts : 1. Haris age + Gitas age > Irfans age + Sairas age. 2. The age difference between Gita and Saira is 1 year. However, Gita is not the oldest and Saira is not the youngest. 3. There are no twins. In what order were they born (oldest first) ? (A) HSIG (B) SGHI (C) IGSH (D) IHSG
***********
10.33
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 243
SOLUTIONS
10.1
S2 =
9 ^9  1h + 22 = 94 8
Option (D) is correct Two and two make four Option (C) is correct. You can always given me a ring whenever you need. Because a friend is need is a friend indeed Option (C) is correct. Let the temperature on Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday be respectively as TM , TTU , TW , TTH So, from the given data we have TH + TTU + TW = 41 ....(1) 3 TTU + TW + TTH = 43 ....(2) and 3 also, as the temperature on Thursday was 15% higher than that of Monday ....(3) i.e. TTH = 1.15 TM solving eq (1), (2) and (3), we obtain TTH = 46cC
10.8
S3 9 ^93  1h = + 32 = 828 8 Option (D) is correct. Nationalism in India is heterogeneous Option (B) is correct. Given, the quadratic equation 3x2 + 2x + P ^P  1h = 0 It will have the roots with opposite sign if
10.9
10.2
10.3
P ^P  1h < 0 So it can be possible only when P < 0 and P  1 > 0 or P > 0 and P  1 < 0 The 1 st condition tends to no solution for P .
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
10.4
Option (B) is correct. Dare to commit mistakes Option (D) is correct. They were requested not to quarrel with others. Quarrel has a similar meaning to fall out Option (C) is correct. Given, the distance travelled by the car in each quarter intervals as Distance 8 km 6 km 16 km Time Duration
1 4 1 4 1 4
10.10
10.5
10.6
hr hr hr
Therefore, the total time taken = 1 + 1 + 1 + 3 hr 4 4 4 4 Hence, Total distance travelled = 8 + 6 + 16 = 30 km average speed = Total distance travelled Total time taken = 30 = 40 km/hr 3/4
10.11
10.7
Option (D) is correct. It will be easy to check the options for given series. From the given series. 10 + 84 + 734 + ...... We get Sum of 1 term = S1 = 10 Sum of 2 terms = S2 = 10 + 84 = 94 and sum of 3 terms = S 3 = 10 + 84 + 734 = 828 Checking all the options one by one, we observe that only (D) option satisfies as 9 ^9n  1h + n2 Sn = 8 9 ^92  1h so, S1 + 22 = 10 8
Again
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
10.15 10.16 10.17
Page 244
Option (B) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Option (A) is correct. Let no. of notes of Rs.20 be x and no. of notes of Rs. 10 be y . Then from the given data. x + y = 14 20x + 10y = 230 Solving the above two equations we get x = 9, y = 5 So, the no. of notes of Rs. 10 is 5.
10.20
= 9000 # 100% = 86% 10500 Option (S) is correct. The graphical representation of their arriving time so that they met is given as below in the figure by shaded region.
10.18
Option (A) is correct. We will categorize the 8 bags in three groups as : (i) A1 A2 A 3 , (ii) B1 B2 B 3 , (iii) C1 C2 Weighting will be done as bellow : 1st weighting " A1 A2 A 3 will be on one side of balance and B1 B2 B 3 on the other. It may have three results as described in the following cases. Case 1 : A1 A 2 A 3 = B1 B 2 B 3
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
This results out that either C1 or C2 will heavier for which we will have to perform weighting again. 2 nd weighting " C1 is kept on the one side and C2 on the other. if then C1 is heavier. C1 > C 2 then C2 is heavier. C1 < C 2 Case 2 : A1 A 2 A 3 > B1 B 2 B 3 it means one of the A1 A2 A 3 will be heavier So we will perform next weighting as: 2 nd weighting " A1 is kept on one side of the balance and A2 on the other. it means A 3 will be heavier if A1 = A 2 then A1 will be heavier A1 > A 2 then A2 will be heavier A1 < A 2 Case 3 : A1 A 2 A 3 < B 1 B 2 B 3 This time one of the B1 B2 B 3 will be heavier, So again as the above case weighting will be done. 2 nd weighting " B1 is kept one side and B2 on the other if B 3 will be heavier B1 = B 2 B1 > B 2 B1 will be heavier B1 < B 2 B2 will be heavier So, as described above, in all the three cases weighting is done only two times to give out the result so minimum no. of weighting required = 2.
10.19 10.21
So, the area of shaded region is given by Area of 4PQRS  (Area of TEFQ + Area of TGSH ) = 60 # 60  2 b 1 # 45 # 45 l 2 = 1575 So, the required probability = 1575 = 7 3600 16 Option (A) is correct. Let us assume total voters are 100. Thus 40 voter (i.e. 40 %) promised to vote for P and 60 (rest 60 % ) promised to vote fore Q. Now, 15% changed from P to Q (15 % out of 40) 15 Changed voter from P to Q 40 = 6 100 # Now Voter for P 40  6 = 34 Also, 25% changed form Q to P (out of 60%) 25 Changed voter from Q to P 60 = 15 100 # Now Voter for P 34 + 15 = 49 Thus P P got 49 votes and Q got 51 votes, and P lost by 2 votes, which is given. Therefore 100 voter is true value.
10.22
Option (A) is correct. A gladiator performs in an arena. Commutators use trains. Lawyers
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014
performs, but do not entertain like a gladiator. Similarly, teachers educate. Only dancers performs on a stage.
10.23
Option (D) is correct. Total budget = 4000 + 1200 + 2000 + 1500 + 1800 = 10, 500 The amount spent on saving = 1500 So, the amount not spent on saving = 10, 500  1500 = 9000 So, percentage of the amount
Option (D) is correct. Available is appropriate because manipulation of genes will be done when other treatments are not useful. Option (B) is correct. Periodicity is almost similar to frequency. Gradualness means something happening with time. Persistency is endurance. Rarity is opposite to frequency. Option (C) is correct. The sentence implies that technocrats are counterproductive
10.24
10.25
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 245
10.33
Option (B) is correct. Since fuel consumption/litre is asked and not total fuel consumed, only average speed is relevant. Maximum efficiency comes at 45 km/ hr, So least fuel consumer per litre in lap Q Option (B) is correct. Option B fits the sentence, as they built up immunities which helped humans create serums from their blood. Option (C) is correct. 4 + 44 + 444 + .............. 4 (1 + 11 + 111 + .......) = 4 (9 + 99 + 999 + ............) 9 = 4 [(10  1) + (100  1) + ........] 9 = 4 [10 (1 + 10 + 102 + 103)  n] 9
n = 4 :10 # 10  1  nD 9 10  1 = 4 610n + 1  10  9n@ 81
Option (D) is correct. Here conserve is most appropriate word. Option (C) is correct. Betrayed means reveal unintentionally that is most appropriate. Option (D) is correct. Number of people who play hockey n (A) = 15 Number of people who play football n (B) = 17 Persons who play both hockey and football n (A + B) = 10 Persons who play either hockey or football or both : n (A , B) = n (A) + n (B)  n (A + B) = 15 + 17  10 = 22 Thus people who play neither hockey nor football = 25  22 = 3
10.34
10.35
10.27
10.28
10.36 10.37
Option (D) is correct. Option (C) is correct. Since 7 + 6 = 13 but unit digit is 5 so base may be 8 as 5 is the remainder when 13 is divided by 8. Let us check.
10.29
SPECIAL EDITION ( STUDY MATERIAL FORM ) At market Book is available in 3 volume i.e. in 3 book binding form. But at NODIA Online Store book is available in 10 book binding form. Each unit of Book is in separate binding.
Available Only at NODIA Online Store
Now or
10.30
Option (C) is correct. Let total no of toffees be x . The following table shows the all calculations. Friend R S = x 4 3 = 1 :2x + 4D  3 4 3 = x +13 = x 2 6 6 = 1 a x + 6k  2 2 2 = x +1 4 x + 5 = 17 4 x = 17  5 = 12 4 x = 12 # 4 = 48 Bowl Status = 2x + 4 3 = 2x + 4  x + 2 3 6 = x +6 2 = x +6x 1 2 4 = x +5 4
Option (D) is correct. Let W be the total work. =W 20 Per day work of one skill worker = W =W 5 # 20 100 Similarly per day work of 1 semiskilled workers = W = W 8 # 25 200 Similarly per day work of one semiskill worker = W = W 10 # 30 300 Thus total per day work of 2 skilled, 6 semiskilled and 5 unskilled workers is = 2W + 6W + 5W = 12W + 18W + 10W = W 100 200 300 600 15 Therefore time to complete the work is 15 days. Per day work of 5 skilled workers
Now, or
10.39
10.31
Option (B) is correct. Circuitous means round about or not direct. Indirect is closest in meaning to this circuitous (A) Cyclic : Recurring in nature (B) Indirect : Not direct (C) Confusing : lacking clarity of meaning (D) Crooked : set at an angle; not straight Option (B) is correct. A worker may by unemployed. Like in same relation a sleeper may be unaware.
Option (B) is correct. As the number must be greater than 3000, it must be start with 3 or 4. Thus we have two case: Case (1) If left most digit is 3 an other three digits are any of 2, 2, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 4. (1) Using 2, 2, 3 we have 3223, 3232, 3322 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2! (2) Using 2, 2, 4 we have 3224, 3242, 3422 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2! (3) Using 2, 3, 3 we have 3233, 3323, 3332 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2! (4) Using 2, 3, 4 we have 3! = 6 no. (5) Using 2, 4, 4 we have 3244, 3424, 3442 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2! (6) Using 3, 3, 4 we have 3334, 3343, 3433 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2!
10.32
GATE Electronics and Communication Topicwise Solved Paper by RK Kanodia & Ashish Murolia
Page 246
(7) Using 3, 4, 4 we have 3344, 3434, 3443 i.e. 3! = 3 no. 2! (8) Using 4, 4, 4 we have 3444 i.e. 3! = 1 no. 3! Total 4 digit numbers in this case is 1 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 6 + 3 + 3 + 3 + 1 = 25 Case 2 : If left most is 4 and other three digits are any of 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4. (1) Using 2, 2, 3 we have 4223, 4232, 4322 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (2) Using 2, 2, 4 we have 4224, 4242, 4422 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (3) Using 2, 3, 3 we have 4233, 4323, 4332 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (5) Using 2, 4, 4 we have 4244, 4424, 4442 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (6) Using 3, 3, 3 we have 4333 i.e 3! = 1. no. 3! (7) Using 3, 3, 4 we have 4334, 4343, 4433 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (4) Using 2, 3, 4 we have i.e. . 3! = 6 no
GATE Electronics & Communication by RK Kanodia Now in 3 Volume Purchase Online at maximum discount from online store and get POSTAL and Online Test Series Free visit www.nodia.co.in
(8) Using 3, 4, 4 we have 4344, 4434, 4443 i.e. . 3! = 3 no 2! (9) Using 4, 4, 4 we have 4444 i.e. 3! = 1. no 3! Total 4 digit numbers in 2nd case = 3 + 3 + 3 + 6 + 3 + 3 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 26 Thus total 4 digit numbers using case (1) and case (2) is = 25 + 26 = 51
10.40
Option (B) is correct. Let H , G , S and I be ages of Hari, Gita, Saira and Irfan respectively. Now from statement (1) we have H + G > I + S Form statement (2) we get that G  S = 1 or S  G = 1 As G cant be oldest and S cant be youngest thus either GS or SG possible. From statement (3) we get that there are no twins (A) HSIG : There is I between S and G which is not possible (B) SGHI : SG order is also here and S > G > H > I and G + H > S + I which is possible. (C) IGSH : This gives I > G and S > H and adding these both inequalities we have I + S > H + G which is not possible. (D) IHSG : This gives I > H and S > G and adding these both inequalities we have I + S > H + G which is not possible.
For more GATE Resources, Mock Test and Study material join the community http://www.facebook.com/gateec2014